A Fi Cio 1045 Savin 2245

AdonisC2_ENcopy122F_FM.
book Page 1 Thursday, February 15, 2001 3:23 PM
1035/1045 Series
Operating Instructions
Copy Reference
Zdsh000j.eps
Read this manual carefully before you use this product and keep it handy for future
reference.
For safety, please follow the instructions in this manual.
AdonisC2_ENcopy122F_FM.book Page 1 Thursday, February 15, 2001 3:23 PM
RICOH COMPANY, LTD.

15-5, Minami Aoyama 1-chome,
Minato-ku, Tokyo 107-8544, Japan
Phone: +81-(0)3-3479-3111
Spain
RICOH ESPAA S.A.
Avda. Litoral Mar, 12-14,
08005 Barcelona
Phone: +34-(0)93-295-7600
The Netherlands
RICOH EUROPE B.V.
Groenelaan 3, 1186 AA, Amstelveen
Phone: +31-(0)20-5474111
Italy
RICOH ITALIA SpA
Via della Metallurgia 12,
37139 Verona
Phone: +39-045-8181500
United Kingdom
RICOH UK LTD.
Ricoh House,
1 Plane Tree Crescent, Feltham,
Middlesex, TW13 7HG
Phone: +44-(0)20-8261-4000
Germany
RICOH DEUTSCHLAND GmbH
Mergenthalerallee 38-40,
65760 Eschborn
Phone: +49-(0)6196-9060
France
RICOH FRANCE S.A.
383, Avenue du Gnral de Gaulle
BP 307-92143 Clamart Cedex
Phone: +33-(0)1-40-94-38-38
Printed in China
UE USA B004-6607
Hong Kong
RICOH HONG KONG LTD.
21/F., Tai Yau Building,
181, Johnston Road,
Wan Chai, Hong Kong
Phone: +852-2862-2888
Singapore
RICOH ASIA PACIFIC PTE.LTD.
260 Orchard Road,
#15-01/02 The Heeren,
Singapore 238855
Phone: +65-830-5888
1035/1045 Series Operating Instructions
Overseas Affiliates
U.S.A.
RICOH CORPORATION
5 Dedrick Place
West Caldwell, New Jersey 07006
Phone: +1-973-882-2000
Introduction
This manual contains detailed instructions on the operation and maintenance of this machine. To get
maximum versatility from this machine all operators should carefully read and follow the instructions in
this manual. Please keep this manual in a handy place near the machine.
Please read the Safety Information before using this machine. It contains important information related
to USER SAFETY and PREVENTING EQUIPMENT PROBLEMS.
Notes
Some illustrations may be slightly different from your machine.
Certain options may not be available in some countries. For details, please contact your local dealer.
Operator Safety
This machine is considered a class 1 laser device, safe for office/EDP use. The machine contains two
GaAIAs laser diodes, 5-milliwatt, 760-800 nanometer wavelength for each emitter. Direct (or indirect
reflected) eye contact with the laser beam might cause serious eye damage. Safety precautions and
interlock mechanisms have been designed to prevent any possible laser beam exposure to the operator.
Laser Safety:
The Center for Devices and Radiological Health (CDRH) prohibits the repair of laser-based optical unit
in the field. The optical housing unit can only be repaired in a factory or at a location with the requisite
equipment. The laser subsystem is replaceable in the field by a qualified Customer Engineer. The laser
chassis is not repairable in the field. Customer engineers are therefore directed to return all chassis
and laser subsystems to the factory or service depot when replacement or the optical subsystem is required.
Warning:
Use of controls or adjustment or performance of procedures other than those specified in this manual
might result in hazardous radiation exposure.
Notes:
The model names of the machines do not appear in the following pages. Check the type of your machine before reading this manual. (For details, P.1 Machine Types.)
Type1: Aficio 1035/1035P
Type2: Aficio 1045/1045P
Certain types might not be available in some countries. For details, please contact your local dealer.
Two kinds of size notation are employed in this manual. With this machine refer to the inch version.
For good copy quality, Ricoh recommends that you use genuine Ricoh toner.
Ricoh shall not be responsible for any damage or expense that might result from the use of parts other
than genuine Ricoh parts in your Ricoh office product.
Power Source
120V, 60Hz, 12A or more
Please be sure to connect the power cord to a power source as above. For details about power source,
P.237 Power Connection.
USA (This information is for facsimile option users only.)
FCC Requirements
1. This equipment complies with Part 68 of the FCC rules. On the cover of this equipment is a label
that contains, among other information, the FCC registration number and ringer equivalence
number (REN) for this equipment. If requested, this information must be provided to the telephone company.
2. This equipment uses the following USOC jack: RJ11C
3. The REN is used to determine the quantity of devices which may be connected to the telephone
line. Excessive REN's on the telephone line may result in the devices not ringing in response to
an incoming call. In most, but not all areas, the sum of the REN's should not exceed five (5.0).
Contact the telephone company to determine the maximum REN for the calling area.
4. If this equipment causes harm to the telephone network, the telephone company will notify you
in advance that temporary discontinuance of service may be required. If advance notice is not
practical, the telephone company will notify the customer as soon as possible. Also, you will be
advised of your right to file a complaint with the FCC if you believe it is necessary.
5. The telephone company may make changes in its facilities, equipment, operations, or procedures that could affect the operation of the equipment. If this happens, the telephone company
will provide advance notice in order for you to make necessary modifications in order to maintain
uninterrupted service.
6. In the event of operation problems (document jam, copy jam, communication error indication),
refer to the solving problems section in this manual.
7. If you cannot correct the problem, please contact the RICOH CORP. CUSTOMER SUPPORT
DEPT. at 1-800-FASTFIX for repair and warranty information. If it is causing harm to the telephone network, the telephone company may request you to disconnect the equipment from the
network until the problem is resolved.
8. This equipment cannot be used on telephone company-provided coin service. Connection to
Party Line Service is subject to state tariffs.
WHEN PROGRAMMING EMERGENCY NUMBERS AND/OR MAKING TEST CALLS TO

EMERGENCY NUMBERS:
1. Remain on the line and briefly explain to the dispatcher the reason for the call before hanging up.
2. Perform such activities in the off-peak hours, such as early morning hours or late evenings.
CANADA (This information is for facsimile option users only.)
The Industry Canada label identifies certified equipment. This certification means that the equipment
meets telecommunications network protective, operational, and safety requirements as prescribed in
the appropriate Terminal Equipment Technical Requirements document(s). The department does not
guarantee the equipment will operate to the user's satisfaction.
Before installing this equipment, users should ensure that it is permissible to be connected to the facilities of the local telecommunications company. The equipment must also be installed using an acceptable method of connection. The customer should be aware that compliance with the above conditions
may not prevent degradation of service in some situations.
Repairs to certified equipment should be coordinated by a representative designated by the supplier.
Any repairs or alterations made by the user to this equipment, or equipment malfunctions, may give the
telecommunications company cause to request the user disconnect the equipment.
Users should ensure for their own protection that the electrical ground connections of the power utility,
telephone lines, and internal metallic water pipe system, if present, are connected together. This precaution may be particularly important in rural areas.
Caution: Users should not attempt to make such connections themselves, but should contact the appropriate electric inspection authority, or electrician, as appropriate.
The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) assigned to each terminal device provides an indication of the
maximum number of terminals allowed to be connected to a telephone interface. The termination on
an interface may consist of any combination of devices subject only to the requirement that the sum of
the Ringer Equivalence Numbers of all the devices does not exceed 5.
In accordance with IEC 60417, this machine uses the following symbols for the main power switch:
a means POWER ON.
c means STAND BY.
Copyright 2001 Ricoh Co., Ltd.
1035G/1045G
Copy Reference
Zdsh000j.eps
reference.
RICOH COMPANY, LTD.

Phone: +81-(0)3-3479-3111
Spain
RICOH ESPAA S.A.
08005 Barcelona
Phone: +34-(0)93-295-7600
The Netherlands
RICOH EUROPE B.V.
Phone: +31-(0)20-5474111
Italy
RICOH ITALIA SpA
37139 Verona
Phone: +39-045-8181500
United Kingdom
RICOH UK LTD.
Ricoh House,
Middlesex, TW13 7HG
Phone: +44-(0)20-8261-4000
Germany
65760 Eschborn
Phone: +49-(0)6196-9060
France
RICOH FRANCE S.A.
Phone: +33-(0)1-40-94-38-38
Printed in Japan
UE USA B003-6607
Hong Kong
181, Johnston Road,
Wan Chai, Hong Kong
Phone: +852-2862-2888
Singapore
260 Orchard Road,
Singapore 238855
Phone: +65-830-5888
1035G/1045G Operating Instructions
Overseas Affiliates
U.S.A.
RICOH CORPORATION
5 Dedrick Place
Phone: +1-973-882-2000
Introduction
Notes
Operator Safety
Laser Safety:
Warning:
Notes:
Type1: Aficio 1035G
Type2: Aficio 1045G
Power Source
FCC Requirements
7. If you cannot correct the problem, please contact the RICOH CORP. CUSTOMER SUPPORT
DEPT. at 1-800-FASTFIX for repair and warranty information. If it is causing harm to the telephone network, the telephone company may request you to disconnect the equipment from the
network until the problem is resolved.

EMERGENCY NUMBERS:
a means POWER ON.
c means STAND BY.
Introduction
Notes
Operator Safety
Laser Safety:
Warning:
Notes:
Type1: 2535/2535P, 3502/3502P
Type2: 2545/2545P, 4502/4502P
For good copy quality, Savin recommends that you use genuine toner.
Savin shall not be responsible for any damage or expense that might result from the use of parts other
than genuine parts in your office product.
Power Source
FCC Requirements
7. If you cannot correct the problem, please contact the SAVIN CORPORATION at 1-203-9675000 for repair and warranty information. If it is causing harm to the telephone network, the telephone company may request you to disconnect the equipment from the network until the problem is resolved.

EMERGENCY NUMBERS:
a means POWER ON.
c means STAND BY.
SAVIN CORPORATION
333 Ludlow Street, Stamford, CT 06904
203-967-5000
Introduction
Notes
Operator Safety
Laser Safety:
Warning:
Notes:
Type1: 2235
Type2: 2245
Power Source
FCC Requirements
7. If you cannot correct the problem, please contact the SAVIN CORPORATION at 1-203-9675000 for repair and warranty information. If it is causing harm to the telephone network, the telephone company may request you to disconnect the equipment from the network until the problem is resolved.

EMERGENCY NUMBERS:
a means POWER ON.
c means STAND BY.
SAVIN CORPORATION
333 Ludlow Street, Stamford, CT 06904
203-967-5000
AdonisC2_ENcopy122F_FM.book Page i Thursday, February 15, 2001 3:23 PM
Safety Information
When using your equipment, the following safety precautions should always be
followed.
Safety During Operation

In this manual, the following important symbols are used:
R WARNING:
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if instructions

are not followed, could result in death or serious injury.
R CAUTION:
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if instructions are not

followed, may result in minor or moderate injury or damage to property.
R WARNING:
Connect the power cord directly into a wall outlet and never use an extension cord.
Disconnect the power plug (by pulling the plug, not the cable) if the
power cable or plug becomes frayed or otherwise damaged.
To avoid hazardous electric shock or laser radiation exposure, do not
remove any covers or screws other than those specified in this manual.
Turn off the power and disconnect the power plug (by pulling the plug,
not the cable) if any of the following conditions exists:
You spill something into the equipment.
You suspect that your equipment needs service or repair.
Your equipment's cover has been damaged.
Do not incinerate spilled toner or used toner. Toner dust might ignite
when exposed to an open flame.
Disposal can take place at our authorized dealer or at appropriate collection sites.
Dispose of the used toner bottle in accordance with the local regulation.
AdonisC2_ENcopy122F_FM.book Page ii Thursday, February 15, 2001 3:23 PM
R CAUTION:
Protect the equipment from dampness or wet weather, such as rain, snow,
and so on.
Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet before you move the equipment.
While moving the equipment, you should take care that the power cord will
not be damaged under the equipment.
When you disconnect the power plug from the wall outlet, always pull the
plug (not the cable).
Do not allow paper clips, staples, or other small metallic objects to fall inside
the equipment.
Keep toner (used or unused) and toner bottle out of the reach of children.
For environmental reasons, do not dispose of the equipment or expended
supply waste at household waste collection points. Disposal can take place
at an authorized dealer or at appropriate collection sites.
The inside of the machine could be very hot. Do not touch the parts with a
label indicating the hot surface. Otherwise it could cause a personal burn.
Our products are engineered to meet high standards of quality and functionality, and we recommend that you only use the expendable supplies available at an authorized dealer.
ii
AdonisC2_ENcopy122F_FM.book Page iii Thursday, February 15, 2001 3:23 PM
How to Read this Manual

Symbols
In this manual, the following symbols are used:
R WARNING:
This symbol indicates a potentially hazardous situation that might result in
death or serious injury when you misuse the machine without following the instructions under this symbol. Be sure to read the instructions, all of which are included in the Safety Information section.
R CAUTION:
This symbol indicates a potentially hazardous situation that might result in minor or moderate injury or property damage that does not involve personal injury
when you misuse the machine without following the instructions under this
symbol. Be sure to read the instructions, all of which are included in the Safety
Information section.
WARNINGS and CAUTIONS are notes for your safety.

Important
If this instruction is not followed, paper might be misfeed, originals might be
damaged, or data might be lost. Be sure to read this.
Preparation
This symbol indicates the prior knowledge or preparations required before operating.
Note
This symbol indicates precautions for operation or actions to take after misoperation.
Limitation
This symbol indicates numerical limits, functions that cannot be used together,
or conditions in which a particular function cannot be used.
Reference
This symbol indicates a reference.
[
]
Keys that appear on the machine's display panel.
{
}
Keys built into the machine's control panel.
iii
AdonisC2_ENcopy122F_FM.book Page iv Thursday, February 15, 2001 3:23 PM
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Machine Types........................................................................................... 1
What You Can Do with This Machine (Copy Mode)................................ 2
Guide To Components .............................................................................. 5
Output Tray Guide......................................................................................... 7
Options ....................................................................................................... 8
Control Panel ............................................................................................. 9
Display Panel ........................................................................................... 11
Displays and Key Operations...................................................................... 11
Function List Based on Options ............................................................ 13
1. Basics
Turning On the Power .............................................................................
Turning On the Main Power ........................................................................
Turning On the Power .................................................................................
Turning Off the Power .................................................................................
Changing Modes......................................................................................
15
15
16
16
18
Originals ...................................................................................................
Sizes and Weights of Recommended Originals..........................................
Sizes Detectable by the Auto Paper Select ................................................
Missing Image Area ....................................................................................
Copy Paper...............................................................................................
Recommended Paper Sizes and Types......................................................
Direction-fixed paper or 2-sided paper........................................................
Non-recommended Paper...........................................................................
Paper Storage .............................................................................................
Toner.........................................................................................................
Handling Toner............................................................................................
Toner Storage .............................................................................................
Used Toner .................................................................................................
19
19
20
21
22
22
25
26
26
27
27
27
27
2. Copying
Basic Procedure ......................................................................................
Setting Originals......................................................................................
Setting Originals on the Exposure Glass ....................................................
Setting Originals in the Document Feeder ..................................................
Original Orientation .....................................................................................
Setting Special Originals .............................................................................
Mixed Size mode.........................................................................................
Setting Custom Size Originals ....................................................................
iv
29
31
31
32
32
33
34
35
AdonisC2_ENcopy122F_FM.book Page v Thursday, February 15, 2001 3:23 PM
Basic Functions.......................................................................................
Adjusting Copy Image Density ....................................................................
Selecting Original Type Setting...................................................................
Selecting Copy Paper .................................................................................
Auto Reduce/Enlarge ..................................................................................
Sort/Stack/Staple .....................................................................................
Sort..............................................................................................................
Stack ...........................................................................................................
Staple ..........................................................................................................
To Stop Scanning Temporarily....................................................................
When Memory Reaches 0% .......................................................................
To Remove the Paper from the Staple Unit ................................................
Punch........................................................................................................
37
37
39
40
43
44
45
48
50
55
55
55
56
Copying from the Bypass Tray ..............................................................

When Copying onto OHP Transparencies or Thick Paper..........................
Programs..................................................................................................
Storing a Program .......................................................................................
Deleting a Program .....................................................................................
Recalling a Program....................................................................................
Job Preset ................................................................................................
Other Functions.......................................................................................
Energy Saver Mode ....................................................................................
Interrupt Copy .............................................................................................
Original Beeper ...........................................................................................
Sample Copy...............................................................................................
Changing the Number of Sets.....................................................................
Preset Reduce/Enlarge ...........................................................................
Create Margin mode ...................................................................................
Zoom.........................................................................................................
Size Magnification ...................................................................................
60
63
64
64
65
66
67
68
68
68
69
69
70
71
72
73
75
Directional Magnification (%) ................................................................. 77

Directional Size Magnification (Inch)..................................................... 79
Duplex/Combine/Series ..........................................................................
Original Direction and Completed Copies ...................................................
Originals and Copy Direction ......................................................................
Specifying Orientation of Bound Originals ..................................................
Duplex.......................................................................................................
1 Sided 2 Sided ......................................................................................
2 Sided 2 Sided ......................................................................................
Combine ...................................................................................................
1 Sided 2 Pages Combine 1 Side...........................................................
81
82
82
82
84
84
85
87
88
89
90
91
v
AdonisC2_ENcopy122F_FM.book Page vi Thursday, February 15, 2001 3:23 PM

1 Sided 16 Pages Combine 2 Side.........................................................
2 Sided 16 Pages Combine 2 Side.........................................................
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
Series/Book............................................................................................
Series Copies............................................................................................
Copying Book Originals.............................................................................
Edit Image ..............................................................................................
Image Repeat............................................................................................
Double Copies...........................................................................................
Centering...................................................................................................
Positive/Negative ......................................................................................
Erase.......................................................................................................
Border Erase .............................................................................................
Center Erase .............................................................................................
Center/Border Erase .................................................................................
Margin Adjustment ................................................................................
101
101
104
112
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
121
Stamp......................................................................................................
Background Numbering ............................................................................
Preset Stamp ............................................................................................
User Stamp ...............................................................................................
Program/Delete User Stamp .....................................................................
Date Stamp ...............................................................................................
Page Numbering .......................................................................................
Cover/Slip Sheet ....................................................................................
Front Cover ...............................................................................................
Front/Back Covers ....................................................................................
Designate ..................................................................................................
Chapter .....................................................................................................
Slip Sheets .............................................................................................
123
123
124
126
128
130
132
138
138
140
141
143
145
Combination Chart ................................................................................ 147
vi
AdonisC2_ENcopy122F_FM.book Page vii Thursday, February 15, 2001 3:23 PM
3. Document Server
Overview.................................................................................................
Process .....................................................................................................
Features and Benefits ...........................................................................
On Demand Printing..................................................................................
File Merge Printing ....................................................................................
Facsimile Resend......................................................................................
Operation from a Computer ......................................................................
Scanning Originals................................................................................
Scanning in Document Server mode ........................................................
Scanning in Copy mode ............................................................................
Printing Saved Documents...................................................................
Sample Printing.........................................................................................
Print First Page .........................................................................................
Searching Saved Documents ...............................................................
To Search by File Name ...........................................................................
To Search by User Name..........................................................................
To Check the Details of Stored Documents ..............................................
Deleting Saved Documents ..................................................................
149
150
151
151
152
154
154
156
156
159
161
163
163
164
164
164
165
166
4. Troubleshooting
If Your Machine Does Not Operate as You Want................................
General .....................................................................................................
Document Server ......................................................................................
Display ......................................................................................................
If You Cannot Make Clear Copies ........................................................
169
169
171
172
173
If You Cannot Make Copies As You Want ...........................................

General .....................................................................................................
Adjust Image .............................................................................................
Stamp........................................................................................................
Combine....................................................................................................
Duplex .......................................................................................................
When Memory Is Full ................................................................................
B Loading Paper...................................................................................
Loading Paper in Tray 1or 2......................................................................
Loading Paper in Tray 3 or 4.....................................................................
Loading Paper in the Large Capacity Tray................................................
D Adding Toner ....................................................................................
x Clearing Misfeeds.............................................................................
175
175
176
177
177
178
179
180
180
181
182
183
186
Changing the Paper Size ...................................................................... 194

Changing the Paper Size in Tray 1 or 2 .................................................... 194
Changing the Paper Size in Tray 3 or 4 .................................................... 196
vii
AdonisC2_ENcopy122F_FM.book Page viii Thursday, February 15, 2001 3:23 PM
d Adding Staples .................................................................................

1000-Sheet Finisher..................................................................................
2 Tray Finisher ..........................................................................................
e Removing Jammed Staples.............................................................
1000-Sheet Finisher..................................................................................
2 Tray Finisher ..........................................................................................
y Removing Punch Waste...................................................................
198
198
200
202
202
204
206
5. User Tools (Copy/Document Server Features)

Accessing the User Tools (Copy/Document Server Features) ......... 207
Exiting From the User Tools...................................................................... 208
User Tools Menu (Copier/Document Server Features) ...................... 210
General Features 1/4 .............................................................................. 212
Reproduction Ratio 1/2 .......................................................................... 219
Reproduction Ratio 2/2 .......................................................................... 220
Edit 1/2..................................................................................................... 222
Edit 2/2..................................................................................................... 224
Stamp...................................................................................................... 227
Background Numbering ............................................................................ 227
Preset Stamp 1/4-4/4 .................................................................................. 227
User Stamp 1/2-2/2 ..................................................................................... 229
Date Stamp ............................................................................................... 230
Page Numbering 1/2-2/2 ............................................................................. 231
Input/Output ........................................................................................... 233
viii
AdonisC2_ENcopy122F_FM.book Page ix Thursday, February 15, 2001 3:23 PM
6. REMARKS
Do's And Don'ts.....................................................................................
Where to Put Your Machine..................................................................
Machine Environment ...............................................................................
Moving.......................................................................................................
Power Connection.....................................................................................
Access to the Machine ..............................................................................
Maintaining Your Machine ....................................................................
Cleaning the Exposure Glass....................................................................
Cleaning the Platen Cover ........................................................................
Cleaning the Document Feeder ................................................................
235
236
236
236
237
237
238
238
238
238
7. Specification
Mainframe............................................................................................... 239
Document Feeder (Option) ................................................................... 243
1000-Sheet Finisher (Option)................................................................ 244
2 Tray Finisher (Option) ........................................................................ 245
Punch Kit (Option)................................................................................. 247
Internal tray 2 (1 bin tray) (Option)....................................................... 248
Extarnal Tray (Option)........................................................................... 249
Large Capacity Tray (LCT) (Option)..................................................... 250
Paper tray unit (Option) ........................................................................ 251
INDEX...................................................................................................... 252
ix
AdonisC2_ENcopy122F_FM.book Page x Thursday, February 15, 2001 3:23 PM
Machine Types
This machine comes in two models which vary by copy speed. To make sure
which model you have, see the inside front cover.
Type 1
Copy speed
Type 2
1
35 copies/minute (A4K, 8 /2"

11"K)
45 copies/minute (A4K, 81/2"

11"K)
What You Can Do with This Machine (Copy

Mode)
Positive/Negative
*1 Optional 2 Tray finisher is reguired.

*2 Optional Bridge unit and optional finisher are reguired.
Series/Book
Document Server
Front & Back
1 Sided & Booklet
2 Sided & Booklet
2 Sided & Magazine

1 Sided & Magazine
1. Selecting Original Type Setting

P.39
23. 2 Sided 8 Pages Combine 2

Side P.98
2. Adjusting Copy Image Density

P.37

Side P.99
3. Setting Special Originals P.33

4. Image Repeat P.112
5. Double Copies P.113
6. Centering P.114
7. Erase P.116
8. Margin Adjustment P.121
9. Positive/Negative P.115
10. Stamp P.123
11. 1 Sided 2 Sided P.84
12. 2 Sided 2 Sided P.85
25. Book 1 Sided P.101

26. Book 2 Sided P.102
27. Front & Back 2 Sided
Side P.88
Side P.89
Side P.90

Side P.94
Side P.95
Side P.96
Side P.91
Side P.92
Side P.93
Side P.97
P.103
28. 1 Sided Booklet P.105

29. 2 Sided Booklet P.106
30. 1 Sided Magazine P.108
31. 2 Sided Magazine P.109
32. Preset Reduce/Enlarge P.71
33. Zoom P.73
34. Size Magnification P.75
35. Directional Magnification (%)
P.77
36. Directional Size Magnification

(Inch) P.79
37. Document Server P.149

38. Punch P.56
39. Sort P.45
40. Rotate Sort P.45
41. Stack P.48
42. Staple P.50
43. Front Cover P.138
44. Front/Back Covers P.140
45. Designate P.141
46. Chapter P.143
47. Slip Sheets P.145
48. Auto Reduce/Enlarge P.43
Guide To Components
1. Document Feeder (ADF)
7. Operation switch
The document feeder automatically feeds

a stack of originals one by one.
Press this switch to turn the power on

(the On indicator light up). To turn the
power off, press this switch again (the On
indicator goes off).
2. Exposure glass
Place originals here face down for copying. P.19 Originals
3. Internal tray
8. Control panel
P.9 Control Panel
Copied paper is delivered here face

down.
9. Duplex unit (Unit for two-sided

copies)
4. Main power switch
Makes two-sided copies.
If the machine does not operate after

turning on the main power switch, check
if the main power switch is turned on. If
it is off, turn it on.
5. Main power indicator

This indicator light up when the main
power switch is turned on, and goes off
when the switch is turned off.
10. Front cover

Open to access the inside of the machine.
11. Paper tray

Set paper here.
12. Paper tray unit (Option)

13. Holding stand
6. On indicator
This indicator lights up when the operation switch is turned on, and goes off
1. Bypass tray
2. Right side cover
Use when copying onto OHP transparencies, adhesive labels, translucent paper,
postcards, and custom size paper.
Open this when a paper jam occurs.
1. Ventilation hole
Prevents overheating. Do not obstruct
the ventilation hole by placing an object
near it or leaning an object against it. If
the machine overheats, a fault might occur.
Output Tray Guide

When copying onto OHP transparencies and translucent paper, raise the guide.
This prevents copies from being curled when delivered.
To copy onto normal paper and thick paper

Slide the guide in the direction of the arrow.
To copy onto OHP transparencies and translucent paper

Insert your forefinger into the indent on the guide and slide the guide to the
right.
To copy onto A3, 11 17 paper

Raise the end fence.
Options
1. 1000-Sheet Finisher
6. Large Capacity Tray (LCT)
Sorts, stacks, and staples copies.
Holds 1,500 sheets of paper.
2. External tray
7. Paper tray unit
If you selected this as the output tray,

copied paper is delivered here face
down.
Consists of two paper trays.
3. Platen cover
Relays copies to the external tray or finisher.
Lower this cover over originals for copying.
9. 2 Tray Finisher
4. Document feeder (ADF) P.32

Insert a stack of originals here.
They will be fed automatically.
5. Internal tray 2 (1 bin tray)

If you selected this as the output tray,
copied paper is delivered here face
down.
8. Bridge unit
Sorts, stacks, and staples copies. You can

also punch copies. (The Punch function is
optional.)
1: Finisher shift tray 1
2: Finisher shift tray 2
Control Panel
1. Screen Contrast knob
8. {Energy Saver}} key
Adjusts the brightness of the display panel.
Press to switch to and from Energy Saver

mode. P.68 Energy Saver Mode.
2. Indicators
9. {Interrupt}} key
These indicators show errors or the status

of the machine. P.169 Troubleshooting.
Press to make interrupt a long copy job to

make copies. P.68 Interrupt Copy.
3. {User Tools/Counter}} key
This indicator goes on when the main

power switch is turned on, and goes off
User Tools
Press to change the default settings
and conditions to meet your requirements.
Counter
Press to check or print the total number of copies made.
4. Display panel
Shows operation status, error messages,
and function menus. P.11 Display
Panel.
5. {Check Modes}} key

Press to check the entered copy job settings.
6. {Program}} key
Press to select the program mode. P.64
Programs.
7. {Clear Modes}} key

Press to clear the previously entered copy
job settings.
10. Main power indicator
11. Operation switch

(the On indicator goes on). To turn the
12. {Sample Copy}} key

Use this key to make a single sample
copy before starting a long copy run. By
checking the sample copy and making
any necessary changes to the image quality settings before you make multiple
copies, you can save time and paper.
P.69 Sample Copy.
13. {Start}} key

Press to start copying. Press to start scanning and printing in Document Server
mode.
14. {Clear/Stop}} key

Clear
Press to delete a number entered.
Stop
Press to stop a copy job in progress.
15. {#}} key

Press to enter a value.
16. Number keys

Use to enter the desired number of copies
and data for selected modes.
17. Function keys

Press the appropriate key to choose any
of the following functions:
Copy
Document Server
Facsimile
Printer
Scanner
18. Function Status indicator

These show the status of the above functions:
Yellow: the function is selected.
Green: the function is active.
Red: the function has been interrupted.
10
Display Panel
The display panel shows the status of the machine, error messages and function
menus.
Important
Do not apply a strong shock or force of about 30 N (about 3 kgf) or more to
the display panel. If you do, the display might be damaged.
Note
The function items displayed serve as selector keys. You can select or specify
an item by lightly pressing it.
When you select or specify an item on the display panel, it is highlighted like
.
Keys appearing as OK cannot be used.
Displays and Key Operations

Note
The following illustrations are examples for the machine with the optional 2
Tray finisher and large capacity tray (LCT) installed.
Initial copy display
1. Original mode, Image Density

and Special Original mode.
2. Operational status or messages.
3. You can register up to three frequently used reduce/enlarge ratios
other than the fixed reduce/enlarge
ratios. Shortcut R/E in P.219
Reproduction Ratio 1/2.
4. The number of originals scanned

into memory, number of copies set,
and number of copies made.
5. Sort, Stack, Staple or Punch
mode.
11
6. Displays the contents of the
7. Shows the available functions.
Shortcut keys. You can register frequently used functions in these

keys. Copy Function Key F1-F5
in P.217 General Features 3/4.
Press a function name to display its

menu. For example, press the [Reduce/Enlarge] key to bring up the Reduce/Enlarge menu.
8. A clip mark appears for a currently selected function.

Function menu
1. Items you can select.
2. The key highlighted with the

lower line underlined indicates the
tray feeding the paper.
Document Server initial display
1. Operational status and messages.

2. Display titles.
12
3. Operational keys.
4. Documents sent by fax.
Function List Based on Options

The functions that are available to you depend on your machine configuration
and which options you have. See the table below.
Available
Not available
Type 1
Type 2
Place originals
on the expo- in the docusure glass
ment feeder
Mixed Sizes Mode
*5
*5
Custom Size Originals
Original Orientation
(Standard Orientation)
Auto Image Density
Manual Image Density
Auto Paper Select
Manual Paper Select
Copying from the Bypass Tray
Sample Copy/Job Preset
Auto Reduce/Enlarge
Reduce/Enlarge
Create Margin Mode
Book
1 Sided 2 pages, 4
pages, 8 pages, 1
Side
1 Sided 4 pages, 8
pages, 16 pages,
2 Side
2 Sided 2 pages, 4
pages, 8 pages, 1
Side
2 Sided 4 pages, 8
pages, 16 pages,
2 Side
Book 1 Sided
Book 2 Sided
Front & Back 2

Sided
Duplex
Combine
Series
13
Type 1
Type 2
Place originals
on the expo- in the docusure glass
ment feeder
Copying Book Originals
Image Repeat
Double Copies
Centering
Positive/Negative
Border Erase/Center Erase
Margin Adjustment
Background Numbering
*6
*6
Preset Stamp
*6
*6
User Stamp
*6
*6
Date Stamp/Page Numbering
Cover/Front/Back Cover/Slip
Sheet
Sort
Shift Sort
*3
*3
Rotate Sort
*1 *2
*1 *2
Shift Stack
*3
*3
Staple
*3
*3
Punch
*4
*4
Store File
*1
*2
*3
*4
*5
*6
14
Set the paper of the same size KL in the paper trays.

You can use this function when Rotate Sort is selected in Select Stack Function.
1000-sheet Finisher or 2 Tray Finisher and Bridge unit required.
2 Tray Finisher and Bridge unit required.
Document feeder required.
32 MB Memory required. (If the machine is equipped with the Printer unit, 32 MB
memory is not required.)
1. Basics
Turning On the Power
To turn the machine on, press the operation switch.
Note
This machine automatically enters
Energy Saver mode or turns itself
off if you do not use the machine
for a while. P.30 Auto Off and
Timer Setting in the System Settings manual.
Turning On the Main Power
A Make sure that the power cord is
firmly plugged into the wall outlet.
B Open the switch cover and turn
on the main power switch (make

sure that the Main Power indicator goes on).
- Power switches
This machine has two power switches. P.11 Display Panel
Operation switch (right side of the

control panel)
Press this switch to activate the
machine. When the machine has
warmed up, you can make copies.
Main power switch (left side of the machine)
When the machine is not to be used
for an extended period of time,
turn off the main power switch.
Important
Do not switch off the main power immediately after it has been
switched on. Failure to observe
this may result in damage to the
hard disk or memory, leading to
malfunctions.
15
Basics
Turning Off the Power
A Press
A Make sure that the platen cover or
the operation switch to

make the On indicator goes on.
The display panel will come on.
the document feeder is in the

right position.
B Press
the operation switch to

make the On indicator goes off.
Note
If the power is not turned on
when the operation switch is
pressed, check if the main power switch is on. If off, turn it on.
During the warm-up period
(less than 10 seconds for Type 1,
less than 15 seconds for Type 2),
you can use the Auto Start function.
16
Note
Even if you press the operation
switch, the indicator do not
goes off and blink in the following cases:
When the platen cover or the
document feeder is open.
When communication is in
progress with external
equipment.
When the hard disk is operating.
Turning Off the Main Power
A Make sure that the On indicator

goes off.
B Turn off the main power switch to

make sure the indicator goes off.
Important
Do not turn off the main power
switch when the indicator goes
on or blink Hard Disk or Memory might be broken.
Pull out the power plug after
you turn off the main power
switch. Hard Disk or Memory
might be broken.
If the main power switch is
turned off, or the power plug is
disconnected, any documents
stored in fax memory will be
lost after approximately one
hour elapses.
17
Basics
Changing Modes
You can use this machine not only as a copier, but also as a fax, printer, document server and scanner as well. Press the {Copy}, {Facsimile}, {Printer}, {Scanner} or {Document Server} key to use that function.
Limitation
You cannot switch modes in the following cases:
During interrupt copying
When scanning in a fax message for transmission
During immediate transmission
During on hook dialing for fax transmission
While scanning an original
When accessing the user tools
18
Originals
Originals
Sizes and Weights of Recommended Originals
Metric version
Where Original Is Set
Original Size
Original Weight
Exposure glass
Up to A3
--
Document feeder
1-sided originals:
40 128g/m2
A3L B6KL
2-sided originals:
52 105g/m2
A3L A5KL
Inch version
Original Size
Original Weight
Exposure glass
Up to 11" 17"
--
Document feeder
1-sided originals:
11 34 lb.
11" 17"L 5 /2" 8 /2"KL

1
2-sided originals:
14 28 lb.
11" 17"L 51/2" 81/2"KL
Note
The number of originals that can be set in the document feeder is about 80.
Original weight in Mixed Size mode is 52-81g/m2, 13.8-21.5 lb.
Non-recommended originals for the document feeder

Setting the following types of originals in the document feeder can cause paper
misfeeds or damage to the originals. Set these originals on the exposure glass instead.
Originals other than those specified in P.19 Sizes and Weights of Recommended Originals
Stapled or clipped originals
Perforated or torn originals
Curled, folded, or creased originals
Pasted originals
Originals with any kind of coating, such as thermal fax paper, art paper, aluminum foil, carbon paper, or conductive paper
Originals with perforated lines
19
Basics
Originals with indexes, tags, or other projecting parts

Sticky originals such as translucent paper
Thin originals that have low stiffness
Thick originals such as postcards
Originals of inappropriate weight
Bound originals such as books
Transparent originals such as OHP transparencies or translucent paper
Originals that have correction fluid or ink on them that has not completely
dried
Sizes Detectable by the Auto Paper Select

Metric version
A4K B5K
L
L
A5K 11"
L
17"L
Size A3
L
Place of
original
B4
L
Exposure
glass
Document
feeder
81/2"
14"L
81/2"
11"KL
81/2"
51/2"
81/2"KL 13"L
Inch version
Size A3 B4
L L
Place of
original
A4
K
B5
K
L
A5
K
L
11"
17"
L
81/2" 81/2" 51/2"

14"L 11"KL 81/2"
KL
81/2" 71/4"
13"L 101/2"
L
Exposure
glass
Document
feeder
Sizes difficult to detect

It is difficult for the machine to detect the sizes of the following originals, so select the paper size manually.
Originals with indexes, tags, or other projecting parts
Transparent originals such as OHP transparencies or translucent paper
Dark originals with many letters and drawings
Originals which partially contain a solid image
Originals which have solid images at their edges
20
Originals
Missing Image Area

Exposure glass
Reference
position
Horizontal size
Vertical size
Maximum Scanning area

A3
(297x420mm)
11"x17"
(279x432mm)
Document feeder
Limitation
Even if you correctly set originals in the document feeder or on the exposure
glass, 3mm (0.1") margins on all four sides of the original might not be copied.
There are cases where the paper will be fed diagonally when a paper size of
433mm or larger is used. Ensure that the paper is set in place it is fed straight.
The system length setting is at its maximum value when set at 1260mm (49").
21
Basics
Copy Paper
Recommended Paper Sizes and Types
The following limitations apply to each tray:
Tray 1 *4
Tray 2
*4
Metric Version
Inch Version
A3L, B4L,
A4KL, B5KL,
<A5L>,
<11" 17"L>,
<81/2" 14"L>,
<81/2" 11"KL>,
<8" 13"L>,
<81/2" 13"L>,
<81/4" 13"L>,
<81/4" 14"L>,
<11" 14"L>,
<71/4" 101/2"L>,
<8" 101/2"KL>,
<51/2" 81/2"L>
64-105g/m2 500 sheet

<A3L, B4L>,
(17-28lb.)
A4KL,
<B5KL, A5L>,
11" 17"L,
81/2" 14"L,
81/2" 11"KL,
<8" 13"L>,
81/2" 13"L,
<81/4" 13"L>,
<81/4" 14"L>,
<11" 14"L>,
<71/4" 101/2"L>,
<8" 101/2"KL>,
<51/2" 81/2"L>
Note
When selecting
paper sizes in
parentheses,
set the paper
size selector
knob to the p
mark. P.194
Changing the
Paper Size
Note
When selecting
paper sizes in
parentheses,
set the paper
size selector
knob to the p
mark. P.194
Changing the
Paper Size
You have to
You have to
specify the paspecify the paper size with
per size with
the User Tools
the User Tools
(System Set(System Settings). See Patings). See Paper Size
per Size
Setting in the
Setting in the
System Settings
System Settings
manual.
manual.
22
Paper
Weight
Paper
Capacity
Copy Paper
Tray 3 *4
Tray 4
*4
OPTION
Bypass
Tray *2 *3
*4
Standard
Size
Custom
size
A3L, B4L,
A4KL, B5KL,
A5L, 11" 17"L,
81/2" 14"L,
81/2" 11"KL,
8" 13"L,
81/4" 13"L,
81/4" 14"L,
11" 14"L,
71/4" 101/2"L,
8" 101/2"KL,
51/2" 81/2"L
A3L, B4L,
A4KL, B5KL,
A5L, 11" 17"L,
81/2" 14"L,
81/2" 11"KL,
8" 13"L,
81/4" 13"L,
81/4" 14"L,
11" 14"L,
71/4" 101/2"L,
8" 101/2"KL,
51/2" 81/2"L
60-105g/m2 500 sheet

(16-28lb.)
A3L, B4L, A4L,

B5L, A5L,
PostcardL,
11" 17"L,
81/2" 14"L,
81/2" 11"KL,
51/2" 81/2"L,
71/4" 101/2"KL,
8" 13"L,
81/2" 13"L,
81/4" 13"L,
11" 14"L,
11" 15"L,
10" 14"L,
10" 15"L,
81/4" 14"L,
8" 101/2"KL,
8" 10"KL
A3L, B4L, A4L,

B5L, A5L,
PostcardL,
11" 17"L,
81/2" 14"L,
81/2" 11"KL,
51/2" 81/2"L,
71/4" 101/2"KL,
8" 13"L,
81/2" 13"L,
81/4" 13"L,
11" 14"L,
11" 15"L,
10" 14"L,
10" 15"L,
81/4" 14"L,
8" 101/2"KL,
8" 10"KL
52-90.2g/m2 50 sheet
(14-24lb.)
Vertical:
100297mm
Vertical: 4.0"11.7"
52-90.2g/m2 50 sheet
(14-24lb.)
Horizontal:
148600mm
Horizontal:
5.9"23.6"
91-163g/m2 25 sheet
(24-43lb.) *5
91-163g/m2 25 sheet
(24-43lb.) *5
Postcard, adhesive labels, translucent

paper, OHP transparencies
Large Capacity Tray
(LCT) *1 *4
A4K, 81/2" 11"K A4K, 81/2" 11"K 60-105g/m2 1500 sheet

(16-28lb.)
(OPTION)
*1
*2
*3
*4
*5
The paper tray fence is fixed. If you wish to change the size of paper set in this tray,
contact your service representative.
If you wish to copy onto custom size paper, set the paper in the bypass tray and specify the size. P.60 Copying from the Bypass Tray.
If you wish to copy onto OHP transparencies or thick paper, select OHP or Thick Paper mode. P.63 When Copying onto OHP Transparencies or Thick Paper.
When setting copy paper, make sure that the stack height does not exceed the limit
mark. The maximum number of sheets you can set at a time depends on the paper
thickness and condition.
If you wish to copy onto thick (128g/m2, 34 lb or heavier) paper, select Thick Paper
mode. Special Paper Indication in the System Settings manual.
23
Basics
Important
If you use damp or curled paper, a misfeed might occur. In this case, try turning over the paper stack in the paper tray. If there is no improvement, change
to paper with less curl.
Note
When you use the bypass tray, it is recommended to set the copy paper direction to L.
Postcards should be fed from the bypass tray.
If you load paper of the same size and in the same direction in two or more
trays, the machine automatically shifts to another tray when the tray in use
runs out of paper. This function is called Auto Tray Switching. (However, this
only true if the Paper Type is recycled or special paper, and the setting for the
other trays are the same.) This saves interrupting a copy run to replenish paper when making a large number of copies. P.40 Selecting Copy Paper,
P.212 Auto Tray Switching
If you select Thick Paper mode, copying speed might be reduced.
24
Copy Paper
Direction-fixed paper or 2-sided paper

The direction-fixed (top to bottom) or 2-sided paper (letterhead paper, punched
paper, or copied paper, e.g.) might not be printed correctly depending on how
the originals and paper are set in place. Set "Letterhead setting" of system settings and then set the original and paper as shown below. Letterhead Setting
in P.233 Input/Output
25
Basics
Non-recommended Paper
R CAUTION:
Do not use aluminum foil, carbon paper, or similar conductive paper to avoid
a fire or equipment failure.
Important
Do not use any of the following kinds of paper or a fault might occur.
Thermal fax paper
Art paper
Aluminum foil
Carbon paper
Conductive paper
Colored OHP transparencies
Paper with perforated lines
Hemmed paper
Note
Do not use the following kinds of paper or a misfeed might occur.
Bent, folded, or creased paper
Torn paper
Slippery paper
Perforated paper
Rough paper
Thin paper that has low stiffness
Paper with much paper dust on its surface
If you make a copy on rough grain paper, the copy image might be blurred.
Paper Storage
Note
When storing paper, the following precautions should always be followed:
Do not store paper where it will be exposed to direct sunlight.
Avoid storing paper in humid areas (humidity: 70% or less).
Store on a flat surface.
Keep open reams of papers in the package, and store as you would unopened
paper.
Under high temperature and high humidity, or low temperature and low humidity conditions, store paper in a vinyl bag.
26
Toner
Toner
Handling Toner
R WARNING:
Do not incinerate used toner or toner containers. Toner dust might ignite when exposed to an open flame. Dispose of used toner containers
in accordance with local regulations for plastics.
R CAUTION:
Keep toner (used or unused) and toner containers out of reach of children.
R CAUTION:
Important
If you use toner other than the recommended type, a fault might occur.
Reference
If you want to add toner. P.183 D Adding Toner
Toner Storage
When storing toner, the following precautions should always be followed:
Store toner containers in a cool, dry place free from direct sunlight.
Store on a flat surface.
Used Toner
Note
Used toner cannot be re-used.
27
Basics
28
2. Copying
Basic Procedure
A Make sure that the machine is in
Copy mode.
If the machine is not in Copy
mode, press the {Copy} key.
B When the machine is set for the

user code, enter the user code
with the number keys and then
press the {#}
} key.
Reference
P.68 Other Functions.
C Make sure that there are no previous settings remaining.
Note
To clear settings, press the
{Clear Modes} key.
D Set your originals.

Reference
P.31 Setting Originals.
E Set your desired settings.
F Enter
the number of copies required with the number keys.
Note
The maximum copy quantity
can be set between 1 and 999
(default: 999).
To change the number entered,
press the {Clear/Stop} key and
enter the new number.
G Press the {Start}} key.

The machine starts copying.
Note
When you set originals on the
exposure glass, press the {#}
key after all originals are
scanned.
Copies are delivered face down.
To stop the machine during the
multi-copy run, press the {Clear/
Stop} key.
To return the machine to the initial condition after copying,
press the {Clear Modes} key.
29
Copying
- System Reset
The machine returns to its initial condition automatically when your job is
finished, after a certain period of
time. This function is called System
Reset.
Note
You can change the System Reset
time. System Reset Timer in
System Settings manual.
- Auto Off
The machine turns itself off automatically after your job is finished, after a
certain period of time. This function is
called Auto Off.
Note
You can change the Auto Off time.
Auto Off Timer in the System
Settings manual.
Auto Off time function will not operate in the following:
When the warning massage is
displayed.
When the service call massage is
displayed.
When the paper is jammed.
When the cover is open.
When "Adding Toner" message
is displayed.
When the toner is being replenished.
When the User Tools/Counter
screen is displayed.
When fixed warm-up is in
progress.
When the facsimile, printer or
other functions are operating.
30
When operations have been

suspended during printing.
When the handset is in use.
When the On-hook dialing
function is in use.
When a recipient is being registered in the address list or
group dial list.
When the Data In indicator goes
on or blinking.
When the sample print/confidential print screens are displayed.
Setting Originals
Setting Originals
Limitation
Set originals after correction fluid
and ink has completely dried. Not
taking this precaution could mark
the exposure glass and cause
marks to be copied.
Note
Basically originals should be
aligned to the rear left corner.
However, some copy functions
may produce different results depending on the direction of the
originals. For details, see the explanations of each function.
Setting Originals on the

Exposure Glass
A Lift the platen cover or the docu-
ment feeder.
Important
Do not open the document feeder with a force. Otherwise, the
cover of the document feeder
might open or be damaged.
Note
Be sure to open the document
feeder by more than 30. Otherwise the original size might not
be detected correctly.
B Set the original face down on the

exposure glass. The original
should be aligned to the rear left
corner.
Reference
P.19 Originals.
1: Reference mark
2: Scale
Note
Start with the first page to be
copied.
C Lower the platen cover or document feeder.
31
Copying
Setting Originals in the

Document Feeder
Note
The last page should be on the bottom.
Do not stack originals beyond the
limit mark on the side fence of the
document feeder.
The original might become dirty if
it is written with a pencil or similar
tools.
Reference
Regarding originals that the document feeder can handle. P.19
Originals.
A Set the aligned originals face up
Original Orientation
You can set the original orientation
separately in the following ways.
This function is useful for copying
torn originals or large originals.
Standard Orientation
Select this function when the original direction is the same as the
copy paper direction.
90 Turn
This function rotates the copy image by 90.
Use this function when you want
to copy onto A3, B4, 11" 17" paper.
A Press the [Special Original] key.
into the document feeder.
B Select the original orientation.

Standard Orientation
1: Limit mark
2: Document guide
Note
Straighten curls in the originals
before setting them in the document feeder.
To avoid a multi-sheet feed,
shuffle the originals before setting them in the document feeder.
32
A Make sure that the

selected.
key is
Setting Originals
90 Turn
Setting Special Originals
When you want to copy A3K,

B4K or 11" 17"K size originals,
set your original in the landscape
orientation and then press the
key. The machine rotates the
original image and you can make
copies as you wish. This is useful
for copying large originals with
the Staple, Punch, Duplex, Combine or Stamp functions.
For example, if you want to copy
A3K or 11" 17"K originals with
for the Staple function configured
as shown below:
Use this function when you want to

use Batch, Mixed Sizes, or when you
select the original orientation.
Note
It is recommended to use this
function together with the Auto
Paper Selector Preset Reduce/
Enlarge function.
A Press the
key.
Batch mode
Up to 80 standard originals can be set

in the document feeder at a time.
Important
When setting special originals
such as translucent paper, set them
one by one.
Note
The [Batch] key can be change to
the [SADF] key. P.233 Switch to
Batch (SADF).
In Batch mode, even when one
original is set in the document
feeder, the original is automatically fed each time it is set.
C Press the [OK] key.

B Press the [Batch] key.
33
Copying
Mixed Size mode

When originals of different sizes are
set on the document feeder at a time,
the machine automatically checks the
size of the originals and makes copies.
2
D Set your originals, then press the
{Start}
} key.
E After all the previously set origi-
nals are fed, set the next originals.

The second and subsequent originals can be fed automatically without pressing the {Start} key.
1: Limit mark
2: Document guide
Note
When the Sort, Combine or Duplex function has been set, press
the {#} key after all originals are
scanned.
F Press the {Start}} key.
34
Limitation
When setting originals of different
sizes on the document feeder and
m aking copies without using
Mixed Sizes mode, parts of the
original image might not be copied, or paper might be jammed.
The weight of originals that can be
set with this function is 52 81g/
m2, 14 20 lb.
The original sizes that can be set
with this function are as follows:
Metric
version
A3L, B4L, A4KL, B5KL
Inch
version
11" 17"L, 81/2" 14"L, 81/2"

11"KL, 51/2" 81/2"KL
For smaller originals, the copy image might be slanted since the originals might not be correctly
aligned with the original guide.
Copying speed and scanning
speed will be reduced.
Note
This key is not used when sending
a fax message in Mixed size originals. Switch to Facsimile mode and
set Mixed size originals. Refer to
the Facsimile Reference manual.
Setting Originals
Setting Custom Size Originals

When setting custom size originals in
the document feeder, specify the size
of the originals.
Limitation
The paper size that can be set with
this function is vertical 128-297mm
(5" 11"), horizontal 128-1,260mm
(5" 49").
B Press the [Mixed size] key.

D Align the rear and left edges of
B Press the [Custm Size Origi.] key.
X14
11X17
the originals as shown in the illustration.
CP19AN
1: Set into the document feeder.

2: Vertical size
C Enter
the horizontal size of the

original with the Number keys,
then press the [#] key.
E Adjust
the guide to the widest

original size.
F Set the aligned originals face up

into the document feeder.
35
Copying
Note
If you make a mistake, press the
[Clear] or {Clear/Stop} key, and
then enter the value again.
D Enter the vertical size of the original with the Number keys, then
press the [#] key.
E Press the [OK] key.

F Set your originals, then press the
{Start}
} key.
36
Basic Functions
Basic Functions
The following basic functions are explained in this section.
Adjusting Copy Image Density

Auto and Manual Image Density
Selecting Original Type Setting
Text, TextPhoto, Photo, Pale, Generation Copy
Selecting Copy Paper
Auto Paper Select and Manual Paper Select
Auto Reduce/Enlarge
The machine can choose an appropriate reproduction ratio based on
the paper and original sizes you select.
Sort
Copies can be assembled as sets in
sequential order.
Rotate Sort
Every other copy set is rotated by
90 K L and delivered to the copy
tray.
Stack (The optional Bridge unit and
the optional finisher are required for
this function)
Copies can be assembled with each
page set.
Staple (The optional Bridge unit and
the optional finisher are required for
this function)
Each copy set can be stapled together.
Punch (The optional Bridge unit and

the optional 2 Tray finisher are required for this function)
This function is used to make
punch holes in copies.
Note
You can select functions to be activated when System Reset is turned
on, when Energy Saver is turned
off, or after the machine is powered on.
You can change default settings for

basic functions. Settings You
Can Change with the User Tools
in System Settings manual.
Adjusting Copy Image Density

You can adjust the copy image density to match your originals.
There are three types in this function:
Auto Image Density

The machine automatically adjusts
the image density.
If you require darker or lighter
copies, adjust the image density
yourself.
Combined Auto and Manual Image
Density
Use when copying originals with a
dirty background (such as newspapers). You can adjust the foreground density while leaving the
background unchanged.
37
Copying
Auto Image Density
A Make sure that the [Auto Image Density] key is selected.

Density
A Make sure that the [Auto Image Density] key is selected.
B Press the [Lighter] or [Darker] key to
adjust the density.
Note
If the [Auto Image Density] key is
not selected, press the [Auto Image Density] key.
If you do not wish to set any
other functions, press the {Start}
key to start copying.
A Press the [Auto Image Density] key

to cancel it.
B Press the [Lighter] or [Darker] key to

adjust the image density.
Note
38
Note
Basic Functions
Selecting Original Type

Setting
A Press the appropriate key to select

the original type.
Select one of the following types to

match your originals:
Text
Select this mode when your originals contain only letters (no pictures).
TextPhoto
Select TextPhoto when your originals contain photographs or pictures with letters.
Photo
Delicate tones of photographs and
pictures can be reproduced with
this mode.
2
Note
If Yes has been selected in
Original Mode Display of the
User Tools, press the [Original
Mode] key to select the original
type, then press the [OK] key.
Original Mode Display in
P.212 General Features 1/4.
Pale
Select this mode for originals that
have lighter lines written in pencil,
or for faint copied slips. The faint
lines will be clearly copied.
Generation Copy
If your originals are copies (generation copies), the copy image can
be reproduced sharply and clearly.

Note
You can directly display the [Original Mode] key on the copy original
display.
You can adjust the quality level for
each original type.
39
Copying
Selecting Copy Paper

There are two ways to select copy paper:
Auto Paper Select

The machine selects a suitable size of copy paper automatically based on the
original size and the reproduction ratio. P.42 Rotated copy.
Manual Paper Select

Choose the tray containing the paper you wish to copy onto: Paper Tray, Bypass Tray or large capacity tray (LCT).
Reference
P.60 Copying from the Bypass Tray.
Limitation
Auto Paper Select mode is intended for normal and recycled paper.
If you set all the paper trays other than No Display or Recycled Paper,
you cannot use Auto Paper Select.
Note
See the following table for possible copy paper sizes and directions with Auto
Paper Select (when copying at a ratio of 100%):
Metric version
Paper Size and Direction
Exposure glass
Document feeder
A3L, B4L, A4KL, B5KL, A5KL,

11" 17"L, 81/2" 11"KL
Inch version
Paper Size and Direction
Exposure glass
11" 17"L, 81/2" 14"L, 81/2" 11"KL
Document feeder
A4KL, 11" 17"L, 81/2" 14"L,

81/2" 11"KL, 51/2" 81/2"KL
For some originals, the original size might not be detected correctly. P.20
Sizes difficult to detect.
When you set special paper, such as recycled paper, in the paper tray, you can
have the paper type shown on the display. Special Paper Indication in
the System Settings manual.
40
Basic Functions
Auto Paper Select
A Make sure that the [Auto Paper Select] key is selected.
Note
If the [Auto Paper Select] key is not selected, press the [Auto Paper Select] key.
If you do not wish to set any other functions, press the {Start} key to start
copying.
If Yes has been selected in Original Mode Display of the User Tools,
press the [Auto Paper Select] key.
The tray with the key mark will not be automatically selected.
Manual Paper Select
A Select the paper tray, bypass tray or large capacity tray (LCT).
Note
If you do not wish to set any other functions, press the {Start} key to start
copying.
41
Copying
- Rotated copy
If the direction in which your original is set (landscape or portrait) is different
from that of the paper you are copying onto, this function rotates the original image by 90 and fits it on the copy paper. This function works when Auto Paper
Select or Auto Reduce/Enlarge is selected. Auto Paper Select in P.40 Selecting Copy Paper and P.43 Auto Reduce/Enlarge.
Original
Orientation
Paper
Orientation
Copy
Orientation
GCROTA0E
Limitation
The default setting for Auto Tray Switching is With Image Rotation You
cannot use the Rotated Copy function because this setting is changed to
Without Image Rotation or Off.
You cannot use the Rotated Copy function when enlarging onto B4 or A3 size
paper. In this case, set your original in the landscape direction.
Original Size and Direction
A4,
B5, or
A5
portrait
Copy Paper Size and Direction

When enlarging to
B4, A3
You cannot
rotate:
GCROTA1E
GCROTA2E
However,
you can rotate:
A4,
B5, or
A5
landscape
R
GCROTA3E
When enlarging to
B4, A3
R
GCROTA4E
You cannot use the Rotated Copy function when Top Slant, Left 2 or
Saddle Stitch is selected for stapling or if the Punch function is selected
when using the 2 Tray finisher. P.50 Staple and P.56 Punch.
You cannot use the Rotate Copy function if the Staple function is selected
when using the 1000-sheet finisher.
42
Basic Functions
Auto Reduce/Enlarge
The machine can choose an appropriate reproduction ratio based on the
paper and original sizes you select.
Inch version
Where Original Is
Set
Original Size and

Direction
Exposure glass
11" 17"L,
81/2" 14"L,
81/2" 11"KL
Document feeder *1 A4KL, 11" 17"L,

81/2" 14"L,
81/2" 11"KL,
51/2" 81/2"KL
*1
Limitation
You cannot use the bypass tray
with this function.
Note
When you use Auto Reduce/Enlarge, see the following table for
possible original sizes and directions:
Metric version
Where Original Is
Set
Original Size and

Direction
Exposure glass
A3L, B4L,
A4KL, B5KL
You cannot scan two sided B6 originals.
The reproduction ratios the machine will select are 25 400%.

For some originals, the original
size might not be detected correctly. P.20 Sizes difficult to detect.
You can set originals of different
sizes in the document feeder at a
time. P.34 Mixed Size mode.
You cannot use the Rotate function
when enlarging B4 or A3 originals.
When enlarging on to B4 or A3 size
copy paper, set the original in the
L direction.
A Press the [Auto Reduce/Enlarge] key.
Document feeder *1 A3L, B4L,

A4KL, B5KL,
A5KL, B6KL,
11" 17"L,
81/2" 11"KL
*1
You cannot scan 2-sided B6 originals.
B Select the paper tray.

Note
43
Copying
Sort/Stack/Staple
The machine can scan your originals
into memory and automatically sort
the copies.
Sort
Sort
Rotate Sort
Shift sort (the optional finisher
and the optional Bridge unit are
equired)
Stack
Stack
(the optional finisher and the
optional Bridge unit are required)
Staple (the optional finisher and the
optional Bridge unit are required)
With 1000-Sheet Finisher
Top Slant
With 2 Tray Finisher
Top
Top Slant
Bottom
Top 2
Limitation
with this function.
The maximum capacity for Sort,
Rotate Sort, and Stack with A5 L
is 100 sheets.
Note
When the number of copies exceeds the tray capacity, remove
copies from the tray.
44
The maximum tray capacity is as

follows.
Metric version
Internal
tray
B4L or larger: 250 sheets

(80g/m2)
A4K or smaller: 500 sheets
(80g/m2)
Internal
tray 2
(1 bin
tray)
125 sheets (80g/m2)
Extar125 sheets (80g/m2)

nal tray
1000 B4L or larger: 500 sheets
Sheet
(80g/m2)
Finisher A4K or smaller: 1,000
sheets (80g/m2)
2 Tray
Finisher shift tray 1
Finisher A3L, B4L: 250 sheets
(80g/m2)
A4KL, B5KL, A5K:
500 sheets (80g/m2)
A5L: 100 sheets (80g/m2)
A3L, B4L, A4L, B5KL:
750 sheets (80g/m2)
A4K: 2,000 sheets (80g/m2)
A5K: 500 sheets (80g/m2)
A5L: 100 sheets (80g/m2)
Sort/Stack/Staple
Inch version
Internal
tray
81/2" 14"L or larger: 250

sheets (20 lb.)
81/2" 11K or smaller: 500
sheets (20 lb.)
Internal
tray 2
(1 bin
tray)
125 sheets (20 lb.)
Sort
Copies can be assembled as sets in sequential order.
Sort
Copies can be assembled as sets in
sequential order.
Extar125 sheets (20 lb.)

nal tray
1000 81/2" 14"L or larger: 500
Sheet
sheets (20 lb.)
Finisher
81/2" 11"K or smaller:
1,000 sheets (20 lb.)
2 Tray
Finisher Shift Tray 1
Finisher 11" 17"L, 81/ " 14"L:
2
250 sheets (20 lb.)
81/2" 11"KL : 500sheets
(20 lb.)
5 /2" 8 /2"KL :
100sheets (20 lb.)
1
3
1
3
1
Metric version
A3L, B4L,
A4KL, B5KL,
A5L
Inch version
11" 17"L,
81/2" 14"L,
81/2" 11"KL,
51/2" 81/2"KL
Finisher Shift Tray 2

11" 17"L, 81/2" 14"L,
81/2" 11"L: 750 sheets
(20 lb.)
51/2" 81/2"KL :
100sheets (20 lb.)
Note
The paper sizes that can be used
in the Sort function are as follows:
81/2" 11"K : 2,000sheets

(20 lb.)
Rotate Sort
Every other copy set is rotated by
90KL and delivered to the copy
tray.
Note
When the optional finisher is installed, you can switch to or
from the Rotate Sort function
with the User Tools. Select
Stack or Rotate sort in P.233
Input/Output.
45
Copying

in the Rotate Sort function are as
follows:
Metric version
A4KL, B5KL
Inch version
81/2" 11"KL
1000-Sheet Finish- 2 Tray

er
Finisher
To use the Rotate Sort function,

two paper trays identical in size
and different in direction (KL)
are required.
Metric A3L, B4L,

version A4KL, B5KL,
A5KL, B6L,
A6L
Reference
For the paper capacity of the optional finishers, P.244 1000Sheet Finisher (Option), P.245
2 Tray Finisher (Option).
A3L,
B4L,
A4KL,
B5KL,
A5KL
Inch
11" 17"L,
version 81/2" 14"L,
81/2" 11"KL,
51/2" 81/2"KL
11"
17"L,
81/2"
14"L,
81/2"
11"KL,
51/2"
81/2"
KL
When using the Rotate Sort,

Punch or Staple functions, the
capacity may be reduced.
Shift Sort
1000-Sheet/2 Tray Finisher
The shift tray moves backward
or forward each time the copies
of one set or those of each job
are delivered, causing the next
copy to shift when delivered so
that you can differentiate each
set or job.
123
123 123
46
Note
in the Sort function are as follows:
A Press the [Sort] or [Rotate Sort] key.

When the finisher is not installed
When the 1000-Sheet Finisher is

installed
Sort/Stack/Staple
When the 2 Tray Finisher is

installed
Note
When the optional finisher is installed, use the User Tools to display [Rotate Sort]. Select Stack
Function in P.233 Input/Output.
B Enter
the number of copy sets

with the number keys.
Limitation
The maximum number of sets is
999.
Note
To change the entered number,
press the {Clear/Stop} key.
C Set your originals, then press the

{Start}
} key.
If an original is misfed during sorted copying, reset

your originals in the document feeder according to the
instructions on the display.
The display will indicate the
number of scanned originals.
When setting an original on the

exposure glass or in the
document feeder using Batch
mode
Reference
P.33 Batch mode.
A Set the original, then press the

{Start}
} key.
Note
copied.
B Set the next original. When it is
placed on the exposure glass,
press the {Start}
} key.
Note
Set the original in the same
direction as the first one.
C After all originals are scanned,
press the {#}
} key.
When setting a stack of originals

in the document feeder
A Set a stack of originals in the
document feeder, then press
the {Start}
} key.
Note
The last page should be on
the bottom.
47
Copying
A Press the [Stack] key.
Stack
Copies can be assembled with each page
set.
Shift Stack
1000-Sheet/2 Tray-Sheet Finisher
This function groups copies of
each page in a multi-page original together. Every other page
stack is shifted for ease of separation. The finisher shift tray of
the finisher provides this function by sliding from side to side.
Note
{Start}
} key.
Note
The paper sizes that can be used in
the Stack function are as follows:
1000-Sheet Finisher 2 Tray
Finisher
Metric
version
A3L, B4L,
A4KL, B5KL,
A5KL
A3L,
B4L,
A4KL,
B5KL,
A5KL
Inch
version
11" 17"L,
81/2" 14"L,
81/2" 11"KL,
51/2" 81/2"KL
11"
17"L,
81/2"
14"L,
81/2"
11"KL
, 51/2"
81/2"
KL
Reference
For the maximum tray capacity of
the optional finisher, P.244
1000-Sheet Finisher (Option),
P.245 2 Tray Finisher (Option).
48
the number keys.

222
111 333
B Enter the number of copies with
When setting a stack of originals

in the document feeder
A Set a stack of originals in the
document feeder, then press
the {Start}
} key.
Note
The last page should be on
the bottom.

mode
Reference
P.33 Batch mode.

{Start}
} key.
Note
copied.
Sort/Stack/Staple

press the {Start}
} key.
Note
Set the original in the same
direction as the first one.
49
Copying
Staple
The optional finisher and the bridge unit are required to use this function.
Each copy set can be stapled together.
Limitation
You cannot use the following paper in this function:
Postcards
Translucent paper
OHP transparencies
Adhesive labels
Curled paper
Low stiffness paper
Paper of different vertical sizes
Note
For this mode, the following limitation applies. When the number of copies
exceeds the tray capacity, copying stops. In this case, remove the copies from
the shift tray and then resume copying.
Metric version
Paper size
A3L, B4L, A4KL, B5K
Stapler
capacity
A4 or smaller: 30 sheets (80g/m2)

2
B4 or larger: 20 sheets (80g/m )
A4 or smaller: 50 sheets (80g/m2)

B4 or larger: 30 sheets (80g/m2)
Mixed Size: 30 sheets (80g/m2)
Shift tray
capacity
(A4K) *1
*1
50
1,000 sheets (80g/m2)
Finisher shift tray 1: 500 sheets

(80g/m2)
Finisher shift tray 2: 1,500 sheets
(80g/m2)
Depending on the number of sheets to be stapled and whether sheets have

punched holes or not, the maximum tray capacity might be reduced.
Sort/Stack/Staple
Inch version
Paper size
11" 17"L, 81/2" 14"L,

81/2" 11"KL
11" 17"L, 81/2" 14"L,

81/2" 11"KL
Stapler
capacity
81/2" 11" or smaller: 30 sheets

(20 lb.)
81/2" 11" or smaller: 50 sheets

(20 lb.)
81/2" 14" or larger: 20 sheets

(20 lb.)
81/2" 14" or larger: 30 sheets

(20 lb.)
Mixed Size: 30 sheets (20lb.)

Shift tray
capacity
(81/2"
11"K) *1
*1
*2
*3
1,000 sheets (20 lb.)
Finisher shift tray 1: 500 sheets

(20lb.)
Finisher shift tray 2: 1,500 sheets
(20lb.)
Depending on the number of sheets to be stapled and whether sheets have

punched holes or not, the maximum tray capacity might be reduced.
If you copy when the paper remains on the tray, the capacity might be reduced.
Available staple positions are Top and Bottom.
In the following cases, the copies will be delivered to the shift tray without
stapling.
When the number of sheets for one set is over the stapler capacity.
When memory reaches 0% during copying.
When you select Staple, Sort mode is automatically selected.
Reference
If you want to add staples, P.198 d Adding Staples.
When staple is jammed, P.202 e Removing Jammed Staples.

When using 1 Sided 1 Sided, 1 Sided 2 Sided, 2 Sided 1 Sided, 2 Sided
1 Sided for double copies in Combine mode, select K original for L copy,
L original for K copy.
Stapling position and original setting

Set all the originals in a direction in which they can be read. They will automatically be rotate copied. When there is copy paper that is identical in size and direction as your original, the staple positions are as follows:
When using 1 Sided 2 Pages Combine 1 Side, 1 Sided 4 Pages Combine
2 Sided for double copies in Combine mode, select K original for L copy, L
original for K copy.
When using Top Slant, Left 2 or Top 2 with 1 Sided 1 Sided, 1 Sided
2 Sided, 2 Sided 1 Sided, or 2 Sided 2 Sided of combine function
for double copies, select K original for L copies and L originals for K copies.
51
Copying
1000-sheet Finisher
When your machine is equipped with the 1000-sheet finisher, the stapling position will be fixed to Top Slant.
Original setting
Exposure
glass
Document
Feeder
Stapling
position
K
Top Slant
2
STAPLEBE
Note
Original images are not rotated.
2 Tray Finisher
Original setting
Exposure
glass
Document
Feeder
Stapling
position
Top
STAPLEAE
STAPLEBE
Top Slant
Bottom
STAPLECE
52
STAPLE25
STAPLE26
STAPLE27
STAPLE28
STAPLE29
STAPLE30
Sort/Stack/Staple
Original setting
Exposure
glass
Document
Feeder
STAPLEDE
Left 2
Stapling
position
*1
STAPLE31
STAPLE33
STAPLE32
*1
Top 2
STAPLEEE
*1
Available staple positions except A3, B4, size of paper.
Note
You cannot change stapling positions during copying.
When the original image is rotated, the stapling direction turns by 90.
By setting orientation of papers and originals, Blank part will appear. Check
orientation. message is displayed. In this case, change the paper orientation.
The maximum original image size that can be rotated is as follows:
Metric
version
A4
Inch
version
81/2" 11"
A Select one of the stapling positions.

1000-Sheet Finisher
53
Copying
2 Tray Finisher
2
Note
When you select the stapling position, Sort mode is automatically selected.
Reference
P.51 Stapling position and original setting
B Enter the number of copy sets with the number keys.

Note
To change the entered number, press the {Clear/Stop} key.
C Set your originals, then press the {Start}} key.

When setting a stack of originals in the document feeder
A Set a stack of originals in the document feeder, then press the {Start}
} key.
Note
The last page should be on the bottom.
When setting an original on the exposure glass or in the document feeder

using Batch mode
Reference
P.33 Batch mode.
A Set the original, then press the {Start}

} key.
Note
Start with the first page to be copied.
B Set the next original. When it is placed on the exposure glass, press the
{Start}
} key.
Note
Set the original in the same direction as the first one.
C After all originals are scanned, press the {#}
} key.
54
Sort/Stack/Staple
To Stop Scanning Temporarily

When you are using the Sort, Stack, or
Staple function, the originals are
scanned into memory.
A Press the {Clear/Stop}} key to stop

originals from being scanned into
memory.
To resume scanning
A Press the [No] key to resume
scanning.
Note
Scanned images in memory
are not cleared.
To clear scanned images of the

originals
A Press the [Yes] key.
Scanning is stopped with the
images cleared.
When Memory Reaches 0%

Scanning will be stopped if the size of
scanned image data exceeds memory
capacity.
Note
There is enough memory to store
approximate 1,000 originals of A4,
8 1 / 2 " 11" size. The number of
originals that can be stored in
memory varies depending on the
memory setting and original type.
In addition, the number of originals that can be stored in memory
will be reduced when you use other functions.
Reference
Scanning will stop when memory
reaches 0% during sorted copying.
However, you can change this setting so that all the scanned pages
are copied and delivered to the
tray first, then the machine automatically continues scanning the
remaining originals. Memory
Full Auto Scan Restart in P.233
Input/Output.
A Press the {Start}} key.

The scanned pages are delivered to
the tray. Then, the image data in
memory is cleared.
B Remove the copies and continue
copying by following the instructions on the display.
To Remove the Paper from the

Staple Unit
If you cancel the stapling copy job in
the middle of the job, the paper might
be left in the staple unit. In this case,
remove the paper from the staple
unit.
A Press the {Clear Modes}} key to cancel the copy settings.
B Set the next original, then press
the {Start}
} key.
The paper left in the staple unit is
automatically delivered, then the
next job starts.
Note
When the paper is not delivered
and the message is displayed,
follow the instructions on the
display to remove the paper.
55
Copying
Punch
The optional 2 tray finisher and the bridge unit are required to use this function.
This function is used to make punch holes in copies.
2 holes
3 holes
4 holes
56
Punch
Note
When using Punch and Combine, Double Copies, or Auto Reduce/Enlarge,
the message "Blank part will appear. Check orientation." may appear because
of the orientation of the original and the copy paper. If this occurs, change the
orientation of the copy paper.
The relationship between the direction in which you set the original and the
punch hole positions is as follows:
Punch hole positions

Direction in which Original is Set
Exposure glass
2 holes
Punch Hole Positions
Document feeder
Standard
3 holes
4 holes
2 holes
90 Turn
3 holes
57
Copying
Direction in which Original is Set
Exposure glass
90 Turn
4 holes
Punch Hole Positions
Document feeder
Punchable paper sizes are as follows:

Punch kit type
2 & 4 holes type
2 holes
4 holes
4 holes type
2 & 3 holes type
4 holes
2 holes
3 holes
A3-A5, 11" 17"-51/2" 81/2"
A4-A5, 81/2" 11"-51/2" 81/2"
A3, B4, 11" 17"
A4, B5, 81/2" 11"
A3-A5, 11" 17"-51/2" 81/2"
A4-A5, 81/2" 11"-51/2" 81/2"
A3-A5, 11" 17"-51/2" 81/2"
A4-A5, 81/2" 11"-51/2" 81/2"
A3, B4, 11" 17"
A4, B5, 81/2" 11"
Since punch holes are made in each copy, the punch hole positions vary
slightly.
The punch hole positions change according to the direction of the paper selected.
Reference
If the punch waste box fills up, P.206 y Removing Punch Waste.
A Select the Punch position.
Note
When stapling copies, also select a stapling position. P.50 Staple.
58
Punch
B Enter the number of copy sets with the number keys.

Note
To change the entered number, press the {Clear/Stop} key.
If you wish to use the Sort function, press the [Sort] key.
C Set your originals, then press the {Start}} key.
59
Copying

Use the bypass tray to copy onto OHP
transparencies, adhesive labels, translucent paper, postcards, and copy paper that cannot be set in the paper
tray.
A Open the bypass tray.
Note
The machine can automatically detect the following sizes as standard
size copy paper:
Metric
version
A3L, A4L, A5L, 81/2" 13"L
Inch
version
A3L, 11" 17"L, 81/2" 14"L,

81/2" 11"L, 51/2" 81/2"L
If you do not use the standard size

copy paper, you should input vertical and horizontal dimensions.
The sizes that you can input are as
follows:
Metric
version
Vertical: 100 297mm
Inch
version
Vertical: 3.9" 11.6"
Horizontal: 148 600mm

Horizontal: 5.8" 23.4"
When using paper larger than 433

mm in size, set it so that it is fed
straight into the machine.
When using paper larger than 433
mm in size, the paper may become
wrinkled, and may not be fed into
the machine, or may cause paper
jams.
To make copies onto OHP transparencies or thick paper exceeding
128g/m2, 35 lb., specify the paper
type in P.63 When Copying onto
OHP Transparencies or Thick Paper.
The maximum number of sheets
you can set at a time depends on
the paper type. For details about
paper capacity of the bypass tray,
P.22 Copy Paper.
60
B Adjust the guides to copy paper

size.
Important
If the guides are not flush with
the copy paper, a skew image or
paper misfeeds might occur.
C Lightly insert the copy paper face

up until the beeper sounds.
The k indicator on the display automatically goes on.
1. Extender
Note
The face side of the paper set is
copied on.
Do not stack paper over the limit mark, otherwise a skew image
or paper misfeeds might occur.
If the beeper is turned off, lightly insert the copy paper until it
stops. Refer to the System Settings manual.
When the document feeder is
open, set the direction of the
copy paper to L.
Swing out the extender to support paper sizes larger than
A4L, 81/2" 11"L.
Fan paper to get air between the
sheets and avoid a multi-sheet
feed.
Before setting, adjust the paper
if curled or warped.
When copying onto standard size

paper (Thick Paper, Thin paper,
Transparent Paper, or OHP
transparecies)
A Press the {#}
} key.
B Press the [Select Size] key.
C Select the paper size.
Note
The copy paper sizes that can
be selected are as follows:
A3L, A4KL, A5KL,
A6L, B4L, B5KL,
B6L, 1117L, 81/214L,
81/211KL, 51/281/2L,
71/4101/2L, 813L,
8 1 / 2 13L, 8 1 / 4 13K,
1114L, 1115K,
1014L, 1015L,
8 1/ 414L, 8101/2KL,
810KL
When copying onto custom size

paper
Important
You should specify the size of
copy paper to avoid paper misfeeds.
A Press the {#}
} key.
61
Copying
B Press the [Custom Size] key.
2
C Press the [Vertical mm] key and
enter the vertical size of the paper with the number keys, then
press the [#] key.
E To register the custom size entered, press the [Store] key and
then press the [Cancel] key.
Note
If you do not register the custom size, go to step F.
Only one custom size can be
stored.
To recall the custom size
stored, press the [Recall] key.
If you do not register the custom size, the size you set is
deleted when modes are
cleared.
F Press the [OK] key.

{Start}
} key.
E When your copy job is finished,

press the { Clear Modes}
} key to
clear the settings.
Note
To change the number entered, press the [Clear] or
{Clear/Stop} key and enter the
new number.
D Enter the horizontal size of the
paper with the number keys,
Note
If the [Horiz mm] key is not
highlighted, press the [Horiz
mm] key.
{Clear/Stop} key and enter the
new number.
62
When Copying onto OHP

Transparencies or Thick Paper
To make copies onto OHP transparencies or thick paper, you need to
specify the paper type.
Note
Select [Thick Paper] if the paper
weight is more than 128g/m2, 34
lb.
A Open the bypass tray, and adjust

F Set your originals and press the
{Start}
} key.
Important
When copying onto OHP transparencies, remove copied sheets
one by one.
G When your copy job is finished,

press the { Clear Modes}
} key to
clear the settings.
the guides to the paper size.
Important
If the guides are not flush with
the copy paper, a skew image or
paper misfeeds might occur.
B Lightly insert the OHP transparencies or thick paper face down

until the beeper sounds.
The k indicator on the display automatically goes on.
Important
When you set an OHP transparency, make sure that its front
and back faces are properly positioned.
To avoid paper misfeeds, fan
the paper before setting it in the
tray.
C Press the {#}} key.

D Select [OHP Sheet] or [Thick Paper].
63
Copying
Programs
You can store frequently used copy
job settings in machine memory, and
recall them for future use.
Storing Your Settings

You can store your settings you
frequently use.
Deleting A Program
You can delete a stored program.
Storing a Program
A Edit the copy settings so that all

functions you want to store in this
program are selected.
B Press the {Program}} key.
Recalling A Program
You can recall a stored program.
Note
You can store up to 10 programs.
You can select the standard mode
or program No. 10 as the mode to
be set when modes are cleared or
reset is made, or immediately after
the operation switch is turned on.
Paper settings are stored based on
paper size. So if you place more
than one paper tray of the same
size, the paper tray prioritized
with the User Tools (System Settings) will be selected first.Refer to
Programs are not cleared by turning the power off or by pressing
the {Clear Modes} key. They are
canceled only when you delete or
overwrite them with another program.
C Press the [Register] key.
D Press
the program number you

want to store.
Note
Program numbers with m already have settings in them.
Reference
P.65 Changing a Stored Program.
E Enter the program name with the

letter keys on the display panel.
64
Programs
Note
If you do not wish to enter the
program name, go to step F.
You can register up to 40 characters.

To change the name entered,
press the [Backspace], [Delete] or
{Clear/Stop} key and enter new
letters.
Reference
For details on entering characters,
"Entering Text Characters" in

When the settings are successfully
stored, the m indicator goes on.
A Repeat steps E and F in Storing

a Program.
Not to overwrite the program

A Press the [Do not Register] key.
Deleting a Program
A Press the {Program}} key.
B Press the [Delete] key.
Changing a Stored Program
A Make sure the program settings.

Note
When you want to check the
contents of the program, recall
the program. P.66 Recalling a
Program.
B Repeat steps A to D in Storing a
C Press

want to delete.
D Press the [Yes] key.
Program.
To overwrite the program
Note
To cancel the deletion, press the
[No] key.
Important
If you select [Register], the previous program is lost.
65
Copying
Recalling a Program
A Press the {Program}} key.
B Press the [Recall] key.
C Press

want to recall.
The stored settings are displayed.
Note
Only programs with m contain
a program.

{Start}
} key.
66
Job Preset
Job Preset
If a long copy job is in progress and
you do not wish to wait for it to finish,
you can use this function to set up the
next one copy job in advance. When
the current copy job is finished, your
copy job will be started automatically.
A Press the {Copy}} key.
D Press the [To "Printing"] key.

After the current copy job, the next
job starts automatically.
Note
You can switch the display to
the current copy job by pressing
the [To "Printing"] key. You can
switch the display to the preset
job by pressing the [To "Reserving"] key.
B Set up the next copy job.
Note
To cancel this job, press the
[Cancel] key.
C Set the originals in the document

feeder and press the {Start}
} key.
All originals are scanned.
67
Copying
Other Functions
Energy Saver Mode
Interrupt Copy
If you do not operate the machine for

a certain period after copying, or
when you press the {Energy Saver}
key, the display disappears and the
machine enters Energy Saver mode.
When you press the {Energy Saver}
key again, the machine returns to the
ready condition. In Energy Saver
mode, the machine uses less electricity.
Use this function if you wish to interrupt a long copy job to make urgently
needed copies.
Note
If you press the {Energy Saver} key
during the operation, the current
settings will be cleared.
It takes about 3 seconds to return
to the ready condition from Energy
Saver mode.
Reference
Low Power Timer in the System Settings manual.
Limitation
You cannot use the Interrupt Copy
function when scanning fax originals.
Note
The procedure for making interrupt copies depends on which
kind of operation the machine is
currently carrying out.
To interrupt an original being fed
A Press the {Interrupt}} key.

The Interrupt indicator goes on
and scanning stops.
B Remove
the originals that were

being copied and set the originals
you wish to copy.
C Press the {Start}} key.

The machine starts making your
copies.
D When your copy job is finished,

remove your originals and copies.
E Press the {Interrupt}} key again.

The Interrupt indicator goes off.
F When the display prompts you to,
replace the originals that were being copied before.

The previous copy job settings will
be restored and the machine will continue copying from where it left off.
68
Other Functions
To interrupt copying after all originals

have been fed
Sample Copy
Use this function to check a copy set

before making a long copy run.
The Interrupt indicator goes on.

Note
Copying will not stop yet.
B Set your original.

The machine stops the original job
and starts copying your original.
D When
copying is complete, remove your originals and copies.
E Press the {Interrupt}} key again.

The Interrupt indicator goes off.
The previous copy job settings will
be restored and the machine will
continue copying from where it
left off.
Original Beeper
The beeper sounds and an error message is displayed when you leave
your originals on the exposure glass
after copying.
Note
To cancel this function, Tone:
Original remains in P.215 General Features 2/4.
Limitation
This function can be used only
when the Sort function has been
turned on.
A Select
Sort and any other functions, then enter the number of

copy sets to be made.
B Set the originals.

C Press the {Sample Copy}} key.
One copy set is delivered for proof
copying.
D After
checking the finish, press

the [Print] key if the sample is acceptable.
The number of copies made is the
number you specified minus one
for the proof copy.
Note
If you press the [Suspend] key
after checking the finish, return
to step A to adjust the copy settings as necessary. You can
change the settings for Staple,
Punch, Duplex, Copy Orientation, Stamp, Margin Adjust, and
Cover/Slip Sheet. However, depending on the combinations of
functions, some settings might
not be changed.
You cannot use the Sample
Copy function after changing
the settings.
69
Copying
Changing the Number of Sets

You can change the number of copy
sets during copying.
Limitation
turned on.
A Press
the {Clear/Stop}
} key when
Copying is displayed.
B Press the [Change Quantity] key.
C Enter
the number of copy sets

with the number keys, then press
the {#}
} key.
70
Note
The number of sets you can enter differs depending on the
timing of pressing the {Clear/
Stop} key.
D Press the [Continue] key.
Preset Reduce/Enlarge
Preset Reduce/Enlarge
You can select a preset ratio for copying.
Metric version
Ratio (%)
Note
You can select one of 12 preset ratios (5 enlargement ratios, 7 reduction ratios).
Use Create Margin to reduce the
image to 93% of its original size
with the centre as reference. You
can register this function in a
shortcut key on the initial display.
You can change the preset ratios to
other ratios you frequently use.
Enlarge in P.219 Reproduction
Ratio 1/2 and Reduce in P.220
Reproduction Ratio 2/2.
You can set and display three
kinds of ratio on the initial display.
Shortcut R/E in P.219 Reproduction Ratio 1/2.
You can specify which of [Reduce],
[Enlarge] or [Mag. Ratio] is to be given priority and displayed when
the [Reduce/Enlarge] key is pressed.
You can select a ratio regardless of
the size of an original or copy paper. With some ratios, parts of the
image might not be copied or margins will appear on copies.
Copies can be reduced or enlarged
as follows:
Original Copy
paper size
400 (enlarge area

by 16)
--
200 (enlarge area

by 4)
A5A3
141 (enlarge area

by 2)
A4A3, A5A4
122
FA3, A4B4
115
B4A3
93
--
82
FA4, B4A4
75
B4F4, B4F
71 (reduce area by
1
/2)
A3A4, A4A5
65
A3F
50 (reduce area by
1
/4)
A3A5, FA5
25
--
Inch version
Ratio (%)
Original Copy
paper size
400 (enlarge area

by 16)
--
200 (enlarge area

by 4)
51/2" 81/2"11"
17"
155 (enlarge area

by 2)
51/2" 81/2"81/2"
14"
129
81/2" 11"11"
17"
121
81/2" 14"11"
17"
93
--
85
F81/2" 11"
78
81/2" 14"81/2"
11"
71
Copying
Ratio (%)
Original Copy
paper size
73
11" 15"81/2"
11"
65
11" 17"81/2"
11"
50 (reduce area by
/4)
11" 17"51/2"
81/2"
25
--
A Press the [Reduce/Enlarge] key.
Create Margin mode

Use Create Margin to reduce the
image by 93% of its original size with
the centre position as reference. You
can register this function in a shortcut
key on the initial display. By combining it with the Reduce/Enlarge function, you can also provide the
Reduce/Enlarge copy with a margin.
Note
You can register Create Margin
in a shortcut key.
You can change the Reduce/Enlarge ratio for Create Margin.
A Press the [Create Margin] key displayed on the initial display.
Note
To select a preset ratio on the
initial display, directly press the
shortcut reduce/enlarge key
and go to step D.
B Press the [Enlarge] or [Reduce] key.
B If you do not wish to combine it

with the Reduce/Enlarge function, set your originals, then press
the {Start}
} key.
C Select a ratio.
D Press the [OK] key.
E Set your originals, then press the
{Start}
} key.
72
Zoom
Zoom
You can change the reproduction ratio in 1% steps.
B Enter the ratio.

To select the ratio with the [n]
and [o] keys
A Select a preset ratio which is

close to the desired ratio by using [Reduce] or [Enlarge].
Note
The following ratios can be selected:
Metric version: 25 400%
Inch version: 25 400%
image might not be copied or margins will appear on copies.
You can select a preset ratio which
is near the desired ratio, then adjust the ratio with the [n] or [o]
key.
B Adjust the ratios with the [n

n]
or [o
o] key.
Note
To change the ratio in 1%
steps, just press the [n] or
[o] key. To change the ratio
in 10% steps, press and hold
down the [n] or [o] key.
To enter the ratio with the number

keys
A Press the [Mag. Ratio] key.
73
Copying
B Enter the desired ratio with the

number keys.
Note
To change the ratio entered,
press the [Clear] or {Clear/
Stop} key and enter the new
ratio.
C Press the [#] key.

{Start}
} key.
74
Size Magnification
Size Magnification
This function calculates an enlargement or reduction ratio based upon
the lengths of the original and copy.
B Press the [Specifid Ratio] key.
2
Amm
amm
C Make sure that the [Specifid Ratio]

key is highlighted.
Preparation
Measure and specify the lengths of
the original and copy by comparing A with a.
Limitation
If the calculated ratio is over the
maximum or under the minimum
ratio, it is corrected within the
range of the ratio automatically.
However, with some ratios, parts
of the image might not be copied
or blank margins will appear on
copies.
Note
A ratio is selected in the range of 25
to 400%.
D Enter
the length of the original

with the number keys and press
the [#] key.
Note
You can enter sizes within the
following ranges:
Metric 1 999mm (in 1mm steps)
version
Inch
0.1" 99.9" (in 0.1" steps)
version
To change the length entered,

press the [Clear] or {Clear/Stop}
key and enter the new length.
75
Copying
E Enter the length of the copy with
the number keys and press the [#]

key.
Note
To change the length entered,
key and enter the new length.
To change the length after
pressing the [#] key, select [Original] or [Copy] and enter the desired length.

G Press the [OK] key.
H Set your original, then press the
{Start}
} key.
76
Directional Magnification (%)
Directional Magnification (%)

Copies can be reduced or enlarged at
different reproduction ratios horizontally and vertically.
a%
b%
C Press the [Direct. Mag.%] key.

CP2P01EE
Note
image might not be copied or
blank margins will appear on copies.
You can also select a preset ratio
which is close to the desired ratio
by using Reduce or Enlarge, then
adjust the ratio with the [n] or
[o] key.
To enter the ratio with the number

keys
A Press the [Horizontal] key.

B Enter the desired ratio with the
number keys, followed by the
[#] key.
Note
To change the ratio entered,
press the [Clear] or {Clear/
Stop} key and enter the new
ratio.
77
Copying
C Press the [Vertical] key.

D Enter the desired ratio with the
number keys, followed by the
[#] key.
To specify a ratio with the [n]

and [o] keys
A Press the [With no] key.

B Press the [Horizontal] key.
C Adjust the ratio using the [n

n]
or [o
o] key.
Note
Pressing the [n] or [o] key
changes the ratio in 1% steps.
Pressing and holding down
the [n] or [o] key changes it
in 10% steps.
If you have incorrectly entered the ratio, readjust the
ratio with the [n] or [o]
key.
D Press the [Vertical] key.
E Adjust the ratio with the [n
n]
or [o
o] key.

{Start}
} key.
78
Directional Size Magnification (Inch)
Directional Size Magnification (Inch)

The suitable reproduction ratios will
be automatically selected when you
enter the horizontal and vertical
lengths of the original and copy image you require.

CP2M01EE
1: Horizontal original size

2: Vertical original size
3: Horizontal copy size
4: Vertical copy size
Preparation
Specify the vertical and horizontal
sizes of the original and those of the
copy, as shown in the illustration.
Limitation
If the calculated ratio is over the
maximum or under the minimum
ratio, it is corrected within the
range of the ratio automatically.
of the image might not be copied
or blank margins will appear on
copies.
Note
You can enter sizes within the following ranges:
Metric
version
1 999mm (in 1mm steps)
Inch
version
0.1" 99.9" (in 0.1" steps)
C Press the [Dirc.Size Mag. In] key.
D Enter

original with the number keys,
Note
To change the value entered,
key and enter the new value.
79
Copying
E Enter

copy with the number keys, then
press the [#] key.
F Enter the vertical size of the original with the number keys, then
press the [#] key.
G Enter the vertical size of the copy
with the number keys, then press

the [#] key.
Note
To change the length, press the
place you wish to change and
enter the new value.
H Press the [OK] key.

I Press the [OK] key.
J Set your originals, then press the
{Start}
} key.
80
Duplex/Combine/Series
You can make copies in a variety of
formats by combining the following
modes:
1 Sided/2 Sided originals
1 Sided/2 Sided copies
Duplex
Combine
Book
Series
B Select
[1 Sided] or [2 Sided] for

copying.
A Press
[Dup./Combine/Series] and
check your originals. And select
[1 Sided] or [2 Sided] for the originals.
1 2 3 4
5 6 7 8
1 2
5 6
1 2 3 4
3 4
7 8
5 6 7 8
9 10 11 12
13 14 15 16
1: 1-sided
2: 2-sided
3: Series/Book
1: 1-sided
2: 2-sided
A: Front
B: Back
81
Copying
Original Direction and

Completed Copies
Originals and Copy Direction
The resulting copy image will differ

according to the direction in which
you set your original (lengthwise K
or widthwise L).
You can select the orientation ([Top to

Top], [Top to Bottom]). P.82 Specifying Orientation of Bound Originals.
Top to Top
Duplex1
Top to Bottom
Duplex2
Specifying Orientation of
Bound Originals
You can specify the orientation of
bound originals (how you turn the
pages). The default setting is [Top to
Top].
GCRYOU1E
Note
The illustrations show the directions of copied images on the front
and back, not the directions of delivery.
Note
You can change the orientation default with the User Tools. Copy
Orientation in Duplex Mode and
Original Orientation in Duplex
Mode in P.215 General Features 2/
4.
A Press the [Dup./Combine/Series] key.
82
B Press the [Orientation] key.
2
C Select an original orientation and
a copy orientation.
83
Copying
Duplex
This function can be used in two
ways:
1 Sided 2 Sided
1 Sided 2 Sided
This mode makes two-sided copies
from one-sided originals.
2 Sided 2 Sided
This mode makes two-sided copies
from two-sided originals.
Limitation
You cannot use the following copy
paper in this function:
Paper smaller than A5K, 51/2"
81/2"K (possible on A5L, 51/
1
2" 8 /2"L)
Paper thicker than 105g/m2, 28
lb.
Paper thinner than 64g/m2, 17
lb.
Translucent paper
Adhesive labels
OHP transparencies
Postcards
with this function.
Note
If you set an odd number of 1-sided originals in the document feeder, the reverse side of the last page
is left blank.
When original images are copied,
the images are shifted by a width
of the binding margin. You can adjust the binding margin or binding
position. You can also change their
default values. Front Margin:
Left/Right, Back Margin: Left/
Right, Front Margin: Top/Bottom and Back Margin: Top/Bottom in P.222 Edit 1/2.
A binding margin can be automatically made on the back side. 1
sided 2 sided Auto Margin: T to
T in P.222 Edit 1/2.
84
Duplex
B Press the [1 Sided] key for original,

then press the [2 Sided] key for
copy.
2 Sided 2 Sided
Note
To change the copy orientation
to Top to Bottom, press the
[Orientation] key and select [Top
to Bottom]. P.82 Specifying
Orientation of Bound Originals.

{Start}
} key.

mode
B Press the [2 Sided] key for original,

then press the [2 Sided] key for
copy.
Reference
P.33 Batch mode.

{Start}
} key.
Note
copied.
press the {Start}
} key.
C Press the {#}
} key after the last
original has been scanned.
Note
85
Copying

{Start}
} key.

mode
Reference
P.33 Batch mode.

{Start}
} key.
Note
copied.
press the {Start}
} key.
C Press the {#}
} key after the last
original has been scanned.
86
Combine
Combine
You can combine two or more originals into one copy. 1 Sided Combine
mode is for 1-sided copies, and 2 Sided Combine mode for 2-sided copies.
This function can be used in twelve
ways:
1 Sided 2 Pages Combine 1 Side

Copies two 1-sided originals to
one side of a sheet.
Copies four 1-sided originals together to one side of a sheet.
Copies eight 1-sided originals together to one side of a sheet.
Copies four 1-sided originals to the
two-page spread on both sides of a
sheet.
Copies eight 1-sided originals together to both sides of a sheet.
Copies 16 1-sided originals together to both sides of a sheet.
Copies one 2-sided original to one
side of a sheet.
Copies two 2-sided originals to
Copies four 2-sided originals to

Copies two 2-sided originals together to both sides of a sheet.
Copies four 2-sided originals together to both sides of a sheet.

Limitation
with this function.
If the calculated ratio is under the
minimum ratio, it is corrected
within the range of the ratio automatically. However, with some ratios, parts of the image might not
be copied.
Note
In this mode, the machine selects
the reproduction ratio automatically. This reproduction ratio depends on the copy paper sizes and
the number of originals.
The machine uses ratios in the following range:
A separation line between originals can be printed with the User
Tools. Separation Line in Combine in P.224 Edit 2/2.
Even if the direction of originals is
different from that of the copy paper, the machine will automatically rotate the image by 90 to make
copies properly.
87
Copying
When making copies in Combine

mode, the border of each original
can be automatically erased by
3mm, 0.1". Erase Original
Shadow in Combine in P.222 Edit 1/2.
If the number of originals placed is
less than the number specified for
combining, the last page is copied
blank as shown in the illustration.
1 Sided 2 Pages Combine 1

Side
Copies two 1-sided originals to one
side of a sheet.
1
12
You can change the copy order in

Combination mode. Copy Order In Combine in P.224 Edit 2/2.
Direction of the originals and arrangement of combined images.
Open to Left (K
K) originals
1 2
Setting originals (Originals set in the

document feeder)
Originals read from left to right
1 2
3 4
2
3
5 6 7 8
2
1
Combine5
1 2 3 4
8
GCSHUY1E
Originals read from top to bottom
Open to Right (L
L) originals
4
3
4 3
2 1
1
3
5
7
2
4
6
8
GCSHUY2E
88
1
4
Combine6
Combine

Side
Copies four 1-sided originals together
to one side of a sheet.
1
2
3
B Press the [1 Sided] key for the orig-
1 2
3 4
inal, then press the [Combine 1

Side] key for the copy.
C Press
the [2 Originals] key, then

press the [OK] key.
B Press the [1 Sided] key for the original, then press the [Combine 1
D Select the paper.

{Start}
} key.
89
Copying
C Press

press the [OK] key.

Side
Copies eight 1-sided originals together to one side of a sheet.
1
1 2 3 4
D Select the paper.
5 6 7 8
7
8

{Start}
} key.
90
Combine
C Press

press the [OK] key.

Side
Copies four 1-sided originals to the
two-page spread on both sides of a
sheet.
2
1
2
D Select the paper.
4
4

{Start}
} key.
91
Copying
C Press

press the [OK] key.

Side
1
2
D Check the orientation.
1 2
5 6
3 4
7 8
GCSHVYAE
1. Front
2. Back

Note

F Select the paper.
G Set your originals, then press the
{Start}
} key.
92
Combine
C Press

press the [OK] key.
1 Sided 16 Pages Combine

2 Side
Copies sixteen 1-sided originals together to both sides of a sheet.
1 2 3 4
5 6 7 8
1
15
16
9 10 11 12
13 14 15 16
2
GCSHVY5E
1. Front
2. Back

Note

F Select the paper.
{Start}
} key.
93
Copying
C Press

press the [OK] key.

Side
Copies one 2-sided original to one
side of a sheet.
2
1
Note
to Bottom]. See P.82 Specifying Orientation of Bound Originals.

F Select the paper.
{Start}
} key.
94
Combine
C Press the [2 Pages] key, then press

the [OK] key.

Side
Copies two 2-sided originals to one
side of a sheet.
2
1
3
2
4
1 2
3 4
Note

F Select the paper.
{Start}
} key.
95
Copying

the [OK] key.

Side
Copies four 2-sided originals to one
side of a sheet.
2
1
3
1 2 3 4
5
2
7
4
5 6 7 8
6
8
Note

F Select the paper.
{Start}
} key.
96
B Press the [2 Pages] key for the original, then press the [Combine 1
Combine

the [OK] key.

Side
Copies two 2-sided originals together
to both sides of a sheet.
2
1
3
2
4
Note

F Select the paper.
{Start}
} key.
97
Copying

the [OK] key.

Side
Copies four 2-sided originals together
to both sides of a sheet.
2
1
3
5
2
7
4
6
8
1 2
5 6
3 4
7 8
GCSHVY2E
1. Front
2. Back

Note
E Press the [OK] key

F Select the paper.
{Start}
} key.
98
Combine

the [OK] key.
2 Sided 16 Pages Combine

2 Side
1 2 3 4
5 6 7 8
2
4
1
13
15
14
16
9 10 11 12
13 14 15 16
2
GCSHVY6E
1. Front
2. Back

Note

F Select the paper.
{Start}
} key.
99
Copying

the [OK] key.
2
Note

F Select the paper.
{Start}
} key.
100
Series/Book
Series/Book
Series copies are made by separately
copying the front and back of a 2-sided original or the two facing pages of
a spread original onto two sheets of
paper. A book is made by copying
two or more originals in page order.
The following types of Series and
Book modes can be used:
Series Copies
Book 1 Sided
Copies the two facing pages of a
spread original to make two 1sided copies.
Book 2 Sided
Copies a spread two-page original onto both sides of a sheet.
Front & Back 2 Sided
Copies each two-page spread
original as it is onto both sides
of a sheet.
Booklet
1 Sided Booklet
Make copies in page order for a
folded booklet.
2 Sided Booklet
Copies a 2-sided original in
page order for a folded booklet.
1 Sided Magazine
Copies two or more originals to
make copies in page order (as
w h e n t h e y a r e f o ld e d a n d
stacked).
2 Sided Magazine
Copies 2-sided originals to
make copies in page order (as
w h e n t h e y a r e f o ld e d a n d
stacked).
Series Copies
Book 1 Sided
You can make one-sided copies from

two facing pages of a bound original
(book).
Limitation
You cannot use the Book 1 Sided
function from the document feeder.
Note
See the following table when you
select original and copy paper sizes with 100% ratio:
Metric version
Original
Copy paper
A3L
A4K 2 sheets
B4L
B5K 2 sheets
A4L
A5K 2 sheets
Inch version
Original
Copy paper
11" 17"L
81/2" 11"K 2
sheets
81/2" 11"L
51/2" 81/2"K 2
sheets
101
Copying
F Make sure that the [Auto Paper Select] key is selected.
Note
If the [Auto Paper Select] key is
not selected, press the [Auto Paper Select] key.
{Start}
} key.
B Press the [Series/Book] key.
Book 2 Sided
Copies a two-page spread original
onto both sides of a sheet.
Limitation
You cannot use the Book 2 Sided
function from the document feeder.
C Make sure that the [Series] key is
selected.
1 Sided] key, then

D Press the [Book
press the [OK] key.
Note
Metric version
Original
Copy paper
A3L
A4 (2-sided)
B4L
B5 (2-sided)
A4L
A5 (2-sided)
Inch version

102
Original
Copy paper
11" 17"L
81/2" 11" (2-sided)
81/2" 11"L
51/2" 81/2" (2-sided)
Series/Book

{Start}
} key.
Front & Back 2 Sided

Copies each two-page spread original
as it is onto both sides of a sheet.

selected.
Limitation
You cannot use the Front & Back
2 Sided function from the document feeder.
Note
Metric version
2 Sided] key, then

D Press the [Book
press the [OK] key.
Original
Copy paper
A3L
A4 (2-sided)
B4L
B5 (2-sided)
A4L
A5 (2-sided)
Inch version
Original
Copy paper
11" 17"L
81/2" 11" (2-sided)
81/2" 11"L
51/2" 81/2" (2-sided)

F Select the paper.
103
Copying

{Start}
} key.
Note
Press the {#} key after all originals are scanned.
Copying Book Originals

selected.
D Press the [Front & Back 2 Sided]

key, then press the [OK] key.

F Select the paper.
104
Limitation
with this function.
Note
The machine sets the reproduction
ratio automatically to meet the paper size and copies the originals together onto the paper.
The machine uses ratios in the
range of 25 to 400%.
available minimum ratio, it will be
adjusted to the minimum ratio.
of the image might not be copied.
Even if the direction of originals is
different from that of the copy paper, the machine will automatically rotate the image by 90 to make
copies properly.
Series/Book
1 Sided Booklet
Make copies in page order for a folded booklet as shown in the following
illustrations:
Open to Left
1
2
3
4
1
GCBOOK0E

If the number of originals scanned
is less than a multiple of 4, the last
page is copied blank.
You can have a 3mm, 0.1" bounding margin around all four edges
of the original left blank (erased).
Erase Original Shadow in
Combine in P.222 Edit 1/2.
How to fold copies to make a

booklet
Open to Right
1
1
2
3
3
4
4
GCBOOK2E
GCBOOK1E
Important
Before selecting this function, select Open to left or Open to
right. with the User Tools.
Orientation: Booklet, Margine in
P.224 Edit 2/2.
1. Open to Left
2. Open to Right
Note
Four originals are copied onto each
sheet of copy paper.
In this mode, the machine sets the
reproduction ratio automatically
to meet the paper size and copies
the originals together onto the paper.
to 400%.
105
Copying
2 Sided Booklet
Make 2 sided originals to copies in
page order for a folded booklet as
shown in the following illustrations:
Open to Left
2
C Press the [Book] key.
Open to Right
D Press the [1 Sided Booklet] key,

then press the [OK] key.

F Select the paper.
{Start}
} key.
Note
When placing one original on
the exposure glass or in the document feeder in Batch mode,
press the {#} key after all originals are scanned.
106
Important
Two originals of 2 sided are copied
onto each sheet of copy paper.
to 400%.
Series/Book

You can have a 3mm, 0.1" bounding margin around all four edges
of the original left blank (erased).
Erase Original Shadow in
2
How to fold copies to make a

booklet
2
3
D Press the [2 Sided Booklet] key,
GCBOOK2E
1. Open to Left
2. Open to Right

F Select the paper.
{Start}
} key.
Note
107
Copying
1 Sided Magazine
Copies two or more originals to make
copies in page order when they are
folded and stacked.
Open to Left
1
2
7
8
7
1
5
3

You can have a 3mm bounding
margin around all four edges of
the original left blank (erased).
Erase Original Shadow in Combine in P.222 Edit 1/2.
The copying may take some time
after scanning originals.
GCBOOK3E
How to fold and unfold copies to

make a magazine
Open to Right
1
Open to Left
2
8
4
6
8
7
1 3
GCBOOK4E
Important
Orientation: Booklet, Magazine
in P.224 Edit 2/2.
Note
to 400%.
108
GCBOOK5E
Open to Right
3 1
GCBOOK6E
Series/Book

{Start}
} key.
Note
2 Sided Magazine
Copies two or more originals of 2 sided to make copies in page order when
they are folded and stacked.
Open to Left
Open to Right
D Press the [1 Sided Magazine] key,


F Select the paper.
109
Copying
Important
in P.224 Edit 2/2.
Note
Two originals of 2 sided are copied
onto each sheet of copy paper.
to 400%.
You can have a 3mm bounding
margin around all four edges of
the original left blank (erased).
Erase Original Shadow in Combine in P.222 Edit 1/2.
The copying may take some time
after scanning originals.
110
How to fold and unfold copies to

make a magazine
Open to Left
1 3
GCBOOK5E
Open to Right
3 1
GCBOOK6E
Series/Book
2
D Press the [2 Sided Magazine] key,


F Select the paper.
{Start}
} key.
Note
111
Copying
Edit Image
Image Repeat
The original image is copied repeatedly.
Part of a repeated image might not

be copied depending on copy paper size, copy paper direction or
reproduction ratio.
You can insert separation lines between repeated images. Repeat
Separation Line in P.224 Edit 2/2.
A Select the size of the copy paper

and the reproduction ratio.
B Press the [Edit/Stamp] key.

Note
The number of repeated images
depends on the original size, copy
paper size, and reproduction ratio.
See the following table:
Original: A5K
K/Copy paper: A4K
K
or Original: A5L
L/Copy paper A4L
L
4 repeats (71%)
16 repeats (35%)
Repeat2
Repeat1
Original: A5K
K/Copy paper: A4L
L
or Original: A5L
L/Copy paper A4K
K
2 repeats
(100%)
Repeat3
C Press the [Edit Image] key.
8 repeats
(50%)
Repeat4
D Press the [Image Repeat] key.
32 repeats
(25%)
Repeat5

112
Edit Image

G Set your original, then press the
{Start}
} key.

Metric version
Double Copies
Original Size and

Direction
Copy Paper Size

and Direction
One original image is copied twice on

one copy as shown in the illustration.
A5L
A4K
B6L
B5K
A4K
A3L
A5K
A4L
B6K
B5L
Inch version
Original Size and
Direction
Copy Paper Size

and Direction
51/2" 81/2"L
81/2" 11"K
51/2" 81/2"K
81/2" 11"L
8 /2" 11"K
11" 17"L
Limitation
The following originals cannot be
detected properly on the exposure
glass. Be sure to select the copy paper manually or set the originals in
the document feeder.
Metric
version
A5L, B6KL
Inch
version
51/2" 81/2"L

with this function.
A Press the [Edit/Stamp] key.
B Press the [Edit Image] key.
Note
You can insert separation lines between repeated images. Double Copies Separation Line in
P.224 Edit 2/2.
113
Copying
C Press the [Double Copies] key.
Note
The original sizes and directions
for centring are listed below.
Metric version
Original
placed on:
Original size and

direction
Exposure glass A3L, B4L, A4KL,

B5KL

F Select the paper.
{Start}
} key.
Centering
You can make copies by moving the
image to the centre of the copy paper.
Document
feeder
A3L, B4L, A4KL,

B5KL, A5KL,
B6KL, 11" 17"L
Inch version
Original
placed on:
Original size and

direction
Exposure glass 11" 17"L, 81/2"

14"L, 81/2" 11"KL
Document
feeder
A4KL, 11" 17"L,

11" 15"L, 81/2"
14"L, 81/2" 11"K,
51/2" 81/2"KL
A Select the paper.

B Press the [Edit/Stamp] key.
Limitation
with this function.
If the direction of originals is different from that of the copy paper,
the machine will not rotate the image by 90(rotated copy).
If the original size cannot be measured, the centring function will
not work.
114
C Press the [Edit Image] key.
Edit Image
D Press the [Centering] key.
B Press the [Edit Image] key.
2
C Press the [Positive/Negative] key.
{Start}
} key.
Positive/Negative
If your original is black and white,
copy images are inverted.
R R

F Select the paper.
{Start}
} key.
GCHATN1E
115
Copying
Erase
This function erases the centre and/
or all four sides of the original image.
This is useful for avoiding shadows
on the copy image caused by the
bound originals, such as books.
This function can be used in three
ways:
Border
This mode erases the edge margin
of the original image.
Center
This mode erases the centre margin of the original image.
Center/Border
This mode erases both the centre
and edge margins of the original
image.
Note
You can change the width of the
erased margin as follows:
Metric
version
Inch
version
0.2" 3.9" (in 0.1" steps)
The default setting of the erased

margin is as follows. You can
change this settings with the User
Tools. Erase Border Width
and Erase Center Width in P.222
Edit 1/2.
Metric
version
10mm
Inch
version
0.4"
Metric version
Paper Size and Orientation
Exposure glass A3L, B4L, A4KL,

B5KL
Document
feeder
A3L, B4L, A4KL,

B5KL, A5KL,
B6KL, 11" 17"L
Inch version
Paper Size and Orientation
Exposure glass 11" 17"L, 81/2"

14"L, 81/2" 11"KL
A4KL, 11" 17"L,
81/2" 14"L, 81/2"
11"KL, 51/2" 81/
2"KL
Document
feeder
The relationship between the original orientation and the erased part
is as follows:
L original
K original
The width of the erased margin

varies depending on the reproduction ratio.
116
If the size of the original is different from sizes listed in the following chart, the erased margin might
be shifted.
1: Erased part
2: 299mm
Erase
Border Erase
C Press the [Border] key.
This function erases the edge margins. You can set the same margin
width for all four sides, or you can set
different margin widths for each side.
2
D Set the erase border width.
Selecting [Same Width]
A Press the [Same Width] key.
Note
If you want to erase the centre margin too, use the Centre/Border
function. P.119 Center/Border
Erase.

B Set an erase border width with
the [n
n ] and [o
o ] keys, followed by the [OK] key.
Note
press the [n] and [o] keys
and enter the new value.
B Press the [Erase] key.
Selecting [Diff. Width]

A Press the [Diff. Width] key.
117
Copying
B Press the key for the border

you wish to change and set an
erase border width with the
[n
n] and [o
o] keys.
Note

C Press the [Center] key.
{Start}
} key.
Center Erase
This function erases the centre margin.
D Set
the erase centre width with

the [n
n] and [o
o] keys. Then press
the [OK] key.
Note
If you want to erase the border
margin too, use the Center/Border
function. P.119 Center/Border
Erase.
Note
press the [n] and [o] keys and
enter the new value.

{Start}
} key.
118
Erase
Center/Border Erase
C Press the [Center/Border] key.
This mode erases both the centre and

edge margins. You can set the same
margin width for all four sides and
centre, or you can set different margin
widths for each.
2
D Set the erase margin width.
Selecting [Same Width]
A Press the [Center] key, then set
the erase centre width with the
[n
n] and [o
o] keys.
Note
B Press the [Same Width] key.

C Press the [Border] key, then set
the erase border width with the
[n
n] and [o
o] keys.
Note
119
Copying
Selecting [Diff. Width]

A Press the [Diff. Width] key.
2
B Press the key for the part you
wish to change and set an erase
margin width with the [n
n] and
[o
o] keys.
Note

{Start}
} key.
120
Margin Adjustment
Margin Adjustment
You can shift the image left, right, top
or bottom to make a binding margin.
Limitation
If you set the margin too wide, areas you do not want to delete
might be erased.
Note
You can change the width of the
binding margin as follows:
Metric
version
Inch
version
0" 1.2" (in 0.1" steps)
The margin width default is as follows. You can change this default
setting with the User Tools.
Front Margin: Left/Right, Back
Margin: Left/Right, Front Margin: Top/Bottom, Back Margin:
Top/Bottom in P.222 Edit 1/2.
Metric
version
Front: 5mm Left
Inch
version
Front: 0.2" Left
When making two-sided copies

from one-sided originals, you can
set a binding margin for back pages. 1 sided 2 sided Auto
Margin: T to T, 1 sided 2 sided
Auto Margin: T to B in P.222 Edit
1
/2.
When making copies in Combine
mode, the binding margins are
made on the copies after the combining is finished.
When 2 Sided 1 Sided is selected, set the binding margins for
front and back pages of the original.
B Press the [Margin Adjustment] key.
Back: 5mm Right

Back: 0.2" Right
121
Copying
C Set a binding margin for a front

page. Press the [
] and [
] keys
when setting the left and right
margins, and the [
] and [
] keys
when setting the top and bottom
margins.
Note
press the [
], [
], [
], [
] keys
D Set
a binding margin for back

pages. Press the [
] and [
] keys
when setting the left and right
margins, and the [
] and [
] keys
when setting the top and bottom
margins.
Note
You can specify the back margin
only when the Duplex or the
Two Sided copy with Combine
is selected.
If you do not need to specify the
back margin, press the [OK] key
and go to step E.

{Start}
} key.
122
Stamp
Stamp
This function prints stamp on the
copies. Stamp modes are as follows:
This function prints numbers on
the background of copies.
Preset Stamp
This function prints preset messages on copies.
User Stamp
This function prints custom messages on copies.
Note
You can change the size of the
numbers with the User Tools.
Size in P.227 Background Numbering.
You can change the density of the
numbers with the User Tools.
Density in P.227 Background
Numbering.
The numbers appear to overlap the
copied image in some cases.
Date Stamp
This function prints the date on
copies.
Page Numbering
This function prints page numbers
on copies.
B Press the [Stamp] key.
32 MB of memory is required to use

t his function (If the machine is
equipped with the Printer unit, 32MB
memory is not required.).
Use this function to have numbers
printed on the background of copies.
This function can help you to keep
track of confidential documents.
GCSTMP2E
123
Copying
C Press
the [Background Numbering]
key.
Preset Stamp
this funct ion (If t he mach ine is
equipped with the Printer unit, 32 MB
2
D Enter the number to start counting from with the number keys.
Then press the [OK] key.
Note
The number can be set from 1 to
999.
key and enter the new number.

{Start}
} key.
124
Limitation
with this function.
One message can be stamped at a
time.
Note
One of the following eight messages can be stamped on copies with a
frame around it: COPY, URGENT, PRIORITY, For Your
Info., Preliminaray, For internal use, CONFIDENTIAL,
DRAFT.
You can change the print page
with the User Tools.
You can change the size and density of the stamp with the User
Tools.
Depending on the paper size, if
you change the stamp size, parts of
the stamp might not be printed.
Stamp
You can choose the default settings

for the position, size and density of
the stamp with the User Tools.
Stamp Position, Stamp Format in P.227 Preset Stamp 1/4-4/4.
for the print page with the User
Tools. Stamp Format in P.227
Preset Stamp 1/4-4/4.
You can change the stamp language with the User Tools.
Stamp Language in P.227 Preset
Stamp 1/4-4/4.
The relationship between the direction in which you set the original and stamp orientation/
position is as follows:
2
C Press the [Preset Stamp] key.
D Select the desired message.

GCSTMP5E
You can change the stamp position

to top, bottom, left and right each
way in 1mm, 0.1" steps. Stamp
position in P.227 Preset Stamp 1/44
/4.
E Press
the [All Pages] or [1st Page

only] key to select the print page.
125
Copying
F Change the stamp position, size

or density.
If you do not wish to change, go to
step G.
To change the stamp position,

size or density
A Press the [Change] key.

B Select the desired position,
size and density.
G After you specified all the desired

settings, press the [OK] key.
H Press the [Cancel] key.
User Stamp
this funct ion (If t he mach ine is
equipped with the Printer unit, 32 MB
Up to four messages which you use
frequently can be stored in the machine's memory and stamped on copies.
Preparation
Before using this function, you
have to store your messages with
the User Tools. P.128 Program/
Delete User Stamp.
Limitation
with this function.
One message can be stamped at a
time.
Note
To cancel the settings, press the
[Cancel] key.
I Set your originals, then press the

{Start}
} key.
126
Note
You can change the print page
with the User Tools.
Stamp
The relationship between the direction in which you set the original and stamp Orientation/
Position is as follows:
2
GCSTMP6E

position in P.229 User Stamp 1/22
/2.
for the print page and the stamp
position with the User Tools.
Stamp condition and Stamp
positionin P.229 User Stamp 1/2-2/
2.
You can combine this function
with only one Preset Stamp.
C Press the [User Stamp] key.
D Select the stamp you require.
127
Copying
E Press

only] key to select the print page.
Program/Delete User Stamp
To change the stamp position

B Select the desired position.
Copy mode.
B Press the {User Tools/Counter}} key.
C Press
the [Copier/Document Server]
key.
F After you specified all the desired

Note
[Cancel] key.
H Set your originals, then press the

{Start}
} key.
128
D Press the [Stamp] key.
E Press the [User Stamp] key.
Stamp
F Press
the [Program/Delete Stamp]
key.
Note
You can register up to 10
characters.
For details on entering characters, refer to "Entering Text
Characters" in the System
Settings manual.
E Enter the horizontal size of the
stamp with the number keys,
To program the User Stamp

A Press the [Program] key.
B Press the stamp number (1 4)

you want to program.
Note
Stamp numbers with m already have settings in them.
If the stamp number is already being used, the machine will ask you if you
wish to overwrite it Press
the [Yes] or [No] key.
C Enter the user stamp name
with the letter keys on the display panel.
Note
You can enter sizes within 10
432mm, 1.0" 17.0" horizontal, and 10 297mm, 1.0"
11.7" vertical. However, if
the value exceeds the maximum value of the area
(5,000mm2, 7.75 inch2), it is
corrected within the range of
the area automatically.
F Press the [Vertical] key, and enter the vertical size in the same
way as step E.
G Set the user stamp on the exposure glass, and then press the
[Start Scanning] key.
Note
The machine scans the original
three times. Do not lift the document feeder until the main
menu of the Copy/Document
Server features appears.
129
Copying
If you press the [Exit] key, the

main menu of the Copy/Document Server features appears
with nothing programmed.
H Press the [Exit] key.
Date Stamp
To delete the User Stamp
Important
You cannot restore a deleted
stamp.
A Press the [Delete] key.
Limitation
with this function.
B Press the stamp number (1 4)

you want to delete.
Note
Only programs with m contain a user stamp.
C Press the [Delete] key.
Note
To cancel the deletion, press
the [Stop] key.
D Press the [Exit] key.
E Press the [Exit] key.
G Press the [Exit] key.

The initial display appears.
130
Note
You can select the following styles:
MM/DD/YYYY
MM.DD.YYYY
DD/MM/YYYY
DD.MM.YYYY
YYYY.MM.DD
DD.JUN.YYYY
You can change the Date Stamp
settings with the User Tools.
P.230 Date Stamp.
The font and size of the Date
Stamp can be changed with the
User Tools. Font and Size in
P.230 Date Stamp.
You can select whether the Date
Stamp is printed negative if it
overlaps black parts of an image.
Superimpose in P.230 Date
Stamp.
For how to set the date, see Set
Date in the System Settings manual.
for the stamp position with the
User Tools. Stamp Position in
P.230 Date Stamp.
Stamp
The relationship between the direction in which you set the original
and the stamp position is as follows:
2
GCSTMP7E

Position in P.230 Date Stamp.
If you combine this function with
the Combine, Magazine or Booklet
function, the page is stamped as
follows.
Combined with the Combine
function
C Press the [Date Stamp] key.
D Press

only] to select the print page.
To change the style of date

A Press the [Change Format] key.
Combined with the Magazine
or Booklet function
131
Copying
B Select the format of date.
2
To change the stamp position

B Select the desired position of

the Date Stamp.

{Start}
} key.
Page Numbering
Use this function to print page numbers on your copies. There are six
types of Page Numbering (n is the total number of pages in your original):
P1,P2,Pn
1/n,2/n,...n/n
-1-,-2-,...-n P.1,P.2,...P.n
1, 2n
1-1,1-2,..1-n
Limitation
with this function.
E After you specified all the desired

Note
[Cancel] key.
132
Note
You can change the Page Numbering settings with the User Tools.
P.231 Page Numbering 1/2-2/2.
The font and size of Page Numbering can be changed with the User
Tools. Font and Size in
You can select whether the Page
Numbering is printed negative if it
overlaps black parts of image.
Superimpose in P.231 Page
Numbering 1/2-2/2.
Stamp

for the stamp position with the
User Tools. Stamp Position in
for the stamp format with the User
Tools. Stamp Format in P.231
Page Numbering 1/2-2/2.
The relationship between the direction in which you set the original and th e Page Num bering
orientation/position is as follows:
2
GCSTMPBE
1. Front
2. Back
the Duplex (Top to Top) function,
you can change the setting to
stamp on the back side in the same
position as the front side. Duplex Back Page Stamping Position
in P.231 Page Numbering 1/2-2/2.
If you use this function with the
Combine, Magazine, or Booklet
function, the page is stamped as
follows.
Page Numbering per original

Combined with 1 Sided/2
Sided in the Combine function
GCSTMP8E

Position in P.231 Page Numbering
1 2
/2- /2.
the Duplex (Top to Top) function
and select the P1, P2 or 1/n, 2/
n style, the page numbers on the
back of the copy paper are printed
as follows.
Combined with the Magazine or Booklet function
133
Copying
Page Numbering per copy

Combined with 1 Sided/2 Sided in the Combine function
C Press the [Page Numbering] key.
2
Page Numbering In Combine
in P.231 Page Numbering 1/2-2/2.
If you use the 1-1, 1-2 style, you
can print page numbers on the slip
sheets in Designate or Chapters
mode. Stamp on Designated
Slip Sheet in P.231 Page Numbering 1/2-2/2.
D Select the format.

E To
change the stamp position,

press the [Change] key.
If you do not wish to change the
stamp position, go to step G.
F Select
the stamp position, then

press the [OK] key.
G To change the first printing page
a n d s t ar t n u m b e r , p r es s t h e
[Change] key.
Note
The display differs depending
on the selected style.
If you do not wish to change, press
the [OK] key and set your originals, then press the {Start} key.
134
Stamp
H Specify the page and number.

If you selected (P1,P2, -1-,-2, P.1, P.2, 1, 2, )
E Press the [Last Number] key,

then enter the page number at
which to stop numbering with
the number keys.
A Press the [First Printing Page]

key, then enter the original
sheet number from which to
start numbering with the number keys.
Note
If you wish to print onto the
last page, press the [to the
end] key and go to step J.
F Press the {#}
} key.
Note
{Clear/Stop} key and enter a
new number.
B Press the {#}
} key.
C Press the [Numbering from/to]
key, then enter the number
from which to start numbering
D Press the {#}

} key.
If you selected (1/5,2/5)

Note
new number.
B Press the {#}
} key.
135
Copying
C Press the [Numbering from/to]

key, then enter the page number from which to start numbering with the number keys.
If you selected (1-1, 1-2,)

D Press the {#}

} key.
E Press the [Last Number] key,
then enter the page number at
which to stop numbering with
the number keys.
Note
new number.
B Press the {#}
} key.
C Press the [First Chapter No.] key,
then enter the chapter number
from which to start numbering
Note
If you wish to print onto the
last page, press [to the end]
key and go to step J.
F Press the {#}
} key.
G Press the [Total Pages] key, then
enter the total number of original pages with the number keys.
D Press the {#}

} key.
H Press the {#}

} key.
136
Stamp
E Press the [Numbering from/to]

key, then enter the page number from which to start numbering with the number keys.
F Press the {#}

} key.

Note
To change the settings after
pressing the [OK] key, press the
[Change] key and enter the new
value.
J Press the [OK] key.
Note
[Cancel] key.
K Set your originals, then press the

{Start}
} key.
137
Copying
Cover/Slip Sheet
Using this function, you can add or
insert cover or paper designate.
There are four types in this function:
Front Cover
The first page of your originals is
copied on a specific paper sheet for
covers.
Front Cover
The first page of your originals is copied on specific paper sheet for covers,
or a cover sheet is inserted before the
first copy.
Copy
Front/Back Cover
The first and last pages of your
originals are copied on specific paper sheets for covers.
Paper Designate
Use this function to have certain
pages of your original copied onto
slip sheets.
Blank
Chapter
If you specify the first page of each
chapter with this function, those
pages will always appear on the
front of copies when using 1 sided
2 sided mode.
Preparation
Before selecting this function, set
the tray for front cover paper and
slip sheet paper. Cover, Slip
Sheet 1 and Slip Sheet 2 in the
The cover or slip sheets should be

identical in size and direction with
the copy paper.
Limitation
You cannot set the copy paper in
the bypass tray. Only set the cover
or slip sheets in the bypass tray.
Note
If Blank mode is selected, the cover
will not be counted as a copy.
138
Note
You can specify whether to make a
copy on a sheet for covers. If you
select [Copy], the first page will be
copied on the cover sheet. If you
select [Blank], a cover sheet will just
be inserted before the first copy.
When choosing [Copy], select
whether the front and back covers
are copied single-sided (1 Sided
Only) or double-sided (Duplex
Copy). Cover in the System
Settings manual.
Cover/Slip Sheet
In Cover of the User Tools (System Settings), if you selected

Mode Selected for Tray Display setting, the machine refers to
the settings in Cover about
Copy). If you selected Display
Always for Tray Display, the
machine refers to the settings in
Special Paper Indication about
Copy) or double-sided (Duplex
Copy). Special Paper Indication and Cover in the System
Settings manual.
When you use this function with
Combine mode, you can specify
whether to combine the front cover
or not. Front Cover Copy in
A Press the [Cover/Slip Sheet] key.
C Select [Copy] or [Blank] for a cover
sheet, and then press the [OK] key.
2
D Select the paper tray containing
the non-cover sheet paper.
E Set
your originals in the document feeder, then press the {Start}

}
key.
B Press the [Front Cover] key.
139
Copying
Front/Back Covers
The first and last pages of your originals are copied on specific paper
sheets for covers.
Copy
4
1
3
GCCOVE0E
Blank
In Cover of the User Tools (System Settings), if you selected

Mode Selected for Tray Display setting, the machine refers to
the settings in Cover about
Copy). If you selected Display
Always for Tray Display, the
machine refers to the settings in
Special Paper Indication about
Copy) or double-sided (Duplex
Copy). Special Paper Indication and Cover in the System
Settings manual.

1
3
1
Note
You can specify whether to make a
copy on a cover sheet. If you select
[Copy], the first and last pages will
be copied on the cover sheets. If
you select [Blank], a cover sheet
will just be inserted before the first
copy and another sheet after the
last copy.
When choosing [Copy], select
Copy). Cover in the System
Settings manual.
140
B Press the [Front/Back Cover] key.
Cover/Slip Sheet
C Select [Copy] or [Blank] for the cov-
er sheets, and then press the [OK]

key.
Designate
Use this function to have certain pages of your original copied onto slip
sheets.
2
D Select
the paper tray containing

the non-cover sheet paper.
Preparation
Before using this function, set the
special paper tray for slip sheets.
Slip Sheet 1, Slip Sheet 2 in
E Set
your originals in the document feeder, then press the {Start}

}
key.
Limitation
You cannot use this function with
Slip Sheet mode.
Note
You can specify the pages up to 20.
When Combine mode (1 Sided
2 Sided) has been selected, the
page numbers you designate will
always be copied onto the front of
copies in the same way as Chapters
mode.
141
Copying
B Press the [Desig./Chapter] key.
F To specify another page location,

repeat steps C to E.
Note
To select chapters 11 to 20, press
the [T
T11
20] key.
G When you wish to finish specify-
ing page location, press the [OK]

key.
C Press the key to select the chapter

number.
This display shows example settings.
D Enter
the page number of the

original's location you want to
copy onto a slip sheet with the
number keys. Then, press the {#}
}
key.
Note
enter the new number in the
same way as steps C to G.
H Select the paper tray containing

the non-slip sheet paper.
Note
E Select
sheets.
142
the paper tray for slip
I Set your originals, then press the

{Start}
} key.
Cover/Slip Sheet
B Press the [Desig./Chapter] key.
Chapter
The page locations you specify with
this function will appear on the front
of copy sheets.
4 6
4
1 3
C Press the [Chapter] key.
5
2
GC SHOW OJ
Preparation
Before selecting this function,
press the [Dup./Combine/Series] key
and select Duplex (1 Sided 2
Sided) mode or Combine mode.
Limitation
Slip Sheet mode.
D Enter the page location of the first
page of the first chapter with the

number keys. Then, press the {#}
}
key.
Note
You can specify the pages up to 20.
w h e n y o u us e t h e D u p l e x ( 1
Sided2 Sided) or Combine function.
This function can be combined
with the Designate function.
Note
E To specify another page location,

repeat steps C to E.
Note
To select chapters 11 to 20, press
the [T
T11-20] key.
143
Copying
F When
you finish specifying the

page location, press the [OK] key.
2
This display shows example settings.
Note
enter the new number in the
same way as in steps C to E.

{Start}
} key.
144
Slip Sheets
Slip Sheets
Every time the original's page changes, a slip sheet is inserted. This function can be used to insert a slip sheet
automatically between each OHP
transparency copied or used as a
stack function. You can also copy
onto the inserted slip sheets.
When using OHP transparencies

set on the bypass tray
Blank
2
1
1
2
3
2
3
Preparation
Before selecting this function,
specify the paper tray for slip
sheets. Slip Sheet 1, Slip
Sheet 2 in the System Settings
manual.
Note
Press the {#} key and set the Special Paper setting to [OHP Sheet].
P.63 When Copying onto OHP
Transparencies or Thick Paper.
Limitation
Chapters and Paper Designate
modes.
Note
Set the slip sheets in the same orientation as originals.
You can specify whether to make
copies onto the inserted slip sheets
or not.
If you do not copy onto slip sheets,
they are excluded from the number of copies counted.
B Press the [Slip sheet] key.
145
Copying
C Select [Copy] or [Blank], followed

by the [OK] key.
2
D Select
the paper tray containing

the non-slip sheet paper.
When using OHP transparencies,
open the bypass tray.

{Start}
} key.
146
Combination Chart
Combination Chart
The combination chart given below shows which modes can be used together.
When you read the chart, see the following table:
means that these modes can be used together.
means that these modes cannot be used together. The mode after
you select will be the mode you're working in.
means that these modes cannot be used together. The mode before
you select will be the mode you're working in.
The following shows the combinations of functions.
147
Copying
148
3. Document Server
Overview
The Document Server enables you to save documents in the machine memory
and then edit and print them as you want.
There are three ways to save documents.
Scanning from the document feeder
Scanning from the exposure glass
Data sent from a computer.
Copy
Facsimile
Transmission
Printing
(Except Scanner)
Storing
facsimile
document
sending
Scanner
Document data for PC

Printer
149
Document Server
Process
A Prepare the documents you want to save by copying, fax transmitting, scanning, and PC data.
B Save the documents.

The documents are saved in the machine memory.
C Print the documents, send fax, and transfer the documents and the data to
PC.
You can print saved documents with any settings you desire at any time.
Scanned documents data can be transfered to PC.
You can resend saved documents you desire at any time.
Important
Do not turn off the main power switch when the Operation Switch is on or
lit. If you turn it off during an operation, memory or hard disk might be
damaged.
Avoid any strong shocking to the machine, the hard disk might be
dameged, and stored files will be deleted. For precautionaly reasons, files
should be copied to another local computer.
Limitation
Data for documents in the Document Server function list that were
scanned in using the Scan function are not displayed.
The stored documents by scanning are not available to print.
You can facsimile sending but the documents must be stored in facsimile
feauture. This function must be operated by facsimile feauture.
Optional Desk Top Binder V2 Professional or Desk Top Binder V2 Lite are
required for transfering data to your computer.
150
Features and Benefits

On Demand Printing
Use to print any saved document as required.
Your current situation might be

When you need to print multiple sets of documents 2-sided and stapled together, you normally print the originals, make duplex copies and then staple them together manually.
With the Document Server

If you save your document in the Document Server, you can print it out at any
time with the necessary print settings, such as duplex and stapling. Your documents will not be confused with those of others in the exit tray.
You can store fax documents, document data so that you can print them
whenever necessary.
151
Document Server
Note
Stapling and punching require the installation of the optional finisher.
You can use a password to prevent others from printing saved documents.
File Merge Printing

You can combine multiple scanned documents to print them in one set.
Your current situation might be

You want to combine several originals that are different in density, size, and
paper weight, e.g.
You can merge documents that were created with different applications or
that were created separately on different computers.
You can merge documents that were sent from a computer with paper originals that have been scanned.
Scrapped and pasted originals
Photo originals
One sided originals
Two sided originals
152

Set the print order to print documents together.
Merge and print fax documents, document data sent, and originals that have
been scanned.
Merge documents created with different applications or created on different
computers.
Store electronic originals created by a computer on the network, and originals
that have been scanned using the document feeder.
Note
You can check the print result by printing a sample set before making a
large print run by pressing the {Sample Copy} key. If you are not satisfied
with the print result of some pages of the set, you have only to scan that
part again.
153
Document Server
Facsimile Resend
You can print or resend a sent document received by fax. This is useful when
you want to send a large document that needs to be sent several times, since you
do not have to scan the document each time.
You current situation might be...

When you need to retransmit multiples sets of the same documents.
You can send the original data stored in memory whenever necessary. You
can merge and send data stored from a previous fax with additional scanned
originals.
Operation from a Computer

If you install Desk Top Binder V2 Professional or Desk Top Binder V2 Lite on
your computer you can check the display of electronic data, select the finish settings and print it. You can also delete data stored in the Document Server. In addition, you can also export documents stored in the Document Server as a file on
your computer.
You can also perform tasks on data stored in the Document Server from your
computer, rather than from near the machine.
Note
You can operate from your computer as follows:
Search by File Name and User Name.
Indicate easily 1 st Page of your documents.
Indicate the documents infomation, change the file name and the password.
Delete the documents.
Copy the documents to your computer.
Print the documents.
Send the stored facsimile documents.
154
Optional Net work Interface board and 32 MB memory or Printer Scanner

unit are required for operating from your computer. Desk Top Binder V2 Professional or Desk Top Binder V2 Lite must be installed on your computer.
Reference
More detail information, refer to Desk Top Binder V2 Professional/Lite manuals.
155
Document Server
Scanning Originals
You can scan the originals you want
to save in the Document Server using
the control panel of the machine. The
originals can be set either on the exposure glass or into the document feeder.
The saved documents will automatically be named in the order of scanning as COPY0001, COPY0002.
Note
You can set the timer to delete the
documents stored in the Document Server with the User Tools.
Auto File Delete in P.233 Input/Output.
You can change the file names that
are assigned automatically.
You can use a password to prevent
others from printing saved documents.
Scanning in Document Server

mode
A Press the {Document Server}} key.
The Select Files to Print display

appears.
B Press the [Scan Original] key.
The Scan Original display appears.
156
Scanning Originals
C Enter a file name, user name, or

password if necessary.
Note
If you do not wish to register a
file name, go to step D.
If you do not register a file
name, it is stored automatically.
Note
If you want to enter non-registered name, press the [Nonregistered Name] key, then enter the new user name.
To set the file name

A Press the [File Name] key.
B Enter the new file name using
the letter keys on the display
panel.
3
To set the password
A Press the [Password] key.
B Enter the password using the
number keys (4 digits).
Reference
Characters" in the System
Settings manual.
To set the user name

A Press the [User Name] key.
B Enter the new user name using
the letter keys on the display
panel.
Note
new number.
C Press the [OK] or {#}
} key.
D Set
your originals either on the

exposure glass or into the document feeder.
Reference
For more information on the
types of originals that can be set
and how to set them, P.31
Setting Originals.
157
Document Server
E Make any desired settings.
Note
Press the [Scanning Finished] key
to cancel the file name, password, or print settings and return to the Select Files to Print
display.
To resume the paused scanning

job, press the [Resume] key in
the confirmation dialog box. To
delete the saved images and
cancel the job, press the [Cancel]
key.
When storing a password,
appears on the left side of the
file name.
G Press the [Scanning Finished] key.
Reference
For details, see the explanations
of each function in this manual.

The document is saved in the Document Server. The saved documents are displayed on the Select
Files to Print display.
Note
If you have set your originals in
the document feeder, the Select Files to Print display appears automatically after all
originals have been scanned.
If you have set your originals on
the exposure glass, press the
[Scanning Finished] key after all
originals have been scanned.
The Select Files to Print display appears.
To stop scanning, press the
{Clear/Stop} key.
158
To change the file name, user

name, or password
A Press the line of the document
whose file name, user name, or
password you want to change.
B If you select a document which

requires a password, the Input the Password window appears. Input the password
using the number keys, then
press the [OK] key.
Scanning Originals
C Press the [File Management] key.
Scanning in Copy mode
D Press the [Change User Name],

[Change File Name], or [Change
Password] key.
3
Copy display appears.
B Press the [Stored File] key.
E Enter the new file name, user

name, or password using the
letter keys or number keys.
C Enter a file name, user name, or

password if neccessary.
Reference
For details about settings,
Scanning in Document Server
mode step C.
159
Document Server
D Set your originals.

Reference
For more information on the
types of originals that can be set
and how to set them, P.31
Setting Originals.
E Make
the scanning settings for

the original.
Reference

Note
To stop scanning, press the
{Clear/Stop} key.
To resume the paused scanning
job, press the [Resume] key in
the confirmation dialog box. To
delete the saved images and
cancel the job, press the [Cancel]
key.
To check if the document has
been stored, press the {Document Server} key to display the
document selection screen.
160
Printing Saved Documents

You can print any of the documents
saved in the Document Server.
Follow these steps to select a document and print it out.

appears.
B Press
the line for the document

you want to print.
The selected line is highlighted.
Note
You can search the document
you desire by the file name or
the user name. P.164 To
Search by File Name.
You can sort the files in order of
[User Name], [File Name], or
[Date]. Press the key you want to
sort by.
If the desired file name is not
shown, see the next or previous
screen using the [T
T Next] and [U
U
Prev.] keys.
If you cannot choose the desired

document by its name, you can
print the first page to check the
contents. Press the line for the
desired document, and press
the [Print 1st Page] key followed
by the {Start} key.
Press the selected line again to
cancel the print job.
If you select a document which
requires a password, the Input
the Password window appears. Enter your password using the number keys, then press
the [OK] key. To delete the value
entered, press the [Clear] or
{Clear/Stop} key. To cancel a selected document, press the [Cancel] key.
C To
print more than one document, repeat step B to select the

desired documents in the order
you want to print them out.
The selected order is shown in the
priority column next to the selected document(s).
Note
To change the print order, press
the highlighted lines to return
to the normal conditions, then
select them again in the order
you want to print.
Press the {Clear Modes} key to
cancel all the settings.
If you press the [Printg Odr] key,
the selected order is displayed
in order.
161
Document Server
D If you need to change any of the

print settings, press the [Print Settings] key.
3
The Print Settings display appears.
E Enter
the required number of

prints using the number keys.
Note
Up to 999 can be entered.
press the {Clear/Stop} key and
enter new value.
If you print more than one set
using the Sort function, you can
check the print result by printing out only the first set.
P.163 Sample Printing.

The machine starts printing.
Note
The print settings remain in the
machine after printing.
The print settings of the document you select first are applied
to the merged documents.
If you select multiple files, you
can confirm the file names or
print order of the files you selected in step C by scrolling
through the list with the [T
T] and
[U
U] keys.
Press the [Select File] key to return to the Select Files to Print
display.
Reference
162
Note
To pause the print job, press the
{Clear/Stop} key. In the confirmation dialog box, press the
[Resume] key to resume it, or
press the [Cancel] key to cancel
it.
Sample Printing
Print First Page
If you print multiple sets using the

Sort function, you can check if the
print order or the print settings are
correct by printing out only the first
set using the {Sample Copy} key.
You can print the first page of the document selected in the Select Files to
Print display to check the contents.
If more than one document is selected, the first page of each document is
printed.
Limitation
turned on.
A Follow steps A to E of the preceding procedure.
B Press the {Sample Copy}} key.
A Press the line for the desired doc-
ument(s) in the Select Files to

Print display, and press the [Print
1st Page] key.
B Press the {Start}} key.

The first page is printed out.
C After the first set is printed out,
press the [Print] key to print the

rest of the print job. Press the
[Suspend] key to cancel it and return back to the Print Settings
menu for changing the setting.
163
Document Server
Searching Saved Documents

You can use either the [Search by File
Name] or [Search by User Name] keys to
search for documents stored on the
document server. You can also list the
stored documents in the order you
prefer. If you install Desk Top Binder
V2 Professional or Desk Top Binder
V2 Lite on your computer, you can
search and rearrange the documents
from your computer.
Search by File Name

You can search the documents
stored in the Document Server by
the file name.
Search by User Name
You can search the documents
stored in the Document Server by
the user name.
To Search by File Name

This searches for documents on the
document server that match a file
name.

B Press the search by [File Name] key.
C Enter the file name using the let-
Note
To display all the files saved in
the Document Server, press the
[All the files] key.
To Search by User Name

This searches for documents on the
document server that match a user
name.

B Press the search by [User Name]
key.
C Enter the user name using the letter keys.
Reference
Characters" in the System Settings manual.

Only the files beginning with the
letters appear in the Select Files to
Print display.
ter keys.
Reference
Characters" in the System Settings manual.

Only the files beginning with the
letters appear in the Select Files to
Print display.
164
Note
To display all the files saved in
the Document Server, press the
[All the files] key.
Searching Saved Documents
To Check the Details of Stored

Documents
A Select
the document for which

you want detailed information.
3
B Press the [Detail] key.
The detailed information about the

document is displayed.
Note
If you have selected several documents, use the [U
U] [T
T] keys to
view the details of each document.
165
Document Server
Deleting Saved Documents

You should delete any of the saved
documents using the control panel of
the machine.
This section describes how to delete
saved documents.
Important
You can save up to 3,000 documents in the Document Server. No
more documents can be saved,
when there are 3,000 documents in
the Document Server. You should
delete unnecessary documents.
You can set the timer to delete the
documents stored in the Document Server with the User Tools.
Delete All Files in the System
Settings manual.
Note
You can delete all the saved documents at a time with the User
Tools. Delete All Files in the
Follow these steps to delete saved
documents.

appears.
B Select a document you want to delete by pressing the name of it.

The selected name is highlighted.
Note
You can search the document
you desire by the file name or
the user name. P.164 To
Search by File Name.
You can sort the files in order of
[User Name], [File Name], or
[Date]. Press the key you want to
sort by.
If the desired file name is not
shown, see the next or previous
screen using the [T
T Next] and [U
U
Prev.] keys.
If you cannot choose the desired
document by its name, you can
print the first page to check the
contents. Press the line for the
desired document, and press
the [Print 1st Page] key followed
by the {Start} key.
Press the selected line again to
cancel the print job.
If you select a document which
requires a password, the Input
the Password window appears. Enter your password using the number keys, and press
the [OK] key. To delete the value
entered, press the [Clear] or
{Clear/Stop} key. To cancel a selected document, press the [Cancel] key.
C Repeat step B if you want to select

more than one document.
166
Deleting Saved Documents
D Press the [Delete File] key.

A confirmation dialog box appears.
3
E Press the [Delete] key to delete it.
Note
To cancel the delete operation,
press the [Do not Delete] key.
167
Document Server
168
4. Troubleshooting
If Your Machine Does Not Operate as You
Want
General
Machine Status
Problem/Cause
Action
Please wait.
A message appears when you

turn on the operation switch,
or change the toner bottle.
Wait for the machine.
Cannot detect original size.
Improper original is set.

P.20 Sizes difficult to detect.
Set custom size original on the

exposure glass. P.31 Setting Originals on the Exposure
Glass.
Input the horizontal and vertical size of the custom original.
P.31 Setting Originals on
the Exposure Glass.
Select paper manually, not in
Auto Paper Select mode.
Do not use Auto Reduce/Enlarge mode.
Original is not set.
Set your originals.
There is no copy paper that is

in the same direction as the
originals.
Set the original in the same direction as the copy paper.
Improper paper size is set.
If you press the {Start} key,

copy job starts.
Rotate Sort is not available

with this image size.
The size of paper for which no

rotate-sorting is available is
selected.
Select the proper paper size.

P.45 Sort.
Cannot punch paper of this

size.
The Punch function cannot be

used the paper size selected.
The following paper sizes are

available for Punch mode:
A3L,B4L, A4KL, B5KL,
A5KL, 1117L, Legal(81/
2"14")L. Select one of these
sizes. P.56 Punch.
It is over stapling capacity.
The number of sheets per set

is over the staple capacity.
Check the stapler capacity.

P.50 Staple.
Check original orientation.
Check paper size.
169
Troubleshooting
Machine Status
Problem/Cause
Action
Hole punch receptacle is full.

Open the door as shown and
empty receptacle.
Punch hole receptacle is full.
Check the punch waste box

and remove punch wase.
P.206 y Removing Punch
Waste.
Cannot staple paper of this size. The Staple function cannot be

used the paper size selected.
Duplex is not avilable with
this paper size.
Select the proper paper size

that can be used in Staple
mode. P.50 Staple.
A paper size not available in

Select a paper size that can be
Duplex mode has been selected. used in Duplex mode. P.84
Duplex.
Maximum number of sets is *. The number of copies exceeds

the maximum copy quantity.
The following paper sizes are

available for Duplex mode:
A3L, B4L, A4KL, B5KL,
A5L. Select one of these sizes.
Max. Copy Quantity in
P.215 General Features 2/4
Document Server
170
Machine Status
Problem/Cause
Action
Scanned pages exceeded max.

number. Do you want to store
the scanned pages as a file?
The number of scanned pages

exceeds the capacity per file of
the Document Server.
If you want to store the

scanned originals as a file,
press the [Store File] key. The
originals are stored as a file in
the Document Server. If you
don't want any scanned originals to be stored, press the [Not
to Store] key. The scanning
data will be cleared.
If Your Machine Does Not Operate as You Want
Document Server
Problem
Action
You forgot your password.
You can confirm your password.

Press [Yes] key onto Display Password with
Stored file temporarily, you can check the
password when you selected the file. Display Password with Stored file in system settings.
Without the password, you cannot edit or
print the document. Scan the document again.
You can delete all the saved documents at
once with the User Tools. Delete All The
Saved Files in P.233 Input/Output.
Make sure that no important document is

saved in the Document Server before deleting
all of the saved documents.
You cannot find out what is saved in a file.
Check the date or time column in the Document Server: Files display.
Check the contents of the document by printing the first page of it. Press the line for the desired document in the Document Server:
Files display, and press the [Print 1st Page] key
followed by the {Start} key.
Memory becomes full frequently.
Select the document that you want to delete,

and then press the [Delete File] key. P.166
Deleting Saved Documents.
You want to check the print result before mak- Check the print result by printing out only the
ing a large print run.
first set. P.163 Sample Printing.
You want to save a document which cannot be
deleted automatically.
Turn Auto File Delete off, then save the document in the Document Server.
If you turn Auto File Delete on after saving
the document, this function is applied to the
next saved documents.
171
Troubleshooting
Display
Problem
Problem/Cause
Action
The display panel is off.
The screen contrast knob is

turned to the dark position.
Set the screen contrast knob to

the light position for proper
viewing of the display panel.
The machine is in Energy Sav- Press the {Energy Saver} key to

er mode.
cancel Energy Saver mode.
The operation switch is
turned off.
Nothing happens when the
The main power switch is
operation switch is turned on. turned off.
172
Turn on the operation switch.

Turn on the main power
switch.
If You Cannot Make Clear Copies
If You Cannot Make Clear Copies

Problem
Cause
Copies appear dirty.
The image density is too dark. Adjust the image density.

P.37 Adjusting Copy Image
Density.
Auto Image Density is not selected.
The reverse side of an original

image is copied.
Select Auto Image Density.

Density.
Auto Image Density is not selected.
A shadow appears on copies if

you use pasted originals.
Action
Select Auto Image Density.

Density.
Change the direction of the
original.
Put mending tape on the pasted part.
Clean them. P.238 Maintaining Your Machine.
The same copy area is dirty

whenever making copies.
The exposure glass or document feeder is dirty.
Copies are too light.
The image density is too light. Adjust the image density.

Density.
The paper size is not appropriate.
Use the recommended paper.
Note
Light copy may occur
when you use damp or
rough grain paper.
Toner cartridge is almost

empty.
Add toner. P.183 D Adding Toner.
Parts of the image are not cop- The original is not set correctly. Set originals correctly. P.31
ied.
Setting Originals.
An improper paper size is selected.
Copies are blank.
Select the proper paper size.
The original is not set correctly. When using the exposure

glass, face the originals down.
When using the document
feeder, face them up. P.31
Setting Originals.
173
Troubleshooting
Problem
Cause
Action
A moir pattern is produced

on copies.
Your original has a dot pattern image or many lines.
Place the original on the exposure glass at a slight angle.
174
y;
;yy;y;y;y;y;y;
y;y;y;y;y;
If You Cannot Make Copies As You Want

General
Problem
Cause
Action
Copies are not stapled.
There are jammed staples in

the stapler.
Remove jammed staples.

P.202 e Removing Jammed
Staples.
Note
After removing jammed
staples, staples might not
be ejected the first few
times you try to use the
stapler.
The number of copies exceeds
the capacity of the stapler.
Check the stapler capacity.

P.50 Staple.
Copy paper is curled.
Turn the copy paper over in

the tray.
Staples are wrongly positioned.
Originals are not set correctly. Place the original on the upper
left corner of the exposure
glass. P.50 Staple.
Misfeeds occur frequently.
Copy paper size setting is not

correct.
Set the proper paper size.

P.194 Changing the Paper
Size.
You cannot combine several

functions.
Selected functions cannot be

used together.
P.147 Combination Chart.
When sorting, the pages are

divided into two blocks.
The memory became full in

the middle of sorting and the
pages were ejected in two
blocks.
You can interrupt the copying

when the memory becomes
full. Memory Full Auto
Scan Restart in P.233 Input/
Output.
175
Troubleshooting
Adjust Image
Problem
Cause
Action
In Double Copies mode, parts

of the original image are not
copied.
Combination of original and

copy paper is not correct.
Select A3L for A4 originals

K, A4 for A5 originals, and B5
for B6 originals. P.113
Double Copies.
In Border, Center, or Center/ You set the wide erased marBorder mode, parts of the
gin.
original image are not copied.
Originals are not scanned correctly.
Change the margin width narrower. You can change it between 2-99mm. Erase
Border Width and Erase
Center Width in P.222 Edit
1
/2.
Set the originals correctly.
176
In Margin Adjustment mode,

parts of the original image are
not copied.
You set the wide erased margin.
In Image Repeat mode, the

original image is not copied
repeatedly.
You selected the same size

copy paper as originals, and
did not select the proper reproduction ratio.
There is a lock of margin space

on the opposite side of the
binding position.
Set the narrow margin with

the User Tools. Front Margin: Left/Right and Back
Margin: Left/Right in P.222
Edit 1/2.
Select copy paper larger than
the originals.
Select the proper reproduction ratio.
Stamp
Problem
Cause
Action
The stamp position is wrong.
The paper orientation is

wrong.
Check the paper orientation

and stamp position.
Cause
Action
Combine
Problem
You cannot make a book from Combine Original Booklet

a booklet or magazine by fold- Format or Combine Original
Magazine Format is not coring copies.
rect.
Change the setting. P.87

Combine.
Parts of the image are not cop- You specified an improper reied.
production ratio that does not
meet the sizes of your originals and copy paper.
When you specify a reproduction ratio using Manual Paper

Select mode, make sure that
the ratio matches your originals and the copy paper.
Note
Select the correct reproduction ratio before using
Combine mode.
Order of copies is not correct.
When you use staple and

punch together, extra margin
may appear.
Sometimes stapling and the

punch hole may not work well
together. In this case, change
the direction of the originals.
You set originals in the incorrect order.
When setting a stack of originals in the document feeder,

the last page should be on the
bottom.
If you set an original on the exposure glass, start with the
first page to be copied.
177
Troubleshooting
Duplex
Problem
Cause
Action
Order of copies is not correct.
You set originals in the incorrect order.
When setting a stack of originals in the document feeder,

the last page should be on the
bottom.
If you set an original on the exposure glass, start with the
first page to be copied.
Orientation of copies (Top to

Top, or Top to Bottom) is not
correct.
You set originals in an incorrect direction or the orientation setting is incorrect.
Select the correct orientation,

or set originals correctly.
P.84 Duplex.
Note
If you set A3, 11" 17" or
B4, 81/2" 14" originals as
shown below, select [Top to
Bottom] to make copies in
Top to Top orientation.
Or select [Top to Top] to
make copies in Top to
Bottom orientation.
CP270-A
178
When Memory Is Full

Limitation
If memory is full on either the master unit or sub-unit, Interrupt Copy will not
be available.
Note
If you set Memory Full Auto Scan Restartof the User Tools to Yes, the
memory overflow message will not be displayed, but make Connect Copy for
the scanned original automatically. Connect Copy continues scanning and
copying until finishing the job. Note that copy sets will be printed out separately by scanning at this time.
Machine Status
Action
Memory is full.
Press the [Output] key to copy scanned originals and clear the scanning data. Press the
[Clear] key to clear the scanning data and not
copy.
Press [Resume] to scan and copy remaining

originals.
To continue copying, remove all copies then

press the [Resume] key. To stop copying, press
the [Stop] key.
Document Server
Machine Status
Action
Memory is full.
Delete any unnecessary files and then scan the

document again. P.166 Deleting Saved Documents.
179
Troubleshooting
B Loading Paper
Note
If you want to change the paper
size of tray 1-2 P.194 Changing
the Paper Size.
C Square the paper and set it in the

tray.
Reference
Regarding paper types and sizes,
P.22 Copy Paper.
Loading Paper in Tray 1or 2
A Pull
out the paper tray until it

stops.
B Remove the back fence.
180
Important
Do not stack paper over the limit mark.
Make sure that the paper stack
is flush with the right side fence.
Note
Shuffle the paper before setting
it in the tray.
Straighten the paper, if curled
or warped, before placing it in
the tray.
D Set the back fence.
B Loading Paper
E Push the paper tray in until it stops.
Note
it in the tray.
the tray.
C Square the paper and set it in the

tray.
Loading Paper in Tray 3 or 4
A Pull out the paper tray until it stops.

D Set the back fence.
Important
181
Troubleshooting
Loading Paper in the Large

Capacity Tray
C Place the paper in the tray along

the edge on the left.
A Press the key if it is not lit.

The key blinks while the bottom
plate is moving down.
Note
The Tray contains up to 1,500
sheets.
B When the key stops blinking and

lights up, open the top cover.
Important
D Close the top cover.
Note
Make sure no paper sheet is involved in the feeding paper of
the Large Capacity Tray, Remove the sheet, if any.
182
D Adding Toner
D Adding Toner
When D is displayed, it is time to supply toner.
R WARNING:
Do not incinerate used toner or toner containers. Toner dust might ignite when exposed to an open flame. Dispose of used toner containers
in accordance with local regulations for plastics.
R CAUTION:
Keep toner (used or unused) and toner containers out of reach of children.
R CAUTION:
Important
If you use toner other than that recommended, an error might occur.
When adding toner, do not turn off the operation switch. If you do, your settings are cleared.
Always add toner after the machine instructs you to add toner.
Do not use used toner. This will damage the machine.
Note
You can still make about 90 copies after D appears, but replace the toner early to prevent poor copy quality.
Reference
Regarding toner storage, P.27 Toner Storage.
1: Open the front cover of the machine.
2: Lift the green lever.
Toner1
183
Troubleshooting
3: Push the green lever, and then gently
pull out the holder.
2
1
Toner2
4: Press the toner bottle backward to raise

its head, and then gently pull out the bottle.
2
1
Toner3
5: Hold a new bottle horizontally and

shake it 5 or 6 times.
Note
5 6
Do not remove the black cap when

shaking.
2
6: Remove the black cap.
Note
Toner4
Do not remove the inner cap.
7: Put the toner bottle on the holder, and

then press its head forward.
1
2
Toner5
184
D Adding Toner
8: Push the holder until it clicks.
9: Push down the green lever.
10: Close the front cover of the machine.
Toner6
185
Troubleshooting
x Clearing Misfeeds
R CAUTION:
The fusing section of this equipment might be very hot. You should be very
careful that you don't touch this section when removing the misfed paper.
Important
When clearing misfeeds, do not turn off the operation switch. If you do, your
copy settings are cleared.
To prevent misfeeds, do not leave any torn scraps of paper within the machine.
If paper misfeeds occur repeatedly, contact your service representative.
Note
More than one misfed area may be indicated. In this case, check every applicable area. See the following charts: A, B, C, D, E, P, U, R, Y, Z
You can find a sticker explaining how to remove misfed paper inside of the
front cover or inside of the finisher.
186
x Clearing Misfeeds
187
Troubleshooting
188
x Clearing Misfeeds
189
Troubleshooting
190
x Clearing Misfeeds
191
Troubleshooting
192
x Clearing Misfeeds
193
Troubleshooting
Changing the Paper Size

Important
If you wish to change the paper
size set in the optional large capacity tray (LCT), contact your service
representative.
Be sure to select paper size with
the user tools. Otherwise, misfeeds
might occur.
Reference
For paper sizes, weight, and capacity that can be set in each tray,
P.22 Copy Paper.
C Remove any remaining copy paper.
Changing the Paper Size in

Tray 1 or 2
A Make
sure that the paper tray

(tray 1 or 2) is not being used.
Then fully pull out the tray.
D Release the side lever.
194
E While pressing the release lever,

adjust the side fences.
F Square the paper and load it into
G Lock the side lever.
H Adjust the back fence to the new
paper size.
the tray.
Important

is flused with the right side
fence.
Note
For 11 17 paper, put the
back fence inside 1.
I Adjust the tray size with the pa-
per size selector to the new paper

size.
Note
it in the tray.
Make sure the leading corners
of the paper are under the corners.
the tray.
195
Troubleshooting
To adjust the paper size to one

not available with the paper size
selector
Changing the Paper Size in

Tray 3 or 4
A Set the paper size selector to

the p mark on the left.
B Press the {User Tools/Counter}
}
key.
C Press the [System Settings] key.
D Press the [Paper Size Setting] key.
E Press the [Tray Paper Size: Tray 1]
or the [Tray Paper Size: Tray 2]
key.
F Select your desired size. Then,
press the [OK] key.
G Press the [Exit] key or press the
{User Tools/Counter}
} key to exit
the User Tools.
A Make sure that the paper tray is
Important
Be sure to select the paper
size with the User Tools (System Settings). Otherwise,
misfeeds might occur.
Note
Remove any remaining copy
paper.
not being used.
B Pull the paper tray out, and then

lift and remove it.
C Remove the screws fastening the

side fences using the screwdriver.
Reference
For details, User Tools
(System Settings) in the System Settings manual.
J Gently push the paper tray in until it stops.
Note
A screwdriver is contained in
the front area of the top tray.
K Check
the paper size displayed

on the display panel.
196
D Re-position the side fences to the

paper size you want to use.
Note
it in the tray.
Make sure the leading corners
of the paper are under the corners.
G Adjust the back fence to the new

paper size.
E Fasten the fences with screws.
Note
For 11 17 paper, put the
back fence inside 1.
F Square the paper and load it into

the tray.
H Push
the paper tray in until it
stops.
I Select the paper size with the user

tools.
Important
197
Troubleshooting
d Adding Staples
R CAUTION:
Important
If you use a staple cartridge other than that recommended, staple failure or
staple jams might occur.
1000-Sheet Finisher
1: Open the front cover.
fin101EE
2: Remove the cartridge.
fin102EE
3: Take out the empty refill in the arrow direction.
fin103EE
198
d Adding Staples
4: Push in the new refill until it clicks.
fin104EE
5: Pull out the ribbon.
4
fin105EE
6: Reinstall the cartridge.
fin106EE
7: Close the front cover.
fin107EE
199
Troubleshooting
2 Tray Finisher
1: Open the front cover of the finisher.
2: Hold the green lever and pull out the

cartridge gently.
3: Hold the both sides of the cartridge.

4: Pull up the upper unit of the cartridge.
5: Take out the empty refill in the arrow direction.
6: Align the arrows on the new refill and

the cartridge, and then push in the refill
until it clicks.
200
d Adding Staples
7: Hold down the upper unit to the cartridge gently.
8: Pull out the ribbon.
4
9: Hold the green lever and reinstall the
cartridge until it clicks.
10: Close the front cover of the finisher.
201
Troubleshooting
e Removing Jammed Staples

Note
Staples might be jammed because of curled copies. In this case, try turning the
copy paper over in the tray. If there is no improvement, change the copy paper with less curls.
After removing jammed staples, staples might not be ejected the first few
times you try to use the stapler.
1000-Sheet Finisher
1: Open the front cover.
fin108EE
2: Remove the cartridge.
fin109EE
3: Open the face plate.
fin110EE
202

4: Remove the jammed staples.
fin111EE
5: Reinstall the cartridge.
fin112EE
6: Close the front cover.
fin113EE
203
Troubleshooting
2 Tray Finisher
1: Open the front cover of the finisher.
2: Hold the green lever and pull out the

cartridge gently.
3: Pull up the knob of the cartridge.
4: Take out all staples slid from the cartridge.
5: Pull down the knob of the cartridge until

it clicks.
204

6: Hold the green lever and reinstall the
cartridge until it clicks.
7: Close the front cover of the finisher.
205
Troubleshooting
y Removing Punch Waste

Note
While Hole punch receptacle is
full. is displayed, you cannot use
the Punch function.
Note
If you do not, Hole punch receptacle is full. is still displayed.
A Open the front cover of the 2 Tray
D Close the front cover of the 2 Tray
finisher.
finisher.
Hole Punch Receptacle Full. disappears.
Note
If the message is still displayed,
reinstall the punch waste box.
B Pull out the punch waste box and

remove punch waste.
C Reinstall the punch waste box.
206
5. User Tools (Copy/

Document Server Features)
Accessing the User Tools (Copy/
Document Server Features)
This section is for the key operators in
charge of this machine. You can change
or set the machine's default settings.
C Select the desired menu and press

the key.
Preparation
After using the User Tools, be sure
to exit from the User Tools.
The selected key is highlighted.

Any changes you make with the
User Tools remain in effect even if
the main power switch or operation switch is turned off, or the
{Clear Modes} key is pressed.
Reference
For details, Accessing the User
Tools (System Settings) in the
A Press the {User Tools/Counter}} key.

The User Tools Main Menu appears.
Note
[T
TNext]: Press to go to the next
page.
[U
UPrevious]: Press to go back to
the previous page.
Reference
P.210 User Tools Menu (Copier/Document Server Features).
D Change the settings by following

the instructions on the display
panel. Then press the [OK] key.
B Press
the [Copier/Document Server

Features] key.
The Copier/Document Server Features menu appears.
Reference
P.218 General Features 4/4.
Note
[OK]: Press to set the new settings and return to the previous
menu.
[Cancel]: Press to return to the
previous menu without changing any data.
207
User Tools (Copy/Document Server Features)
Exiting From the User Tools
A After changing the User Tools settings, press the [Exit] key on the
User Tools Main Menu.
Changing the User Tools is completed, and the machine is ready
for copying.
5
Note
To exit from the change of the
machine's default settings and
return to Copy mode, press the
{User Tools/Counter} key.
You can also exit from the User
Tools by pressing the {User
Tools/Counter} key.
208
Accessing the User Tools (Copy/Document Server Features)
209
User Tools Menu (Copier/Document

Server Features)
210
User Tools Menu (Copier/Document Server Features)
211
General Features 1/4

Auto Paper Select Priority
As a default setting, Auto Paper Select is selected. You can cancel this setting.
Note
Default: ON
Auto Tray Switching

If you load paper of the same size in two or more trays, the machine automatically shifts to another tray when the tray in use runs out of paper (when Auto
Paper Select is selected.) This function is called Auto Tray Switching. This
setting specifies whether to use Auto Tray Switching or not.
Default: With image rotation
Note
[With image rotation] Use this when copying with Auto Tray Switching.
[Without image rotation] Only copies with Auto Tray Switching if you load
paper of the same size and in the same direction in two or more trays. If the
paper is not the same size or in the same direction, the message Load paper. is displayed.
[OFF] When a paper tray runs out of paper, copying is interrupted and the
message Load paper. is displayed.
Paper Display
You can choose whether the available paper trays/sizes are shown on the initial display at Auto Paper Select mode.
Note
Default: Display
If you choose Hide, the display is shown as below. When the [Auto Paper
Select] key is pressed, paper sizes appear on the display.
212
Original Type Priority

As a default setting, Text is selected as the Originals Type. You can change it
to Text/Photo, Photo, Pale, or Generation Copy.
Note
Default: Text
Original Type Display

You can choose whether the original modes are shown on the initial display.
Note
Default: Display
If you choose Hide, the display is shown as below.
5
Auto Image Density Priority
You can turn the Auto Image Density on or off for each of the original types
(Text, Text/Photo, Photo, Pale, and Generation Copy).
Note
Default: Text: On, Text/Photo: On, Photo: Off, Pale: On, Generation Copy: On
Copy Quality
You can adjust the quality level of copies for each of the original types (Text,
Text/Photo, Photo, Pale, Generation Copy).
Text
Adjust the sharpness of text.
Note
Default: Normal
[Custom Setting] is the value set during service setup.
Choosing [Sharp] or [Sort] affects the outline sharpness of text.
213
Text/Photo
When there are photo(s) and text on the original, determine whether the
photo or text takes priority.
Note
Default: Normal
[Normal] achieves a good balance between text and photos.
Photo
For a photo original, adjust the finish quality level to match the type of
photo original.
Note
Default: Print Photo
Select [Print Photo] for printed photo originals, and [Glossy Photo] for
printed photo originals with fine dots.
Select [Normal] for printed photo and text originals.
Pale
Adjust the quality level for the finish of a pale original with normal density.
Note
Default: Normal
Generation Copy
Adjust the quality level so as not to thicken the lines of the finish image.
Note
Default: Normal
Image Density
You can select one of seven original image density levels for each of the original types (Text, Text/Photo, Photo, Pale, Generation Copy).
Note
Default: Text: Normal, Text/Photo: Normal, Photo: Normal, Pale: Normal, Generation Copy: Normal
214

Duplex Mode Priority
You can select the type of the Duplex function effective when the machine is
turned on, Energy Saver mode is off, or Auto Reset is on.
Note
Default:
Metric version: 1 Sided1 Sided
Inch version: 1 Sided2 Sided
Copy Orientation in Duplex Mode

You can set the copy orientation when making two-sided copies.
Note
Default: Top to Top
Original Orientation in Duplex Mode

You can set the original orientation when making two-sided copies.
Note
Default: Top to Top
Change Initial Mode

You can select the initial mode or Program No. 10 as the mode effective when
the machine is turned on, or modes are cleared.
Note
Default: Standard
Max. Copy Quantity

The maximum copy quantity can be set between 1 and 999.
Note
Default: 999Sheets.
Tone: Original remains

The beeper (key tone) sounds when you forgot to remove originals after copying.
Note
Default: On
If the Panel Tone of the User Tools (System Settings) setting is Off, the
beeper does not sound irrespective of the Tone: Original on Platen setting. Panel Tone in the System Settings manual.
215
Job End Call

You can choose whether or not the beeper sounds when copying is complete.
If the "Panel Tone" of the User Tools (System Settings) settings is "Off", the
machine beeps to notify you that the machine did not complete a job for reasons such as copying was interrupted, the paper tray ran out of paper or a paper jam occurred.
Note
Default: On
216

Copy Function Key: F1-F5
You can register frequently used functions in Function Keys F1 to F5.
Note
Default:
Copy Function Key: F1: 1 Sided2 Sided:T to T
Copy Function Key: F2: 2 Sided:T to T2 Sided:T to T
Copy Function Key: F3: 1 Sided1 Sided Combine:2 Originals
Copy Function Key: F4: 1 Sided1 Sided Combine:4 Originals
Copy Function Key: F5: Create Margin
217

Document Server Storage Key: F1F5
You can reqister frequently used functions in Function keys F1 to F5. You can
also change the registered functions.
Note
Default
Document Server Storage Key: F1: 2 Sided Original Top to Top
Document Server Storage Key: F2: 1 Sided 1 Sided Combine
Document Server Storage Key: F3: 1 Sided 1 Sided Combine: 4 originals
Document Server Storage Key: F4: 1 Sided 1 Sided Combine: 8 originals
Document Server Storage Key: F5: Create Margin
218
Reproduction Ratio 1/2

Shortcut R/E
You can register up to three frequently used Reduce/Enlarge ratios other
than the fixed Reduce/Enlarge ratio and have them shown on the initial display. You can also change the registered Reduce/Enlarge ratios.
If no Reduce/Enlarge ratio has been set when selecting [Shortcut R/E 1], [Shortcut R/E 2], or [Shortcut R/E 3], enter the desired Reduce/Enlarge ratio using the
number keys.
Enlarge 1-5
You can customize the enlargement ratios available when you press the [Reduce/Enlarge] key followed by the [Enlarge] key.
Note
Default:
Metric version:
Enlarge 1: 115%
Enlarge 2: 122%
Enlarge 3: 141%
Enlarge 4: 200%
Enlarge 5: 400%
Inch version:
Enlarge 1: 121%
Enlarge 2: 129%
Enlarge 3: 155%
Enlarge 4: 200%
Enlarge 5: 400%
When selecting [User Enlrg. Ratio], enter a ratio using the number keys (in
the range of 101 to 400%).
Priority Setting: Enlarge

You can set the ratio with priority when the [Reduce/Enlarge] key is pressed,
followed by the [Enlarge] key.
Note
Default:
Metric version: 141%
Inch version: 155%
219

Reduce 1-6
You can customize the reduction ratios available when you press the [Reduce/
Enlarge] key followed by the [Reduce] key.
Note
Default:
Metric version:
Reduce 1: 25%
Reduce 2: 50%
Reduce 3: 65%
Reduce 4: 71%
Reduce 5: 75%
Reduce 6: 82%
Inch version:
Reduce 1: 25%
Reduce 2: 50%
Reduce 3: 65%
Reduce 4: 73%
Reduce 5: 78%
Reduce 6: 85%
When selecting [User Redc.Ratio], enter a ratio using the number keys (in the
range of 25 to 99%).
Priority Setting: Reduce

You can set the ratio with priority when the [Reduce/Enlarge] key is pressed,
followed by the [Reduce] key.
Note
Default:
Metric version: 71%
Inch version: 73%
Ratio for Create Margin

You can set a Reduce/Enlarge ratio when registering Create Margin in a
Shortcut Key.
Note
Default: 93%
220
R/E Priority
Specify which Reduce, Enlarge or Input Ratio is shown on the display panel
with priority when the [Reduce/Enlarge] key is pressed.
Note
Default: Reduce
221
Edit 1/2
Front Margin: Left/Right
You can specify left and right margins on the front side of copies in Margin
Adjust mode.
Note
Default:
Metric version: Left 5mm
Inch version: Left 0.2"
Back Margin: Left/Right

You can specify left and right margins on the back side of copies in Margin
Adjust mode.
Note
Default:
Metric version: Right 5mm
Inch version: Right 0.2"
Front Margin: Top/Bottom

You can specify front top and bottom margins on the front side of copies in
Margin Adjust mode.
Note
Default:
Metric version: Bottom 0mm
Inch version: Bottom 0.0"
Back Margin: Top/Bottom

You can specify back top and bottom margins on the front side of copies in
Margin Adjust mode.
Note
Default:
Metric version: Bottom 0mm
Inch version: Bottom 0.0"
222
Edit 1/2
1 sided
2 sided Auto Margin:T to T
In 1 sided 2 sided Duplex mode, you can specify whether to automatically
set the margins on the back side.
The margin is set to the same value of Back Margin: Left/Right.
Note
Default:
Metric version: Right 5mm
Inch version: Right 0.2"
1 sided
2 sided Auto Margin:T to B
In 1 sided 2 sided Duplex mode, you can specify whether to automatically
set the margins on the back side. The value set for "Back Margin: Top/Bottom" is used.
Erase Border Width
The default setting of the width of the erased margins in Erase Border mode
can be changed as follows:
Metric version: 3 50mm in 1mm steps
Inch version: 0.1" 2.0" in 0.1" steps
Note
Default:
Metric version: 10mm
Inch version: 0.4"
Erase Original Shadow in Combine

In Combine Copy or Booklet/Magazine Copy mode, you can specify whether
to erase a 3mm, 0.1" bounding margin around all four edges of each original.
Note
Default: Yes
Erase Center Width

The default setting of the width of the erased margins in Erase Centre mode
can be changed as follows:
Metric version: 2 99mm in 1mm steps
Inch version: 0.1" 3.9" in 0.1" steps
Note
Default:
Metric version: 10mm
Inch version: 0.4"
223
Edit 2/2
Image Repeat Separation Line
You can select a separation line in Image Repeat mode from None, Solid, Broken A, Broken B, or Crop Marks.
None
Solid
Broken A
5
Broken B
Crop Marks
Note
Default: None
Double Copies Separation Line

You can select a separation line in Double Copy mode from None, Solid, Broken A, Broken B,or Crop Marks.
None
Solid
224
Edit 2/2
Broken A
Broken B
Crop Marks
Note
Default: None
Separation Line in Combine

You can select a separation line in Combine mode from None, Solid, Broken
A, Broken B, or Crop Marks.
None
Solid
Broken A
Broken B
Crop Marks
Note
Default: None
225
Front Cover Copy in Combine

You can specify whether to make a combined copy on the front cover sheet
when you select Front Cover copy mode.
Note
Default: Combine
Designated Slip Sheet Copy in Combine

You can specify whether to make a combined copy on the inserted slip sheets
in Desig./Chapter Copy mode.
Note
Default: Combine
Copy on Designated Paper

You can specify whether to copy on the designate.
Note
Default: Yes

You can select the type of originals for Booklet or Magazine mode.
Note
Default: Open to Left
Copy Order in Combine

You can set the copy order in Combine mode to Left to Right or Top to Bottom.
Note
Default: From left to right
226
Stamp
Stamp
Size
You can set the size of the numbers.
Note
Default: Normal
Small
Normal
Large
Density
You can set the density of the numbers.
Note
Default: Normal
Preset Stamp 1/4-4/4

Stamp Priority
You can select the stamp type priority detected in Stamp mode.
Note
Default: Copy
Stamp Language
You can select the language of the message that is printed in Stamp mode.
Note
Default: English
Stamp Position
You can set the position at which the stamp is printed.
Press the arrow keys to adjust the position.
Note
Default:
Metric Version:
Position: Top right
Top Margin: 24mm
Right Margin: 24mm
227
Inch Version:
Position: Top right
Top Margin: 1.0"
Right Margin: 1.0"
Stamp Format
You can adjust the size, density and print page for the stamp.
Size
You can set the size of the stamp.
Note
Default: 1X
Density
You can set the pattern used to print the stamp.
Note
Default: Normal
Normal: The stamp is printed on the image. You cannot confirm which
parts overlap the image.
Lighter: The image can be seen through the stamp.
Light: You can see the image even clearer than in the Lighter setting.
Print Page
You can select whether the stamp is printed on the first page or all pages.
Note
Default: All Pages
228
Stamp
User Stamp 1/2-2/2

Program/Delete Stamp
You can register up to 4 custom stamps with your favorite design. You can
register/change/delete your favorite design as a user stamp.
How to Program/Delete Stamp, P.128 Program/Delete User Stamp.
Stamp Position
Note
Default:
Metric version:
Position: Top right
Top Margin: 24mm
Right Margin: 24mm
Inch version:
Position: Top right
Top Margin: 1.0"
Right Margin: 1.0"
Stamp Format
You can adjust the print page for User Stamp 1 to 4 you registered.
Note
Default: All Pages
229
Date Stamp
Format
You can select the date format for Date Stamp mode.
Note
Default:
Metric version: DD/MM/YYYY
Inch version: MM/DD/YYYY
Font
You can select the Date Stamp font.
Note
Default: Font 1
This setting is linked with Page Numbering.
Stamp Position
Note
Default:
Metric version:
Position: Top left
Top Margin: 8mm
Left Margin: 32mm
Inch version:
Position: Top left
Top Margin: 0.3"
Left Margin: 0.8"
Stamp Setting
You can select whether the date is printed on the first page or all pages.
Note
Default: All Pages
Size
You can set the Date Stamp size.
Note
Default: Auto
230
Stamp
Superimpose
You can select whether the Date Stamp is printed negative when it overlaps
black parts of the image.
Note
Default: No
Page Numbering 1/2-2/2

Stamp Format
You can select the page number format priority detected in Page Numbering
mode.
Note
Default: P1, P2
Font
You can select the font of the page number that is printed in Page Numbering
mode.
Note
Default: Font 1
This setting is linked with Date Stamp.
Size
You can set the size of the stamp that is printed in Page Numbering mode.
Note
Default: Auto
Duplex Back Page Stamping Position

You can set the position of the duplex back page number that is printed in Duplex mode.
Note
Default: Opposite Position
Page Numbering in Combine

You can set how the pages are numbered when you use the Combine function
and Page Numbering function together.
Note
Default: Per original
231
Stamp on Designated Slip Sheet

You can select whether to print the page number onto slip sheets when you
use the Designate function set to Copy and Page Numbering function together.
Note
Default: No
Stamp Position: P1, P2...Stamp Position: 1/5, 2/5...Stamp Position: 1, 2

...Stamp Position: P.1, P.2...Stamp Position: 1, 2...Stamp Position: 11, 12...
Note
Default:
Metric version:
Position: P1, 1/5, P.1, 1:Top right, -1-, 1-1: Bottom center
Top/Bottom Margin: P1, 1/5, P.1, 1:12mm, -1-, 1-1: 8mm
Left/Right Margin: P1, 1/5, P.1, 1:12mm, -1-, 1-1: 0mm
Inch version:
Position: P1, 1/5, P.1, 1:Top right, -1-, 1-1: Bottom center
Top/Bottom Margin: P1, 1/5, P.1, 1:0.5", -1-, 1-1: 0.3"
Left/Right Margin: P1, 1/5, P.1, 1:0.5", -1-, 1-1: 0.0"
Superimpose
You can select whether page numbers are printed negative when they overlap black parts of the image.
Note
Default: No
232
Input/Output
Input/Output
Switch to Batch (SADF)
You can select Batch mode or SADF mode when you press the Special Original key.
SADF Auto Reset
When you set one original at a time in the document feeder, the Auto Feed
indicator lights for a selected time after an original is fed to show that the document feeder is ready for another original. You can adjust this time from 3
seconds to 99.
Note
Default: 5sec.
Rotate Sort: Auto Paper Continue

You can specify whether to continue copying when the paper of the required
orientation has run out during rotate-sorting. Rotate Sort in P.45 Sort.
If you select [No]:
When paper of the required orientation runs out, the machine stops copying and prompts you to supply copy paper. When you load paper, the machine will continue copying.
If you select [Yes]:
Copying continues using copy paper of a different direction. The copy job
will finish even if you have left the machine.
Note
Default: No
Auto Sort
You can specify whether Sort mode is selected when the machine is turned on
or the mode is cleared.
Note
Default: No
Memory Full Auto Scan Restart

When the memory becomes full while scanning originals, the machine can
make copies of the scanned originals first, then automatically proceed scanning the remaining originals.
You can enable or disable this function.
If you select [No]:
When the memory becomes full, the machine stops operation allowing you
to remove the copy pages delivered on the output tray.
If you select [Yes]:
You can leave the machine unattended to make all the copies, but the resulting sorted pages will not be sequential.
Note
Default: No
233
Select Stack Function

Specify which Stack or Rotate Sort is shown on the initial display with priority.
Note
Default: Stack
The optional finisher or booklet finisher is required to use this function.
Select Stapling Position

Specify which Top 2 staples or Bottom is shown on the initial display with priority.
Note
Default: Top 2 staples
Letterhead Setting
If you want to copy on the direction-fixed (top to bottom) or 2-sided paper,
the machine rotates the image correctly. To use this function, select Yes.
Note
Default: No
234
6. REMARKS
Do's And Don'ts
R CAUTION:
Unplug the power cord from the
wall outlet before you move the
equipment. While moving the
equipment, you should take care
that the power cord will not be
damaged under the equipment.
Important
If you want to unplug the power
cord or turn off the main power
switch, make sure that the remaining memory space indicates 100%
on the display for facsimile mode.
While the machine is unplugged,
you can neither send nor receive a
fax.
Reference
For details, see the Facsimile Reference.
When you use this machine for a

long time in a confined space without good ventilation, you may notice an odd smell. To keep the
workplace comfortable, we recommend that you keep it well ventilated.
Do not press areas on or around
the fusing unit. These areas get hot.
After making copies continuously,
the exposure glass may feel
warmthis is not a malfunction.
You might feel warm around the
ventilation hole. This is caused by
exhaust air, and is not a malfunction.
Do not turn off the operation

switch while copying or printing.
Make sure that all copying or
printing has finished.
The machine might fail to produce
good copy images if condensation
forms inside the machine due to
rapid temperature change. To prevent this problem, the machine has
an anti-condensation function.
Even after the main power switch
is in the stand-by position, the anticondensation heater is active, thus
keeping the machine body slightly
warm.
Do not open the covers of machine
while copying or printing. If you
do, misfeeds might occur.
Do not move the machine while
copying or printing.
If you operate the machine improperly or a failure occurs on the
machine, your machine settings
might be lost. Be sure to take a note
of your machine settings.
Supplier shall not be liable for any
loss or damages resulting from a
failure on the machine, loss of machine settings, and use of the machine.
235
REMARKS
Where to Put Your Machine

Machine Environment
Environments to avoid
Your machine's location should be

carefully chosen because environmental conditions greatly affect its
performance.
Locations exposed to direct sunlight or strong light (more than

1,500 lux).
Locations directly exposed to cool
air from an air conditioner or heated air from a heater. (Sudden temperature changes might cause
condensation within the machine.)
Locations close to such machines
generating ammonia as diazo copy
machine.
Places where the machine might be
subjected to frequent strong vibration.
Dusty areas.
Areas with corrosive gases.
Optimum environmental conditions

R CAUTION:
Keep the equipment away from
humidity and dust. Otherwise a
fire or an electric shock might occur.
Do not place the equipment on an

unstable or tilted surface. If it topples over, it could cause injury.
R CAUTION:
If you use the equipment in a
confined space, make sure there
is a continuous air turnover.
Temperature: 10 32C (50

89.6F)(humidity to be 54% at
32C, 89.6F)
Humidity: 15 80% (temperature
to be 27C, 80.6F at 80%)
A strong and level base.
The machine must be level within
5mm, 0.2" both front to rear and
left to right.
To avoid possible buildup of
ozone, be sure to locate this machine in a large well ventilated
room that has an air turnover of
more than 30 m3/hr/person.
236
Moving
R CAUTION:
Important
If you move the machine, you
must be careful as follows:
Turn off the main power P.17
Turning Off the Main Power
wall. When you pull out the plug
from the socket, grip the plug to
avoid damaging the code and
causing fire or electric shock.
Close the front cover, the bypass tray, or others.
Where to Put Your Machine
Limitation
Carefully move the machine, If
not, the machine might be damaged or stored file might be deleted.
Do not take off the holding stand.

Avoid any strong shocking to the
machine, the hard disk might be
damaged, and stored files will be
deleted. For precautionaly reasons
files should be copied to another
local computer.
Power Connection
R WARNING:
Only connect the machine to
the power source described on
the inside front cover of this
manual. Connect the power
cord directly into a wall outlet
and do not use an extension
cord.
When the main switch is in the

Stand-by positions, the optional
anti-condensation heaters are on.
In case of emergency, unplug the
machine's power cord.
When you unplug the power cord,
the anti-condensation heaters turn
off.
Make sure that the plug is firmly
inserted in the outlet.
Voltage must not fluctuate more
than 10%.
The socket-outlet shall be installed
near the equipment and shall be
easily accessible.
Access to the Machine

Place the machine near the power
s o u rc e , p ro vi d i n g c le a r an c e a s
shown.
Do not damage, break or make

any modifications to the power
cord. Do not place heavy objects on it. Do not pull it hard
nor bend it more than necessary. These actions could
cause an electric shock or fire.
R CAUTION:
1. Rear: more than 10 cm (4.0")

2. Right: more than 10 cm (4.0")
3. Front: more than 75 cm (29.6")
4. Left: more than 10 cm (4.0")
R CAUTION:
When you disconnect the power
plug from the wall outlet, always
pull the plug (not the cable).
Note
For the required space when options are installed, contact your
service representative.
TSPS060E
237
REMARKS
Maintaining Your Machine

If the exposure glass, platen cover, or
document feeder belt is dirty, you
might not be able to make copies as
you want. Clean them if you find
them dirty.
Cleaning the Platen Cover
Cleaning the machine

Wipe the machine with a soft,
damp cloth. Then, wipe it with a
dry cloth to remove the water.
Important
Do not use chemical cleaner or organic solvent, such as thinner or
benzene. If they get into the machine or melt plastic parts, a failure
might occur.
Do not clean parts other than those
specified in this manual. Such
parts should be cleaned by your
Cleaning the Document

Feeder
Cleaning the Exposure Glass
Clean 1 and 2
Clean 1 and 2
238
7. Specification
Mainframe
Configuration:
Desktop
Photosensitivity type:
OPC drum (100)
Original scanning:
One-dimensional solid scanning system through CCD
Copy process:
Dry electrostatic transfer system
Development:
Dry two-component magnetic brush development system
Fusing:
Heating roll pressure system
Resolution:
600 dpi
Exposure glass:
Stationary original exposure type
Original reference position:
Rear left corner
Warm-up time:
Type 1: Less than 15 seconds (20C) (When Facsimile or Printer is installed:
Less than 18 seconds (20C))
Type 2: Less than 20 seconds (20C)
Originals:
Sheet/book/objects
Maximum original size:
A3L, 11" 17"L
Copy paper size:
Trays: A3L A5L, 11" 17"L 51/2" 81/2"L
Bypass: A3L A6L, 11" 17"L 51/2" 81/2"L
239
Specification
Bypass (custom size):

Vertical: 100 297mm, 4.0" 11.7"
Horizontal: 148 600mm, 5.9" 23.6"
Duplex: A3L A5L, 11" 17"L 51/2" 81/2"L (impossible on A5K,
51/2" 81/2" K)
LCT: A4K, 81/2" 11"K
Copy paper weight:

Paper tray: 64 105g/m2, 17 28 lb.
Bypass tray: 52 163g/m2, 14 lb. 43 lb.
Non-reproduction area:
Leading edge: Less than 3 2mm
Trailing edge: Less than 2 2mm
Left edge: Less than 2 1.5mm
Right edge: Less than 2 + 2.5/-1.5mm
First copy time:
Type 1: 4.5 seconds or less
(face up feed, A4K, 100%, feeding from tray 1, on the exposure glass,
TextPhoto mode, Auto Image Density)
Type 2: 3.6 seconds or less
(face down feed, A4K, 100%, feeding from tray 1, on the exposure glass,
TextPhoto mode, Auto Image Density)
Copying speed: (Type 1)

19 copies/minute (A3L, 11" 17"L)
35 copies/minute (A4K, 81/2" 11"K)
Copying speed: (Type 2)
22 copies/minute (A3L, 11" 17"L)
45 copies/minute (A4K, 81/2" 11"K)
Reproduction ratio:
Preset reproduction ratios:
Enlargement
Full Size
240
Metric version
Inch version
400%
400%
200%
200%
141%
155%
122%
129%
115%
121%
100%
100%
Mainframe
Reduction
Metric version
Inch version
93%
93%
82%
85%
75%
78%
71%
73%
65%
65%
50%
50%
25%
25%
Zoom: From 25 to 400% in 1% steps.
Maximum continuous copy run:

999 sheets
Copy paper capacity:
Tray 1, 2: 500 sheets (80g/m2, 20 lb.)
Bypass tray: 50 sheets (80g/m2, 20 lb.)
Power consumption:
Mainframe only
Type 1
Type 2
Warm-up
about 1.25 kw
about 1.25 kw
Stand-by
about 0.15 kw
about 0.17 kw
During printing
about 1.2 kw
about 1.2 kw
Maximum
less than 1.44 kw
less than 1.44 kw
Type 1
Type 2
about 1.3 kw
about 1.3 kw
Complete system *1
Warm-up
Stand-by
about 0.17 kw
about 0.195 kw
During printing
about 1.4 kw
about 1.4 kw
Maximum
less than 1.44 kw
less than 1.44 kw
*1
The Complete System consists of the mainframe, finisher and large capacity
tray (LCT).
Dimensions (W D H up to exposure glass):

Type 1, 2: 670 650 720mm, 26.4" 25.6" 28.3"
Space for mainframe (W D):
Type 1, 2: 980 650mm, 38.6" 25.6" (Bypass tray extender is used for large
size paper)
241
Specification
Noise Emission *1 :
Sound Power Level:
Mainframe only
Stand-by
Copying
Complete system
Type 1
Type 2
Less than 51 dB (A)
Less than 51 dB (A)
Less than 67 dB (A)
Less than 67 dB (A)
Type 1
Type 2
*3
Stand-by
Less than 52 dB (A)
Less than 52 dB (A)
Copying
Less than 70 dB (A)
Less than 70 dB (A)
Sound Pressure Level *2 :

Mainframe only
Stand-by
Copying
Complete system
Type 1
Type 2
Less than 37 dB (A)
Less than 37 dB (A)
Less than 55 dB (A)
Less than 55 dB (A)
Type 1
Type 2
*3
Stand-by
Less than 37 dB (A)
Less than 37 dB (A)
Copying
Less than 55 dB (A)
Less than 55 dB (A)
*1
*2
*3
The above measurements made in accordance with ISO 7779 are actual value.
It is measured at the position of the bystander.
The Complete System consists of the mainframe, finisher and large capacity
tray (LCT).
Weight:
Type 1, 2: Approx. 78 kg, 172 lb
HDD:
10 GB or more
Capacity for Document Server
4.2 GB
Capacity for Memory sorting
1.5 GB
Capacity for others
4.3 GB or more
242
Document Feeder (Option)
Document Feeder (Option)

Mode:
ADF mode, Batch mode, Mixed Size mode, Custom Size originals mode
Original size:
A3L B6KL (2 sided original are impossible for B6KL)
11" 17"L 51/2" 81/2"KL
Original weight:
1-sided originals: 40 128g/m2 (11 34 lb.)
2-sided originals: 52 105g/m2 (14 28 lb.) (Duplex)
Number of originals to be set:
80 sheets (80g/m2, 20 lb.) or less than 11mm, 0.43"
Maximum power consumption:
Less than 60W (power is supplied from the main frame)
Dimensions (W
D
H):
570 518 150mm, 22.4" 20.3" 5.9"
Weight:
Approx. 12 kg, 26.5lb
Note
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
243
Specification
1000-Sheet Finisher (Option)

Paper size:
A3L, B4L, A4KL, B5KL, A5KL, B6L, A6L, 11" 17"L, 81/2" 14"L,
81/2" 11"KL, 51/2" 81/2"L
Paper weight:
52 157g/m2, 14 42 lb.
Stack capacity:
1,000 sheets (A4K, 81/2" 11"K or smaller) (80g/m2, 20 lb.)
500 sheets (B4L, 81/2" 14"L or larger) (80g/m2, 20 lb.)
Staple capacity:
30 sheets (A4K, 81/2" 11"K or smaller) (80g/m2, 20 lb.)
20 sheets (B4L, 81/2" 14"L or larger) (80g/m2, 20 lb.)
Staple paper size:
A3L, B4L, A4KL, B5K, 11" 17"L, 81/2" 14"L, 81/2" 11"KL
Staple paper weight:
64 80g/m2, 17 20 lb.
Staple position:
1 position (upper left)
Power consumption:
48W (power is supplied from the main frame.)
Dimensions (W D H):
568 520 625mm, 22.4" 20.5" 24.6"
Weight:
Approx. 21kg, 46.3 lb
244
2 Tray Finisher (Option)
2 Tray Finisher (Option)

Finisher Shift Tray 1:
Paper size:
81/2" 11"KL, 51/2" 81/2"KL
Paper weight:
52 157g/m2, 14 42 lb.
Stack capacity:
500 sheets (A4KL, B5KL, A5K, 81/2" 11"KL) (80g/m2, 20 lb.)
250 sheets (A3L, B4L, 81/2" 14"L, 11" 17"Ls) (80g/m2, 20 lb.)
100 sheets (A5L, 51/2" 81/2"KL) (80g/m2, 20 lb.)
Finisher Shift Tray 2:
Paper size:
81/2" 11"KL, 51/2" 81/2" KL
Paper weight:
52 157g/m2, 14 42 lb.
Stack capacity:
No Staple:
2,000 sheets (A4K, 81/2" 11"K) (80g/m2, 20 lb.)
750 sheets (A3L, B4L, A4L, B5KL, 11" 17"L, 81/2" 14"L,
81/2" 11"L) (80g/m2, 20 lb.)
Staple:
1,500 sheets (A4K, 81/2" 11"K) (80g/m2, 20 lb.)
750 sheets (A3L, B4L, A4L, B5KL, 11" 17"L, 81/2" 14"L,
81/2" 11"L) (80g/m2, 20 lb.)
500 sheets (A5K) (80g/m2, 20 lb.)
100 sheets (A5L, 51/2" 81/2" KL) (80g/m2, 20 lb.)
Staple capacity:
50 sheets (A4KL, B5KL, 81/2" 11"KL) (80g/m2, 20 lb.)
30 sheets (A3L, B4L, 11" 17"L, 81/2" 14"L) (80g/m2, 20 lb.)
Staple paper size:
A3L, B4L, A4KL, B5KL, 11" 17"L, 81/2" 14"L, 81/2" 11"KL
Staple paper weight:
64 90g/m2, 17 24 lb
245
Specification
Staple position:
1 staple 3 positions
2 staples 1 position
Power consumption:
Less than 60W (power is supplied from the main frame.)
Dimensions (W D H):
680 620 1.030mm, 26.7" 24.4" 40.5"
Weight:
Approx. 55kg, 121.2 lb.
246
Punch Kit (Option)
Punch Kit (Option)

Paper size
2 holes: A3L A5KL, 11" 17"L, 81/2" 14"L 51/2" 81/2"KL
3 holes: A3L, B4L, A4K, B5K, 11" 17"L, 81/2" 11"K
4 holes:
Metric version: A3L, B4L, A4K, B5K, 11" 17"L, 81/2" 11"K
Scandinavian version: A3L A5K, 11" 17"L, 81/2" 14"L 51/2"
81/2"K
Paper weight:
4 holes: 52 163g/m2, 14 lb. 43 lb.
2 or 3 holes: 52 163g/m2, 14 lb. 43 lb.
Power consumption:
26.4 W (power is supplied from the mainframe.)
Dimensions (W D H):
142 456 92mm, 55.9" 179.5" 36.2"
Weight:
Approx. 2.9 kg, 6.4 lb
Note
247
Specification
Internal tray 2 (1 bin tray) (Option)

Number of bins:
1
Available paper size:
A3L, B4L, B5KL, A5L, 11" 17"L, 81/2" 14"L, 81/2" 11"KL,
51/2" 81/2" L
Paper capacity:
125 sheets (80g/m2, 20 lb.)
Copy paper weight:
60 105g/m2 (16 28lb.)
Less than 15 W (power is supplied from the main frame.)
Dimensions (W D H):
470 550 110mm, 18.6" 21.7" 4.4"
Weight:
Approx. 4 kg, 8.9lb
Note
248
Extarnal Tray (Option)
Extarnal Tray (Option)

Dimensions (W D H):
265 395 65mm, 10.4" 15.5" 2.5"
Weight:
Approx. 600 g, 1.3 lb
Note
249
Specification
Large Capacity Tray (LCT) (Option)

Paper size:
A4K, 81/2" 11"K
Paper weight:
60 105g/m2, 16 24 lb.
Paper capacity:
1,500 sheets (80g/m2, 20 lb.)
Power consumption
Maximum. 40 W (power is supplied from the mainframe.)
Dimensions (W D H, option unit):
390 500 390mm, 15.3" 19.6" 15.3"
Weight:
Approx. 17 kg, 37.5 lb.
Note
250
Paper tray unit (Option)
Paper tray unit (Option)

Copy paper weight:
60 105g/m2 (16 28 lb.)
Available paper size:
A3L, B4L, A4KL, B5KL, A5L, 11" 17"L, 81/2" 14"L,
81/2" 11"KL, 51/2" 81/2" L, 81/4" 14"L, 11" 14"L, 71/4" 101/2" L,
8" 13"L, 8" 101/2"KL, 81/2" 13"L, 8" 101/2"KL, 81/4" 13"L
Less than 50 W (power is supplied from the main frame.)
Paper capacity:
550 sheets (80g/m2, 20 lb.) 2 trays
Dimensions (W D H):
540 600 270mm, 21.3" 23.7" 10.7"
Weight:
Approx. 25 kg, 55.2 lb.
Note
251
INDEX
D
1000-Sheet Finisher, 8
1000-sheet finisher, 244
2 Tray Finisher, 8
2 Tray finisher, 245
A
Access to the Machine, 237
Adding Staples, 198
Adding Toner, 183
Auto Off, 30
Auto Reduce/Enlarge, 43
B
Back Cover, 138, 140
Background Numbering, 123
Basic functions, 37
Batch mode, 33
Book originals, copying, 101, 104
Border Erase, 116, 117
Bridge unit, 8
Bypass tray, 6, 60
C
Center/Border Erase, 119
Center Erase, 118
Centering, 114
Centre/Border Erase, 116
Centre Erase, 116
Changing Paper
Tray 1 or 2, 194
Changing the Paper Size, 194
Chapter, 143
Check Modes key, 9
Clearing Misfeeds, 186
Clear Modes key, 9
Clear/Stop key, 10
Combination Chart, 147
Combine, 81, 87
Control Panel, 9
Control panel, 5
Copy Paper, 22, 40
Cover
Back Cover, 138, 140
Front Cover, 138, 140
252
Date Stamp, 130

Designate, 141
Directional Magnification (%), 77
Directional Size Magnification (Inch), 79
Display, 11
Display panel, 9, 11
Document Feeder, 243
Document feeder, 5, 32
Cleaning, 238
Document feeder (ADF), 8
Document Server, 149
Deleting, 166
Features and Benefits, 151
Printing, 161
Scanning Originals, 156
Do's And Don'ts, 235
Double Copies, 113
E
Energy Saver key, 9
Energy Saver mode, 68
Enhance, 71
Enlarging, 71
Environment, 236
Erase
Border, 116, 117
Center, 118
Center/Border, 119
Centre, 116
Centre/Border, 116
Exposure glass, 5, 19, 31
Cleaning, 238
Extarnal Tray, 249
Extender, 60
External tray, 8
F
File Merge Printing, 152
Finisher
1000-Sheet Finisher, 8
Front Cover, 138, 140
Front cover, 5
Function Status indicator, 10
I
Image Density, 37, 38
Image Repeat, 112
Indicators, 9
Internal tray, 5
Internal tray 2 (1 bin tray), 8
Interrupt Copy, 68
Interrupt key, 9
J
Job Preset, 67
L
Large Capacity Tray (LCT), 8, 250
Loading Paper, 180
Large Capacity Tray (LCT), 182
Tray 1 or 2, 180
Tray 3, 181
Tray 4, 181
M
Machine Environment, 236
Mainframe, 239
Main power indicator, 5, 9
Main power switch, 5, 15
Maintenance, 238
Margin Adjustment, 121
Messages, 169
Misfeeds, 186
Mixed Size mode, 34
N
Numbering
Page Numbering, 132
Number keys, 10
O
On Demand Printing, 151
Operation switch, 9, 15
Options, 8
Original Beeper, 69
Originals, 19
Originals, setting, 31
Original Type selecting, 39
Output tray guide, 7
P
Page Numbering, 132
Paper
Changing, 194
Loading, 180
Paper tray, 5
Paper tray unit, 8
Platen cover, 8
Power Connection, 237
Preset Stamp, 124
Program
Changing, 65
Deleting, 65
Recalling, 66
Storing, 64
Program key, 9
Programs, 64
Punching copies, 56
Punch kit, 247
R
Reduce/Enlarge, 71
Reducing, 71
Remarks, 235
Removing Jammed Staples, 202
Removing Punch Waste, 206
Repeat
Image Repeat, 112
253
S
Safety information, i
Sample Copy, 69
Sample Copy key, 9
Screen Contrast knob, 9
Series Copies, 101
Setting Custom Size Originals, 35
Slip Sheets, 138, 145
Sort, 44
Sorting copies into sets, 45
Specification, 239
Document Feeder, 243
Extarnal Tray, 249
Large Capacity Tray (LCT), 250
Mainframe, 239
Punch kit, 247
Stack, 44, 48
Stamp, 123
Date Stamp, 130
Page Numbering, 132
Preset Stamp, 124
User Stamp, 126
Staple, 44
Staples, 198
Removing Jammed Staples, 202
Stapling copies, 50
Start key, 9
System Reset, 30
T
Toner, 27
Toner Bottle
Storage, 27
Two-sided Copies, 81, 84
U
User Stamp, 126
User Tools
Copy/Document Server Features, 207
User Tools/Counter key, 9
V
Ventilation hole, 6
Z
Zoom, 73
254
UE
USA
B003
UE
USA
B004
AdonisC2_EN_b-f_FM.book Page 1 Tuesday, January 23, 2001 4:45 PM
FAX Option Type 1045

Facsimile Reference (option)

<Basic Features>
ZDPH130e.eps
reference.
FAX Option Type 1045 Operating Instructions
Printed in Japan
UE USA B360-8607
Available Options
Fax Function Upgrade Unit (Fax Function Upgrade Type 185)
ISDN Unit (ISDN Option Type 1045)
Extra G3 Interface Unit (G3 Interface Unit Type 1045)
Expansion Memory (32MB: DIMM)
Handset (Handset Type 450)
Supplies
Marker Ink (Marker Type 30 is recommended for the best performance)
Copyright 2001
AdonisC2_EN_b-f_FM.book Page i Tuesday, January 23, 2001 4:45 PM

Symbols
R WARNING:
death or serious injury when you misuse the machine without following the instructions under this symbol. Be sure to read the instructions, all of which are included in the Safety Information section in the Copy Reference manual.
R CAUTION:
Information section in the Copy Reference manual.
* The statements above are notes for your safety.

Important
Preparation
Note
Limitation
Reference
[
]
{
}
AdonisC2_EN_b-f_FM.book Page ii Tuesday, January 23, 2001 4:45 PM
ii
AdonisC2_EN_b-f_FM.book Page iii Tuesday, January 23, 2001 4:45 PM
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Manuals for This Machine......................................................................... 1
Basic Features (this manual) ........................................................................ 1
Advanced Features ....................................................................................... 1
1. Getting Started
Guide to Components ...............................................................................
Front View .....................................................................................................
Rear View......................................................................................................
Control Panel .............................................................................................
3
3
4
6
Starting the Machine ................................................................................. 8

Turning On the Power ................................................................................... 8
Turning Off the Power ................................................................................... 9
Switching Between Copy Mode, Facsimile Mode and Printer/Scanner Mode ... 10
Reading the Display ................................................................................
Reading the Display Panel and Using Keys................................................
Standby Display ..........................................................................................
Communication Display ..............................................................................
Display Prompts ..........................................................................................
11
11
12
13
14
2. Faxing
Overview...................................................................................................
Changing Memory Transmission and Immediate Transmission .................
Setting Originals......................................................................................
Setting a Single Original on the Exposure Glass ........................................
Setting Originals in the Document Feeder (ADF)........................................
Setting a Scan Area ....................................................................................
If the Machine Cannot Detect the Size of Your Original..............................
Original Sizes Difficult to Detect..................................................................
Memory Transmission ............................................................................
Broadcasting ...............................................................................................
Canceling a Memory Transmission .......................................................
Canceling the Transmission Before the Original is Scanned ......................
Canceling a Transmission While the Original is Being Scanned ................
Canceling a Transmission While the Message is Being Sent .....................
Immediate Transmission ........................................................................
15
15
16
17
18
20
22
23
24
27
29
29
29
29
32
Canceling an Immediate Transmission ................................................. 35

Canceling a Transmission Before You Have Pressed the Start Key .......... 35
Canceling a Transmission After You Have Pressed the Start Key ............. 35
iii
AdonisC2_EN_b-f_FM.book Page iv Tuesday, January 23, 2001 4:45 PM
Scan Settings...........................................................................................
Resolution ...................................................................................................
Original Type...............................................................................................
Image Density (Contrast) ............................................................................
Mixing Scan Settings for a Multiple Page Original ......................................
Dialing.......................................................................................................
Number Keys ..............................................................................................
Quick Dials ..................................................................................................
Groups ........................................................................................................
Reception .................................................................................................
Selecting the Reception Mode ....................................................................
36
36
37
38
40
41
41
43
45
46
46
3. Setup
Initial Settings and Adjustments............................................................
Programing..................................................................................................
Editing .........................................................................................................
Deleting .......................................................................................................
Quick Dial .................................................................................................
Programing Quick Dials ..............................................................................
Editing Quick Dials ......................................................................................
Deleting Quick Dials....................................................................................
Groups......................................................................................................
Programing Groups.....................................................................................
Editing Groups ............................................................................................
Deleting Groups ..........................................................................................
Entering Text............................................................................................
Available Characters ...................................................................................
Keys ............................................................................................................
How to Enter Text .......................................................................................
47
48
51
52
54
54
57
60
62
62
64
67
70
70
70
71
4. Troubleshooting
Adjusting Volume .................................................................................... 73
Error Messages and Their Meanings..................................................... 75
When the {Facsimile} key is Lit in Red.................................................... 76
Solving Problems .................................................................................... 77
INDEX........................................................................................................ 78
iv
Manuals for This Machine

Two Facsimile Reference manuals are provided, the Basic Features manual and
the Advanced Features manual. Please refer to the manual that suits your needs.
Basic Features (this manual)

The Basic Features manual explains the most frequently used fax functions and
operations.
Advanced Features
The Advanced Features manual describes more advanced functions, and also
explains settings for key operators.
Chapter 1 Transmission Mode

Explains how to send at a specific time without having to be by the machine,
and also take advantage of off-peak telephone line charges.
Chapter 2 Checking and Canceling Transmission Files
Explains how to cancel a transmission, and resend a message when it fails to
transmit.
Chapter 3 Communication Information
Explains how to erase a fax message programed in memory and check the
contents of any file in memory.
Chapter 4 Transmission Features
Explains about useful transmission features, also learn how to dial numbers
easily.
Chapter 5 Reception Features
Explains about reception features. Learn how to receive messages in telephone mode, and print two pages of received messages on one page.
Chapter 6 Simplifying the Operation
Explains how to specify a Program and use the Document Server.
Chapter 7 Facsimile User Tools
Explains how to program frequently used functions as a Quick Dial Key and
User Function Key.
Chapter 8 Key Operator Setting
Explains about functions the key operator handles. Learn how to setup the
phone line type, and how to store the Memory Locked ID and the Confidential ID.
Chapter 9 PC FAX Feature

Explains how to fax directly from a computer and make necessary settings.
Chapter 10 Troubleshooting
Explains what to do when toner runs out and when power is turned off or
fails.
Chapter 11 Appendix
You can check consumables and options for facsimile functions.
1. Getting Started
Guide to Components
Front View
1. Document Feeder (ADF)/Platen
3. Internal Tray
Cover (Option)
Fax messages are delivered here.
Holds a document stack of up to 50

sheets which are fed automatically one at
a time. Place documents face up here.
4. ISDN Line Connector (Option)

5. Parallel Interface Port
2. Exposure Glass
Plug the parallel cable into this port.
Place the original face down on the upper

left corner of the exposure glass, aligning
the upper left corner with the reference
mark. Close the platen cover when you set
a document on the exposure glass.
6. Network Interface Unit

Plug the network cable into this port.
Getting Started
7. Main Power Switch

Do not touch this switch. This switch
should be only used by a service representative.
Note
If the operation switch is on and there
is still no power, turn on the Main
Power switch.
If you leave the Main Power switch
off for more than an hour, all files in
memory are lost. Chapter 10,
"When Power is Turned off or Fails" in
the Advanced Features manual
The On indicator blinks when:
The platen cover or document
feeder (ADF) is open.
Communicating with other destination machines.
The hard disk is running.
8. Handset/External Telephone (Option)

9. Operation Switch
(the On indicator lights up). To turn the
indicator goes off). P.8 Turning On the
Power
10. Internal Tray 2

Fax messages are delivered here when received. The Internal tray 2 allows you to
distinguish fax messages from copied or
printed paper that are delivered to other
trays. The indicator beside the Internal
tray 2 is lit when the Internal tray 2 contains fax messages or printouts. Chapter 1, "Printing a Received Fax" in the
System Settings
Rear View
1. Bypass Tray
2. Analog Line Connector
Select this tray for non-standard size paper.

"Copying from the Bypass Tray" in the
Copy Reference
Chapter 5, "Having Incoming Messages Printed on Paper From the Bypass
Tray" in the Advanced Features manual
Appendix, "Connecting the Machine

to a Telephone Line and Telephone" in
Guide to Components
3. Handset (Option)/External Telephone Connector

4. Extra G3 Interface Unit Connector

(Option)
Getting Started
Control Panel
1
1. Confidential File Indicator
5. {Start Manual RX}} key
Lights when a message has been received

into memory with Confidential Reception. Blinks when a Memory Lock file has
been programed in memory. Chapter
3, "Printing a Confidential Message" and
Chapter 3, "Printing a File Received with
Memory Lock" in the Advanced Features
manual
Press to start manual reception.

Press this key before pressing the {Start}
key to check the settings selected for the
fax about to be sent.
7. {Program}} key
Lights during transmission or reception.
Press to use the program function.

Chapter 6, "Simplifying the Operation" in
2. Communicating Indicator
User Tools:
Press to enter User Tools mode. These
tools allow you to customize the default
settings. Chapter 7, "General Setting/
Adjustment" in the Advanced Features
manual
Counter:
Display and print the total number of
pages transmitted and received.
4. LCD display
This guides you through tasks and informs you of the machine status. A messages appears here. P.11 Reading the
Display
Press to cancel the current settings and

returns.

Hold down for more than a second to enter Energy Saver mode.
10. {Interrupt}} key

Press to interrupt the current fax operation in order to start copying.
11. Receive File Indicator

Lights when a message other than a Confidential Reception or Memory Lock file
has been received. Chapter 5, "When
the Confidential File Indicator is Lit or
Blinking" in the Advanced Features manual
Control Panel
12. {Facsimile}} key

Press to switch to Facsimile mode. P.12
Standby Display
Lights in yellow
Facsimile mode has been selected.
Lights in green
Facsimile mode has been printing.
Lights in red
Lights up whenever any facsimile error occurs. Press {Facsimile} to display
the error message and take the appropriate action. P.76 When the {Facsimile} key is Lit in Red
13. {On Hook Dial}} key

Use to dial a number from the numeric
keypad without having to lift the handset. Chapter 4, "Handy Dialing Functions" in the Advanced Features manual
14. {Tone}} key

Press to send tonal signals down a pulse
dialing line. P.43 Tone
15. {Pause/Redial}} key

Pause:
Insert a pause when you are dialing or
storing a fax number. A pause cannot be
inserted as the first digit. P.42 Pause
Redial:
Press to redial one of the last ten numbers. Chapter 4, "Redial" in the Advanced Features manual
16. Number keys

Use to dial fax numbers or enter the number of copies.

Clear:
Deletes one character or digit.
Stop:
Interrupts the current operation (transmission, scanning, copying or printing).
18. {Start}} key

Press to start all tasks.
Getting Started
Starting the Machine

To start the machine, turn on the operation switch.
Note
This machine automatically enters
Energy Saver mode or turns itself
off if you do not use the machine
for a while. "Energy Saver Timer", "Auto Off Timer" in the Copy
Reference
A Confirm
that the power cord is

plugged into the wall outlet firmly and the Main Power switch is
on.
B Confirm
that the Main power

switch is on.
- Power switches
This machine has two power switches: P.3 Guide to Components
Operation switch
Turn on this switch to activate the
machine. When the machine has
warmed up, you can make copies
or send faxes.
Main power switch
Do not touch the Main Power
switch. It should be used only by a
service representative when the
optional fax unit is installed.
C Turn on the operation switch. The

On indicator should light.
Important
If you leave the Main Power
switch off for more than one hour,
all fax files in memory are deleted.
See "Turning Off The Power" below.
The panel display will turn on.
Starting the Machine
Note
If nothing happens when you
turn on the operation switch,
make sure the Main Power
switch is turned on.
Turning Off the Power
A Turn
off the operation switch.

The On indicator will go out.
Important
Do not turn off the Main Power
switch while the indicator is lit or
blinking. This may cause problems
in the hard disk or memory.
Be sure to turn off the Main Power
switch before unplugging the
power cord. This may cause problems in the hard disk or memory.
Make sure that 100% is shown on
the display before you turn the
Main Power switch off or you unplug the power cord. Fax files programed in memory will be deleted
an hour after you turn the Main
Power switch off or you unplug
the power cord.
A Make sure the On indicator is off.

B Turn off the Main Power switch.
Important
Fax files programed in memory
will be deleted an hour after
you turn the Main Power
switch off or you unplug the
power cord. Chapter 10,
"When Power is Turned off or
Fails" in the Advanced Features
manual
The Main Power indicator turns

off.
Turning Off the Main Power Switch

When the Main Power switch is
turned off while using the fax function, waiting fax jobs and print jobs
may be canceled, and incoming fax
documents cannot be received. Normally, only the service representative
operates this switch. When you have
to turn off this switch for some reason, follow the procedure below.
Getting Started
Switching Between Copy Mode, Facsimile

Mode and Printer/Scanner Mode
1
This machine is both a fax and a copier. When you turn on the power switch, the
copier screen is shown and the machine is ready to make copies. When you wish
to use fax functions, press the {Facsimile} key on the left of the operation panel.
You can set the machine to start in the Facsimile mode. "Changing the Machine Settings" in the Copy Reference
10
Limitation
You cannot switch modes under the following circumstances:
While scanning in a fax
During Immediate Transmission
While editing the System Settings
During Interrupt Copying
While using On-hook Dial
During Energy Saver mode
Reading the Display
Reading the Display

The display tells you the machine status and guides you through operations.
Note
Functions that have been selected are highlighted (for example
).
Keys that you cannot select are shown with a dashed outline (for example
).
All procedures in this manual assume you are in Facsimile mode. By default,
when you turn the machine on it is in Copy mode. Press the {Facsimile} key
to change to Facsimile mode. You can have the machine start in Facsimile
mode. "Changing the Machine's Settings" in the Copy Reference
Reading the Display Panel and Using Keys
1. Displays the scanning conditions

and sizes you can choose.
4. Displays messages and the ma-
Displays the possible selections for various functions.
5. Press to display various information about transmission.
2. Displays the name and facsimile

number of a destination when transmitting. Also displays the size of the
original.
6. Appears when a destination is entered. Press [Clear] to erase character

or numbers one by one.
3. Displays the entered number of a

destination. When adding destinations with the number keys, press
[Add].
chine status.
7. Switches the transmission mode

between memory transmission and
immediate transmission.
11
Getting Started
8. Displays Quick Operation Keys
10. Displays the programed desti-
set for often used functions.
nations.
[TX File Status] and [Dest. Management] are

preset.
Displays the Quick Dial table of programed destinations.
9. Displays various functions for

transmitting.
Additional transmitting functions.
Standby Display
While the machine is in standby mode (immediately after the {Facsimile} key is
pressed or after the {Clear Modes} key is pressed), the following display is shown.
Memory Transmission
Immediate Transmission
Note
To return the machine to standby mode, do one of the following:
If you have set the original and have not pressed the {Start} key, remove
the original.
If you have not set an original, press the {Clear Modes} key.
If you are in User Tools mode, press the {User Tools/Counter} key.
12
Reading the Display
Communication Display
While the machine is communicating, the status is displayed.
Memory Transmission
Note
Even when the machine is using memory to fax a message or receive a message, you can still scan the next original into memory. Chapter 4, "More
Transmission Functions" in the Advanced Features manual
Reception
Note
Even when the machine is being used a copier or printer, the sender's name
or number will be displayed for received faxes.
13
Getting Started
Display Prompts
Depending on the situation, the machine will show various prompts on the display.
Instructions and Requests
Questions
Selections
Status
14
2. Faxing
Overview
Changing Memory
Transmission and Immediate
Transmission
The basic procedure to send a fax
message is:
A Make sure the Facsimile indicator
is lit
B Set your original
C Dial the number
D Press the {Start} key
The rest of this section describes these
steps and the various features that are
available in more detail.
There are two ways to send a fax message:
Memory Transmission
Check the display to see which mode
is correctly active. You can change the
t ran sm ission mo de by p ressing
[Immed. TX] or [Memory TX].
15
Faxing
Setting Originals
In this manual an original can mean a
single or multiple page document.
You can set your originals either in
the Document Feeder (ADF) or on the
exposure glass. Some types of originals are unsuitable for the Document
Feeder (ADF) so they must be set on
the exposure glass.
Which way you place your original
depends on its size and whether you
are using the Docum ent Feeder
(ADF) or the exposure glass.
Limitation
If you place A5 size documents on
the exposure glass, they will not be
detected. A5 size documents loaded in the ADF are sent as A4 size.
Note
When sending a fax, the image
output at the other end depends on
the size and direction of paper
used in the receiver's terminal. If
the receiver does not use paper of
the same size and direction as that
of the original, the fax image may
be output reduced, trimmed at
both edges, or divided into two or
more sheets. When sending an important original, we recommend
that you ask the receiver about the
size and direction of the paper
used in their terminal.
When sending an original of an irregular (i.e. non-standard) size or
part of a large original, you can
specify the scan area precisely.
P.20 Setting a Scan Area
16
You can scan non-standard sized

documents as standard sized documents with the Irregular Scan
Area feature. When you turn on
this feature, the area scanned will
be in the specified range regardless
of the actual document size. A
blank margin will appear or the
image will be cut at the receiving
end.
Make sure that all ink, correcting
fluid etc., has completely dried before setting your original. If it is
still wet, the exposure glass will be
marked and those marks will appear on the received image.
If you set an A4 size original in the
portrait direction, the machine rotates the image by 90 degrees before sending it. Chapter 4,
"Transmission with Image Rotation" in the Advanced Features
manual
Reference
For how to set 2-sided documents,
see Chapter 4, "2-sided Transmission" in the Advanced Features
manual.
Setting Originals
- How to set A4, B4, A3, Lt, LG

and DLT size originals
Original
Where original is set

Exposure glass
Document Feeder(ADF)
*1
Note
When you set originals on the ADF
as shown in the above illustration,
the Fax Header will be printed on
the received faxes at the destination as follows:
*1 On the upper end of printings
*2 On the left end of printings
*2
Setting a Single Original on

the Exposure Glass
Note
When you set originals in the ADF
as shown in the above illustration,
the Fax Header will be printed on
the received faxes at the destination as follows:
*1 On the upper end of printings

*2 On the left end of printings
Set originals that cannot be placed in

the Document Feeder (ADF), such as
a book, on the exposure glass one
page at a time.
A Lift the Document Feeder (ADF)
by at least 30 degrees. Place the

original face down and align its
upper left corner with the reference mark at the upper left corner
of the exposure glass.
- How to set A4, A5 and B5 size

originals
Original
Where original is set

Exposure glass
Document Feeder(ADF)
*2
*1
1. Reference mark
2. Scale
Limitation
A5 size documents are not detected the exposure glass. Load A5
size documents in the ADF.
Note
If you do not raise the Document Feeder (ADF) by at least
30 degrees, the original size will
not be detected.
17
Faxing
B Close the Document Feeder (ADF).

Note
When sending a bound original,
the received image may contain
some black areas. To reduce this
effect, hold down the original to
prevent its bound part from rising.
- Bound Original Page Order

W h en s en din g bound orig inals
(books, magazines, etc.), you can
choose to have either the left page or
right page sent first. Chapter 4,
"Book Fax" in the Advanced Features
manual
Note
The default setting is Send Right
Page first. Chapter 8, "Changing
the User Parameters" in the Advanced Features manual
18
Setting Originals in the

Document Feeder (ADF)
Use the Document Feeder (ADF) to
scan in a stack of originals in one operation. The Document Feeder (ADF)
can handle both single-sided and
double-sided originals.
Limitation
The maximum document length is
1200mm (47").
Place all the originals to be sent in
a single stack.
You cannot set originals in the
Document Feeder (ADF) one page
at a time or in sheaves.
Do not open the Document Feeder
(ADF) while it is scanning the originals or a document could become
jammed.
Note
If you send documents longer than
420mm (17"), select Long Document mode with the User Parameters. If a jam occurs, the document
might be damaged because scanning will not stop. P.20 Setting
a Scan Area Chapter 8, " Changing the User Parameter " in the Advanced Features manual
Documents longer than 420mm
(17") must be sent by memory
transmission (immediate transmisson is not possible).
If an original jams, press the {Clear/
Stop} key then remove the original
carefully.
If your original is bent or folded,
flatten it before you set it.
Set thin originals on the exposure
glass.
Setting Originals
Reference
For information about the sizes
and number of originals that can
be placed in the Document Feeder
(ADF), Appendix, "Acceptable
types of Originals" in the Advanced Features manual
A Adjust
the document guide to

match the size of your originals.
Align the edges of your originals
and stack them in the Document
Feeder (ADF) face up.
1. Limit mark
2. Document guide
Originals unsuitable for the Document Feeder (ADF)
Do not set the following types of originals in the Document Feeder (ADF) because they may be damaged. Place them on the exposure glass instead.
Originals containing staples or clips
Pasted originals
Originals with any kind of coating, such as thermosensitive paper, art paper,
aluminum foil, carbon paper, or conductive paper
Originals with index tabs, tags, or other projecting parts
Sticky originals, such as translucent paper
Thin and soft originals
Originals of inappropriate weight
Originals in bound form, such as books
Transparent originals, such as OHP transparencies or translucent paper
19
Faxing
Setting a Scan Area

Normally, the area of a set document
is scanned automatically. If a scan
area is specified, the document is
scanned accordingly. Thus, documents can be sent without extra space
or blank margins. Normally, all documents loaded in the Document Feeder (ADF) are scanned as the same
sizes. To scan originals of different
sizes as different sizes, use Mixed
Original Sizes.
Auto Detect
The area of a set document is
scanned automatically.
Regular
The set document is scanned according to the specified size regardless of its actual size.
The sizes that can be specified are
A4, B4, A3, LT, LG, and DLT.
Note
When using the Mixed Original
Sizes, the machine sends the
originals by memory transmission. Chapter 4, "Transmission with Image Rotation" in the
Advanced Features manual
When using the Mixed Original
Sizes feature, rotation transmission is disabled.
A Set the originals, and select any

scan settings you require.
Note
When setting different size originals into the ADF, adjust the
document guide to the largest
original.
Small originals may be sent at a
slight slant since they do not
match the document guide.
B Press the [Scan Area] key.
Area
Enter the area to be scanned. The
set document is scanned according
to the entered size regardless of its
actual size. Chapter 7, "Programing and Changing a Scan
Size" in the Advanced Features
manual
Mixed Original Sizes
Select this to scan one by one the
size of originals loaded in the ADF.
For example, when A4 and B4 size
originals are sent together, usually
all are sent as B4 size. By selecting
Mixed Original Sizes, the machine
scans and sends each document according to its size.
20
The Scan Area menu is shown.
C Select the scan area.

Specifying Standard Sizes
A Press the [Regular] key.
Setting Originals
B Press the size of the originals

to be sent.
Note
To cancel the set programed
size, press [Cancel]. The menu
returns to that of step B.
B Press [OK].
2
Note
To cancel the specified standard size, press [Cancel]. The
display appears as in step B.
8 1/2 x 11 is LT, 8 1/2 x 14 is
LG, and 11 x 17 is DLT.
C Press [OK].
The specified size is shown.
D Press [OK].
[Regular] is highlighted on the

display and the size is shown
above this.
[Area 1] or [Area 2] is highlighted

on the display the scan area is
shown above this.
Specifying Mixed Original Sizes

A Press the [Mixed Original Sizes]
key.
B Press [OK].
Specifying Programed Sizes

A Press the [Area 1] or [Area 2] key.
[Mixed Original Sizes] is highlighted on the display the scan area

is shown above this.
D Specify the receiver and press the

The length and width of the
programed size is shown.
{Start}
} key.
21
Faxing
If the Machine Cannot Detect the Size of Your Original

If the machine cannot detect the original size, the following display is shown:
If this happens, carry out the following steps.
A Press [Exit].
B Remove the original and replace it on the exposure glass.
C Press the {Start}} key to scan the original again.
If the above display appears again, repeat steps A to C.
Note
If the machine still cannot detect the original size, the following display is
shown:
If this happens, carry out the following steps.

Press the key to switch the scan size.
Press the {Start} key again.
22
Setting Originals
Original Sizes Difficult to Detect

The machine finds it difficult to detect the size of the following kinds of originals. If this happens, the receiving machine may not select print paper of the correct size. P.22 If the Machine Cannot Detect the Size of Your Original
Documents set on the exposure glass of sizes other than those listed in the table below
Originals with index tabs, tags, or projecting parts
Dark originals with many characters or drawings
Originals which partially contain solid printing
Originals which have solid printing at their edges
The following paper sizes are automatically detected in Facsimile mode.
Inch Version
Paper Size
Where Original
is Set
11"
17"K
K 8 1/2"
14"K
K
8 1/2"
11"K
K
L
5 1/2"
8 1/2"
KL
10"
14"L
L
8 1/2"
13"L
L
8"
10"K
K
Exposure Glass
- Auto detect
- Unable to auto detect
23
Faxing
Memory Transmission
In Memory Transmission mode, after
you press the {Start} key, the machine
does not dial the destination until all
pages of your fax message have been
scanned into memory (in contrast
with Immediate Transmission, where
the number is dialed first and pages
are scanned and sent one by one).
Memory Transmission is useful because:
You can take your original away
from the machine without having
to wait too long
While your message is being sent,
other people can operate the machine
You can send the same message to
more than one place in a single operation (Broadcasting)
Important
If there is a power failure (Main
Power switch is off) or the plug is
pulled out for more than 1 hour, all
the files programed in memory are
deleted. As soon as power is restored, the Power Failure Report is
printed to help you identify deleted files. If you turn just the operat i o n sw i t c h o f f , f il e s a r e n o t
deleted. Chapter 10, "When
Power is Turned off or Fails" in the
Limitation
If memory is full (0% appears on
the display), Memory Transmission is disabled. Use Immediate
Transmission instead.
24
Note
Maximum number of Memory
Transmission files: 400 (up to 800
files with optional Expansion
Memory installed)
Maximum number of destinations
per Memory Transmission: 200
Combined total number of destinations that can be programed:
500. (2,000, with Fax Function Upgrade Unit.)
The theoretical maximum number
of destinations you can enter with
the number keys is 100, but this
will depend on the amount of
memory currently available.
The number of pages that you can
store in memory depends on the
original images and the scan settings. You can store up to 160 standard pages (ITU-T #1 chart,
Resolution: Standard, Original
Mode: Text).
The machine will return to the default transmission mode (Memory
Transmission) after every transmission. You can change this so
that the desired setting is maintained. Chapter 7, "General Setting/Adjustment" in the
The maximum total number of
documents that can be programed
in memory is as follows:
About 1000 pages with only the
optional Expansion Memory installed
About 2,080 pages with both the
optional Expansion Memory
and the optional Fax Function
Upgrade Unit installed
Memory Transmission
A Make
sure that the Memory

Transmission is selected.
C Make the necessary settings you

require.
2
If it is not, press the [Memory TX]
key.
B Set the original.

Limitation
You can send the first pages
from the exposure glass then
the remaining pages from the
Document Feeder (ADF). After
you remove the last page from
the exposure glass, you have 60
seconds to insert the remaining
pages in the Document Feeder
(ADF).
Note that you cannot set pages

on the exposure glass after you
have started using the Document Feeder (ADF).
Note
To store multiple page originals
from the exposure glass, set
them page by page.
The original can be placed at either Document Feeder (ADF) or
Exposure Glass, until you press
the {Start} key.
Reference
P.36 Scan Settings
D Dial.

{Clear/Stop} key and enter the correct number again.
Reference
P.41 Dialing
Chapter 4, "Chain Dial" and

"Redial" in the Advanced Features manual
E Press the {Start}} key.
Reference
P.16 Setting Originals
The machine starts scanning the

original.
25
Faxing
F Set the last original then press

[#
#].
G Press the {Start}
} key.
The machine calls the destination.
Note
Do not open the Document
Feeder (ADF) while it is scanning originals.
After scanning, the machine will

return to standby mode.
-Checking the Transmission

Settings
You can check the transmission settings (e.g. destination and transmission mode) on the display.
A Press the {Check Modes} key.
Sending Originals from the

Exposure Glass
A Set the first page of your original on the exposure glass face
down.
B Dial.
C Select any scan settings you require.
D Press the {Start}
} key.
original.
E Set the next original on the exposure glass within 60 seconds
after the machine has finished
scanning the first original.
Note
Repeat steps C to E for all
pages.
26
The following display appears.
After checking the settings on the

display, press the {Check Modes}
key.
This returns the display to the display shown before pressing the
{Check Modes} key the first time.
Memory Transmission
Broadcasting
Send the same messages to several
destinations.
Note
Maximum number of destinations
per Broadcasting: 500
Combined total number of destinations that can be set: 500

The number of destinations that
can be set using the number keys
varies according to the machine's
memory usage. The maximum
number is 100 or 1000 when the
operational Expansion Memory is
installed. P.42 Restrictions
When Dialing with the Number Keys
Note that you cannot set pages

on the exposure glass after you
have started using the Document Feeder (ADF).
Note
To scan multiple page originals
from the exposure glass, place
them page by page.
The original can be placed at either place until you press the
{Start} key. P.16 Setting
Originals
C Select any settings you require.
A Make
sure that Memory Transmission is selected.
Reference
D Dial a destination.
If it is not, press the [Memory TX]
key.
B Set the original.

Limitation
You can send the first pages
from the exposure glass then
the remaining pages from the
Document feeder (ADF). After
you remove the last page from
the exposure glass, you have 60
seconds to insert the remaining
pages in the Document Feeder
(ADF).

Reference
Chapter 4, "Chain Dial" and

"Redial" in the Advanced Features manual
27
Faxing
E Press [Add].
2
Note
When specifying a destination
using Quick Dial or Group Dial,
the destination is added even
without pressing [Add].
F Dial a destination.
Note
Repeat steps E and F for more
destinations.

original.
28
The machine starts calling the destinations. After scanning, the machine will return to standby mode.
Canceling a Memory Transmission

Canceling the Transmission
Before the Original is Scanned
A Press the {Clear Modes}} key.
Note
When documents are loaded in
the Document Feeder (ADF),
you can cancel the transmission
by just removing them.
Canceling a Transmission
While the Original is Being
Scanned
Canceling a transmission after pressing the {Start} key.
A Press the {Clear/Stop}} key.
While the Message is Being
Sent
Use this procedure to cancel a transmission after the original has been
scanned.
Limitation
If transmission finishes while you
are carrying out this procedure, it
will not be canceled.
Note
If you cancel a message while it is
being sent, transmission is halted
as soon as you finish this procedure. However, some pages of
your message may have already
been sent and will be received at
the other end.
Canceling a transmission using the

[Change/Stop TX File] key
A Press [Change/Stop TX File].
The machine will stop storing the

original and the data will not be
sent.
The list of programed files being

transmitted or a waiting transmission is displayed.
29
Faxing
B Select the file you want to cancel.
Canceling a transmission using the

} key
{Clear/Stop}
2
Note
If the desired file is not shown,
press [U
U Prev.] or [T
T Next].
C Press [Stop Transmission].
Note
To cancel another file, repeat
steps B and C.
D Press [Exit].
The machine will return to standby

mode.
30
B Select the file you want to cancel.
Note
If the desired file is not shown,
press [U
U Prev.] or [T
T Next].
Note
To cancel another file, repeat
steps B and C.
D Press [Exit].
2
mode.
31
Faxing
With Immediate Transmission, when
you press the {Start} key, the fax
number is dialed immediately. The
message is scanned and transmitted
page by page without being programed in memory. This contrasts
with Memory Transmission which
scans all pages into memory before
dialing the destination.
Immediate Transmission is useful if
you want immediate confirmation
that the message is being sent to the
correct destination (just check for the
other terminal's Own name or Own
Fax Number on the operation panel
during transmission).
Note
You cannot send the same message
to multiple destinations (Broadcasting). Use Memory Transmission for this purpose.
Place the original on the exposure
glass or in the Document Feeder
(ADF). To send two or more pages
from the exposure glass, set them
one page at a time.
You can scan some pages of your
original from the exposure glass
and the remainder from the Document Feeder (ADF). When you
have finished scanning from the
exposure glass, place the remainder of the pages in the Document
Feeder (ADF) and press the {Start}
key within ten seconds.
By default, the transmission mode

selected when the machine is
turned on or when modes are
cleared (transmission mode home
setting) is Memory Transmission.
You can change this with the [Gen.
Settings/Adjust] key. Chapter 7,
"General Setting/Adjustment" in
A Make sure that Immediate Transmission is selected.
If it is not selected, press the

[Immed. TX] key.
B Set the original.

Limitation
Do not open the Document
Feeder (ADF) while it is scanning the originals. This can
cause originals to jam.
Note
The original can be placed at either Document Feeder (ADF) or
Exposure Glass, until you press
the {Start} key.
Reference
32
C Select
any scan settings you re-
quire.
The Sender Name/Number isn't

displayed until the machine connects to the other one.
2
Reference
P.36 Scan Settings
D Dial.
Reference
P.47 Initial Settings and Adjustments
After transmission the machine

will return to standby mode.

Reference
P.41 Dialing
Chapter 4, "Chain Dial" in the

Sending Originals from the

Exposure Glass
A Set the first page face down on
the exposure glass.
B Dial.
C Select any scan settings you require.
D Press the {Start}
} key.
original.
33
Faxing
E Set the next original on the exposure glass within 10 seconds

after the machine has finished
scanning the first original.
Note
Repeat steps C to E for all
originals.
F Set the last original then press
[#
#].
G Press the {Start}
} key.
The machine starts to call the
destination.
- If the Connection Could Not Be

Made
The following display appears if the
fax could not be sent:
Do one of the following:

Press [Cancel Transmission] and try
again.
Press [Memory Transmission] to have
the machine scan in the document
and then automatically redial the
number.
34
Canceling an Immediate Transmission
Canceling an Immediate Transmission

Before You Have Pressed the
Start Key
A Press the {Clear Modes}} key.
Note
When the original is being set,
you can also cancel an Immediate Transmission by removing
the original from the machine.
After You Have Pressed the
Start Key
A Press
the {Clear/Stop}
} key, and
then remove the original.
Note
If the transmission finishes
while you are carrying out this
procedure, it will not be canceled.
35
Faxing
Scan Settings
You may wish to send many different
types of fax messages. Some of these
may be difficult to reproduce at the
other end. However, your machine
has three settings that you can adjust
to help you transmit your document
with the best possible image quality.
Resolution:
Standard, Detail, Super Fine (option)
Image density:
Auto Image Density, Manual Image Density (7 levels)
Original Type:
Text, Text/Photo, Photo
Resolution
Images and text are scanned into the
machine by converting them to sequences of dots. The frequency of dots
determines the quality of the image
and how long it takes to transmit.
Therefore, images scanned at high resolution (Super Fine) have high quality
but transmission takes longer. Conversely, low resolution (Standard)
scanning results in lower quality but
your original is sent more quickly.
Choose the setting that matches your
needs based upon this trade off between speed and image clarity.
3.85lines/mm, 200
100dpi)
Standard (8
Select for originals containing normal sized characters.
Detail (8
7.7lines/mm, 200
200dpi)
Select for originals containing
small characters or when you require greater clarity. This resolution is twice as fine as Standard.
36
Super Fine (optional Expansion Memory required: 16

15.4lines/mm,
400
400dpi)
Select for originals with very fine
details or when you require the
best possible image clarity. This
resolution is eight times as fine as
Standard.
Limitation
If the other party's machine does
not support the resolution at
which you are sending, this machine automatically switches to a
resolution which is supported.
Sending with Super Fine resolution requires that your machine
has the optional Expansion Memory and the other party's machine
has the capability to receive fax
messages at Super Fine resolution.
Note that even if the option is installed on your machine, transmission and reception may take place
using Detail resolution if the other
party's machine does not support
this feature. Chapter 4, "Printed
Report" in the Advanced Features
manual
Note
When the machine is turned on or
modes are cleared, the resolution is
set to Standard by default. You can
change this with the [Gen. Settings/
Adjust] key. Chapter 7, "General
Setting/Adjustment" in the Advanced Features manual
By default, the resolution returns
to the home setting after every
transmission. You can change this
with the [Gen. Settings/Adjust] key.
Chapter 7, "General Setting/
Adjustment" in the Advanced Features manual
Scan Settings
A Press [Resolution].
Original Type
If your original contains photographs, illustrations or diagrams with
complex shading patterns or grays,
select the appropriate Original Type
to optimize image clarity.
B Select the resolution you require.
C Press [OK].
Text
Select Text to send an original containing a high-contrast black-andwhite image. Use this setting even
if your original contains text and
photographs or if you only want to
send clearer text.
Text / Photo
Select Text / Photo to send an original containing both a high-contrast black-and-white image, such
as text, and a halftone image such
as a photograph.
Photo
Select Photo to send an original
containing a halftone image such
as a photograph or a color original.
Note
If you select Text / Photo or Photo,
the transmission will take longer
than when Text is selected.
If you send a fax message with
Text / Photo or Photo and the
background of the received image
is dirty, reduce the density setting
and re-send the fax.
modes are cleared, the Original
Type is set to Text. You can change
this with the [Gen. Settings/Adjust]
key. Chapter 7, "General Sett i n g/ Ad j u st m e nt " i n t he A dvanced Features manual
37
Faxing
By default, the machine returns to

the Original Type home setting after every transmission. You can
change this with the [Gen. Settings/
Adjust] key. Chapter 7, "General
A Press [Original Type].
Image Density (Contrast)

The text and diagrams in your original should stand out clearly from the
paper they are written on. If your
original has a darker background
than normal (for example, a newspaper clipping), or if the writing is faint,
adjust the image density.
Auto Image Density

The appropriate density setting for
the original is automatically selected.
B Select
the original type you re-
quire.
C Press [OK].
38

Use manual image density, to set
image density yourself.
Density
You can adjust image density for
only photographs, illustrations or
diagrams when the original has a
dark background.
Note
modes are cleared, the image density is set to Auto Image Density.
You can change this with the [Gen.
Settings/Adjust] key. Chapter 7,
By default, the machine returns to
the Auto Image Density home setting after every transmission. You
can change this with the [Gen. Settings/Adjust] key. Chapter 7,
Scan Settings
A Selecting the type of image density.
B Press [i
iLighter] or [Darkerj
j] to
change the density.
Auto Image Density

A Make sure that [Auto Image Density] is selected.
2
Note
You can select one of seven
density levels.
Note
If [Auto Image Density] is not
selected, press [Auto Image
Density].
Combined Auto and Manual

Image Density
A Make sure that [Auto Image Density] is selected. If it is not selected, press [Auto Image Density]
to turn it on.
A Make sure that [Auto Image Density] is not selected. If it is selected, press [Auto Image Density]
to turn it off.
B Press [i
iLighter] or [Darkerj
j] to
change the density.
Note
You can select one of seven
density levels.
39
Faxing
Mixing Scan Settings for a

Multiple Page Original
When sending an original consisting
of several pages, you can select different Image Density, Resolution and
Original Mode settings for each page.
Set your original, select the scan settings for the first page, dial and press
the {Start} key as you would normally. Then follow one of the following
two procedures.
When setting originals on the exposure

glass
While the machine is beeping, you
have about 60 seconds (10 for Immediate Transmission) to select density,
resolution and original mode. The remaining time is shown on the display.
A Check which pages you wish to

scan with different settings.
B Remove the previous page and set

the next page.
C Select the Image Density, Resolution and Original Mode.
Note
Adjust settings for each page
before you press the {Start} key.
40
When setting originals in the document

feeder (ADF)
A Check which pages you wish to

scan with different settings.
B Select the Image Density, Resolution and Original Mode before

the next page is scanned.
Dialing
Dialing
There are two main ways to dial a
number:
A Enter
the fax number with the

number keys.
Number keys:
Enter numbers directly using the
key pad on the right side of the operation panel.
Quick Dials:
When you have programed a destination's number in a Quick Dial
key, you can dial the number by
just pressing that key. Additionally, you can store a name that will
appear on the display whenever
you press that Quick Dial.
This section covers these features and
others in more detail.
The digits appear on the display as

you enter them.
Number Keys
Enter numbers directly using the key
pad on the right side of the operation
panel.
Note
Maximum length of a fax number:
254 digits.
You can insert pauses and tones in

a fax number. P.42 Pause, P.43
Tone
If the optional ISDN Unit is installed, you may need to enter a
sub-address. Chapter 4, "Subaddress" in the Advanced Features
manual
Note
{Clear/Stop} key to erase the incorrect digits and try again.
If the optional ISDN Unit is installed, select G3 or G4 before
you go to the next step.
Chapter 4, "Changing the Line
Type" in the Advanced Features
manual
41
Faxing
- Restrictions When Dialing with

the Number Keys
Fax numbers entered with the number keys are programed in internal
memory (separate from memory for
storing original data). Therefore, you
cannot program more than 100 numbers , total, with the number keys for
the following:
Destinations specified in a Memory Transmission (including Confidential Transmission and Polling
Reception)
Transfer Stations and End Receivers specified in a Transfer Request
Destinations and Transfer Stations
specified in a Group
Destinations specified in program
registration
For example, when 90 destinations
are programed in a Group with the
number keys, only 10 destinations
can be dialed for Memory Transmission from the number keys.
Note
When this machine is requested to
transfer a call (i.e. become a Transfer Station), 2 fax numbers are automatically programed. Therefore,
the number of destinations that
can be dialed from the number
keys decreases by two whenever
this machine is requested to transfer a call.
When a total of 100 fax numbers is
programed, only Immediate
Transmission is allowed.
If a memory file is awaiting transmission and the "Memory is full

and you cannot enter with number keys" message is displayed
when dialing with the number keys,

you cannot dial any more numbers.
This is because fax numbers have
been dialed with the number keys
for some of the files awaiting transmission. When these files have been
sent and their fax numbers are deleted from memory, additional fax
numbers can be dialed.
The display shows the percentage
of free memory space for storing
originals. Since fax numbers are
programed in separate memory,
dialing fax numbers with the number keys does not change the percentage on the display.
Pause
Press the {Pause/Redial} key when dialing or storing a number to insert a
pause of about two seconds.
Limitation
You cannot insert a pause before
the first digit of a fax number.
Note
A pause is shown as a "-" on the
display.
You can insert pauses in numbers
programed in Quick Dials.
42
Dialing
Tone
This feature allows a machine connected to a pulse dialing line to send
tonal signals (for example if you want
to use a special service on a tone dialing line). When you press the {Tone}
key, the machine dials the number using tonal signals.
-Sending Tonal Signals by ISDN

(Optional ISDN Unit Required)
You can still send tone signals to a G3
user even if the machine is only connected to an ISDN line.
Note
This feature can only be used for
Memory or Immediate Transmission. You cannot dial through
ISDN using On-hook Dial or Manual Dial.
Quick Dials
Limitation
You cannot place a tone before the
first digit of a fax number.
Some services may not be available

when using the {Tone} key.
Note
A tone is shown as a "" on the display.
- Using the {Tone} key with On

Hook Dial
A
B
C
Press the {On Hook Dial} key.

Enter the fax number with the
number keys.
Press the {Tone} key.
When you have programed a destination's number in a Quick Dial table,

you can dial the number by just selecting the destination from Quick
Dial table.
Additionally, you can store a name
that will appear on the display whenever you press that Quick Dial.
Preparation
You must program the fax number
of destination for the Quick Dial
table prior to using Quick Dial.
P.54 Programing Quick Dials
Note
To check the contents of Quick Dial, print the destination list.
Chapter 7, "Reports/Lists" in the
Reference
P.41 Dialing
43
Faxing
A Set your original and select any
scan settings you require. P.36

Scan Settings
B Press
the title key for the table

with the desired destination key.
C Press
the destination key If the

desired destination key is not
shown, press [U
U] and [T
T] to look
through the table.
-Changing Display Method

A
Press [Dest. Management].

Press [Switch Display].
Select [Display Quick Dial Tbl] or [Display Number Keys].
Press [OK].
Note
To cancel the change, press
[Cancel]. The display appears as
in step B.
Press [Exit].
B
C
Quick Dial Table
Display Number Key

Note
To cancel a selected destination,
press that destination again.
If you wish to dial another destination, press [Add] and repeat
steps B and C.
D Press the {Start}} key.
44
Dialing
Groups
If you frequently send the same message to more than one place, program
these numbers into a Group. Then
you can send the messages to all the
destinations in that Group with just a
few keystrokes. You can also program a name for the Group (for example, "Branch Offices") which will be
displayed before you press the {Start}
key.
Preparation
You need to program the Groups.
P.62 Programing Groups
C Press
the group key for the desired group.
2
A programmed destination and
the total number of destinations is
displayed. Press [U
U Prev.] or [T
T
Next] to see the other destination.
Limitation
Group Dial can be used only for
Memory Transmission; it cannot
be used for Immediate Transmission. The machine automatically
changes to Memory Transmission
when you use Group Dial.
Note
To check the contents of the
Groups, print the list. Chapter 7,
"Group Dial List" in the Advanced
Features manual
Note
{Clear/Stop} key and start again.
A total of 500 destinations programed for Group Dial.
A Set your original and select any

B Press [Group].
45
Faxing
Reception
Selecting the Reception Mode
There are two ways you can set up
your machine to handle incoming
calls:
Manual Reception (external telephone required)
Auto Reception (external telephone required)
Manual Reception
When a telephone call comes in, the
machine rings. If the call is a fax message, you must manually change to
facsimile mode.
Auto Reception
When a telephone call comes in, the
machine automatically receives it as a
fax message. If the call is a fax message, you must manually change to
telephone mode.
Limitation
You cannot select the reception
mode when the Extra G3 Interface
Unit (option) is installed.
The optional external telephone is
required to use this machine as a
telephone.
You cannot select the reception
mode when you use an ISDN line.
46
3. Setup
Initial Settings and Adjustments
You can send information to the other
party when transmitting or receiving
a fax message. This information is
shown on the display of the other machine and printed as a report. The following information can be sent.
Own name
The Own name is sent to the other
party when you send or receive a
fax. This name should include
your name. The Own name is
shown on the display of the other
machine and printed in a report.
You can program letters, symbols, number, and spaces.
Limitation
Own name works only when
the other machine is the same
make and has the Own name
feature.
Note
You can program up to 20 characters in Own name.
Fax Header
The Fax Header is printed on the
header of every fax you send. You
should include your name in Fax
Header.
You can program letters, symbols,
number, and spaces.
Note
You can program up to 32 characters in Fax Header. Chapter 7, "General Setting/
Adjustment" in the Advanced
Features manual
Own Fax Number (Facsimile number

of sender)
The Own Fax Number of the sender is sent to the other party when
sending a fax using a G3 line. The
received Own Fax Number is
shown on the display of the other
machine and printed in a report.
This function is available regardless of the make of the other party's
machine.
Note
You can program up to 20 characters in Own Fax No.
G4 Terminal ID
The optional G4 Unit is required to
use this function.
G4 Terminal ID is available when
the machine is connected to an
ISDN line. This information is
printed by the other party's machine when a fax is transmitted.
You can program letters, symbols,
number, and spaces.
Note
You can program up to 22 characters in G4 Terminal ID.
Important
You can confirm the programed
settings from Parameter Setting.
We recommend that you print
the Parameter List and keep it
when you program or change
settings. Chapter 8, "Printing
the User Parameter List" in the
47
Setup
Programing
E Program the name and Own Fax

Number.
Programing a Fax Header

A Press [First Name] or [Second
Name].
B Press [Facsimile Features].
B Enter a Fax Header.
C Press [Gen. Settings/Adjust].
Reference
P.70 Entering Text
Press [Program Fax Information].
Note
If "Program Fax Information" is
not shown, press [U
U Prev.] or [T
T
Next].
48
C Press [OK].
Programing a Own name
Programing a Own Fax Number
A Press [Own Name].
A Press [Own Fax Number].
B Press [Own Name].
B Select line type to Program.
C Enter a Own name.
Note
The display differs according
to the number of G3 Interface
Unit (option) installed.
When an Extra G3 Interface
Unit (option) is installed
Reference
P.70 Entering Text
D Press [OK].
When two Extra G3 Interface
Units (option) are installed
49
Setup
C Enter a facsimile number.
Reference
P.70 Entering Text
E Press [Facsimile No.].
F Enter a facsimile number using

the number keys.
D Press [OK].
Programing G4 Terminal ID
A Press [G4 Terminal ID].
G Press [OK].
H Press [Terminal Name].
B Press [Country Code].
I Enter a terminal name.
C Enter a country code using the

number keys.
Reference
P.70 Entering Text
J Press [OK].
50
D Press [OK].
F Press [Exit].
G Press the {User Tools/Counter}} key.

mode.
Editing
Note
not shown, press [U
U Prev.] or [T
T
Next].
E Press [Fax Header], [Own Name] or

[Own Fax Number] for editing.
Note
The following procedure explains
how to edit Own name as an example.
F Press the item you want to edit.
G Press [Backspace] or [Delete All] and
D Press [Program Fax Information].
reenter the name or number.
Note
Press [Clear], if you want to edit
Own Fax No., Country Code
and Own Fax No. of G4 Terminal ID.
51
Setup
H Press [OK].
Deleting
Note
The following procedure explains
how to edit Own name as an example.

I Press [Exit].
J Press the {User Tools/Counter}} key.

mode.
D Press [Program Fax Information].
Note
not shown, press [U
U Prev.] or [T
T
Next].
52
E Press [Fax Header], [Own Name] or

[Own Fax Number] for editing.
F Press the item you want to delete.
G Press [Backspace] or [Delete All] and

reenter the name or number.
H Press [OK].
I Press [Exit].

mode.
Note
Press [Clear], if you want to edit
Own Fax No., Country Code
and Own Fax No. of G4 Terminal ID.
53
Setup
Quick Dial
To save time, you can program a fax
number that you use often into a
Quick Dial key. Then, whenever you
are sending a message to that location, just press that Quick Dial key to
dial.
Use the following steps to program a
new Quick Dial or to edit or overwrite
existing Quick Dials.
You can program the following items
in each key:
Destination fax number (up to 254
digits)
You can select a line type for each
destination, when the ISDN Unit
(option) or Extra G3 Interface Unit
(option) is installed.
Setting can also be made for SEP,
SUB, PWD, PID (up to 20 digits),
sub-address (optional ISDN Unit is
required), UUI, and tonal signals.
P.43 Tone, Chapter 4,
"Transmission Features" in the Advanced Features manual
Destination name (up to 20 digits)
Label Insertion (whether to print
the destination name on faxes sent
to this number)
Fax Header (which Fax Header is
printed on faxes sent to this number) Chapter 4, "Sub Transmiss ion M o d e" in th e Ad v an c ed
Features manual
Key Display
You can program the Key Display
shown on the display (up to 16
characters). The Group name (up
to 16 characters of group name)
will be programed as the Key Display automatically if you do not
program a Key Display.
54
Select Title
You can select a title to display
programed destinations. If no specific title is selected, only "Quick
Dial List" will be shown.
Important
We recommend that you print the
Quick Dial list and keep it when
you program or change fax numbers. Chapter 7, "Reports/Lists"
in the Advanced Features manual
Programing Quick Dials

If a receiver is programed in the
Quick Dial table, you can just press
that Quick Dial key to dial.
Limitation
When a programed Quick Dial key
is being used for a standby Memory Transmission, the message
" Specified destination is
used by transmission standby
file. It cannot be changed or
deleted. Specify it again
after transmission is completed. " is shown. You cannot
change the destination for this key.

Note
Up to 400 destinations can be programed. You can program up to
1200 destinations when Fax Function Upgrade Unit is installed.
The maximum number of digits
for a fax number may be less than
254 due to the setting for the F
Code, Space and Sub-address.
Quick Dial
You can program a destination

into the Quick Dial table using
[Prog./Change/Delete] in facsimile
User Tools. Chapter 7, "General
A Press [Dest. Management].
If an unprogramed key is not

shown, press [U
U Prev.] or [T
T
Next].
Press [Change Title] to display
another title.
D Enter the name of the receiver.
B Press
[Program/Change/Delete Quick
Dial].
Note
If the key has been programed,
already the contents are shown.
E Press [OK].
The name has been programed.
F Enter
the facsimile number you

want to program with the number
keys or [1], [2], [3], [4], [5], [6],
[7],[8], [9], [0], [p
p], and [q
q].
C Select
the destination key you

want to program.
Note
If the destination key has not
been programed,[p Not programed] is shown.
Note
You should program a facsimile
number.
If you make a mistake, press
[Clear] and start again.
Press [Adv. Features] to edit F
code, sub-address or UUI.
55
Setup
You can select a line type for

each destination when the ISDN
Unit (option) or Extra G3 Interface Unit (option) is installed.
Press [Select Line] to select a line
type.
Selecting a Fax Header

A Press [Select Fax Header].
B Select [1st Name] or [2nd Name]
for registration.
Programing/Changing Key
Display
A Press [Key Display].
B Enter a Key Display.
C Press [OK].
Programing Label Insertion

A Press [Label Insertion].
B Select [ON] or [OFF].
Note
The name which you programed is shown. P.70
Entering Text
C Press [OK].
The Key Display which you
programed is shown.
Selecting a Title
A Press [Select Title].
B Select the title you want to program.
C Press [OK].
56
Note
If you select [OFF] or if you
want to insert only the receiver name, go to step F.
C Press [Change] at the right side
of the second or third line.
Quick Dial
D Select the standard message to

be stamped at the second or
third line.
Editing Quick Dials

Change the receiver information already programed.
Limitation
When a programed Quick Dial key
is being used for a standby Memory Transmission, the message
E Press [OK].
F Press [OK].
G Press [OK].
"Specified destination is
deleted. Specify it again
after transmission is completed." is shown. You cannot
change the destination for this key.
Note
If you press [Cancel], group is
not programed. The display appears as in step C.
B Select [Program/Change/Delete Quick

Dial].
H Press [Exit] twice.

mode.
57
Setup
C Select
the destination key you

want to change.
Note
If the destination key you require is not shown, press [U
U
Prev.] or [T
T Next].
another title.
D Press the {Clear/Stop}} key or [Clear]

and reenter the facsimile number.
Edit the items only you want to
change. If you do not edit, go to
step E.
Note
Press [Adv. Features] to edit F
code, sub-address or UUI.
You can select a line type for
each destination when the ISDN
Unit (option) or Extra G3 Interface Unit (option) is installed.
Press [Select Line] to select a line
type.
58
Editing a Destination
A Press [Destination].
B Reenter the destination.
Reference
P.70 Entering Text
C Press [OK].
The new destination entered is
shown.
Editing a Key Display

B Reenter the key display.
Reference
P.70 Entering Text
C Press [OK].
The new key display entered is
shown.
Quick Dial
Editing a Title
Editing Label Insertion
A Press [Select Title].

B Select the title you want to edit.
A Press [Label Insertion].

3
Note
You can programed the same
destinations for [Title 1], [Title
2], [Title 3].
When [Freq.] is selected for
one title, [Freq.] is selected for
all titles.
C Press [OK].
Note
If you select [OFF] or if you
want to insert only the receiver name, go to step F.
C Press [Change] at the right side
of the second or third line.
Editing a Fax Header

A Press [Select Fax Header].
B Select [1st Name] or [2nd Name]
and edit them.
D Select the standard message to
be stamped at the second or
third line.
C Press [OK].
E Press [OK].
F Press [OK].
59
Setup
E Press [OK].
Deleting Quick Dials

This procedure describes how to find
a programmed Quick Dial and delete
it.
Limitation
When a deleted Quick Dial key is
being used for a standby Memory
Transmission, the message "Spec-
Note
If you press [Cancel], group is
not programed. The display appears as in step C.
F Press [Exit] twice.
ified destination is used by

transmission standby file. It
cannot be changed or deleted.
Specify it again after transmission is completed." is
shown. You cannot delete the destination for this key.

mode.
B Select [Program/Change/Delete Quick

Dial].
60
Quick Dial
C Press [Delete].
D Select
the destination key to be

deleted.
E Press [Delete].
The destination has been deleted.
Note
If you press [Do not Delete], the
destination is not deleted. The
display appears as in step D.
The information for the destination key is shown.

Note
U
Prev.] or [T
T Next].
another title.

mode.
61
Setup
Groups
Programing Groups
If you send the same message to several destinations at the same time on a
regular basis, program these destination numbers as a Group. This allows
you to dial these destinations with a
single key press.
You can program the following items
in a Group:
Destination fax numbers (up to 500
numbers for each group, up to 254
digits for each number)
Group name (up to 20 characters)
Key Display
You can program the Key Display
shown on the display (up to 16
characters). The Group name (up
to 16 characters of group name)
will be programed as the Key Display automatically if you do not
program a Key Display.
You can edit destinations which are
programed in a group.
Programing Groups
Important
It is recommended that you print
and keep the Group Dial list when
you program or change destinations. Chapter 7, "Reports/
Lists" in the Advanced Features
manual
62
Limitation
When a programed group is being
used for a standby Memory Transmission, the message "Specified
destination is used by transmission standby file. It cannot be changed or deleted.
Specify it again after transmission is completed. " is
shown. You cannot change the destinations for this Group.

Note
The maximum number of Groups
you can program is 64.
The theoretical maximum number
of destinations you can store in a
Group *1 is 500 *2 .
*1
*2
If the same number is programed in

several Groups, it will only be counted as a single item.
There a Maximum of 100 numbers
with the Group key and 100 numbers
entered directly with the number
keys.
Groups
B Press [Program/Change/Delete Group].
E Press [OK].
The name has been programed.
F Specify
the destinations to be
programed in the Group.
C Select the group key you want to
program.
Note
If the group key has not been
programed, [p Not programed]
is shown.
U
Prev.] or [T
T Next].
D Enter the name of the group.
Note
You should program the group
name.
Note
You should program facsimile
numbers using the number keys
or Quick Dial table.
{Clear/Stop} key or [Clear] and
enter again.
When you specify multiple destinations using the number
keys, press [Add].
Press [Dest. List], you can confirm the destinations programed in the group.
G Press [OK].
Note
If you press [Cancel], the group
is not programed. The display
appears as in step C.
Reference
P.70 Entering Text
63
Setup
H Press [Exit] twice.
Reference
Chapter 5, Reception Functions in the Advanced Features
manual
Editing Groups
Change the Groups already programed.
mode.
Limitation
When a programed Group is being
used for a standby Memory Transmission, the message "Specified
- Programing the Group as a

Transfer Station of a Multi-step
Transfer
destination is used by transmission standby file. It cannot be changed or deleted.

Specify it again after transmission is completed." is
A Group can be programed as a

Transfer Station of a Multi-step
Transfer. You should program the receiving stations when you program
the group as a Transfer Station.
For more information, contact your
A Follow step A to F in "Programing
Groups".
B Press [Adv. Features].
C Press [Transfer Req.].
D Press [Receiving Station].
E Specify the receiving station.
Note
When you specify the receiving station with Quick Dial, press [Quick
Dial] and enter the Group Dial
number using the number keys.
F
G
64
When you specify the receiving station with Group Dial, press [Group
Dial] and enter the Group Dial
number using the number keys.
After specifying all of the receiving
stations, press [OK].
Press [Exit].
shown. You cannot change the destination for this key.
B Select [Program/Change/Delete Group].
Groups
C Select the key for the group key

want to change.
Note
If the group key you require is
not shown, press [U
U Prev.] or [T
T
Next].
D Change the contents of the group.
B Press [Backspace] and [Delete All]

to reenter the group name.
Reference
P.70 Entering Text
C Press [OK].
Editing Key Display

Editing a Group Name

A Press [Group Name].
B Press [Backspace] and [Delete All]

to reenter the key display.
C Press [OK].
65
Setup
Editing a destination programed

in a Group
Destinations programed with the

Quick Dial table
A Press [Change] for the destination you want to edit.
A Press the {Clear/Stop}

} key or
[Clear] to cancel the destination.
3
Note
If the destination you require
is not shown, press [U
U Prev.]
or [T
T Next].
B Select the desired destination

key from the Quick Dial table.
B Edit the destination.
Destinations programed with the

number keys
A Press the {Clear/Stop}
} key or
[Clear] and reenter the facsimile
number.
Adding destinations
A Press [Add].
66
Groups
B Add the destination using the

number keys or destination
key.
Deleting Groups
Limitation
When a programed Group is being
used for a Memory Transmission
on standby, the message "Speci-
E Press [OK].
fied destination is used by

transmission standby file.
It cannot be changed or deleted. Specify it again after
transmission is completed." is
shown. You cannot delete destinations for this Group.
Deleting a destination programed in

a Group


mode.
67
Setup
C Select the group key which contains the destination you want to
delete.
Note
If you want to delete another
destination, press [U
U Prev.] or [T
T
Next] to display it.
The programed Group is shown
on the display.
F Press [OK].
3
Note
If the group key you require is
not shown, press [U
U Prev.] or [T
T
Next].
D Press [Change] for the destination

you want to delete.
Note
If you press [Cancel], the display
G Press [Exit] twice.
E Press the {Clear/Stop}} key or [Clear]

to delete the facsimile number.
If you programed the destination
with the number keys, the number
will clear one digit at a time. If you
programed it with the Quick Dial
table, the number will clear all at
once.
68

mode.
Deleting Groups
Groups
C Press [Delete].
E Press [Delete].
The group has been deleted.
Note
If you press [Do not Delete]. The
display appears as in step C.
D Select the key for the group you

want to delete.
Note
If the group key has not been
programed, [p Not programed]
is shown.
If the group key has been programed, the group name or key
display is shown.
69
Setup
Entering Text
This section describes how to enter characters. When you enter a character, it is
shown at the position of the cursor. If there is a character at the cursor position,
the entered character is shown before the character.
Available Characters
Alphabetic characters
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZabcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz
Symbols
Numerals
0123456789
Keys
Note
When entering uppercase or lowercase continuously, use the [Shift Lock] to
lock the case.
70
Entering Text
How to Enter Text

Entering letters
A Press [Shift] to switch between uppercase and lowercase.

B Press the letter you want to enter.
Deleting characters
A Press [Backspace] or [Delete All] to delete characters.
71
Setup
72
4. Troubleshooting
Adjusting Volume
You can change the volume of the following sounds the machine makes.
On Hook
Sounds when the {On Hook Dial}
key is pressed.
Transmission
Sounds when the machine sends a
message.
Reception
Sounds when the machine receives
a message.
Dialing
Sounds after pressing the {Start}
key until the line connect to the
destination.
C Select [Gen. Settings/Adjust].
Printing
Sounds when a received message
has been printed. Chapter 5,
"Print Completion Beep" in the Advanced Features manual
Limitation
Adjusting Volume is not available
with G4 on the optional Extra G3
Interface Unit.
D Select [Adjust Sound Volume].
Note
You can adjust the On Hook volume when you press the {On Hook
Dial} key. Chapter 4, "On-Hook
Dial" in the Advanced Features
manual
You can adjust the optional handset bell volume. Appendix,
"Connecting the Machine to a Telephone Line and Telephone" in the
73
Troubleshooting
E Press [Lower] or [Louder] for each

item.
Note
You can hear the actual volume
by pressing [Check].
F Press [OK].
Note
If you press [Cancel], the volume
setting is canceled. The display
G Press [Exit].
H Press {User Tools/Counter}}.
mode.
74
Error Messages and Their Meanings
Error Messages and Their Meanings

If there is an error, one of the following messages may appear on the display. It
might just flash briefly, so if you are watching for errors, stay by the machine and
check the display.
Message
Problem and Solution
Put original back, check it and press [Start].
Original jammed during Memory Transmission. Reset originals that have not been
scanned.
Error occurred, and transmission was canceled.
A document jam occurred during Immediate

Transmission. Press [OK] and re-send the page
which has been not sent.
An error occurred during Immediate Transmission. Press [OK] and re-send the original.
Note
There may be a problem with the machine
or the telephone line (for example noise or
cross talk). If the error re-occurs frequently,
Cannot detect original size. Place original
again, then press [Start].
The machine failed to detect the size of the

original. Reset originals and press the {Start}
key.
LCall Service
There is a problem with the fax function.

Record the code number shown in the display
and contact your service representative. The
copier function will still work normally.
Functional problems with facsimile. Please call

service.
Memory is full. Cannot scan more. Transmitting only scanned pages.
If you press [OK], the machine returns to the

standby mode and starts transmitting pages
which has been scanned.
75
Troubleshooting
When the {Facsimile} key is Lit in Red

If this key is lit, refer to the table below and take the appropriate action.
Problem
Solution
Paper has run out.
Add paper.
The paper output tray is full.
Remove the paper from the tray.
The machine is in RDS (Remote Diagnostic

System) mode.
Wait with the Main Power switch on. Machine

will go to the standby mode after it exits from
the RDS mode.
A facsimile error has occurred.
The facsimile has a problem. Contact a service

representative. The copier will still function
normally.
Toner is empty.
Replace the toner cartridge.
"Loading Paper" in the Copy Reference
"Adding Toner" in the Copy Reference
76
Solving Problems
Solving Problems
This table lists some common problems and their solutions.
Problem
Solution
Refer to
Image background appears

dirty when received at the
other end.
Adjust the scan density.
P.38 Image Density (Contrast)
Printed or sent image contains

spots.
The Document Feeder (ADF)

or exposure glass is dirty.
Clean them. the Copy Reference manual
---
Make sure that ink or correction fluid is dry before setting

the original.
Received image is too light.
Request the sender to increase

the image density.
---
When using moist, rough or

processed paper, the printed
image may be partly invisible.
Only use recommended paper.
Appendix, "Acceptable
Types of Originals" in the Advanced Features manual
When D appears on the display, toner is beginning to run

out. Replace the toner cartridge soon. the Copy Reference manual
---
Message appears blank at the

other end.
The original was set upside

down. Set it properly.
You want to cancel a Memory

Transmission.
If the original is being programed, press the {Clear/Stop}

key.
P.29 Canceling a Memory

Transmission
If the original is being sent,

use "Change/ Stop TX File".
Chapter 2, "Checking and

Canceling Transmission Files"
in the Advanced Features
manual
You want to cancel an Immediate Transmission.
Press the {Clear/Stop} key.
P.29 Canceling a Memory

Transmission
You cannot add any destinations in a Group at though the

number of destinations has
not reached the maximum.
100 destinations have been

programmed with the number keys (1000 with the optional Expansion Memory).
Program more numbers with
Quick Dials or Speed Dials.
P.41 Dialing
77
INDEX
A
Adjusting Volume, 73
Analog Line Connector, 4
Auto Reception, 46
B
Broadcasting, 24
Bypass Tray, 4
C
Canceling a Memory Transmission, 29
Canceling an Immediate Transmission, 35
Changing Memory Transmission and
Immediate Transmission, 15
Check Modes key, 6
Clear Modes key, 6
Clear/Stop key, 7
Communicating Indicator, 6
Components, 3
Confidential File Indicator, 6
Control Panel, 6
CSIOwn Fax Number, 47
D
Detail, 36
Dialing, 41
Display, 11
Document Feeder (ADF), 3
E
Energy Saver key, 6
Entering letters, 71
Entering Text, 70
Error Messages, 75
Exposure Glass, 3
Extra G3 Interface Unit Connector, 5
H
Handset/External Telephone, 4
Handset/External Telephone Connector, 5
I
Image density, 36
Image Density (Contrast), 38
Immediate Transmission, 13, 15, 32
Interrupt key, 6
L
LCD display, 6
letters, 71
M
Main Power Switch, 4
Manual Reception, 46
Memory Transmission, 13, 15, 24
N
Number keys, 7, 41
O
On Hook Dial key, 7
Operation Switch, 4
Original Type, 36, 37
P
Pause, 42
Pause/Redial key, 7
Photo, 37
Platen, 3
Q
Quick Dial, 41, 43, 54
F
Facsimile key, 7
Faxing, 15
G
Groups, 45, 62
78
R
Receive File Indicator, 6
Reception, 46
Resolution, 36
RTIOwn name, 47
S
Scan Settings, 36
Selecting the Reception Mode, 46
Setting Originals, 16
Setup, 47
Solving Problems, 77
Standard, 36
Start Manual RX key, 6
Super Fine, 36
T
Text, 37
TextPhoto, 37
Tonal Signals, 43
Tone, 43
Tone key, 7
Troubleshooting, 73
TTIFax Header, 47
U
79
MEMO
80
UE
USA
B360
FAX Option Type 1045


<Advanced Features>
ZDPH130e.eps
reference.
FAX Option Type 1045 Operating Instructions
Printed in Japan
UE USA B360-8657
Available Options
Fax Function Upgrade Unit (Fax Function Upgrade Type 185)
Handset (Handset Type 450)
Supplies
Marker Ink (Marker Type 30 is recommended for the best performance)
Copyright 2001
NOTICE
R CAUTION:
Use of controls, adjustments or performance of procedures other than those
specified herein may result in hazardous radiation exposure.
Shielded interconnect cables must be employed with this equipment to ensure
compliance with the pertinent RF emission limits governing this device.
Although this equipment can use either loop disconnect or DTMF signalling,
only the performance of the DTMF signalling is subject to regulatory requirements for correct operation. It is therefore strongly recommended that the equipment is set to use DTMF signalling for access to public or private emergency
services. DTMF signalling also provides faster call set up.
Direct (or indirect) reflected eye contact with the laser beam may cause serious eye damage.
Safety precautions and interlock mechanisms have been designed to prevent any possible laser
beam exposure to the operator.
Note
Some illustrations might be slightly different from your machine.
Certain options might not be available in some countries. For details, please
contact your local dealer.
Important
Parts of this manual are subject to change without prior notice. In no event will
the company be liable for direct, indirect, special, incidental, or consequential
damages as a result of handling or operating the machine.
Trademarks
Microsoft, Windows and Windows NT are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.
Other product names used herein are for identification purposes only and might
be trademarks of their respective companies. We disclaim any and all rights in
those marks.
Note
The proper names of the Windows operating systems are as follows:
Microsoft Windows 95 operating system
Microsoft Windows Millennium Edition (Windows Me) operating system
Microsoft Windows 2000 Professional
Microsoft Windows 2000 Server

Microsoft Windows NT Server operating system Version 4.0
Microsoft Windows NT Workstation operating system Version 4.0
- Notice about the Telephone Consumer Protection Act (Valid in USA

only).
The Telephone Consumer Protection Act of 1991 among other things makes it
unlawful for any person to send any message via a telephone fax machine unless
such message clearly contains in a margin at the top or bottom of each transmitted page or on the first page of the transmission, the date and time it is sent and
an identification of the business, other entity, or other individual sending the
message and the telephone number of the sending machine or such business,
other entity or individual. This information is transmitted with your document
by the TTI (Transmit Terminal Identification) feature. In order for you to meet
the requirement, your machine must be programmed by following the instructions in the accompanying Operation Manual. In particular, please refer to the
chapter of Installation. Also refer to the TTI (Transmit Terminal Identification)
programming procedure to enter the business identification and telephone
number of the terminal or business. Do not forget to set the date and time.
Thank you.
For this machine, TTI is called FAX HEADER.
Note to users in the United States of America
- Notice:
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class
B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed
to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause
harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee
that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does
cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one more of the following measures:
Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which
the receiver is connected.
Consult the dealer or an experienced radio /TV technician for help.
ii
- Warning
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.
Note to users in Canada
- Note:
This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003.
Remarque concernant les utilisateurs au Canada
- Avertissement:
Cet appareil numrique de la classe B est conforme la norme NMB-003 du Canada.
iii
Important Safety Instructions

Caution
When using your telephone equipment, basic safety precautions should always
be followed to reduce the risk of fire, electric shock and injury to persons, including the following:
Do not use this product near water, for example, near a bath tub, wash bowl,
kitchen sink or laundry tub, in a wet basement or near a swimming pool.
Avoid using a telephone during an electrical storm. There may be a remote
risk of electric shock from lightning.
Do not use a telephone in the vicinity of a gas leak to report the leak.
Use only the power cord and batteries indicated in this manual. Do not dispose of batteries in a fire. They may explode. Check with local codes for possible special disposal instructions.
Save these instructions.
Certalnes mesures de scurit doivent tre prises pendant l'utilisation de matrial tlphonique afin de rduire les risques d'incendle , de choc lectrique et de
blessures. En voici quelquesunes:
Ne pas utiliser l'appareil prs de l'eau, p.ex., prs d'une balgnoire, d'un lavabo, d'un vier de cuisine, d'un bac laver, dans un sous-sol humide ou prs
d'une piscine.
viter d'utiliser le tlphone (sauf s'il s'agit d'un apparell sans fil) pendant un
orage lectrique. Ceci peut prsenter un risque de choc lectrique caus par la
foudre.
Ne pas utiliser l'appareil tlphonique pour signaler une fulte de gaz s'il est
situ prs de la fuite.
Utiliser seulement le cordon d'alimentation et le type de piles indiqus dans
ce manual. Ne pas jeter les piles dans le feu: elles peuvent exploser. Se conformer aux grlements pertinents quant l'limination des piles.
Conserver ces instructions.
iv
How to Read This Manual

Symbols
R WARNING:
R CAUTION:

Important
Preparation
Note
Limitation
Reference
[
]
{
}
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Manuals for This Machine......................................................................... 1
Advanced Features (this manual) ................................................................. 1
Basic Features .............................................................................................. 1
1. Transmission Mode
Overview..................................................................................................... 3
Sending at a Specific Time (Send Later) ................................................. 4
Priority Transmission................................................................................ 6
Confidential Transmission ....................................................................... 7
Polling Transmission ................................................................................ 9
Polling Transmission Clear Report.............................................................. 11
Polling Reception .................................................................................... 12
Polling Reserve Report ............................................................................... 14
Polling Result Report .................................................................................. 14
2. Checking and Canceling Transmission Files

Checking Destinations (Destination List) .............................................
Canceling a Transmission ......................................................................
Changing a Destination ..........................................................................
Adding a Destination...............................................................................
Changing the Transmission Time..........................................................
Printing a File...........................................................................................
Re-sending a File.....................................................................................
Printing a List of Files in Memory (Print TX File List) ..........................
15
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
3. Communication Information
Printing the Journal.................................................................................
Checking the Transmission Result (TX File Status) ............................
Checking the Reception Result (RX File Status) ..................................
Displaying the Memory Status ...............................................................
Printing a Confidential Message ............................................................
Confidential File Report...............................................................................
Printing a File Received with Memory Lock..........................................
Personal Boxes........................................................................................
Personal Boxes ...........................................................................................
Printing Personal Box Messages ................................................................
vi
25
27
28
29
30
31
32
34
34
35
Information Boxes ...................................................................................

Information Boxes .......................................................................................
Storing Messages in Information Boxes......................................................
Printing Information Box Messages ............................................................
Deleting Information Box Messages ...........................................................
36
36
36
38
39
4. Transmission Features
Handy Dialing Functions ........................................................................
Chain Dial....................................................................................................
Redial ..........................................................................................................
Advanced Features .................................................................................
SUB Code ...................................................................................................
SID Code.....................................................................................................
SEP Code ...................................................................................................
PWD Code ..................................................................................................
Transfer Request ........................................................................................
Sub-address................................................................................................
UUI ..............................................................................................................
On-Hook Dial............................................................................................
Manual Dial...............................................................................................
Changing the Line Type..........................................................................
Sub Transmission Mode .........................................................................
Book Fax .....................................................................................................
2-Sided Transmission (Double-Sided Transmission) ..................................
Standard Message Stamp...........................................................................
Sending an Auto Document ........................................................................
Sending a Stored File..................................................................................
Stamp..........................................................................................................
Transmission Options .................................................................................
More Transmission Functions ...............................................................
If Memory Runs Out While Storing an Original ...........................................
Parallel Memory Transmission ....................................................................
Checking the Transmission Result..............................................................
Automatic Redial .........................................................................................
Batch Transmission.....................................................................................
ECM (Error Correction Mode) .....................................................................
Broadcasting Sequence ..............................................................................
Checking the Transmission Progress .........................................................
Dual Access ................................................................................................
Transmission with Image Rotation ..............................................................
Simultaneous Broadcast .............................................................................
JBIG Transmission ......................................................................................
Printed Report..........................................................................................
Memory Storage Report..............................................................................
Transmission Result Report (Memory Transmission) .................................
Communication Failure Report ...................................................................
Transmission Result Report (Immediate Transmission) .............................
41
41
41
43
43
44
44
46
46
49
50
51
52
53
55
55
56
57
58
59
65
66
70
70
70
70
71
71
71
71
71
72
72
72
72
73
73
73
73
74
vii
5. Reception Features
Reception ................................................................................................. 75
Immediate Reception .................................................................................. 75
Memory Reception ...................................................................................... 75
Substitute Reception ................................................................................... 76
Screening Out Messages from Anonymous Senders ................................. 76
When the Receive File Indicator is Lit......................................................... 78
When the Confidential File Indicator is Lit or Blinking ................................. 78
Reception Functions ............................................................................... 79
Transfer Station........................................................................................... 79
Transfer Result Report................................................................................ 80
ID Reception (Closed Network)................................................................... 80
JBIG Reception ........................................................................................... 80
Auto Fax Reception Power-up .................................................................... 80
Printing Functions................................................................................... 81
Print Completion Beep ................................................................................ 81
Checkered Mark .......................................................................................... 81
Center Mark ................................................................................................ 81
Reception Time ........................................................................................... 82
2-Sided Printing........................................................................................... 82
180 Degree Rotation Printing...................................................................... 83
Multi-copy Reception................................................................................... 83
Image Rotation............................................................................................ 84
Combine 2 Originals.................................................................................... 84
Page Separation and Length Reduction (Not Available in Some Countries) ... 85
Reverse Order Printing ............................................................................... 85
Page Reduction........................................................................................... 86
TSI Print ...................................................................................................... 86
CIL/TID Print ............................................................................................... 86
When There is No Paper of the Correct Size.............................................. 87
Having Incoming Messages Printed on Paper from the Bypass Tray......... 90
Where Incoming Messages are Delivered - Output Tray ..................... 91
G3/G4 Separate Tray .................................................................................. 91
Tray Shift..................................................................................................... 91
6. Simplifying the Operation

Programs.................................................................................................. 93
Registering Keystroke Programs ................................................................ 93
Deleting a Program ..................................................................................... 96
Using the Document Server ................................................................... 97
Storing a Document .................................................................................... 97
File Manage .............................................................................................. 100
Delete File ................................................................................................. 101
viii
7. Facsimile User Tools

Accessing the User Tools.....................................................................
Function Map. ........................................................................................
Program/Delete Menu............................................................................
Changing the Order of the Quick Dial Table .............................................
Programing Title of the Quick Dial Table ..................................................
Programing Standard Messages...............................................................
Deleting Standard Messages ....................................................................
Storing an Auto Document ........................................................................
Deleting an Auto Document ......................................................................
Programing and Changing a Scan Size ....................................................
Deleting a Scan Size.................................................................................
Reports/Lists..........................................................................................
General Setting/Adjustment .................................................................
Reception Mode.....................................................................................
103
106
108
108
109
111
112
113
115
116
118
119
120
126
8. Key Operator Setting

Changing Key Operator Settings .........................................................
Counters....................................................................................................
Forwarding ................................................................................................
Memory Lock.............................................................................................
ECM ..........................................................................................................
Changing the User Parameters.................................................................
Special Senders to Treat Differently .........................................................
Box Settings ..............................................................................................
Transfer Report .........................................................................................
Programing a Confidential ID ....................................................................
Programing a Polling ID ............................................................................
Programing a Memory Lock ID .................................................................
Selecting Dial/Push Phone........................................................................
Programing ISDN G3 Line ........................................................................
Programing ISDN G4 Line ........................................................................
RDS (Remote Diagnostic System)............................................................
131
131
132
134
135
136
141
151
161
162
163
164
165
166
167
169
9. PC FAX Features
Setting PC FAX Properties ...................................................................
Basic Transmission...............................................................................
Address Book ............................................................................................
Printing ......................................................................................................
LAN FAX Operation Messages .................................................................
172
173
174
175
175
ix
10.Troubleshooting
When Toner Runs Out........................................................................... 177
When Power is Turned off or Fails ...................................................... 178
11.Appendix
Replacing the Stamp Cartridge ............................................................
Connecting the Machine to a Telephone Line and Telephone..........
Connecting the Telephone Line ................................................................
Connecting the Machine to the ISDN .......................................................
Connecting The Optional External Telephone ..........................................
Selecting the Line Type.............................................................................
Multi-port ...................................................................................................
Optional Equipment ..............................................................................
Fax Function Upgrade Unit .......................................................................
Expansion Memory (32MB: DIMM) ...........................................................
ISDN Unit (ISDN Option Type 1045).........................................................
Extra G3 Interface Unit (G3 Interface Unit Type 1045) .............................
Specifications ........................................................................................
Acceptable Types of Originals .............................................................
Acceptable Original Sizes .........................................................................
Original Sizes Difficult to Detect ................................................................
Paper Size and Scanned Area..................................................................
Function List ..........................................................................................
Transmission Mode...................................................................................
Advanced Features ...................................................................................
Sub Transmission Information ..................................................................
Communication Information ......................................................................
Fax User Tools ..........................................................................................
179
180
180
181
181
182
183
184
184
184
185
185
186
187
187
188
188
191
191
192
192
194
195
INDEX...................................................................................................... 199

Two Facsimile Reference manuals are provided, the Basic Features manual and
the Advanced Features manual. Please refer to the manual that suits your needs.
Advanced Features (this manual)

The Advanced Features manual describes more advanced functions, and also
explains settings for key operators.
Basic Features
The Basic Features manual explains the most frequently used fax functions and
operations.
Chapter 1 Getting Started

Describes the parts of the machine and control panel.
Chapter 2 Faxing
Explains about basic transmission. You can also learn about other types of
transmissions and how to switch the Reception Modes.
Chapter 3 Setup
Explains how to store, edit and erase names and fax numbers. Quick Dials
and Groups are also explained. These functions store numbers and save time
when dialing. Also contains information on how to enter letters and symbols.
Chapter 4 Troubleshooting
Explains how to adjust the volume. When unusual messages appear on the
display or the indicator lights, check the list and take the appropriate action.
1. Transmission Mode
Overview
This feature describes various options that you can choose when sending a fax
message. The selections you make will only apply to the current fax message.
Transmission Mode
Sending at a Specific Time (Send Later)

Using this feature, you can instruct
the machine to delay transmission of
your fax message until a later time
which you specify. This allows you to
take advantage of off-peak telephone
charges without having to be by the
machine at the time.
B Press [Transmission Mode].
Transmitter
The Transmission Mode menu appears.
Receiver
C Select
the [Send Later] function

number with the number keys.
Send Later
at 21:00 (9:00PM)
ND1X01E4
For convenience, you can program

the time when your phone charges
become cheaper as the Economy
Transmission time. P.124 Program
Economy Time
Then if you have a non urgent fax,
just select Send Later with Economy
Transmission when you scan it. Faxes
will be queued in memory and will
start being sent at Economy Transmission time.
Note
You can not specify a time more
than 24 hours.
If you wish to use Economy Transmission, program the time when

your phone charges are cheaper.
This feature is only available with
Memory Transmission.
A Place your original and select any

D Enter the time with the number
keys to change AM/PM, press

[AM] or [PM] (North America only)
or press [Economy Time].
Sending at a Specific Time (Send Later)
Note
If the current time shown on the
display is not correct, change it.
"Timer Setting" in the System
Reference manual
When entering numbers smaller than 10, add a leading zero.

{Clear/Stop} key and try again.
To cancel Send Later, press
[Cancel] and the display will return to the Transmission Mode
menu.
Press [Economy Time] to specify
the economy time.
E Press [OK].
The Transmission Mode menu is
shown on the display. The Send
Later key is highlighted, and the
specified time is shown above.
F Press [OK].
The initial display is shown.
G Dial and press the {Start}} key.

Note
You can cancel a message transmission set up for Send Later.
P.17 Canceling a Transmission
Transmission Mode
Priority Transmission
Documents you send with Memory
Transmission are sent in the order
they are scanned in. Therefore, if several messages are queued in memory,
the next document you send will not
be sent immediately. However, by using this feature you can have your
message sent before any other
queued messages.
C Select [Priority TX].
D Press [OK].
E Dial and press the {Start}} key.
Limitation
This feature is not available with
Immediate Transmissionif selected, the machine automatically
switches to Memory Transmission.
If there is already a message stored

with this feature or a transmission
is in progress, your message will
be sent after that message has been
transmitted.

Confidential Transmission
If you do not want your message to be
picked up casually at the other end,
use this feature. The message will be
stored in memory at the other end
and will not be printed until an ID is
entered.
Transmitter
Receiver
ND1X01E5
Preparation
If you install the optional Expansion Memory or Hard Disk option,
program the Confidential ID.
P.162 Programing a Confidential
ID
Limitation
The destination machine must be
of the same make and have the
Confidential Reception feature.
The destination machine must

have enough memory available.
Note
We recommend that you program
the Confidential ID beforehand.
An ID can be any 4 digit number
except 0000.
When the machine is not the same
make, you can use Confidential
Transmission using "SUB Code".

There are two types of Confidential

Transmission:
Default ID
The other party can print the message by entering the Confidential
ID programmed in their machine.
ID Override
Should you wish to send a confidential message to a particular person at the other end, you can
specify the Confidential ID that
person has to see that message. Before you send the message, do not
forget to tell the intended receiver
the ID that must be entered to
print.
C Select [Confidential TX].
Transmission Mode
D Depending
on the Confidential
Transmission type, use one of the
following procedures:
B Enter the confidential ID (4

digit number) with the number
keys.
A Press [Default ID].
B Press [OK].
The Transmission Mode menu
is shown.
The [Default ID] key is highlighted, and Default ID is shown
above.
Note
To cancel Confidential TX,
press [Cancel] and the display
will return to the Transmission Mode menu.
Override ID
A Press [ID Override].
C Press [OK].
The Transmission Mode menu
is shown.
The [Confidential TX] key is highlig hted , and D efault ID is
shown above
Note
To cancel Confidential TX,
will return to the Transmission Mode menu.
E Press [OK].
F Dial and press the {Start}} key.
Note
For details on deleting a Confidential Transmission, seeP.17
Canceling a Transmission.
Polling Transmission
Use Polling Transmission when you
want to leave an original in the machine's memory for others to pick up.
The message will be sent when the
other party calls you up.
Transmitter
(This machine)
Transmission Receiver
Request
ND1X01E7
There are three types of Polling

Transmission.
Free Polling Transmission

Anybody can poll the message
from your machine. The machine
sends it regardless of whether Polling ID's match.
Default ID TX
The message will only be sent if the
Polling ID of the machine trying to
poll your message is the same as
the Polling ID stored in your machine. Make sure that both machines' Polling IDs are identical in
advance.
ID Override Transmission
You must enter an Override Polling ID unique to this transmission.
This ID overrides that stored in the
Polling ID. The user must supply
this ID when they poll your machine and if the IDs match, the
message is sent. Make sure the other end knows the ID you are using
in advance.
Limitation
Polling Transmission is allowed
only if the receiver's machine has
the Polling Reception feature.
Usually, you can only send using

ID Polling Transmission to machines of the same make that support the Polling Reception
function. However, when the Information Box File functions used,
and if the other party's fax machine
supports the Polling Transmission
and the "SEP" feature, you can still
carry out a polling transmission
with an ID.
Note
Free Polling and ID Polling Transmission allow only one file to be
stored in memory.
Personal ID Polling Transmission

allows a file to be stored in memory for each ID; a total of up to 200
files for varying ID's can be stored.
Before using "Default ID Polling"
and "Override ID Polling", you
need to program the polling ID.
A polling ID may be any string of
four numbers (0 to 9) and characters (A to F) except 0000 and FFFF.
The communication fee is charged
to the receiver.

Transmission Mode
Default ID Polling TX
A Select [Default ID TX].
C Select [Polling TX].
B Press [Only Once] or [Save] to delete or save the file after transmission.
Note
To delete the original immediately after transmission, select [Only Once].
To repeatedly send the original, select [Save].
D Depending on the Polling Trans-
mission mode, use one of the following procedures:
Free Polling TX
A Select [Free Polling TX].
B Press [Only Once] or [Save] to delete

or save the file after transmission.
10
Note
ID Override Transmission
A Select [ID Override Transmission].
B Specify a 4 digit ID Code with
the number keys and the [A],
[B], [C], [D], [E] and [F] keys.
Note
[Clear] and try again
C Press [Only Once] or [Save] to delete or save the file after transmission.
Note
E Press [OK].
shown. The [Polling TX] key is highlighted, and the specified mode is
shown above.
Note
To cancel the Polling Transmission, press [Cancel]. The Transmission Mode menu is shown.
F Press [OK].
Polling Transmission Clear

Report
This report allows you to verify

whether Polling Transmission has
taken place.
Limitation
This report is not printed if the
User Parameters are set to allow
the stored originals to be repeatedly sent (Save). P.136 Changing
the User Parameters(Switch11,
Bit7)
Note
This report is turned on by default.
You can turn it off if you wish.
P.136 Changing the User Parameters(Switch03, Bit6)
By default, a portion of the sent image is printed on the report. You
can turn this off with the User Parameters. P.136 Changing the
User Parameters(Switch04, Bit7)
11
Transmission Mode
Polling Reception
Use this function if you want to poll a
message from another terminal. You
can also poll documents from many
terminals with only one operation
(use Groups and Keystroke Programs
to fully exploit this feature).
Receiver
Sender
(This machine)
Transmission
Request
ND1X01E8
There are two types of Polling Reception.
Default ID/Free Polling RX (Reception)

Use this method for Free Polling or
Default ID Polling. If the Polling ID
is programmed in your machine,
any messages waiting in the transmitting machine with the same ID
are received. If the other machine
does not have any messages waiting with the same Polling ID, any
messages that do not require ID
are received (Free Polling).
ID Override Polling Reception
You must enter an Override Polling ID unique to this transmission.
This ID overrides that stored in the
Polling ID.
Your machine will receive any
messages waiting in the transmitting machine with matching ID's.
If no ID's match, any messages that
do not require ID are received
(Free Polling).
12
Limitation
Polling Reception requires that the
other machine can perform Polling
Transmission.
To receive a message sent by any

Default ID Polling Transmission or
Override ID Polling Transmission,
it is necessary to specify the same
polling ID as the sender's.
Usually, you can only receive documents with a polling ID from machines of the same make that
support the polling function. However, if the other party's fax machine
supports Polling Transmission and
the "SEP" function, you can still receive using Polling Reception from
another party's fax machine that has
stored IDs. P.44 SEP Code
Note
A Polling ID may be any four numbers (0 to 9) and characters (A to F)
except 0000 and FFFF.
A Press [Transmission Mode].
Polling Reception
B Select [Polling RX].
B Specify a 4 digit ID Code with

the number keys and the [A],
[B], [C], [D], [E] and [F] keys.
C Depending
which method you

are using, choose one of the following procedures:
Default ID/Free Polling RX

A Press [Default ID/Free Polling RX].
Note
[Clear] and try again
D Press [OK].
shown. The [Polling RX] key is highlighted, and the specified mode is
shown above.
Note
To cancel the Polling Reception,
press [Cancel]. The Transmission Mode menu is shown.
E Press [OK].
ID Override Polling Reception
A Press [ID Override Polling Reception].
F Dial and press the {Start}} key.
13
Transmission Mode
Polling Reserve Report

This report is printed after Polling Reception has been set up.
Note
By default, this report is turned off.
Turn it on with the User Parameters. P.136 Changing the User
Parameters(Switch03, Bit3)
Polling Result Report

This report is printed after a Polling
Reception has been completed and
shows the result of the Polling Reception.
Note
You can also check the result of a
Polling Reception with the Journal.
By default, this report is turned on.

Turn it off with the User Parameters. P.136 Changing the User
14
2. Checking and Canceling

Transmission Files
After you have pressed the {Start} key (after scanning originals), you can check
and edit the destination or settings of Memory Transmission. And you can also
cancel a transmission, change the settings of a transmission, print a stored file,
print a list of stored files and resend a file which failed to transmit.
This feature is available for Memory Transmission, Confidential Transmission,
Transfer Request, Polling Reception and Polling transmission.
Limitation
You cannot check and edit a file being sent or receiving. Also the Confidential
Transmission file and the stored file to be printed as a report cannot be
checked and edited.
Note
There is no file being sent, received or stored by Memory Transmission, if
[Change/Stop TX File] does not appear on the display.
Checking Destinations (Destination List)

B Select [Check/Change Settings].
C Select
files to be changed or
checked.
Note
If desired file is not shown,
press [U
U Prev.] or [T
T Next].
If you select multiple destinations, the file selected first is displayed.

If you select multiple destinations, only the number of files
which have not been transmitted is shown.
You cannot select a file being
sent.
15
Checking and Canceling Transmission Files
D Check a file and press [Exit].
2
E Press [Exit].
16
You can cancel a transmission when
the file is being sent, stored in memory or fails to transmit. All the scanned
data is deleted from memory.
Note
If you cancel a transmission while
the file is being sent, some pages of
your file may have already been
sent and will be received at the
other end.
If transmission finishes while you

try to cancel it, it will not be canceled.

which have not been transmitted is shown
If you select multiple destinations, only one file can be displayed. To display all files,
press [Check/Change Settings].

The file you select to stop transmitting is deleted.
B Select the files you want to stop

transmitting.
Note
To cancel Stop Transmission,
press [Save].
To cancel another transmission,
repeat step B.
D Press [Exit].
Note
If a desired file is not shown,
press [U
U Prev.] or [T
T Next].
To display only files being sent,

press [Files under TX].
17
Changing a Destination
You can delete destinations.
Note
If you delete a destination which
only exists in memory, transmission is also canceled.
D Press [Change] of destination you

want to delete.
A Press[Change/Stop TX File].
E Press [Clear]
to delete a destina-
tion.
B Press [Check/Change Settings].
F Press [OK].
C Select
a file, and delete the desired destinations from it.
Note
To delete another destination,
repeat step C.
G Press [Exit].
Note
press [U
U Prev.] or [T
T Next].
To display files only files being
sent, press [Files under TX].
18
Adding a Destination
Adding a Destination
D Press [Add].
C Select a file, and add the desired

destinations to it.
E Specify the destination.
Note
You can specify the destination
using the number keys.
Repeat steps D and E, if you
want to add another destination.
F Press [OK].
G Press [Exit].
Note
press [U
U Prev.] or [T
T Next].
To display files only which is
being sent, press [Files under TX].
19
Changing the Transmission Time

You can specify the transmission time
with Send Later.
You can also delete the transmission
time. When the transmission time is
deleted, the file starts to transmit immediately.
D Press [Change TX time].

E Press [Clear], and then reenter the
transmis sion time usin g th e

number keys or select [Economy
Time].
C Select a file If you want to change

the transmission time.
Note
The time already specified is
shown.
If you select Economy Time, the

time already specified is entered.
If you press [Transmit Now], the
file is transmitted immediately.
But when there is stored file in
memory, that file will be transmitted after this file.
F Press [OK].
Note
press [U
U Prev.] or [T
T Next].
To display files only files being

sent, press [Files under TX].
20
Note
Repeat step C, if you want to
change another transmission
time.
G Press [Exit].
Printing a File
Printing a File
If you wish to check the contents of a
file that is stored in memory and has
not been sent yet, use this procedure
to print it out.

Note
To cancel a file from printing
before pressing the {Start} key,
will return to step C.
To cancel a file from printing after pressing the {Start} key,

press [Stop Printing] and the display will return to step C.
E Press [OK].
B Press [Print File].
Note
Repeat step C, if you want to
print another file.
F Press [Exit].
C Select a file you want to print.
Note
press [U
U Prev.] or [T
T Next].
To display files only which is

being sent, press [Files under TX].
If you want 2 sided printing,
press [Print 2 Sides].
21
Re-sending a File
This function is valid when the machine is set up with the User Parameters to save messages that could not
be sent in memory.
If you select the failed transmission
file, you can resend it. This feature allows you to transmit a fax message
again. These files will be kept for either up to 24 or 72 hours depending
on how you program this feature.
P.136 Changing the User Parameters(Switch24, Bit1,0)
Note
"TX Failed" displays when the
file fails to transmit.

press [U
U Prev.] or [T
T Next].
If you select multiple destinations, the first file selected is displayed.
which have not been transmitted is shown.
D Press [OK].
Note
To add destinations, press [Add]
to specify.
To cancel transmissions, press

[Cancel] and the display will return to step C.
B Press [Transmit Failed File].
E Press [Exit].
Note
Repeat step C, if you resend another file.
C Select a file you want to resend.
22
Printing a List of Files in Memory (Print TX File List)
Printing a List of Files in Memory (Print TX

File List)
Print this list if you wish to find out
which files are stored in memory and
what their file numbers are. Knowing
the file number can be useful (for example when erasing files).
D Press [Exit].
Note
The contents of an original stored
in memory can also be printed.
P.21 Printing a File
B Press [Print List].

Note
To cancel a file from printing
before pressing the {Start} key,
will return to step B.
To cancel a file from printing after pressing the {Start} key,

press [Stop Printing] and the display will return to step B.
23
24
3. Communication
Information
Printing the Journal
The Journal contains information
about the last 50 communications
made by your machine. It is printed
automatically after every 50 communications (receptions+transmissions).
If the machine installs the optional
ISDN Unit or the optional Extra G3
Interface Unit, you can print the Journal of each line type.
You can also print a copy of the Journal at any time by following the procedure below.
Important
The contents of a Journal printed
automatically is deleted after
printing. If you administer the history of transmissions and receptions, we recommend that you
keep the Journal. You can check total 200 communications (receptions+transmissions) on the
display.
Note
The sender's name column of the
Journal is useful when you need to
program a special sender.
If you do not want the Journal

printed, you can turn it off.
A Press [Information].
B Select [Print Journal].
All
Prints the Journal in order communications made.
Print per File No.
Prints the Journal specified only
by file a number.
Print per User Code
Prints the Journal of communications concerning specified a
User Code.
C Select a printing mode.
25
Communication Information
Selecting [All]
A Press [All].
Note
If you cancel printing, press
[Cancel] and the display will
return to step C.
Selecting [Print per File No.]
A Press [Print per File No.].

B Enter a four digit file number.
Note
If you want to cancel printing, press [Cancel] and the
display will return to step C.
Selecting [Print per User Code]

A Press [Print per User Code].
B Specify an eight digit User
Code with the number keys.
C Press [#
#].
26
D Check the User Code shown on

the display.
Note
If you want to cancel printing, press [Cancel] and the
display will return to step C.

E Press [Exit].
Checking the Transmission Result (TX File Status)
Checking the Transmission Result (TX File

Status)
You can browse a part of the Transmission Result report on the display.
C Check
the transmission result,

and then press [Exit].
Limitation
If a transmission is completed
while you are using this function,
the result will not be shown until
you exit TX File Status and start it
again.
Note
Only the transmission result of the
l as t 2 0 0 c om m u n i c a t i o n s a re
shown.
Note
If a desired transmission result
U Prev.] or
[T
T Next].
The "Destination" shows the fax
nu mber of a sender or Fax
Header Information. If there is a
transmission from a computer,
"-- PCFAX -->" is shown.
D Press [Exit].
B Select [TX File Status].
Displaying file ordered last communications.
27
Checking the Reception Result (RX File

Status)
You can browse a part of the Reception Result report on the display.
C Check
the reception result, and

then press [Exit].
Limitation
If a message is received while you
are using this function, the result
will not be shown until you exit RX
File Status and start it again.
Note
Only the reception result of the last
200 communications are shown.
Note
If a desired reception result is
not shown, press [U
U Prev.] or [T
T
Next].
The "Destination" shows the fax
nu mber of a sender or Fax
Header Information.
D Press [Exit].
B Select [RX File Status].
Displaying file ordered last communications.
28
Displaying the Memory Status
Displaying the Memory Status

Use this function to display a summary of current memory usage. Items
shown are the percentage of free
memory space, the number of received confidential messages, the
number of files to be sent, the number
of memory lock files and the number
of received messages to be printed.
Note
If "Others" is displayed, it
means that one or more Auto
Documents or transfer files
ha ve been stored. P.113
Storing an Auto Document,
P.46 Transfer Request, P.36
Information Boxes
D Press [Exit].
The Information menu is shown.
B Select the [Memory Status] function

C Check
the memory status and

then press [Exit].
29
Printing a Confidential Message

This feature is designed to prevent
messages from being picked up casually by anyone when they are received. If someone sends you a
message using Confidential Transmission, it is stored in memory and
not automatically printed. To print
the message you have to enter the
Confidential ID code. When your machine has received a confidential message, the Confidential File (i)
indicator lights.
Note
If the machine received a message with SUB Code, the Confidential File indicator also lights.
Print a message with SUB Code

using the [Print Personal Box File]
function. P.35 Printing Personal Box Messages
B Press [Information].
Preparation
Before using this function, program your Confidential ID.
P.162 Programing a Confidential
ID
Important
If the Main Power switch is off
more than an hour, all Confidential Messages are deleted. In that
case, use the Power Failure Report
to identify which messages have
been deleted. P.178 When Power is Turned off or Fails
C Select [Print Confidential RX File].
Limitation
You must program the Confidential ID for Confidential Reception
to work.
A Confirm
that the Confidential

File indicator lights.
30
Note
If you receive a fax by Confidential ID Override Reception, enter the Override Confidential
ID.
You need to obtain the Override
Confidential ID from the sender.
Printing a Confidential Message
D Enter a four digit confidential ID

with number keys.
Confidential File Report

By default, this report is printed
whenever your machine receives a
Confidential Message.
Note
You can turn this report off with
the User Parameters. P.136
Changing the User Parameters(Switch04, Bit0)
The confidential ID is not shown

on the display.
Note
You must enter the confidential
ID programed by this machine
when the received file has no
confidential ID.
You must enter the confidential
ID programed by sender when
the file is received. Confirm the
sender's confidential ID in advance.

The received messages are printed.
When printing has finished, the Information menu is shown.
Note
If no Confidential Messages
have been received, the message "No reception file." is
shown. Press [Exit].
If the Confidential IDs or Personal Confidential IDs do not
match, the message "No reception file." is displayed. Press [Exit] to cancel the operation, and
then check the Confidential ID
or Personal Confidential ID
with the other party and try
again.
F Press [Exit].
31
Printing a File Received with Memory Lock

This is a security feature designed to
prevent unauthorized users from
reading your messages. If Memory
Lock is switched on, all received messages are stored in memory and are
not automatically printed. To print
the messages, you have to enter the
Memory Lock ID code. When your
machine has received a message with
Memory Lock, the Confidential File
(i) indicator blinks.
Preparation
Before using this function, program your Memory Lock ID.
P.164 Programing a Memory Lock
ID
Important
If the Main Power switch is turned
off for more than an hour, all messages protected by Memory Lock
will be deleted. In that case, the
Power Failure Report will be printed so you can confirm which messages have been deleted. P.178
When Power is Turned off or Fails
Limitation
Messages received by Polling Reception are automatically printed
even if this feature is switched on.
Note
You can also apply Memory Lock
to messages that come only from
certain senders. P.141 Special
Senders to Treat Differently
32
A Confirm
that the Confidential

File indicator lights.
B Press [Information].
C Select [Print Memory Lock].
D Enter a four digit confidential ID

The confidential ID is not shown

on the display.

When the printing is completed,
the Information menu is shown.
Note
If no messages have been received, while Memory Lock is
switched on, the message "No
reception file." is shown. Press
[Exit].
If the Memory Lock ID does not

match, the message "Specified
code does not correspond to
programed Memory Lock ID."
is shown. Press [Exit] and retry
after checking the Memory
Lock ID.
F Press [Exit].
33
Personal Boxes
This feature lets you set up the machine so that incoming messages addressed to certain users are stored in
memory instead of being printed out
immediately. Each user must be assigned a SUB Code (Personal Code)
that has been designated as a Personal Box beforehand. When the other
party sends their message, they specify the SUB Code of the user they are
sending to. When the message is received, it is stored in the Personal Box
with the matching SUB Code. In order to print a message received into a
Personal Box, you must enter the SUB
Code assigned to that Personal Box.
This enables several individuals or
departments to share a single fax machine yet be able to differentiate between messages. Furthermore, if you
specify a receiver for the Personal
Box, instead of being stored in memory, incoming messages with this SUB
Code appended are forwarded directly to the destination you specify.
This machine
Sender
Personal Box
Receiver
SUB:1111
SUB Code : 1111

Receiver : A
SUB Code : 2222

Receiver : B
SUB Code : 3333
Receiver : Print
GFSINB0N
34
Personal Boxes
Note
To be able to receive messages into
a Personal Box, you must inform
the sender of the SUB Code registered for that Personal Box, and
ask them to send the message using SUB Code Transmission with
that SUB Code. P.43 SUB Code
When messages have been received into Personal Boxes, the

Confidential Reception/Memory
Lock indicator lights and the Confidential File Report is printed.
If a Personal Box is assigned a receiver, incoming messages are
transferred to that receiver with a
forwarding mark stamped on
them. If a receiver is not assigned,
P.35 Printing Personal Box Messages for how to print these messages out.
Personal Boxes
Printing Personal Box Messages

Follow these steps to print a message that
has been received into a Personal Box.
Preparation
Personal Box in advance. P.151
Box Settings
Note
If a desired box is not shown,
press [U
U Prev.] or [T
T Next].
When password is required

A Enter a password.
Note
The Confidential File (i) indicator lights when a message has been
received into a Personal Box.
If you print a Personal Box message, it is deleted.
B Press [OK].
Note
the {Clear/Stop} key or [Clear]
and try again.

B Select [Print Personal Box File].
Note
To stop printing, press [Stop
Printing]. The display will return
to step C.
E Press [Exit].
Note
If there are messages in other
Personal Boxes, the display will
return to step C. Repeat from
step C to print another file.
C Enter a box you want to print.
F Press [Exit].
35
Information Boxes
Use the Information Box feature to set
up the machine as a fax information
service or document server. By scanning documents into Information
Boxes, other parties can receive these
messages whenever they request
them.
This machine
Register
Documents
Information Box
SEP Code : 4444
SEP Code : 5555
Print
Receiver
Follow these steps to store a message

in an Information Box.
Preparation
Information Box in advance.
SEP:2222
Note
One Information Box stores one
file.
Transmission
Request
SEP Code : 6666
GFKEIB0N
Information Boxes
Note
Program documents for this feature using theStoring Messages in
Information Boxes P.36
For other parties to be able to retrieve a message programed in an

Information Box, you need to inform them of the SEP Code assigned to that Information Box.
When a SEP Code Polling Reception request is made by another
party, the SEP Code they specify is
compared with the SEP Code programed in that Information Box. If
the codes match, the message
stored in the Information Box is
sent to the other party automatically.
To check on the contents of Information Boxes, use the Printing Information Box Messages P.38
36
Storing Messages in
Information Boxes
The stored file is not deleted automatically. If you want to delete a

stored file. P.39 Deleting Information Box Messages
If you want to change the stored
file, delete the file in advance.
The information menu is shown.
B Select [Store/Delete/Print Information

Box File.].
Information Boxes
C Select a box you want to store the
D Place the original and select any
Note
press [U
U Prev.] or [T
T Next].
Note
You can also select the following settings.
file.
You cannot select a box which

has a already stored. If you
want to change the stored file,
delete the file in advance.
When password is required

A Enter a password.
B Press [OK].
Note
and try again.
Book Fax
2 Sided Original
Stamp

The machine starts to scan the original.
To stop scanning, press [Stop Scanning] and the display will return to
step C.
Note
When you place an original on
the Exposure glass, place an another original within 60 seconds. When there is no other
original, press [#
#].
F Press [Exit].
Press the {Start} key.

Repeat step C to store a file into another box.
G Press [Exit].
37
Printing Information Box

Messages
D Select a box you want to print.

The SEP Code and box name are
displayed.
Follow these steps to print a message

stored in an Information Box.

Box File.].
Note
press [U
U Prev.] or [T
T Next].
You cannot select a box which
has no stored file.
When the password is required

A Enter a password.
C Press [Print File].

B Press [OK].
Note
and try again.

The machine starts to print.
Note
To stop printing, press [Stop
Printing] and the display will return to step D.
38
Information Boxes
F Press [Exit].
Repeat step D to print another

stored file in the box.
G Press [Exit].
D Select
a box that contains the

stored file you want to delete.
The SEP Code and box name are
displayed.
Deleting Information Box

Messages
Follow these steps to delete a message

stored in an Information Box.
Note
press [U
U Prev.] or [T
T Next].
You cannot select the box which
has no stored file.
When the password is required

A Enter a password.

Box File.].
B Press [OK].
C Press [Delete File].
Note
and try again.
E Press [Yes].
The file is deleted.
Note
To cancel deleting, press [No]
and the display will return to
step D.
39
F Press [Exit].
Repeat step D to delete another

stored file in the box.
G Press [Exit].
40
4. Transmission Features
Handy Dialing Functions
Chain Dial
Redial
This allows you to compose a telephone number from various parts,

some of which may be stored in
Quick Dials and some of which may
be entered using the number keys.
The machine memorizes the last 10

destinations that have been dialed. If
you wish to send a message to a destination which you faxed to recently,
the Redial feature saves you time by
finding and entering the number
again.
Note
Maximum length of a telephone or
fax number: 254 digits
For Memory Transmission and Immediate Transmission, insert a

pause between numbers. For Onhook Dial and Manual Dial, no
pause is needed.
- (Example) 01133-1-555333
Assume that 01133 is stored in Quick
Dial 01.
A Place the original and select any
B Press the Quick Dial key {0001}.
C Press the {Pause/Redial} key.
D Enter {1}, {5}, {5}, {5}, {3}, {3},
{3} with the number keys.
E Press the {Start} key.
Limitation
The following kinds of destinations are not memorized:
Quick Dials
Group Dials
Destinations dialed by a Program
Destinations dialed as End Receivers for Transfer Request
Forwarding terminal of the substitute reception
Destinations dialed using the
external telephone or optional
handset keypad
Destinations dialed by Redial
(regarded as already memorized)
Any destinations after the first
number if multiple destinations
were dialed
Do not dial any numbers before
you press the {Pause/Redial} key. If
you press the {Pause/Redial} key after entering numbers using the
number keys, a pause will be entered instead.
41
Transmission Features
Note
If the receiver uses a fax machine
of the same manufacturer that is
capable of programing the Own
Name, that name may be shown
on the display instead of the fax
number.
A Press the {Pause/Redial}} key.
B Select a destination you want to

redial.
42
Advanced Features
Advanced Features
SUB Code
Normally you can only use Confidential Transmission to send to fax machines of the same make that have the
Confidential Reception feature. However, if the other machine supports a
similar feature called "SUB Code",
you can send fax messages to the other party using this method instead.
Limitation
You can only use this feature with
a G3 line (not with G4).
C Press [Adv. Features].

The advanced feature menu is
shown.
4
D Select [SUB Code].
You cannot use Chain Dial with

this feature.
You cannot select this function
when carrying out standard Confidential Transmission.
Note
The ID can be up to 20 digits long
and consist of spaces, * and # .
Make sure the ID matches the
specification of the fax you are
sending to.
You can store IDs in Quick Dials,
Groups and Programs.
Messages you send using this feature are marked "SUB" on all reports.

B Dial
E Press [TX SUB Code].
F Enter
a SUB Code with the

number keys.
the fax number using the

number keys.
43
G Press [OK].
SUB Code appears one line under
the fax number on the display.
H Press [Exit].
To enter a password, press [Password (SID)].
I Press the {Start}} key.

Note
If you use Immediate Transmission and the destination fax machine does not support the SUB
Code feature, a message will appear on the display to inform
you of this. In this case, press
[OK] to cancel the transmission.
SID Code
There are times when you may wish
to use a "SID" (Sender ID) when sending confidential faxes with the SUB
Code feature.
Limitation
You can enter a SID up to 20 digits
long.
Note
Messages you send using this feature are marked "SID" on all reports.
SEP Code
Normally you can only use Polling
Reception to receive faxes from machines that have the Polling Recept io n fea t u re o f th e s a m e m a ke .
However, if the other machine of another make supports a polling reception, you can receive fax messages
from the other party using this method instead.
Limitation
a G3 line (not with G4).
You cannot use Chain Dial with

this feature.
Note
The ID can be up to 20 digits long.
Make sure the ID matches the

specification of the fax you are
sending to.
You can store IDs in Quick Dials,
Groups and Programs with the
number keys, and consist of space,
* and #.
Messages you receive using this
feature are marked "SEP" on all reports.
A Dial
the fax number using the

number keys.
B Press [Adv. Features].
The advanced features menu is

shown.
44
Advanced Features
C Select [SEP Code].
H Press [Transmission Mode].
D Press [RX SEP Code].
I Select [Polling RX].
E Enter
a SEP Code with the

number key.
F Press [OK].
A SEP Code appears one line under the fax number on the display.
G Press [Exit].
J Press [Default ID/Free Polling RX].
Note
To cancel Polling RX, press [Cancel] and the display will return
to step I.
K Press [OK].
shown.
The [Polling RX] key is highlighted,
and "Free/Default ID poll" is
shown above.
L Press [OK].
M Press the {Start}} key.

45
PWD Code
The following terminology is used in

this section.
There are times you may wish to use

a password when receiving faxes by
polling with the SEP Code feature.
Requesting Party
The machine where the message
originates from.
Limitation
You can enter a password up to 20
digits long.
Transfer Station
The machine that forwards the incoming message to another destination.
Note
Messages you send using this feature are marked "PWD" on all reports.
Transfer Request
Transfer Request allows fax machines
that have this feature to automatically
distribute incoming messages onto
multiple fax destinations. This feature
helps you save costs when you send
the same message to more than one
place in a distant area, and saves time
since many messages can be sent in a
single operation.
The diagram below may make the
concept clearer.
The Transfer Stations you specify
must be machines of the same make
as this machine and have the Transfer
Station function.
Requesting
party
End Receiver
Transfer
Station
End Receiver
End Receiver
The final destination of the message,
or the machine the Transfer Station
sends to. End Receivers must be programmed into Quick Dials or
Groups in the Transfer Station.
Limitation
Polling ID's of the requesting party
(this machine) and Transfer Stations must be identical.
You can specify up to 99 Transfer

Stations in a Transfer Request.
However, you can only specify up
to 50 Transfer Stations from the
number keys.
You can have up to 30 End Receivers per Transfer Station. If you
specify a Transfer Station Group,
the Group counts as a single receiver.
The combined total of End Receivers and Transfer Stations you specify with the number keys cannot
exceed 99.

Transfer
Result Report
End Receiver
ND1X01E9
46
Preparation
Before you can use this feature,
you must program the Polling ID.
P.163 Programing a Polling ID
B Dial a Transfer Station.

Note
Enter the fax numbers of the
Transfer Stations with either
Quick Dials or the number keys.

{Clear/Stop} key and try again.
Advanced Features

shown.
D Select [Transfer Req.].
F Dial a End Receiver.
Note
You cannot enter the numbers
of the End Receivers directly.
The numbers must be stored in
Quick Dials or Groups in the
Transfer Station(s). To specify
an End Receiver, use the special
format described in, P.48
Specifying an End Receiver
G When you have specified all the

End Receivers, press [OK].
E Press [Receiving Station].
H Press [Exit].
Note
To cancel the Transfer Request,
will return to step D.
Note
The Transfer Stations and End
Receivers are displayed.

47
Specifying an End Receiver

When you make a Transfer Request,
you must specify the final destinations (End Receivers) for your message.
You cannot enter the numbers of the
End Receivers directly. Instead, enter
a simple code that describes where
the numbers are stored in the Transfer Station (in Quick Dials or Groups).
The numbers must first have been
stored in Quick Dials or Groups in the
Transfer Station(s).
Quick Dial
A Press [q Quick Dial].
B Enter the number (2 or 3 digits)
of the Quick Dial where the End
Receiver is stored.
48
Speed Dial
A Press [qp Speed Dial].
B Enter the number (2 or 3 digits)
of the Speed Dial code.
Note
For example, to choose the
number stored in Speed Dial
12 in the Transfer Station, enter: {1} {2}
Press [Add] if you wish to enter more End Receivers.
Press [U
U Prev.] or [T
T Next] to
see the End Receivers already entered. You can select
an End Receiver from this list
and remove it by pressing
the {Clear/Stop} key or [Clear].
To cancel the Transfer Request, press [Cancel].
Note
number stored in Quick Dial
01 in the Transfer station, enter: {0} {1}.
Group Dial
A Press [qpp Group Dial].
B Enter the number (2 digits) of
the Group number.

Press [U
U Prev.] or [T
T Next] to
Note
number stored in Group Dial
04 in the Transfer station, enter: {0} {4}.

Press [U
U Prev.] or [T
T Next] to
Advanced Features
Sub-address
D Select [Sub-address/UUI].
The optional ISDN Unit is required.

ISDN allows two or more terminals
(such as a fax machine and digital telephone) to be connected to a single
line. These terminals are identified by
their sub-address numbers. If the terminals connected to the line at a destination are assigned sub-addresses,
dialing a sub-address allows you to
direct your fax message to a particular terminal at the destination.
E Select [Sub-address].
Limitation
Sub-addresses can only be used
with ISDN.
Note
You can program a sub-address in
Quick Dial.
A Select either G4 or G3 (ISDN).
F Enter the destination sub-address

Note
When the optional ISDN Unit is
installed, the line used for G3 is
set to ISDN.
B Dial
the fax number with the

number keys.
G Press [OK].
H Press [Exit].
49
F Enter
the destination UUI with

the number keys.
UUI
Limitation
UUI can only be used with ISDN.
Note
You can program a UUI in Quick
Dial.
A Select G4.
B Dial the fax
number with the
number keys.
D Select [Sub-address/UUI].
E Select [UUI].
50
G Press [OK].
H Press [Exit].
On-Hook Dial
On-Hook Dial
This is just like using the external telephone, except you do not have to
pick up the external telephone before
dialing. Just press the {On Hook Dial}
key and dial the number. If you hear
a voice, you can pick up the external
telephone and speak with the other
party.
Limitation
This feature is not available in
some countries.
On-Hook Dial does not work with

ISDN lines.
This feature is not available for the
optional Extra G3 Interface Unit.

Reference
Chapter 2, "Setting Originals"
in the Basic Features manual
Chapter 2, "Scan Settings" in

the Basic Features manual
B Press the {On Hook Dial}} key.
C Dial.
The machine immediately dials the

destination. If you make a mistake,
press the {On Hook Dial} or {Clear
Modes} key and return to step B.
D When the line is connected and
you hear a high-pitched tone,

press the {Start}
} key.
If you hear a voice, pick up the
external telephone before you
press the {Start} key and notify
the destination that you want to
send a fax message (ask them to
switch to Facsimile mode).
After transmission, the machine
You will hear a low tone from the

internal speaker. If you wish to
cancel this operation, press the {On
Hook Dial} key again.
51
Manual Dial
The external telephone or optional Handset is required.
Pick up the handset of the external
telephone and dial. When the line is
connected and you hear a highpitched tone, press the {Start} key to
send your fax message. If, on the other hand, you hear a voice at the other
end, continue your conversation as
you would normally over the telephone.
Limitation
Manual Dial does not work with
ISDN lines.
This feature is not available for the

optional Extra G3 Interface Unit.
The result of the transmission with
manual dial is not mentioned in
the Transmission Result Report
(Immediate Transmission).
When the Economy Transmission
mode has just been changed to
night, there is no sounds for a period of 4 seconds (Max) when you
pick up the handset. You can operate the machine after hearing a
tone.

Reference
Chapter 2, "Setting Originals"
Chapter 2, "Scan Settings" in

B Pick up the external telephone.

You will hear a tone.
52
C Dial.
The machine immediately dials the

destination.
If you make a mistake, replace the
external telephone and try again
from step B.
D When the line is connected and
you hear a high-pitched tone,

press the {Start}
} key to send your
fax message.
Note
If you hear a voice, notify the
destination that you want to
send a fax message (ask them to
switch to Facsimile mode).
E Replace the handset of the external telephone.

After transmission, the machine
Changing the Line Type
Changing the Line Type

The optional ISDN Unit or Extra G3 Interface Unit is required.
When the optional ISDN Unit and Extra G3 Interface Unit are installed,
you can connect to up to a maximum
of 3 lines.
G4
ISDN line is selected.
Limitation
When sending a fax, you can select
the line type if dialing with the
number keys or Chain Dial.
Up to 2 Extra G3 Interface Units

can be installed on this machine.
However, if the machine installs a
ISDN Unit, only one Extra G3 Interface Unit is able to install.
Note
When you install the optional
ISDN Unit or Extra G3 Interface
Unit, you can specify the line type
home position from "Gen. Settings/Adjust". By default, the machine is set to "G3 Auto". P.120
General Setting/Adjustment
G3
G3 is selected after power up or
when the machine is reset. If you
install Extra G3 Interface Unit, you
can select "G3-1", "G3-2" or "G3-3"
depending on the number of the
installed unit.
4
Limitation
If you select G4 mode, JBIG
compression is not available.
Which line is used for G3 transmissions?

ISDN lines can be used for G3 communication as well as G4 communications. If the machine
connected with an ISDN and analog (PSTN) line, each line can be
available by selecting "G3 Auto".
Select "I-G3" when you use the
ISDN line for a G3 transmission.
Note
If you wish to use an analog
(PSTN) line for G3 transmission, contact your service representative.
When you use G3 with ISDN,
you can set the sub-address.
53
A Press [Select Line].
B Select the line you want to use.
When an optional Extra G3 Unit is

installed.
When two optional Extra G3 Units

are installed.
C Press [Exit].
When an optional ISDN Unit is Installed.
When an optional ISDN Unit and

optional Extra G3 Unit are installed.
54
Auto Identification
This feature is used when G4 is
selected. The machine first tries
a G4 communication and if it
cannot connect because the receiver is not a G4 terminal, it automatically switches to G3 and
redials.
Note
If the G3 line at the destination is connected to the ISDN
via a TA (Terminal Adapter)
or a PABX, since the called
number is on ISDN, it is regarded as G4 and the Auto
Identification feature may
not automatically switch this
machine to G3.
Sub Transmission Mode

C Select [Book Fax].
Book Fax
Use to send book originals from the
Exposure glass. Pages are scanned in
the order shown below.
Limitation
Depending on the paper sizes
available on the destination machine, the message may be reduced
when printed at the other end.
D Select the size of the original.
Exposure glass
THYS980E
Note
You can have bound originals
scanned in left page first or right
page first. By default, the machine
scans in the left page first, but you
can change this setting with the
User Parameters. P.136 Changing the User Parameters(Switch06,
Bit6)
A Place your original on the Expo-
sure glass and select any scan settings you require.
B Press [Sub TX Mode] .
Note
To cancel this mode, press [Cancel]. The Sub Transmission
Mode menu is shown on the
display.
If you choose A3, the original
will be sent using Image Rotation Transmission.
E Select [From first Page] or [From second Page].
The Sub Transmission Mode menu

is shown.
55
Note
Select "From first Page" to send
a book original from the first
page.
Select "From second Page" if

you want to send a cover letter
as the first page.
A Place your original in the Document Feeder (ADF) and select any
B Press [Sub TX Mode].
F Press [OK].
The [Book Fax] key is highlighted,
and the selected file name is shown
above.
G Press [OK].
H Dial and press the {Start}} key.
2-Sided Transmission
(Double-Sided Transmission)

is shown.
C Select [2 Sided Original].
Use this feature to send 2-sided originals, the Document Feeder (ADF) is
required.
Limitation
The front and back of the scanned
original will be printed in order on
separate sheets at the other end.
The orientation of alternate sheets
may be reversed at the other end. If
you want to print the original with
the same orientation at the other
end, specify the "Original Position"
and "Page Opening Orientation".
This feature is only available with

Memory Transmission.
This feature is only available using
the Document Feeder (ADF).
Note
You can confirm whether both
sides were properly scanned in
with the Stamp feature. P.65
Stamp
56
D Specify original position.

Note
Make sure that the specified
Original Position matches the
orientation of originals loaded
in the Document Feeder (ADF).
E Specify page opening orientation

from [Top to Top] or [Top to Bottom].
F Specify
the transmission mode

from [2 Sided from 1st Page] or [1 Sided for 1st Page].
G Press [OK].
The [2 Sided Original] key is highlighted, and "Original position"
and "Page Opening Orientation"
are shown above.
A Place
your originals and select

any scan settings you require.

is shown.
C Select [Std. Message].

Standard Message Stamp
Use this feature to stamp a standard
message at the top of the first original
sent.
There are four types of standard messages: "Confidential", "Urgent",
"Please phone" and "Copy to corres.
section"
You can also program other messages.
Note
While this feature is in use, the second and third lines of the "Label
Insertion" are not printed.
When there is an image around the

area where the standard message is
to be stamped, that image is deleted.
To program a standard message,
use the "Program/Change/Delete
Standard Message" function.
P.111 Programing Standard Messages, P.112 Deleting Standard
Messages
D Select the standard message to be

stamped.
Note
Programed standard messages
are shown in the keys. If there
are none programed, the message "pNot Programed" is
shown.
The machine cannot stamp multiple standard messages.
57
E Press [OK].
The "Std Message" is highlighted,
and the selected standard message
is shown above.
F Press [OK].
Sending an Auto Document
If you often have to send a particular
page to people (for example a map, a
standard attachment or a set of instructions), store that page in the
memory as an Auto Document. This
saves rescanning the document every
time you want to send it.
You can fax an Auto Document by itself, or attach it to a normal fax message.
When sending an Auto Document

with another original, the Auto
Document is sent first.
Storing Auto Documents reduces
the amount of free memory slightly. Unless you delete the document, free memory will not return
to 100%.
You can print an Auto Document
or a summary of Auto Documents
currently stored in memory.
P.119 Reports/Lists

When you fax an Auto Document
by itself, go to step B.
Preparation
You need to program an Auto Document. P.113 Storing an Auto
Document
Important
Whenever you store or change an
Auto Document, we recommend
that you print the Auto Document
list for reference. P.119 Reports/
Lists
Limitation
You can attach one Auto Document to each transmission.
Note
You can store up to 6 Auto Documents (up to 18 with optional Expansion Memory installed).
P.113 Storing an Auto Document
Originals with Auto Documents

are sent by Memory Transmission.
58

appears.
C Select [Auto Document].
D Select Auto Document file.

When you fax an Auto Document
by itself, press [TX Stored File(AD)
Only].
Note
Programed Auto Documents
are shown in the keys. If there
are none programed, the message "pNot Programed" is
shown.
press [U
U Prev.] or [T
T Next].
[Cancel] and try again.
To cancel the Auto Document,
will return to step C.
E Press [OK].
The "Auto Document" is highlighted, and the selected file name is
shown above.
F Press [OK].
Sending a Stored File

Use this feature to send documents
that are stored in the Document Server. You can specify and send multiple
documents, and also send them with
scanned originals all at once.
You can also print the stored originals
with [Print File].
Preparation
Store the documents to be sent in
advance. P.97 Using the Document Server
Limitation
Only the documents that are
stored using the fax feature can be
sent or printed by pressing the
{Facsimile} key. Documents stored
using the copy feature or printer
feature can be printed by pressing
the {Document Server} key. "Document Server" in the Copy Reference manual
Sending Stored Documents

The machine sends documents that
are stored in the document server.
The documents stored in the document server can be sent again and
again until they are deleted. Once
sent, the documents are stored into
the document server. Therefore, you
can send them in just one operation
without having to set your originals
again.
Limitation
sent. Documents that are stored
using the printer feature or scanner feature cannot be sent.
59
You cannot use the following

transmission methods.
Free Polling transmission
ID Polling transmission
Personal ID Polling transmission
Immediate transmission
Batch transmission
On-hook Dial
Manual Dial
B Select [Select Stored File].
C Select the documents to be sent.
Note
You can specify a maximum of 30
documents at one time.
The machine can send a total of 400

pages in one operation. With the
optional Expansion Memory, it can
send a maximum of 1000 pages.
The specified documents are sent
with the scan settings of when they
were stored.
The stored documents are given
"File Names", such as "FAX001"
and "FAX002", automatically.
However, you can change the file
names. P.100 File Manage
You can attach "User Names" to
the stored documents. P.100
File Manage
A Press [Sub TX Mode].
Note
When multiple documents are
selected, they are sent in the order of selection.
Press the [TX Order] key to arrange the order of the documents to be sent.
Press the [File Name] key to place
the documents in alphabetical
order.
Press the [User Name] key to
place the documents in order by
the programed user name.
Press the [Date] key to place the
documents in order by the programed date.
Specifying Documents from the

"File List"
The Sub TX Mode menu is shown.
60
A Press [U
U Prev.] or [T
T Next] to display the documents to be sent.
B Select the file name.

"File Name"

"User Name"
A Press the [Search by File Name]

key.
A Press the [Search by User Name]

key.
B Enter the name of the document to be sent.
B Press or select the user name of

the document to be sent.
Note
The file name is searched by
partial matching.
Note
If the user name of the document to be sent is not displayed, press [U
U Prev.] or [T
T
Next].
Reference
Chapter 3, "Entering Text"
C Press [OK].
D Select the file name.
To search by entering the

user name, press [Non-programed Name] and enter the
user name. The user name is
searched by partial matching.
Reference
C Press [OK].
61
D If you select a document with a

password, enter the password.
If the document does not have a
password, proceed to step F.
G Press [OK].
Note
To add an original to the stored
documents, place the original
and select any scan settings you
require.

Printing Stored Documents
E Press [OK].
F When you want to add your origi-
nals to the stored documents and

send them all at once, press [R
R
Origi. + Stored File] or [Stored file + R
Origi.].
When sending only the stored documents, go to step G.
Use this feature to print the documents stored in the document server.
Limitation
printed. Documents stored using
the fax feature are shown with an
"F" in front. To print documents
that are stored using the copy feature or printer feature, press the
{Document Server} key. See the
Copy Reference and Printer reference for details.
Reference
Document Server in the Copy
Reference manual
Note
When the [R Origi. + Stored File]
key is pressed, the machine
sends in the order of "Originals"
to "Stored Files". When the
[Stored file + R Origi.] key is
pressed, the machine sends in
the order of "Stored Files" to
"Originals".
The added originals are not
stored.
62
Note
You can also print the first page
only to check the content of the
original.
You can specify and print multiple

documents.
When specifying and printing
multiple documents, page numbers are put on all the files. You can
specify whether to put page numbers on your files in "User Parameters". The factory default is set to
"Print". P.136 Changing the User
Press [Date] to place the documents in order by the programed date.

To see details of the selected
document, press the [Detail] key.
To return to the standby menu,
press the [File List] key.

is shown.
B Press [Select Stored File].
4
Selecting a Document from "File
List"
C Select the document to be printed.
A Press [U
U Prev.] or [T
T Next] to display the document to be sent.
B Select the file name.
Specifying a Document from the

"File Name"
A Press [Search by File Name].
Note
If you cannot find the document
you want to print, press [U
U
Prev.] or [T
T Next].
Press [File Name] to place the
documents in alphabetical order.
Press [User Name] to place the
documents in order by the programed user name.
63
B Enter the file name to be sent.
Note
The file name is searched by
partial matching.
Reference
C Press [OK].
Specifying a Document from the

"User Name"
A Press [Search by User Name].
B Press the user name of the document to be sent.
Note
If the user name of the document to be sent is not shown,
press [U
U Prev.] or [T
T Next].
To search by entering the

user name, press the [Nonprogramed Name] key, and
then enter the user name. The
user name is searched by
partial matching.
Reference
C Press [OK].
D Press [Print File] or [Print 1st Page].

When the [Print File] key is pressed,
the machine prints all the pages.
When the [Print 1st Page] key is
pressed, the machine prints only
the first page.
Limitation
When "Print 1st Page" is selected, originals larger than size A4
are printed after they are reduced to A4 size.
The machine can print up to 30
files using the "Print 1st Page"
feature.
Note
To print both sides, press [Print 2
Sided].

Note
When only the first page is
printed, the file name is printed
at the top of the paper.
To cancel printing, press [Cancel].
64
Stamp
Optional Document Feeder (ADF) is required.
When sending a fax message using
the Document Feeder (ADF), the machine can stamp a circle mark at the
bottom of the original. When sending
a double sided document, they are
marked at bottom of the front page
and top of the rear page. This stamp
indicates that the original has been
successfully stored in memory for
Memory Transmission, or that it has
been successfully sent for Immediate
Transmission.
By default, Stamp is turned off. If

you use this feature often, you can
adjust the "Gen. Settings/Adjust"
so that the home setting is on. In
this case, Stamp can easily be
turned off for any single transmission by pressing [Stamp].

The Sub Transmission menu is

shown.
C Press [Stamp].
Limitation
Stamp only works when scanning
from the Document Feeder (ADF).
You cannot turn the Stamp feature
on or off while a document is being
scanned.
Do not open the document feeder
(ADF) while scanning the document. A document jam could occur.
Note
When the stamp starts getting lighter, replace the cartridge. P.179
Replacing the Stamp Cartridge
Note
To cancel using stamp, press
[Stamp] again.
D Press [OK].
The [Stamp] key is highlighted.
E Dial and press the{{Start}} key.
If a page was not stamped even

though the Stamp feature is turned
on, you need to resend that page.
65
Transmission Options
This section describes various features that you can switch on and off
for any particular transmission by following the procedure at the end of
this section.
In addition, if you frequently use a
certain configuration of options, you
can change the default home position
(on or off) of each option.
- Fax Header Print

By default, the machine adds your
Fax Header identification to each
message you send so it appears on the
printed fax at the other end.
You can store two Fax Header indications: "Own Number 1" and "Own
Number 2".
For example, if you store your department name in one and your organization name in the other, you could use
the first when sending internal faxes
and the second for external faxes.
Note
You can switch this feature on and
off with "Gen. Settings/Adjust".
The factory default is set to on
- Label Insertion
With this feature you can have the receiver's name printed on the message
when it is received at the other end.
The name will be printed at the top of
the page and will be preceded by "To".
Limitation
When there is an image around the
area where the Label is to be printed, that image is deleted.

The factory default is set to off.
- Sender Stamp
When there is data, such as the user
name and department name, programed into the user code, you can
have the machine print a sender
stamp on the right edge of your paper.
Note
Enter the user name in System Settings.
- Reduced Image Transmission

Using this feature, your message is
sent at a reduced size (93%) with a
blank margin on the left.
Limitation
This feature is not available at Immediate Transmission.
Image Rotation is not available

with this feature.
66
- Auto Reduction
- Default ID Transmission
By default, if the receiver's paper is

smaller than the paper you are sending on, the message is automatically
reduced to fit onto the paper available
at the other end.
If you turn this feature on, transmission will only take place if the destination's Polling ID is the same as
yours. This feature can stop you from
accidentally sending information to
the wrong place (you need to co-ordinate Polling ID's with the other party).
Transmitter
(This machine)
Receiver
Reduction
ND1X02E0
Important
If you turn this feature off, the
scale of the original is maintained
and some parts of the image may
be deleted when printed at the other end.
Note
Selecting Transmission Options for a

Single Transmission
A Place the original and select any

ND1X02E1
Note
The factory default is set to on.

is shown.
C Select [Options].
67
D Press [ON] or [OFF] to specify "Fax

Header Print".
Note
You can select "Own Number 1"

or "Own Number 2". Contact
your service representative for
details.
To close option settings, go to
step J.
F Change "Sender Stamp".
Note
The factory default is set to "No
Stamp".

step J.
A Press [Change].
E Press [Programed name] or [OFF] to

specify "Label Insertion".
B Enter user name to be stamped.
Note

step J.
Note
User name specified when
the User Code is programed
appears.
Press [Non-programed Name] to

stamp a user name which is
not programed.
C Press [OK].
68
G Press [ON] or [OFF] to specify "Reduced Image TX".
J Press [OK].
shown.
K Press [OK].
L Dial and press the {Start}} key.
Note

step J.
H Press [ON] or [OFF] to specify "Auto reduce".
Note

step J.
I Press [ON] or [OFF] to specify "Default ID TX".
Note

step J.
69
More Transmission Functions

If Memory Runs Out While
Storing an Original
If you run out of memory while storing an original (free space reaches
0%), "Memory is full. Cannot
scan more. Transmission will be
stopped." is displayed.
Press [Exit] to transmit the stored pages only.
Note
By default, successfully scanned
pages are sent. If you wish to
change this setting, please contact
your service representative.
Parallel Memory Transmission

This function dials while the original
is being scanned. Standard Memory
Transmission stores the original in
memory, then dials the destination.
Parallel Memory Transmission all ow s y o u to q u ic k ly d et erm i n e
whether a connection was made. In
addition, this function scans the original faster than Immediate Transmission and is useful when you are in a
hurry and need to use the original for
another purpose.
Note
By default this feature is turned on,
You can change this with the User
Parameters. P.136 Changing the
Limitation
Standard Memory Transmission is
used instead of Parallel Memory
Transmission in the following cases.
When the line is busy and could

not be connected to
70
With Send Later

With Transfer Request
When you store an original for
Memory Transmission while
another communication is in
progress
When two or more destinations
are specified
When you send only an Auto
Document
When the original is set on the
exposure glass
When you send messages
stored in the Document Server.
Checking the Transmission

Result
Turn the Transmission Result Report on if you want a report to be
printed after every successful
transmission. Chapter 2, "Memory Transmission" in the Basic Features manual
If you leave the Transmission Result Report off, the report will not
be printed after every transmission. However, should a transmission fail, a Communication Failure
Report will be printed instead.
If you turn the Transmission Result Report (Memory Transmission) off, the Error Report will be
printed when the communication
on fails.
You can also check the transmission result by examining the Journal. P.25 Printing the Journal
You can either print or scroll
through the Journal on the display.
P.27 Checking the Transmission
Result (TX File Status)
More Transmission Functions
Automatic Redial
ECM (Error Correction Mode)
If a fax message could not be transmitted because the line was busy or
an error occurred during transmission, redialing is done 4 times at 5
minutes intervals (these figures vary
according to which country you are
in).
If redialing fails after four redials, the
machine cancels the transmission and
prints the Transmission Result Report
or Communication Failure Report.
This feature automatically sends data

that was not transmitted successfully
using a system that complies with international standards.
ECM requires that the destination
machine has the same feature.
Batch Transmission
Broadcasting Sequence
If you send a fax message by Memory

Transmission and there is another fax
message waiting in memory to be
sent to the same destination, that
message is sent along with your original. Several fax messages can be sent
with a single call, thus eliminating the
need for several separate calls. This
helps save communication costs and
reduce transmission time.
Fax messages for which the transmission time has been set in advance are
sent by batch transmission when that
time is reached.
If you dial several destinations for the

same message (Broadcasting) the
messages are sent in the order in
which they were dialed. If the fax
message could not be transmitted, the
machine redials that destination after
the last destination specified for
Broadcasting. For example, if you
specify four destinations A through D
for broadcasting, and if the lines to
destinations A and C are busy, the
machine dials the destinations in the
following order: A, B, C, D, A, and C.
Note
By default, Batch Transmission is
switched on. You can switch it on
or off with the User Parameters.
Note
By default, ECM is switched on.
You can change this with the Key
Operator Settings. P.135 ECM
Checking the Transmission

Progress
To check which destinations the fax
message has been sent to so far, print
the TX file list.
71
Dual Access
Simultaneous Broadcast
The machine can scan other messages

into memory even while sending a
fax message from memory, receiving
a message into memory , or automatically printing a report. Since the machine starts sending the second
message immediately after the current transmission terminates, the line
will be used efficiently.
Note that during Immediate Transmission or when in User Tools mode,
the machine cannot scan an original.
The optional ISDN Unit or optional extra

G3 Interface Unit is required.
Transmission with Image

Rotation
For most purposes, place A4/LT originals in the landscape direction (L).
If you place an A4/LT original in the
portrait direction (K), the image will
be sent rotated by 90. Providing the
receiver has A4/LT landscape paper
(L), the message will be printed the
same size as the original.
Limitation
Parallel Memory Transmission or
Immediate Transmission.
When Image Rotation is used, all

messages are sent by normal Memory Transmission.
The Standard Broadcast feature sends

faxes one at a time to multiple destinations in the order of specified destination numbers.
The Simultaneous Broadcast feature,
however, can send faxes three at a
time to multiple destinations by
transmitting simultaneously over different lines.
This results in a shorter overall transmission time.
Note
This feature can use a maximum of
3 lines simultaneously.
When using the optional extra G3
Interface Unit, if you set the line selection to "G3 Auto Select" beforehand, the machine will use
whichever G3 line is not busy
thereby increasing efficiency.
JBIG Transmission
Fax Function Upgrade Unit is required.
If you use JBIG (Joint Bi-level Image
Experts Group) compression you can
send photographic originals faster
than the other compression method.
G3/I-G3 of line type.
Limitation
If ECM is turned off, JBIG Transmission is not available.
This feature requires that the other
party's fax machine has both the
JBIG function and ECM function
(G3 communication only).
72
Printed Report
Printed Report
Memory Storage Report
This report is printed after an original
is stored in memory. It helps you review the contents and the destinations of stored originals. Even if the
machine is set up not to print this report, it is still printed if an original
could not be stored.
Note
You can turn this report on and off.
By default, it is not printed.
You can choose whether to include
part of the original image on the report (part of the image is printed
by default). P.136 Changing the
Transmission Result Report

(Memory Transmission)
This report is printed when a Memory Transmission is completed so you
can check the result of the transmission. If two or more destinations are
specified, this report is printed after
the fax message has been sent to all
the destinations. If the machine is set
up not to print this report and the fax
message could not be successfully
transmitted, the Communication Failure Report is printed. P.73 Communication Failure Report

part of the original image on the report (by default, part of the image
is printed). P.136 Changing the
The "Page" column gives the total
number of pages. The "Not Sent"
column gives the number of pages
that could not be sent successfully.
Communication Failure Report
This report is only printed if the

Transmission Result Report is turned
off and a message could not be successfully transmitted with Memory
Transmission. Use it to keep a record
of failed transmissions so you can
send them again.
Note
part of the original image on the report (by default, part of the image
is printed). P.136 Changing the
The "Page" column gives the total

number of pages. The "Not Sent"
column gives the number of pages
Note
By default, this function is turned
on. You can turn it off with the
Bit0)
73
Transmission Result Report

(Immediate Transmission)
If you turn this report on, a report will
be printed after every Immediate
Transmission so you have a record of
whether the transmission was successful or not. If the machine is set up
not to print this report and the fax
message could not be successfully
transmitted, the Error report is printed instead.
Note
You can switch this report on or off
using the User Parameters.
If the page was sent successfully,
the "Page" column gives the total
number of pages that were sent
successfully. The "Not Sent" column gives the number of pages
74
5. Reception Features
Reception
Immediate Reception
Memory Reception
Each page of a fax message is printed

as soon as it is received. This method
is used for standard fax messages.
The machine waits until all pages of

the message have been received into
memory before printing the message.
Receiver (this machine)
Receiver (this machine)

Sender
Sender
ND1X00E2
- Reception Resolution
This machine supports Standard, Detail and Super Fine resolutions for reception. If you do not have the Fax
Function Upgrade Unit, faxes sent at
Super Fine resolution will be printed
on your machine at Detail resolution.
This may differ from the sender's intention.
Reception will not take place if there
is not enough free memory left. If free
memory reaches 0% during Immediate Reception, any further reception
becomes impossible and the current
communication is terminated.
ND1X00E3
This method is used with the following features:

Combine 2 originals P.84 Combine 2 Originals
Multi-copy when set to multiple
copies P.83 Multi-copy Reception
Reverse Order Printing P.85
Reverse Order Printing
Substitute Reception P.76 Substitute Reception
2-sided Printing P.82 2-Sided
Printing
Important
All the messages stored in memory
are deleted if the power is switched
off for more than one hour.
The machine may not be able to receive large numbers of messages
or messages with a high data content. In such cases, we recommend
you switch the above features off
or add a memory card.
75
Reception Features
Limitation
The machine may not be able to receive fax messages when the free
memory space is low.
Note
If the free memory space reaches
0% during Memory Reception, the
machine can no longer receive the
current fax message and stops
communicating.
Substitute Reception
If any of the conditions listed below
are met, the machine automatically
switches to Memory Reception mode
and stores messages in memory instead of printing them. This reception
mode, in which a received fax message is stored in memory unprinted,
is called Substitute Reception. Messages received using Substitute Reception are automatically printed
when the condition which caused the
machine to use Substitute Reception
is rectified. Substitute Reception takes
place when:
Paper runs out
Toner runs out
Paper is jammed
A cover is open
A fax is received during a copy or
print run
Limitation
Reception may not take place if
there is not enough free memory
left.
Note
The Receive File indicator lights to
let you know when message(s)
have been received using Substitute Reception.
76
If free memory reaches 0% during

Substitute Reception, any further
reception becomes impossible and
the current communication is terminated.
Screening Out Messages from

Anonymous Senders
To help you screen out unwanted
messages that may fill up machine
memory, the machine can be programmed to only use Substitute Reception under the following
conditions.
Four settings are available:
"When Own Name or Own Fax
Number is received"
"Free"
"disable"
Note
The default setting is "When Own
Name or Own Fax Number is received", only storing messages
when the Own Name/Own Fax
Number is present. You can
change this with the User Parameters. P.136 Changing the User
Parameters(Switch05, Bit2,1)
Even if the sender does not have an

Own Name or Own Fax Number,
the machine will still receive messages using Substitute Reception
if:
Paper becomes jammed while
the power switch is on
Printing is not possible for some
reason, for example, when copy
job is in progress
Reception
- When Own Name or Own Fax

Number is Received
The machine switches to Substitute
Reception only when the sender has
programmed their Own Name or
Own Fax Number. If the power is
switched off for more than an hour,
all the messages received into memory are deleted. In that case, the Power
Failure Report or the Journal can be
used to identify which messages are
lost so you can ask the senders to
transmit them again.
Important
If a sender has not programmed
their Own Name or Own Fa x
Number, the machine may reject
an important fax message. We recommend that you ask important
senders to program an Own Name
or Own Fax Number in advance.
- Free
The machine switches to Substitute
Reception regardless of whether or
not the sender has programmed their
Own Name or Own Fax Number.
77
Reception Features
When the Receive File Indicator is Lit

If the Confidential File indicator is lit, a message has been received and stored
in memory with Memory Lock or Personal Boxes. You need to print it out manually. P.35 Printing Personal Box Messages
If the Receive File indicator is lit, a message has been received but could not be
printed for some reason. The message was stored in memory (Substitute Reception). When you solve the problem, the message will be automatically printed.
The table below lists some problems that could have caused Substitute Reception to take place and their solutions.
Why Substitute Reception Indication/Status
Occurred
Solution
Paper has run out
B and/or {Facsimile} indi- Add paper.

cator is lit red.
See "Loading Paper" in the Copy Reference manual
Toner is empty
D is lit
Replace the toner cartridge.

See "Adding Toner" in the Copy Reference manual
Paper is jammed
x is lit
Remove the jammed paper.

See "Clearing Misfeeds" in the Copy
Reference manual
Cover is open
The message "Open Cover"

appears.
Close the cover.
Machine is busy printing

with other function
The machine is printing

with other function.
The message will be printed after the

current job finishes automatically.
Output tray is full.
The message "Following

output tray is full. Remove
paper." appears.
Remove paper from output tray.
A cover other than the Document

Feeder (ADF) or front cover is open.
When the Confidential File Indicator is Lit or Blinking

If the Confidential File indicator is blinking, a message has been received and
stored in memory with Memory Lock. You need to print it out manually. P.32
78
Reception Functions
Reception Functions
Transfer Station
Transfer Stations allow you to expand
the standard features of your fax machine to set up complex networks.
Transfer Stations must be machines of
the same make.
The diagram below may make the
concept clearer.
End Receiver
Requesting Transfer station
party
End Receiver
Transfer
result report
End Receiver
ND1X00E4
The following terminology is used in

this section.
Requesting Party
The machine where the message
originates from.
Transfer Station (this machine)
The machine that forwards the incoming message to another destination.
End Receiver
The final destination of the message, that is the machine the Transfer Station sends to. End Receivers
must be programmed into Quick
Dial or Groups in the Transfer Station.
Limitation
Polling ID's of the Requesting Party and Transfer Station must be
identical for this feature to work.
If your line number is not programed at the Transfer Station, reception will not take place.
This machine will not receive a
Transfer Request unless it has
enough free memory to store two
or more destinations dialed from
the number keys.
If the Requesting Party specifies a
Group for the End Receivers and
the total number of End Receivers
exceeds 500, the Transfer Station
cannot transfer the message and
sends a Transfer Result Report to
the Requesting Party.
- Multistep Transfer
The principles of Transfer Stations
can be used to build up a multi-step
facsimile network where messages
are passed through several Transfer
Stations. By programming the end receivers in a Transfer Station Group,
you can enable this machine to transfer messages onto other Transfer Stations.
For more information, contact your
This feature can only be used if the
machines are made by the same maker.
Reference
P.80 ID Reception (Closed Network)
79
Reception Features
- Sending the Transfer Result

Report
This machine compares the fax
number of the Requesting Party with
the Requesting Party's number programmed in a Quick Dial or Speed Dial. If the lower five digits of the two
numbers match, it sends the Transfer
Result Report to the Requesting Party.
For example:
Requesting Party's own dial
number:
001813-11112222
Transfer Station's Quick Dial:
03-11112222
Transfer Result Report

This reports whether transmission to
the End Receivers was successful or
not.
Preparation
Program the requesting party fax
n u mber i n a dva nc e . P.16 1
Transfer Report
When the Transfer Station has transferred the message to all End Receivers, it sends the Transfer Result
Report back to the Requesting Party.
The machine prints the report if it
cannot be sent back to the Requesting
Party. You must program the fax
number of the requesting party in a
Quick Dial in the Transfer Station.
Note
By default, a portion of the original
image is printed on this report.
You can turn this off with the User
Parameters. P.136 Changing the
80
ID Reception (Closed Network)

If you wish to limit reception of messages from those with machines of the
same make and with the same Polling
ID, contact your service representative to turn this feature on.
Note
When you use this function, contact
your service representative for details.
JBIG Reception
Fax Function Upgrade Unit is required.
It allows you to receive messages sent
in the JBIG format.
Limitation
If ECM is turned off, JBIG Reception is not available.
G4 communication.
When the optional Extra G3 Interface
Unit is installed, JBIG receptions of
"G3-2" and "G3-3" lines are standard.
Auto Fax Reception Power-up

This machine can be set to shut down automatically if nobody has used the it for
a while. In these situations, even though
the operation switch is off, the machine
can still receive incoming messages as
long as the Main Power switch is on.
Important
Reception is not possible if both
the operation switch and Main
Power switch are turned off.
Note
By default, messages are printed as
soon as they are received (Immediate Reception). To change this, see
Printing Functions
Printing Functions
Print Completion Beep
Center Mark
By default, the machine beeps to let

you know when a received message
has been printed.
By default, marks are printed halfway

down the left side and at the top center of each page received. This makes
it easy for you to position a hole
puncher correctly when you file received messages.
Note
You can alter the volume of the
beep or turn it off completely (set
the volume to the minimum level).
Chapter 4, "Adjusting Volume"
Checkered Mark
By default, a checkered mark is printed on the first page of fax messages to
help you separate them.
ND1X00E6
Limitation
The center mark may deviate a little from the exact center of the
edge.
Note
You can turn this feature off with
the Initial Setup Reception Mode
settings. P.126 Reception Mode
ND1X00E5
Note
You can turn this feature off with
the Initial Setup Reception Mode
settings. P.126 Reception Mode
81
Reception Features
Reception Time
You can have the date and time printed at the bottom of the message when
its received. This feature is turned off
by defaultturn it on with the Initial
Setup Reception Mode settings.
P.126 Reception Mode
Limitation
When a received message are
printed on two or more sheets, the
date and time is printed on the last
page.
Note
The date and time when the message was printed can also be recorded on the message. If you need
this feature, please contact your
Limitation
To use this function, all pages of
the received document must be of
the same sizeinform the sending
party of this beforehand if necessary. You must also have paper set
in your machine of the same size as
that sent by the sending party
(A4A4, B4B4 are typical examples, whether A3 and B5 sizes are
correctly scan in will depend on
the fax machine). This machine
will correctly scan in landscape
A3, B4, A4, B5 and portrait A4, B5
and A5. The following table shows
the results that can be achieved
when sending and receiving using
this machine.
2-Sided Printing
You can have a received message
printed on both sides of the paper. By
default, this feature is turned off.
Switch it on with the Initial Setup Reception Mode settings. P.126 Reception Mode
This feature works only when all

pages are of the same width and
are received into memory.
The machine will use Memory Reception for 2-Sided Printing.
This feature cannot be used with
Combine 2 originals.
Printouts may vary depending on
how the sender set them.
82
Printing Functions
If another party sends you a fax

and their machine is not able to detect the size of the original correctly, the message may come out
truncated, separated or containing
excess white space when printed at
your end. For example, if the sending machine thinks a B5 original is
a B4 original, it will be printed at
your end on B4 size paper even if
you have B5 paper available in
your machine.
Multi-copy Reception
If you switch this feature on, multiple
copies of each incoming fax message
will be printed. You can also choose
to have multiple copies made of messages from particular senders.
P.141 Special Senders to Treat Differently, P.126 Reception Mode
Note
You can choose to have messages
only from selected senders printed
in this way. P.141 Special Senders to Treat Differently
180 Degree Rotation Printing

When printing on both sides of the
paper, this machine rotates images as
shown in the diagram.
2
1
CP2B02E0
5
ND1X00E7
Limitation
The maximum number of copies
that can be made of each message
is 10. If you are using Multi-copy
with Specified Senders, the maximum number is 10.
Note
By default, this feature is turned
o f f . S w it c h i t o n a n d s e t t h e
number of copies with the Initial
Setup Reception Mode settings.
The machine will use Memory Reception for Multi-copy Reception.
83
Reception Features
Two 81/2"11"K messages are

printed side by side on a sheet of
11"17"L.
Image Rotation
If you have installed paper in the cassette portrait K, incoming fax messages will be rotated automatically to
fit on the paper.
this machine
ND1X01E0
ND1X00E9
Note
You can choose to have received
messages printed from the specified tray. P.126 Reception Mode
Combine 2 Originals
When two messages of the same size
and direction are received consecutively, they are printed on a single
sheet when you turn this feature on.
This can help you economize on paper.
Two A5K messages are printed
side by side on a sheet of A4L.
Two B5K messages are printed
side by side on a sheet of B4L.
Two A4K messages are printed
side by side on a sheet of A3L.
Two 81/2"51/2"K messages are
printed side by side on a sheet of
81/2"11"L.
84
Limitation
This feature does not work with
messages larger than A5K, B5K,
A4K or LTK. When A5K, B5K,
A4K, or LTK size paper is loaded
in the machine, each page of the received message is printed on a single sheet.
If paper matching the size and direction of a received document is
not available, Combine 2 originals
is not possible.
When "Combine 2 originals" and
"2-Sided Printing" are selected at
the same time, combine 2 originals
takes priority and 2sided printing
is canceled.
Note
off. Switch it on with the User Parameters. P.136 Changing the
This feature uses Memory Reception.
Printing Functions
Page Separation and Length

Reduction (Not Available in
Some Countries)
When the size of a received message
is longer than the paper loaded in the
machine, each page of the message
can be split and printed on several
sheets, or reduced and printed on a
single sheet. For example, this feature
splits the message if the length exceeds 0.79 or more, by reducing the
length within 0.79. When a message
is split, the split mark (*) is inserted at
the split position and about 0.39 of
the split area is duplicated on the top
of the second sheet.
You can adjust the overprinting

and reduction lengths within the
following ranges:
Guideline for split: 06.1 (0.2
steps)
Overprinting length: 0.16, 0.39,
0.79, 1.57
Reverse Order Printing

Normally, received pages are printed
and stacked on the tray in the order
they are received. If you turn this feature on, the machine will start printing the message from the last page
received.
5
your machine
ABC
(Document)
Print
ND1X01E2
ND1X01E1
Note
Your service representative can
customize this feature with the following settings. Bracketed values
are defaults.
Reduction (on)
Print split mark (on)
Overprinting (on)
Overprinting length (0.39)
Guideline for split (when message is 0.79 longer than paper)
Note
off. Switch it on with the Initial Setup RX. P.126 Reception Mode
When this feature is on, the first

page will be printed last.
This feature uses Memory Reception.
85
Reception Features
Page Reduction
CIL/TID Print
If you turn this feature on and you receive a message that is longer than the
paper in the cassette, usually the machine prints it on two pages. The machine reduces the width and length of
the received image so that it will fit on
one page. If A4L paper size is loaded
and a message of B4L size is received, the machine will reduce the
message to a single A4L sheet.
your machine
5
(B4 size)
reduction
(A4 size)
ND1X01E3
Note
off. Switch it on with the User Parameters. P.136 Changing the
TSI Print
Usually the sender's Fax Header is printed on received messages. If the sender
has not programmed their Fax Header,
you will not be able to identify them.
However, if you turn this feature on, the
sender's Own Name or Own Fax
Number is printed instead so you can
find out where the message came from.
Chapter 3, "Initial settings and Adjustment" in the Basic Features manual
Note
You can turn it on or off with the
Bit3)
86
Two features are provided for identification of messages received by G4

(ISDN). If turned on, this information
will be printed on every page.
The CIL (Call Identification Line) refers to the combination of the receiver's own fax number, name, the
sender's own fax number and name,
time, and page number. The default
setting is on. The TID refers to the
name programed by the sender in
their Fax Header. The default setting
is off.
Limitation
These features are available only
when receiving in G4 mode.
If the sender's TID contains double-byte characters (for example

Chinese characters), the TID will
not be printed even if TID Print is
turned on.
Note
You can turn CIL and TID on or off
with the User Parameters. P.136
Changing the User Parameters(Switch02, Bit5 or Bit6)
Printing Functions
When There is No Paper of the Correct Size

If there is no paper in your machine that matches the size of a received message,
the machine will choose a paper size based upon the paper you have available.
For example, if your machine has B4L and A3L installed and you receive a
A4L size message, check the A4 column of the following table. The paper size
at the top has the highest priority. In this case, since B4L is a higher priority than
A3L, the message is printed on A4L.
If only B5L is loaded and you receive an A3L message, the received message
is stored in memory and will not be printed.
Priority Table
87
Reception Features
Page Reduction
Disabled
Reduction in Sub-scan Direction
Enabled
Page Separation Threshold
0.79(20mm)
Width or Length Priority
Width
KK and LL indicate that the message is split over two pages of paper with
the orientation and size shown.
Limitation
Paper placed in the bypass tray is not usually selected for printing a received
message. However, you can use this tray if you select the bypass tray as the
main paper tray using Reception with Specified Senders. P.141 Special
Senders to Treat Differently
The paper size used to print a received message may be different from the size
of the sent original.
Note
Widths that this machine can receive are A4, B4, LT, LG, and A3. Any messages narrower than A4 or LT are sent as A4 or LT width with the length unchanged.
Reference
P.85 Page Separation and Length Reduction (Not Available in Some Countries)
P.86 Page Reduction

P.84 Image Rotation
"Just Size" Printing

If you turn this feature on and no paper tray is stocked with paper of a suitable
size to print a received document, a message will appear on the display prompting you to load paper of the required size. When you have loaded the new paper,
you can then print the message.
Two messages can appear:
Paper Cassette
88
Printing Functions
Bypass Tray
Note
The action that is followed upon your pressing [Exit] varies depending on the
status where the machine is situated at the occurrence of a message.
If any received documents or reports were being printed automatically, the
printer automatically continues printing from where it had left off.
If any documents or reports were being printed manually, the printer does
not resume the printing. Perform the operations from the beginning again.
By default, this message is turned off. You can turn this message on with the
User Parameters. P.136 Changing the User Parameters(Switch05, Bit5)
Out of paper display message

If the paper tray runs out of paper, you can have a message appear on the display asking you to add more paper.
Note
By default, this message is turned off. You can turn it on with the User Parameters. P.136 Changing the User Parameters(Switch05, Bit7)
89
Reception Features
Having Incoming Messages Printed on Paper from the Bypass

Tray
You can have messages sent from Specified Senders printed on paper from the
Bypass Tray. This is useful if you need messages printed on a size of paper not
stocked in the paper cassette(s).
Limitation
The print area is determined by Optional Expansion Memory, Resolution,
and the vertical length of originals.
Note
Before you can use this feature, you need to turn on Authorized Reception
(Initial Setup Reception Mode settings), program the Specified Senders (Key
Operator Settings) along with the Paper. P.126 Reception Mode, P.141
Special Senders to Treat Differently
When you set paper sizes other than A4 landscape, B4 landscape and portrait,
A3 landscape and portrait in the Bypass Tray, specify the paper size. This size
should match the bypass paper size for copying or a paper jam may occur. To
change the bypass paper size for copying. "Copying from the Bypass Tray"
in the Copy Reference manual
If the specified paper size and the size of paper set in the Bypass Tray do not
match, paper jams may occur and the image may be truncated.
If you use this feature, Image Rotation and 180 Degree Rotating Printing, are
not possible.
90
Where Incoming Messages are Delivered - Output Tray
Where Incoming Messages are Delivered

- Output Tray
G3/G4 Separate Tray
An optional upper tray or optional finisher unit is required for using this feature.
You can specify the document feeding tray for each line. For example, you can
specify documents received through the G3-1 line to be fed to the "Internal Tray"
and documents received through the G4 line to be fed to the "Upper Tray", facilitating the separation of files.
Note
To use this feature, specify the line and destination in "G3/G4 Separate Tray".
Tray Shift
The optional Finisher Unit is Required.
When the optional Finisher Unit is selected for fax output, you can use the Tray
Shift function to have the internal delivery exit move to the left or right whenever a fax or report is printed.
This is useful for separating faxes stacked in the finisher output tray, that is, if
the previous incoming fax was output to the left, the next incoming fax will be
output to the right and vice-versa.
Note
You can turn this feature on or off with the User Parameters. When the machine is shipped, this feature is turned on by default. P.136 Changing the
91
Reception Features
92
6. Simplifying the Operation

Programs
If you regularly send messages to a
particular destination or transmit using the same features, you can save a
lot of repetitive keypad operations by
registering this information in a Keystroke Program.
Registering Keystroke
Programs
Keystroke Programs can be recalled
by just pressing a Quick Dial key. The
following procedure can be used to
program a new Keystroke Program or
overwrite an old one.
You can register the following items
in Keystroke Programs:
Memory Transmission, Immediate
Transmission, destinations (up to
500 numbers), Resolution, Original
Type, G3 or G4 communication
mode, Stamp, Send Later, Default
ID, Auto Document, Book Fax,
Transfer Deadline, Polling Transmission, Polling Reception, Transfer Request, 2sided transmission
and optional functions
Program name (up to 20 characters)
Important
Keystroke Program list and keep it
when you register or change a
function. P.119 Reports/Lists
Limitation
You cannot register a program in a
Quick Dial key used for another
function.
When a registered program key is

being used for a Memory Transmission on standby, the message
" Specified destination is
deleted. Specify it again after transmission is completed." is displayed and you cannot
change the function for this key.

Note
The maximum number of programs you can register is 100 (up to
200 with optional Fax Function
Upgrade Unit installed).
A Prepare for registering the program.

Note
The procedure of programming
is differs depending on programs you want to register.
cancel programming.
Example of registering a program

using Send Later with the fax
number "0123456789".
A Press {0}
}, {1}
}, {2}
}, {3}
}, {4}
},
{5}, {6}
}, {7}
}, {8}
}, {9}
} with the
number keys.
C Select [Send Later].
D Specify "Send Later".
Note
If "Send Later" is already
specified, that time is shown.
change "Send Later".
93
Simplifying the Operation
F Press [OK].
The program has been registered.
G Press [Exit].
The program (facsimile) is shown.
C Press [Register].
Registered program number and
names are shown in the keys. If
there are none registered, "pNot
Programed" is shown.
Using a Program
Example of executing a program
using Send Later with the fax
number "0123456789".
Facsimile mode and the standby

display is shown.
D Select the program number which

"p
pNot Programed" is shown.
Note
If the standby display is not
shown, press the {Facsimile}
key.
B Place your original.

Note
If you have not programed destinations or scan settings for
program, enter the fax number
for the destination and select
any scan settings you require.
C Press the {Program}} key.

Note
[Delete] and try again.
E Enter the program name.

The "Program Name" display is
shown.
Note
You should register the program name.
94
Programs
D Select a program number you registered.

Then, the registered fax number
and time is shown. Then Transmission Mode is selected.
C Press [Change Name].
D Select
the program number for

the name you want to change.

The fax number and specified time
are shown on the display and the
machine starts to scan the original.
Changing a Program Name

Limitation
When a registered program is being used for a standby Memory
Transmission, you cannot change
the program name.
6
E Reenter a program name.
Note
Press [Delete] to cancel a program name from changing.
F Press [Exit].

display is shown.
Note
key.
95
Deleting a Program
Limitation
When a registered program is being used for a standby Memory
Transmission, the following message appears and you cannot delete
the program: "Specified destination is used by transmission standby file. It cannot
be changed or deleted. Specify it again after transmission is completed."
Note
If you delete a program, the registered program name is also deleted.

display is shown.
Note
key.
C Press [Delete].
96
D Select

want to delete.
E Press [Delete].
The contents of the program are
shown on the display.
Note
Press [Do not Delete] to cancel delete, and the display will return
to step C.
F Press [Exit].
Using the Document Server

Use this feature to store documents
into the Document Server of this machine.
The Document Server can store documents using, facsimile and printer
features.
The documents that are stored using
a facsimile feature are available to
transmit by facsimile.
Storing in the Document Server enables the following:
Once stored, a document can be
sent out as many times as you
want just by selecting it.
A stored the document does not
use facsimile memory.
You can also send multiple stored
documents, and combine a document
with a scanned original to send them
out as a single document. Use "Select
Stored File" in "Sub TX Mode" to send
stored documents.
Note
The stored documents are not deleted even after a power failure or
when the main power source fails.
The fax feature has a memory capacity of approximately 3,000 pages. You can store approximately
9,000 pages (ITU-T No.1 chart) into
the Document box, using the copy,
printer, and scanner features.
You can store 400 pages as one
document (up to 1,000 pages with
optional Expansion Memory).
You can print the stored documents by pressing the {Document

Server} key. Documents stored using the fax feature are shown with
an "F" in front of the user name.
"Document Server" in the Copy
Reference manual
Storing a Document
You can send documents that are being scanned. Storage is only available
for documents.
Scanned documents are given file
names, such as "FAX001" and
"FAX002" automatically. However,
you can change the file names.
You can also specify a user name or
password to the stored documents to
identify or protect accidental transmission from others.

display is shown.
If the stan dby disp lay is no t
shown, press the {Facsimile} key.
B Place your original and select any

97
C Press [Store File].
Programing a User Name

Note
Set user names from those that
are programed in the user code.
Set the user codes in the "System Settings" manual.
A Press [File Info. Setting].
D Select [Store & Transmit] or [Store only].

Select [Store & Transmit] to send
documents after stored.
B Press [User Name].
6
Select [Store only] to store documents.
The User Name Change menu is

shown.
C Press the user name to be programed.
When [Store only] is selected,
pppppppppp is
shown.
E Set the user name, file name and

password if necessary.
Note
If you are not going to set the
user name, file name, or password, go to step F.
You cannot change multiple

documents at once.
98
The user names that are programed in the user code are
shown.
Note
Press the title key to switch
between titles.
To set an unprogrammed
user name, press [Non-programed Name] and enter the
name. User names that are
entered by pressing the [Nonprogramed Name] key are Not
Programed.
D Press [OK].
The specified user name is
shown.
E Press [OK].
Setting a File Name

B Press the [File Name] key.

The File Name Change menu is
shown.
C Enter the file name.

Reference
D Press [OK].
The changed file name is
shown.
E Press [OK].
Setting a Password
B Press [Password].
The Password Setting menu is
shown.
C Enter a password using the

number keys.
Note
If you make an error, press
the {Clear/Stop} key or [Clear],
and then reenter your password.
99
D Press [OK].
pppp is shown.
E Press [OK].
F Press [OK].
G If you have selected the [Store &
Transmit] key, specify the receiver.

Note
If you have selected [Store only],
go to step H.
H Press the {Start}} key.
C Select [Manage/Delete File].
File Manage
You can change the file name, user
name, and password of stored documents.
To change a stored document, delete
the document you no longer need,
and then reprogram the new document. P.101 Delete File
You can also change the information
by pressing the {Document Server}
key. "Document server" in the
Copy Reference manual
D Press the document to be changed.

Note
You can specify multiple documents at one time.
Changing a File Name

A Press [Change File Name].
shown.
100
B Press [Backspace] or [Delete All]

and reenter the file name.
Reference
C Press [OK].
Changing a User Name

A Press [Change User Name].
B Press [Clear].
The user name is deleted.
Reference
D Press [OK].
Changing the Password

A Press [Change Password].
B Enter a new password using
the number keys.
C Press [OK].
E Press [OK].
Delete File
Use this feature to delete your stored
documents.
C Press the new user name.
Note
If the user name to be
changed is not shown, press
[U
U Prev.] or [T
T Next].
Press the title keys to switch

between titles.
To set an unprogrammed
user name, press the [Nonprogramed Name] key, and
then enter the name.
User names that are entered
by pressing the [Non-programed Name] key are not programed into the user code.
101
C Select [Manage/Delete File].
D Press the document you want to

delete.
E Press [Delete File].
F Press [Delete].
Note
If you want to cancel the deletion of a document, press [Do not
Delete.].
G Press [OK].
H Press [OK].
102
- Controlling documents saved

in the Document Server from a
computer
The fax documents saved in the Document Server can be viewed and controlled from a network computer
with DesktopBinder V2 Lite or DesktopBinder V2 Professional installed.
The following operations are available from the computer:
Displaying
documents
(Easy
Viewer)
Displaying document properties
(Properties)
Deleting documents (Delete)
Copying documents to a computer
(Copy)
Printing documents (Print from
Document Server)
Sending documents by fax (Fax
from Document Server)
Exporting documents as files (Export Document)
For more information, see the DesktopBinder V2 operating instructions
and Help.
Settings made in System Settings enable you to send documents to the delivery server or to automatically save
documents in the Document Server.
For more information, see the Scanner Reference.
7. Facsimile User Tools

Accessing the User Tools
The User Tools allow you to program the machine with your identification, to
store frequently used numbers and settings, and customize the default settings
to match your needs.
So you can find the User Tool you want quickly and easily, they are grouped by
function.
Prog./Change/Delete
Use to program, change or delete: Quick Dial table, Group Dial, Title of Quick
Dial, order of Quick Dial table, Auto Documents, Standard Message, Irregular scan Area
Print List/Report
Use to print: the Journal, Group list, Program list, Auto Document list, Quick
Dial list, Label Insertion list
General Settings/Adjustment
Use to set defaults for: Transmission mode (Memory / Immediate), scan conditions (Resolution / Auto Image Density / Original Type), Fax Information,
Adjust Sound Volume Use to set defaults for: Transmission mode (Memory/
Immediate), scanning conditions (Resolution, Auto Image Density and Original Type)
Reception Mode
Use to turn on or off: Reverse Order, Checkered Mark, Center Mark, Print RX
Time, Multi-copy Reception, Authorized Reception, Special RX Nos., 2-sided
printing and Forwarding
Change the Reception Mode
Make the Bypass Paper Size Settings
Key Operator Tools
Use to program/check: your name, your fax number, line type, various ID
codes, number of transmitted/received documents
Menu
Each menu appears in the each tab.
You can switch the display by pressing [U
U Prev.] or [T
T Next].
The selected item is highlighted.
When you specify all the settings, press [OK]. If [OK] is not pressed, the settings you made might be canceled.
Press [Cancel] to cancel specified settings. The previous display is shown.
103
Facsimile User Tools
Key Operator Code

When Key Operator Code is programed and turned on, users have to enter a
programed Key Operator Code (maximum 8 digits) to operate the User Tools
and Key Operator Tools. This prevents unauthorized people from changing
registrations.
Note
You can change the Key Operator Code on or off with "System Settings".
When you set the Key Operator Code active, enter a code (maximum 8 digits) with the number keys and select [Partial] or [All Initial Settings] to limit
access. The factory default is set to "Partial".
Selecting [Partial]
Only the Key Operator Tools are protected with a Key Operator Code.
Selecting [All Initial Settings]
The key Operator Tools and User Tools are protected with a Key Operator Code.
A Press the {User Tools/Counter} key.
If you have selected [All Initial Settings], go to step C.
B Select [Key Operator Code].
C Enter a maximum 8 digit Key Operator Code with the number Keys.
User Code Management

The machine can be set up so that nobody can use it without entering a user
code. This prevents unauthorized people from sending fax messages and
helps track the activity of each user.
Note
You can specify a User Code with "System Settings".
Even when User Code Management is set to on, you can still receive and
print fax messages as usual.
When you specify a user name, all reports are printed with the user name
in the user code area.
104
Accessing the User Tools

A
When the following message appears on the display, User Code Management has been set to on.
Enter a maximum 8 digit User Code with the number keys.

Note
Entering unprogrammed user code, the display returns to step A.
105
Function Map.
106
Function Map.
107
Program/Delete Menu
Changing the Order of the
Quick Dial Table
By pressing [
] from the top menu,
the destination key moves down.
Use this feature to change the order of

the programed quick dial table.
It would be convenient if you list the
receivers that you fax to frequently on
the first page of the quick dial table.
Note
You can only change the order
within Title 1, Title 2, and Title 3.
You cannot change the order within the Destination List.
Pressing an arrow key will move the
selection to the desired destination
key position.
Reference
Chapter 3, "Programing Quick
Dials" in the Basic Features manual
B Select [Facsimile Features].
The Initial Facsimile Features

menu is shown.
C Check that the "Prog./Change/Delete" tab is shown.
By pressing [
] as shown in the
menu above, the destination key
moves to the right.
D Select [Change Order of Quick Dial Table].
108
Program/Delete Menu
E Press the destination key that you

want to change the order of.
Note
If the desired destination key is
not shown, press [U
U Prev.] or [T
T
Next] to switch displays.
Programing Title of the Quick

Dial Table
Use this feature to add a name to the
title of the quick dial table in order to
facilitate finding the desired programed destination.
As in a telephone directory, there are
titles in the quick dial table to facilitate finding the desired receiver from
among many destinations.
If the destination key is at a different title, press [Change Title] to

switch between titles.
F Press
an arrow key to move

throughout the document.
Note
Press [To Top] to move to the top
of the quick dial table, and press
[To End] to move to the end of
the quick dial table.
G Press [OK].
The order has been changed.
Note
To cancel the change, press
[Cancel].
In the menu above, the "CD" page

(menu) of the quick dial table is selected. The titles are "Freq.", "AB",
"CD", "EF", "GH", "IJK", "LMN",
"OPQ", "RST", "UVW", and "XYZ".
For an example, press "EF" to select
that page.
On this machine, you can create a
Quick Dial Table according to your
needs. In creating a quick dial table,
you should program titles to facilitate
your search process. The factory default settings, classified by alphabetical order, can be changed with a
different type of classification.
Create and use your own titles according to your needs, for example,
"Business and "Private".
H Press the {User Tools/Counter}} key.

The display is returned to the
standby mode.
109
Note
The machine can make four types
of quick dial tables. To display a
quick dial table different from the
one being shown, press the [Change
Title] key. P.111 Switching Titles
You can program up to four characters for the "Title 1" and "Title 2"
keys.
You can program up to eight characters for the "Title 3" key.
Use the same procedure to program and change the titles.

The Fax User Tool menu is shown.
C Check that the "Prog./Change/Delete" tab is selected.
E Press the title key to program.

Note
You cannot make any changes
to "Destination List" or "Freq.".
F Enter the name for the title key.

Reference
Chapter 3, "Entering Text" in
Note
To program another title key,
repeat from step E.
G Press [OK].
H Press [Exit].
I Press the {User Tools/Counter}} key.
D Select [Program Title of Quick Dial Table].
110
Program/Delete Menu
- Switching Titles
To specify a fax receiver on the quick
dial table, select the title where that
receiver is programed in.
You can specify all programed receivers on the destination list.
To display the quick dial table in alphabetical order, select "Title 1". To
display the quick dial table that is
programed by user, select "Title 2".
B Select [Change Title].
C Press the title key to be displayed.
D Press [OK].
The selected title is shown above
the "Change Title" menu.
Note
To cancel changing the title,
will return to step B.
Press [Exit].
Programing Standard
Messages
Use this feature to program standard
messages to be printed at the top of
the first page of the original. It would
be convenient if you programed your
own greetings, etc.
Note
You can program your own messages into [Prog. Messge 1], [Prog.
Messge 2] and [Prog. Messge 3] keys
only. You cannot change the "Confidentiall", "Urgent", "Please
phone", or "Copy to corres ..." messages.
Use the same procedure to program and change your messages.
7
D Select [Program/Change/Delete Standard Message].
111
pNot ProE Select a key that is "p

gramed".
Note
To change a message, press the
programed message that you
want to change.
Deleting Standard Messages

Use this feature to delete programed
messages that you no longer need.

C Check that the "Prog./Change/DeF Enter your message.
lete" tab is shown.
Reference
G Press [OK].
Note
To program another message,
repeat from step E.
To cancel a registration, press

[Cancel].
H Press [Exit].
112
D Select [Program/Change/Delete Standard Message].
E Press [Delete].
To cancel the deletion, press [Register/Change].
Program/Delete Menu
F Select the message that you want
Storing an Auto Document
G Press [Delete].
If you find that you often have to send

a particular page to people (for example, a map, a standard attachment, or
a set of instructions), store that page
in memory as an Auto Document.
This saves re-scanning the original
every time you wish to send it.
Use the following procedure to program a new Auto Document or overwrite an existing one.
to delete.
Note
To delete another message, repeat from step F.
To cancel a deletion, press [Do

not Delete], and the display will
return to step F.
H Press [Exit].
Important
You can store up to 6 Auto Documents (18 with the optional Expansion Memory installed). Each Auto
Document can contain one page.
You can store the following items

in an Auto Document:
Scan settings (Resolution, Original Type, and Image Density)
Irregular Scan Area
Document name (up to 16 characters)
Auto Document list and keep it
when you program or change an
Auto document. P.119 Reports/
Lists
Limitation
You can only send one Auto Document per transmission.

113
D Select [Store/Change/Delete Auto Document].
E Select the file you want to store or

change
Changing a file
A Select a file you want to
change.
A message "A file is already
stored. If another file is stored,
previous one will be deleted. Is
it OK?" is shown.
B Press [Store].
If you want to cancel storing,
press [Do not Store].
Changing only file name

A Press [Change Name].
B Select a file you want to
change.
C Enter a file name.
7
Note
If there are stored files, the file
names are shown.
Storing a file
A Select [p
pNot Programed].
B Enter a file name.
Note
You should program the file
name.
Reference
C Press [OK].
114
Reference
D Press [OK].
Go to step H.
Program/Delete Menu
F Place your original and select any

Deleting an Auto Document

Limitation
You cannot delete an Auto Document waiting to be transmitted.
Delete it after the transmission, or
cancel the transmission on standby, and then delete the Auto Document.
Note
You can also specify a scan size.
Chapter 2, "Setting a Scan Area" in the Basic Features manual

The machine starts to scan.
Note
To cancel scanning, press [Stop
Scanning].
A Press the{{User Tools/Counter}} key.

H Press [Exit] after scanning is fin-
ished.

D Select [Store/Change/Delete Auto Document].
E Press [Delete].
115
F Select the file you want to delete.

G Press [Delete].
Note
To cancel a file from deleting,
press [Do not Delete].
H Press [Exit].
Programing and Changing a

Scan Size
When you select a Scan Size to scan a

non-standard size original, two custom sizes of original are available
(Program Size 1 and Program Size 2).
Use these functions to program a custom size in advance.
To change an existing Scan size, just
use the same procedure to change a
Scan Size.
Important
When programing or changing an
original size, we recommend that
you make a memo of the new size.
Note
For the horizontal length, specify
from 128 to 1200mm or from 5.5 to
47inches.
116
D Select
[Program/Change/Delete Scan
Size].
E After confirming [Register/Change]

is selected, press [Program Size 1] or
[Program Size 2].
Note
If a size is already programed, it
is shown on the display. If not,
"pNot Programed" is shown.
Program/Delete Menu
F Enter a Horizontal size with the

number keys.
Note
For the horizontal length, specify from 128 to 1200mm or from
5.5 to 47 inches. You cannot
specify shorter than 128mm,
also longer than 1200mm.
Each time you press [mm] or

[inch], the units change between
"mm" and "inch" alternately. If
you enter a length and change
the unit by pressing [mm] or
[inch], the length is converted
automatically according to the
unit (fractions are rounded off).
For Example, When you enter
{2}, {5} and {0} in millimeters
and change to "inch", the length
"9.8inch" is shown on the display. If you press [mm] or [inch]
again, "249mm" is displayed.
[Clear] and try again.
To cancel a scan size from programing, press [Cancel].
G Select a Vertical size.
Note
A displayed vertical size differs
depending on selected unit.
When [mm] is selected, [Auto detect], [210mm (A4)], [257mm(B4
JIS)], [297mm (A3)], [216mm (8 1/2)]
and [279mm (11)] are shown.
When [inch] is selected, [Auto detect], [8.3inch (A4)], [10.1inch(B4
JIS)], [11.7inch (A3)], [8.5inch] and
[11.0inch] are shown.
To cancel a scan size from programing, press [Cancel].
H Press [OK].
I Press [Exit].
117
Deleting a Scan Size
F Select [Program Size 1] or [Program

Size 2].

G Press [Yes].
Note
To cancel a deletion, press [No],
and the display will return to
step F.

D Select
[Program/Change/Delete Scan
Size].
E Press [Delete].
118
Reports/Lists
Reports/Lists
This function allows you to print the
following reports and lists manually.
Select a report or list as needed.
Journal
P.25 Printing the Journal
Quick Dial list
Chapter 3, "Quick Dial" in the
Basic Features manual
Label Insertion list
Chapter 3, "Quick Dial" in the
Basic Features manual
Group Dial list
Chapter 3, "Groups" in the Basic
Features manual
Program list
P.93 Programs
Auto Document list
D Select a list or report you want to

print.

After printing, the display will return to step E.
Note
To cancel printing, press [Cancel] and the display will return
to step E.
F Press the {User Tools/Counter}} key.

C Select [Print List/Report].
119
Make the settings for the following
items. The set items are highlighted
on the Fax User Tool menu when the
power is turned on.
Memory/Immed.
Transmission
Switch
Use this feature for specifying the
transmission mode for document
transmission.
Text Size Priority
Use this feature to specify the character size of your originals for
scanning.
type of originals for scanning.
Auto Image Density Priority
Use this feature for specifying
whether to prioritize automatic
image density for scanning your
originals.
Scan Density Adjustment
scan density of your originals.
Change Title of Quick Dial Table
Use this feature for selecting the title to be shown on the quick dial table.
Quick Dial Table Display Switch
Use this feature for displaying the
ten-keys instead of the quick dial
table.
Sound Volume Adjustment
Chapter 4, "Adjusting Volume"
Program Fax Information
Chapter 3, "Initial Settings and
Adjustments" in the Basic Features
manual
120
Fax Header Print Setting

whether sender name you will use
when there are two sender names
(for printing) programed.
Label Insertion Priority Setting
whether to use the label insertion
feature.
Reduced Image Transmission Setting
whether to use reduced image
transmission. P.66 Transmission Options
Auto Reduced Image Setting
whether to transmit an automatically red uced im age. P.66
Closed Network Priority Setting
whether to execute ID transmission. P.66 Transmission Options
Scan End Reset
whether to return to the initial settings each time an original is
scanned.
Mix Original Size Priority Setting
whether to use the Mixed Original
Sizes when your originals are set in
TX Stamp Priority
whether to press a TX stamp.
Line Priority Setting
Use this feature for prioritizing the
line of usage.
Program Economy Time

Use this feature for specifying a
time for transmission when the telecommunication rates are low.
P.4 Sending at a Specific Time (Send
Later)
On Hook Mode Release Time
time to cancel the On-hook mode
after you transmit with On-hook
dialing. It is convenient to use this
when the fax information service
disconnects your On-hook dialing.
Quick Operation Key
Frequently used features that are
programed as Quick Operation
Keys are shown on the menu imm edi ate ly aft er t h e powe r is
turned on.
Note
The following display shows the
factory default of each function.
D Select
a function you want to

specify.
Note
If you make a mistake, press [Exit].
If the function you want to specify is not shown, press [U

U Prev.]
or [T
T Next].
E Make any function settings you

require.
Switch Memory/Immed.
Transmission
A Select [Memory Transmission] or

[Immediate Transmission].

The Facsimile User Tools menu is
shown.
C Select [Gen. Settings/Adjust].

B Press [OK].
The General Settings/Adjust

menu is shown.
121
Text Size Priority
Adjust Scan Density
A Select a text size.
A Press [Darker] or [Lighter].
B Press [OK].

A Select an original type.
Note
You can set the image density manually within seven
levels.
B Press [OK].
Change Title of Quick Dial Table

A Select a title on Quick Dial Table.
7
B Press [OK].
Auto Image Density

A Select [ON] or [OFF].
B Press [OK].
B Press [OK].
122
Switch Display
Reduced Image TX Setting
A Select [Display Quick Dial Tbl] or

[Display Number Keys].
B Press [OK].
B Press [OK].

7
B Press [OK].
B Press [OK].
Closed Network Priority Setting

Label Insertion Priority Setting
A Select [Programed name] or [OFF].
B Press [OK].
B Press [OK].
123
Scan End Reset


Note
The display may differ depending on the line type you have.
A Select a line type you usually
use.
B Press [OK].
Mix Original Size Priority Setting

B Press [OK].

Limitation
You can program only one
Economy Transmission Time.
7
B Press [OK].
TX Stamp Priority
Note
The factory default is set to
"11:00 PM".
A Enter the Economy Transmission Time to change AM/PM,
press [AM] or [PM] (North America only) with the number
keys.
B Press [OK].
Note
124
B Press [OK].
On Hook Mode Release Time

A Select [1 minute], [3 minutes], [5
minutes] and [10 minutes] to start
the On Hook mode.
A Select Quick Operation Key

B Select the function you want to
program in the Quick Operation Key.
C Press [OK].
B Press [OK].

Quick Operation Key

The Quick Operation Key can be
programed with following functions.
Journal, TX File Status, Print Conf.
RX, Print Memory Lock, Select
Stored File, Send Later, Auto Document, 2 Sided Original, Closed
Network, Polling TX, Polling RX,
Fax Header Print, Label Insertion,
Dest. Management, Forwarding,
Transfer Request
Up to three functions can be programed in the Quick Operation
Key.
Note
The factory default is as follows:
Quick Operation Key 1

* No
TX File Status
Dest. Management
125
Reception Mode
Make the settings "ON" or "OFF" for
the following reception functions.
Switch Reception Mode P.79
Reception Functions
Chapter 2, "Selecting the Reception Mode" in the Basic Features
manual
Authorized RX
Forwarding
RX File Print Qty P.83 Multicopy Reception
2-Sided Print P.82 2-Sided
Printing
RX Reverse Printing P.85 Reverse Order Printing
Paper Tray
G3/G4 Separate Tray P.91 G3/
G4 Separate Tray
Checkered Mark P.81 Checkered Mark
Center Mark P.81 Center Mark
Print Reception Time P.82 Reception Time
D Select
a function you want to

specify.
Note
If the function you want to specify is not shown, press [U
U Prev.]
or [T
T Next].
E Make any function settings you

require.
Switch Reception Mode

A Select reception mode.
Note
The following display shows factory default of each function.

B Press [OK].

shown.
C Select [Reception Mode].

The Reception Mode menu is
shown.
126
Reception Mode
Authorized RX
RX File Print Qty
A Press [ON] or [OFF].
A Specify the print quantity with

the number keys.
B Press [OK].
Note
To cancel this setting, Press
[Cancel].
Forwarding
Note
The available print quantity

is 1 to 10. The factory default
is set to 1.
B Press [OK].
Note
[Cancel].
2 Sided Print
B Press [OK].
Note
[Cancel].
B Press [OK].
Note
[Cancel].
127
RX Reverse Printing
G3/G4 Separate Tray
A Select [ON].
B Press [OK].
Note
[Cancel].
Note
If you select "OFF", the received paper is printed from
a default tray.
B Select a line type.
Paper Tray
A Select paper tray.
7
C Select a tray to deliver the received paper.
Note
When no tray is specified,
"Auto Select" will be selected.
If you want to select the Bypass tray, specify it with

"Special Sender". P.141
Special Senders to Treat Differently
B Press [OK].
D Press [OK].
Note
To cancel these settings, Press
[Cancel].
If you specify for another line

type, repeat step B.
E Press [OK].
128
Reception Mode
Checkered Mark
Print Reception Time
B Press [OK].
B Press [OK].
Note
[Cancel].
Center Mark
Note
[Cancel].

B Press [OK].
Note
To cancel this setting, press
[Cancel].
129
130
8. Key Operator Setting

Changing Key Operator Settings
Counters
D Select [Transmission Page Count].
This function allows you to check the

total number of pages transmitted
and received on the display.
Transmissions:
Total number of transmitted pages
Receptions:
Total number of received pages

shown.
The total communication pages are

shown.
Note
If "Transmission Page Count" is
not shown, press [U
U Prev.] or [T
T
Next].
E After checking the display, press

[Exit].
C Select [Key Operator Tools].

The Key Operator Tools menu is
shown.
131
Key Operator Setting
Forwarding
Using this feature, you can select
messages from Specified Senders to
be printed on your machine, and then
sent on to another fax machine.
This is useful if, for example, you are
visiting another office and would like
a copy of your messages sent to that
office so you can read them.
Preparation
Before using this function, you
should specify the "Forwarding"
function in "Reception Mode" and
that it is set to on.
Programing Forwarding Stations

shown.
You can specify the End Receiver separately, according to the Special Senders. If you do not specify the Special
Sender, the messages are forwarding
to the specified receiver.
Limitation
The Forwarding function does not
forward messages received with Confidential Reception, Memory Lock,
Polling Reception mode, or messages
received by Transfer Request.

shown.
D Select [Forwarding].
You can program a sender with

Quick Dial Table and Groups. You
cannot program a sender with
Groups that have destinations
specified as transfer stations.
Note
One receiver can be specified with
this function. If you want more receivers, select Group Dial.
You can print a forwarding mark
on messages that are forwarded.
You can specify whether or not to
print forwarded messages. The default setting is on. P.136 Changing the User Parameters(Switch11,
Bit6)
132
Note
If "Forwarding" is not shown,
press [U
U Prev.] or [T
T Next].
E Press [ON].
Deleting a Forwarding Station
A Press the{{User Tools/Counter}} key.

Note
If there is a Forwarding Station
already programed, a receiver
name is shown. If you want to
change, press [Receiver] and go
to step F.

shown.
To cancel "Forwarding", press

[Cancel] and go to step G.
F Select
an end receiver with the

Quick Dial Table.
shown.
D Select [Forwarding].
8
{Clear/Stop} key or [Clear] and try
again.
G Press [OK].
H Press [OK].
The receiver name is shown on the
right side of [Receiver].
Note
If "Forwarding" is not shown,
press [U
U Prev.] or [T
T Next].

133
E Press [ON].
F Press [OK].
G Press the{{User Tools/Counter}} key.
Forwarding Mark
You can print a Forwarding Mark on
the receiver's messages which have
been forwarded.
The receiver is easy to distinguish
from forwarding paper and usual receptions.
You can specify whether or not to
print a Forwarding Mark with P.136
Changing the User Parameters(Switch02, Bit0). The default setting is on.
Memory Lock
When you switch Memory Lock on,
received messages are stored in memory and are not printed automatically. When a message is received in the
Memory Lock mode, the Confidential
File indicator blinks. To print this
message, enter the Memory Lock ID.
A user without the ID cannot print
the message. This prevents an unauthorized person from seeing the message.
To use Memory Lock, program the
Memory Lock ID and switch it on.

shown.

shown.
134
D Select [Memory Lock RX].
ECM
If a part of a transmission fails because of a line problem, the lost data
is automatically resent. For this feature to work, the other machine must
have ECM. By default, ECM is turned
on, but you can change this with the
following procedure.
Note
If "Memory Lock RX" is not
shown, press [U
U Prev.] or [T
T
Next].
E Select [ON] or [OFF].
Limitation
If you turn ECM off, you cannot
use the following features:
JBIG Transmission
Super G3 Communication

F Press [OK].

shown.
Note
[Cancel] and the display will return to step D.

shown.
135
D Select [ECM].
E Select [ON] or [OFF].
Note
If "ECM" is not shown, press [U
U
Prev.] or [T
T Next].
F Press [OK].
Note

Changing the User Parameters

The User Parameters allow you to customize various settings to match your
needs.
To change the function settings, set the user parameter switches.
Preparation
Access to some User Parameter Settings requires the installation of optional
equipment or that other settings be made beforehand.
- Switches and Bits

User Parameters are divided into Switches and each switch is divided into eight
bits. The right most bit is bit 0 and the left most is bit 7.
136
Switch 02 0
- User Parameter List

The User Parameter switches are outlined below.
: Default Settings
Switch
02
03
04
Bit
Item
0 Forwarding Mark
Off
On
3 TSI Print
Off
On
5 CIL Print
Off
On
6 TID Print
Off
On
0 Automatic printing of the

Memory TX Result Report
Off
On

Memory Storage Report
Off
On

Polling RX Reserve Report
Off
On

Polling RX Result Report
Off
On

Immediate TX Result Report
Off
On

Polling TX Clear Report
Off
On

Journal
Off
On

Confidential File Report
Off
On
7 Include a portion of the image on the Transmission

Result Report (Memory
Transmission), Memory
Storage Report, Communication Failure Report, or
Transfer Result Report (Inclusion of part of image)
Off
On
137

Switch
05
Bit
Item
0 Receive Service Call (SC)

Possible (SubstiCondition (Substitute Re- tute RX)
ception during service call)
2, 1
1
Not possible (Reception off)
Receive when the machine can not print (Substitute reception

during printer error)
00: Enabled unconditionally (Free),
01: Enabled for Own Name/Own Fax Number is received,
10: Enabled for Polling ID match,
11: Disabled (Reception off)
Off
On
7 Empty cassette alert (Paper

Empty Warning indication)
Off
On
06
6 First page scanned for

book originals
07
2 Parallel Memory Transmission
08
2 Authorized Reception type Only receive

from specified
senders
10
1 Combine 2 Originals
Off
On
3 Page Reduction when

printing
Off
On
1 Send PB/UUI to ISDN
UUI
PB
6 Local Print when Forwarding
Off
On
11
14
138
5 Just Size Printing
From the left

page
Off
From the right

page
On
Receive all messages except
those from specified senders
7 Polling file after sending

(Polling transmission
standby time)
Delete
(Use Once)
Standby (Save)
0 Print documents received

with Auto Power-On Reception (Night Printing
mode)
Immediate print- When turning on

ing (Off)
the Operation
switch (On)
1 Long Document Transmission (Well Log)
Off
On
2 Batch Transmission
Off
On
3 Reset when function

changed
Off
On
7 System Parameter List TX
Off
On

Switch
Bit
Item
17
2 Whether you need to press

Add after entering a Quick
Dial/Group Dial when
broadcasting
Not Necessary
Necessary
18
0 Print data with Fax Header
Off
On
1 Print transmitter origin

with Fax Header
Off
On
2 Print file number with Fax

Header
Off
On
3 Print page number with

Fax Header
Off
On
0 Use paper delivery shift

function (Offset Print)
Off
On
1 Sort Journal by line Type
Off
On

PC FAX error report
Off
On
1 Reprint the documents

that fail to print from PC
FAX driver
Off
On
19
20
5, 4, 3, 2 Store documents in memory that could not be printed from PC

FAX driver
0000: 0 minute / 0001: 1 minutes / 0010: 2 minutes / 0011: 3 minutes / 0100: 4 minutes / 0101: 5 minutes / 0110: 6 minutes / 0111:
7 minutes / 1000: 8 minutes / 1001: 9 minutes / 1010: 10 minutes
/ 1011: 11 minutes / 1100: 12 minutes / 1101: 13 minutes / 1110:
14 minutes / 1111: 15 minutes
24
1, 0
Store a message in memory that could not be transmitted

00: Off, 01: Store for 24 hours, 11: Store for 72 hours
25
4 RDS
Off
On
139
E Select
the same Switch number

you want to change.

User Parameter list and keep it
when you program or change a
user parameter. P.141 Printing
the User Parameter list
Do not change any bit switches
other than those shown on the previous pages.
F Select the same Bit number you

want to change.

shown.

When the Bit number is pressed,
the current value switches between 1 and 0.
Note
Repeat from step F to change
another Bit number of the same
Switch.
8
shown.
D Select [Parameter Setting].
G Press [OK].
To cancel these settings, press [Cancel] and the display will return to
step E.
H Repeat step Eand F to change the

Switch settings.
I After all the settings are finished,

press [Exit].

Note
If "Parameter Setting" is not
shown, press [U
U Prev.] or [T
T Next].
140
Printing the User Parameter list

Print this list to see the current User
Parameter settings.

shown.

shown.
D Press [Print List] just to the right

side of [Parameter Setting].
Note
If "Parameter Setting" is not
shown, press [U
U Prev.] or [T
T Next].

To cancel print a list, press [Cancel]
and the display will return to step
D.

Special Senders to Treat

Differently
By programing particular receivers in
advance, you can set the following
feature for each receiver.
Use the Own Name or Own Fax
Number to program your receivers. If
the receiver has the same machine
makes, program a Own Name that is
already programed as a receiver. If the
machine is not the same makes, use
Own Fax Number. To transmit with
G4, program the G4 destination information. You can also set the feature for
all programed receivers. For convenience, you can specify a feature for all
programed receivers when most of
your receivers have the same settings,
and specify in the Special Sender registration only the Special Senders that
you wish to have a feature changed for.
The following items can be programed.
Special Senders (Up to 30. A maximum of 50 when optional the Fax
Function Upgrade Un it is installed. A maximum of 20 characters for each name when using G3,
and a maximum of 24 characters
for each name when using G4.)
Full/Partial agreement
When you program Own Names
or Facsimile Names for multiple
destinations, you can program a
sequence of characters common to
these identifications as a Full
agreement instead of programing
every identification.
If a destination has a Own Name or
Own Fax Number containing a
Partial agreement, the machine determines if the destination matches
a programed destination.
141
Using a Full agreement

Destination to be
registered
(Own Name)
Number of registered identifications
NEW YORK
BRANCH
HONG KONG
BRANCH
SYDNEY
BRANCH
Using a Partial agreement

Destination to be
registered
(Own Name)
Number of registered identifications
BRANCH
Limitation
You can program up to 30 wild
cards.
Note
Compare identifications by neglecting spaces.
You can use wild cards for the
following functions:
P.144 programing/Changing Special Senders
P.145 Authorized RX
P.145 Forwarding
Limitation
You cannot program senders as
Special Senders if they do not have
Own Name or Own Fax Number
programed in their fax machines.
The machine cannot discriminate
between Polling Reception and
Free Polling documents from Special Senders.
142
Note
You can program up to 24 characters for the sender.
You can check Own Name and Own

Fax Number with Journal. You can
check programed Special Senders
with specified sender list. P.150
Printing the Special Sender List
If you select "OFF" for the Special
Sender function in "Initial Set Up",
the settings follow the "Reception
Mode" settings.
Authorized Reception
Use this feature to limit incoming
senders. The machine only receives
the faxes from programed Special
Senders, and therefore, it would
help you screen out unwanted
messages, such as junk mail, and
save you from wasting fax paper.
Note
To use this feature, program the
Special Senders, and then select
"ON" in "Authorized RX" with
"Reception Mode". P.126 Reception Mode The factory default is set to "OFF". P.136
(Switch08, Bit2)
Without the registration of Special Senders, the Authorized RX

function will not work even if
you select "ON".
You can select whether to receive only from programed
senders or receive only from
senders other than the ones programed with "User Parameter".
The factory default is set to "Only receive from specified senders". P.136 Changing the User
Parameters (Switch08, Bit2)
If you select "OFF" for Authorized RX in "Initial Set Up", the
settings follows the "Reception
Mode" settings.
Forwarding
Use this feature to output the received originals, and then transfer
them to the senders which are programed beforehand. Registration
of a place outside your company as
the other end will enable you to see
your reception there.
To discriminate between the other
ends, depends on the incoming
sender, such as transferring originals o n ly receiv ed from p rogramed senders (special senders),
you have to program the sender
with a transfer end.
Note
To use this feature, program
your Special Senders, and then
select "ON" in "Forwarding"
that is in "Reception Mode".
The factory default is set to
"OFF ". P .1 26 Recepti on
Mode
If you specify "ON" in "Forwarding" and select "Same as

basic settings", the fax message
will be forwarded to the other
ends programed in "Specify end
Receiver". P.132 Forwarding
If you do not program any Special Senders, the machine transfers all incoming documents to
the other end that is specified in
"Specify end Receiver".
RX File Print Qty

Use this feature to only print the
number of specified documents
copies received from programed
senders (Special Senders). If you
do not program any Special Senders, the machine prints the number
of specified documents copies received from all senders.
Limitation
You cannot use multi-copy
printing with Polling Reception,
Confidential Reception, or
Memory Lock.
Note
You can specify 1 to 10 copies.
Print 2 Sided
Use this feature to print on both
sides of the paper.
Limitation
Optional duplex unit is required for using this feature.
If you select bypass tray in the

"Paper Tray", duplex printing is
disabled.
Memory Lock
Use this feature to store incoming
documents from programed senders (special senders) on memory
without outputting them. Persons
who do not know the Memory
Lock ID cannot output, and therefore this feature is useful for receiving confidential documents. If
you do not program any senders,
the machine receives the fax message from all senders using Memory Lock reception.
Reference
P.164 Programing a Memory
Lock ID
Limitation
If you program the same sender
in Memory Lock and Forwarding, Forwarding is disabled.
RX Reverse Printing
Use this feature to print the pages
in reverse order. P.85 Reverse
Order Printing
143
Paper Tray
Use this feature to output the documents received from programed
senders (special senders) and the
documents from other senders on
different types of paper.
For example, if you supply blue
paper in tray 1 and white paper in
tray 2, the machine outputs the
documents from special senders
on the blue paper and outputs the
documents from other senders on
the white paper, making it easy for
you to discriminate between the
two.
If you do not program any special
senders, the machine outputs the
documents received from all senders using default paper tray.
Limitation
During polling reception and
free polling, you cannot select
the paper tray.
Note
If the machine receives an message that is a different size from
the paper that is in the specified
tray, the machine prints the
message after splitting it or minimizing its size. P.85 Page
Separation and Length Reduction
(Not Available in Some Countries)
Selection of the bypass tray (optional) enables you to specify

the paper size in "Scan Area".
The factory default is set to "Auto detect".
144
programing/Changing Special Senders

shown.
D Select [Program Special Sender].
Note
If "Program Special Sender" is
not shown, press [U
U Prev.] or [T
T
Next].
E Select destination to program
Authorized RX
A Press [Authorized RX].
If you program a new destination,

press "pNot Programed".
F Enter a destination.
Enter a destination using Own
Name or Own Fax Number.
Reference
C Press [OK].
Forwarding
A Press [Forwarding].
G Press [OK].
H If you program
"Partial agreement" in condition, press [Partial

agreement].
8
If you select [No], go to step D.
C Specify an end receiver.
I Select the item you want to program.

Note
You must select only the item
If you select [Same as basic settings], the settings will be the

same as [Reception Mode], [Forwarding] and [Memory Lock].
To cancel these settings, press
[Cancel] and the display will return to step E.
D Press [OK].
If you select [Yes], the name of
the end receiver is shown on the
right of "Receiver:".
145
Reception File Print Qty
Memory Lock
A Press [Reception File Print Qty].

B Select [Number of Sets].
A Press [Memory Lock].

C Enter the print quantity with

the number keys.
C Press [OK].
RX Reverse Printing
A Press [RX Reverse Printing].
Note
D Press [OK].
Print 2 Sided
A Press [Print 2 Sided].
C Press [OK].
146
C Press [OK].
Paper Tray
A Press [Paper Tray].
B Select a tray you want to use.
You can select [Tray 1], [Tray 2],

[Tray 3], [Tray 4], [Bypass tray] or
[Auto Select].
C Press [OK].
J Press [OK].
A Special Sender has been programed.
K Press [Exit].
L Press {User Tools/Counter}}.
Programing "Initial Set UP" of a Special

Sender
Use this function to program "Initial
Set Up" of a Special Sender. You can
also specify the Bypass Tray Paper
Size.
Note
not shown, press [U
U Prev.] or [T
T
Next].
E Press [Initial Set Up].

shown.
F Select a function you want to pro-
gram.
In this feature, "Authorized RX"

follows the same settings as "Reception Mode". P.126 Reception
Mode
147
Programing "Authorized RX" and

"Special RX Function"
B Make sure that [Vertical] is selected.

Note
If " Vertical is not selected,
press [Vertical].
C Enter a vertical size of paper

The illustration shows the "Authorized RX" display as a sample.

B Press [OK].
Programing "Bypass Tray Paper

Size"
A Select [Auto detect], [Standard
Size] or [Custom Size] you want
to program.
Note
If you select [Auto detect], the
machine shows a paper size
automatically.
If you select [Standard Size],

select a paper size displayed,
and then go to step H.
If you select [Custom Size], go
to step B.
148
Note
You can specify a vertical
size of paper from 209mm
(8.2 inch) to 305mm (12.0
inch). You cannot enter a size
smaller than 208, and larger
than 305. P.90 Having Incoming Messages Printed on
Paper from the Bypass Tray
[inch], the units change between "millimeter" and
"inch" alternately. If you enter a length and change the
unit by pressing [mm] or
[inch], the length is converted
automatically according to
the unit (fractions are rounded off).
D Press [#
#].
The programed size is shown.
E Press [Horiz.].
F Enter a horizontal size of paper

Deleting a Special Sender

Use this function to program "Initial
Set Up" of a Special Sender. And the
Bypass Tray Paper Size can be specified.

Note
You can specify a horizontal
size of paper from 148mm
(5.8 inch) to 600mm (23.6
inch). You cannot enter a size
smaller than 148, and larger
than 600. P.90 Having Incoming Messages Printed on
Paper from the Bypass Tray
[inch], the units change between "mm" and "inch" alternately. If you enter a length
and change the unit by pressing [mm] or [inch], the length
is converted automatically
according to the unit (fractions are rounded off).
G Press [#
#].
H Press [OK].

shown.
G Press [Exit].
Note
not shown, press [U
U Prev.] or [T
T
Next].
149
E Press [Delete].
Printing the Special Sender List

F Select a Special Sender you want
to delete.
G Press [Delete].
A Special Sender is deleted and
"pNot Programed" is shown.
The Facsimile User Tools menu is shown.
D Press [Print List] next to "Program

Special Sender".
Note
To cancel deleting a special
sender, press [Do not Delete] and
the display will return to step F.
H Press [Exit].
Note
If "Program Special Sender" is not
shown, press [U
U Prev.] or [T
T Next].

After printing a list, the display
Note
To cancel printing a list, press

150
Box Settings
Programing/Editing Personal Boxes
The following functions are for delivery and transfer of messages:

Personal Box
Information Box
Transfer Box
By using SUB and SEP Codes with
these functions, you can send messages to another party's box and retrieve messages stored in boxes.
For detail about how to set up these
functions, see the following.
P.151 Programing/Editing Personal
Boxes
P.154 Programing/Editing Information Boxes
P.157 Programing/Editing Transfer
Boxes
For detail about how to print out and
delete messages stored in boxes, see
the following.
P.34 Personal Boxes
P.36 Information Boxes
This section describes how to program Personal Boxes.

You can store the following items:
SUB Code (required)
Up to 20 characters long and can be
composed of digits 0-9, "#", "*" and
spaces (the first character cannot
be a space).
Box Name (required)
Up to 20 characters long.
Password (optional)
be a space).
Receiver (optional)
You can program one delivery destination for each Personal Box.
Specify the Quick Dial or Speed
Dial the delivery destination is
stored in.
Note
The combined total of items that
can be stored with the Personal
Box, Information Box and Transfer
Box features is 150. Installing the
optional Fax Function Upgrade
Unit increases this capacity to 400
items.
If a message cannot be delivered, a

Communication Failure Report is
printed and the message is saved
as a Confidential Reception document.
You can edit boxes in the same
way as programing them. However, to change the SUB Code itself,
you must delete it, and then program a new SUB Code.
SUB and SEP Codes can be up to 20

digits long and contain, spaces,
pound signs (#), and aster-isks (*).
Note
The Fax Header is not printed on
delivered messages.
Reference
P.34 Personal Boxes
151

shown.
Note
If you change a box already programed, press it and go to step
I.
If the desired box is not shown,

press [U
U Prev.] or [T
T Next].
F Press [Personal Box].
G Enter a Box Name.

D Select [Box Setting].
Reference
H Press [OK].
I Enter a Box Code.
8
The "Box Setting" menu is shown.
E Select a box to program.

Note
To change the Box Code, press
and try again. To change Box
Name, press [Box Name] and repeat step G.
If you program a new box, press

"pNot Programed".
152

try again.
J Specify any settings you require.

If you do not program [Password]
or [Receiver], go to step K.
Programing a Password
A Press [Password].
B Enter a password.
K Press [OK].
A box mode is shown next to box.
L Press [Exit].
M Press the {User Tools/Counter}} key.
Deleting Personal Boxes

Personal Boxes.
Limitation
If the messages are programed in
the box, you cannot delete it.

Note
and try again.
C Press [OK].
Programing a Receiver
A Press [Receiver].
B Select a destination with the
Quick Dial Table.

shown.

Note
If the desired destination is
not shown, press [U
U Prev.] or
[T
T Next].
C Press [OK].
153
E Press [Delete].
F Select a box you want to delete.
Note
press [U
U Prev.] or [T
T Next].
G Press [Delete].
A box is deleted and "pNot Programed" is shown.
Note
To cancel deleting a Special
Sender, press [Do not Delete] and
H Press [Exit].
154
Programing/Editing Information Boxes

This section describes how to set up
an Information Box.
SEP Code (required)
be a space).
Password (optional)
be a space).
Box Name (required)
Note
way as programing them. However, to change the SEP Code itself,
you must delete it, and then program a new SEP Code.
Reference
P.38 Printing Information Box Messages

shown.
F Press [Information Box].
G Enter a Box Name.

Reference
Chapter 3, Entering Text in
H Press [OK].
I Enter a Box Code.
"pNot Programed".
Note
I.
press [U
U Prev.] or [T
T Next].
Note
To change Box Code, press the
try again. To change Box Name,
press [Box Name] and repeat step
G.
try again.
J Press [Password].
Note
If you do not program a password, go to step M.
155
K Enter a password.
Note
try again.
L Press [OK].
M Press [OK].
N Press [Exit].
O Press the {User Tools/Counter}} key.
E Press [Delete].
Deleting Information Boxes

Information Boxes.
Limitation
If the messages are programed in
the Information Box, you cannot
delete them.

shown.
156
Note
press [U
U Prev.] or [T
T Next].
G Press [Delete].
The box is deleted and "pNot Programed" is shown.
Note
H Press [Exit].
Programing/Editing Transfer Boxes

This feature turns your machine into
a fax relay station. Documents sent
with a SUB Code that matches the
SUB Code programed as a Transfer
Box are received, and then relayed to
the programed receiver.
Since documents can be sent to multiple destinations in a single transfer request, you can economize on
communication costs when sending
to remote destinations.
This Machine (Transfer Station)
End Receiver
Transfer Box
Requesting party
SUB Code : 7777

End Receiver : A,B,C
SUB:7777
Transfer
Request
SUB Code : 8888

End Receiver : D,E,F
SUB Code : 9999
End Receiver : G,H,I
End Receiver
End Receiver
Print
GFCYUB0N
Note
Inform the requesting party of the
SUB Code assigned to the Transfer
Box. When they wish to have a
message transferred by your machine, ask them to send the message
using
SUB
Code
Transmission and specifying this
SUB Code. If a password is also
programed, inform them of this
too and ask them to enter it for the
SID Code.

SUB (required)
be a space).
Box Name (required)
Password (optional)
be a space).
Receiving Station (required)
You can store 5 receiving stations
(destinations to which messages
will be forwarded) for each box.
Specify receiving stations with
Quick Dials or Groups assigned to
Quick Dials that have been programed beforehand.
Limitation
After messages are transferred, a
Transfer Result Report is not sent
back to the sender.
Note
After messages are transferred,
they are deleted.
157
By default, the machine prints out

received messages and the Transfer Result Report that it transfers
after the transfer has finished. If
you want to turn this feature off,
please contact your service representative.
When the programed receiver is a
Multi-step Transfer Group Dial,
Multi-step Transfer takes place.
way as programing them. However, to change the SUB Code itself,
you must delete it, and then program a new SUB Code.
way as programing them.

"pNot Programed".

shown.
Note
9.

press [U
U Prev.] or [T
T Next].
F Press [Transfer Box].
G Enter a Box Name.

Reference
158
H Press [OK].
I Enter a Box Code.
C Press [OK].
Repeat from step 1 to specify
another receiving station.
Programing a Password
If you do not program a password,
go to step K.
A Press [Password].
B Enter a password
Note
To change Box Code, press the
try again. To change Box Name,
press [Box Name] and repeat step
G.

try again.
J Specify the condition of registration.

Programing Receiving Stations
A Select Receiving Station
You can store 5 receiving stations.
B Specify receiving stations with
Quick Dials.
Note
and try again.
C Press [OK].
K Press [OK].
L Press the {User Tools/Counter}} key.

Deleting Transfer Boxes

Limitation
If the specified SUB Code is not
programed as a Transfer Box, or
the messages of the box are programed, you cannot delete it.
Note
You can also specify receiving
stations with Group Dials.

press [U
U Prev.] or [T
T Next].
159

shown.
Note
press [U
U Prev.] or [T
T Next].
G Press [Delete].
A box is deleted and "pNot Programed" is shown.
Note
E Press [Delete].
H Press [Exit].
Printing the Box List

Follow the procedure below to print a
list showing the currently programed
Personal Boxes, Information Boxes
and Transfer Boxes.

shown.
160
D Press [Print List] next to "Box Setting".
Note
press [U
U Prev.] or [T
T Next].
Transfer Report
For the requesting party to be able to
receive Transfer Result Reports from
the Transfer Station, the requesting
party must program the number of
the telephone line their machine is
connected to in their own machine.
P.46 Transfer Request, P.80 ID Reception (Closed Network)
Be sure to insert a pause after the area
code.
For example, if you are in the United
States and your fax number is 2121234567, program the following:
You can program the fax number for
each line (G3, G4).
Note
Up to 16 digit are available for G3.
Up to 29 digit are available for G4.
1212-1234567
After printing a list, the display

Note
To cancel printing a list, press
[Cancel] and the display will return to step E.

shown.
Note
press [U
U Prev.] or [T
T Next].

161
D Select [Transfer Report].
Programing a G4 Fax number

To use this function, optional
ISDN Unit is required.
A Press [G4 Fax No.].
B Enter your fax number with
number keys.
Note
If "Transfer Report" is not
shown, press [U
U Prev.] or [T
T
Next].
E Specify the fax number for each

line.
C Press [OK].

Programing a Confidential ID
Programing a G3 Fax number
Program a Confidential ID to print

Confidential Reception.
A Press [G3 Fax No.(Dir.)].

B Enter your own fax number
with number keys.
Limitation
If you do not program the Confidential ID, you cannot receive a
confidential transmission.
Note
A Confidential ID can be any four
digit numeric codes except for
0000.

C Press [OK].

shown.
162
Programing a Polling ID
Program a Polling ID to use the Transfer Request, Transfer Station, Default
ID Polling Transmission, Default ID
Polling Reception and ID Reception.
When you use ID Transmission, program the same ID as that programed
on the sender's machine.
D Select [Program Confidential ID].
Note
A Polling ID can be any combination of digits (0-9) and letters (A-F)
except for 0000 and FFFF.
Note
If "Program Confidential ID" is
not shown, press [U
U Prev.] or [T
T
Next].
E Enter an ID with the number keys.

again.

shown.
D Select [Program Polling ID].
F Press [OK].
To cancel programing an ID, press
[Cancel]] and the display will return to step D

163
Note
If "Program Polling ID" is not
shown, press [U
U Prev.] or [T
T
Next].
E Enter an ID with the number keys

and [A] to [F].
again.
Programing a Memory Lock ID

Program a Memory Lock ID to print
Memory Lock reception.
A Memory Lock ID can be any four
digit numeric codes except for 0000.

shown.

F Press [OK].
[Cancel] and the display will return
to step D.

D Select [Program Memory Lock ID].
Note
If "Program Memory Lock ID "
U Prev.] or
[T
T Next].
164
E Enter a ID with number keys.

shown.
again.
F Press [OK].
[Cancel] and the display will return
to step D.

D Select [Select Dial/Push Phone].
Selecting Dial/Push Phone

Use this function to select a line type
when the machine is connected to a
G3 analog line.
A Dial or Push line is available for selection. The factory default is set to
Push Phone.
Limitation
If you are only connected to an
ISDN line, this function is not
available.
Note
"G3-2" and "G3-3" is shown on the
display, depending on the number
of installed Extra G3 Interface
Units.
8
Note
If "Select Dial/Push Phone" is
not shown, press [U
U Prev.] or [T
T
Next].
E Press
[Push Button Phone] or [Dial

Phone (10PPS)] to select line.
Use the same procedure to program and change this function.
165
F Press [OK].
G Press [Exit].
Programing ISDN G3 Line

This function must be set when you
connect the machine to an ISDN G3
digital line.
You can program the following items.
Own Fax Number 1
Own Fax Number 2
Sub-address P.49 Sub-address
Note
Optional ISDN Unit is required.
Program the Own Fax Number 1
as your own digital number. And
Own Fax Number 2 as another digital number which occupies a single line.
You should program the Own Fax
Number 1.
ISDN allows two or more terminals (such as a fax machine and
digital telephone) to be connected
to a single line. These terminals are
identified by their sub-address
numbers. If the terminals connected to the line at a destination are
assigned sub-addresses, dialing a
sub-address allows you to direct
your fax message to a particular
terminal at the destination.
Up to four digits (0 to 9999) are
available for a sub-address
166

shown.
D Select [Program ISDN-G3 Line].
Note
If "Program ISDN-G3 Line" is
not shown, press [U
U Prev.] or [T
T
Next].
E Select an item you want to program.
Programing Own Fax Number 1

and Own Fax Number 2
A Select [Own Number 1] or [Own
Number 2]
B Enter your own facsimile
C Press [OK].
Programing a Sub-address
A Select [Sub-address].
B Enter a sub-address with the
number keys.
C Press [OK].
F Press [Exit].
Programing ISDN G4 Line

This function must be set when you
connect the machine to an ISDN G4
digital line.
You can program the following items.
Own Fax Number 1
Own Fax Number 2
Sub-address P.49 Sub-address
Note
Optional ISDN Unit is required.
Program the Own Fax Number 1
as your own digital number. And
Own Fax Number 2 as another digital number which occupies single
line.
You should program the Own Fax
Number 1.
ISDN allows two or more terminals (such as a fax machine and
digital telephone) to be connected
to a single line. These terminals are
identified by their sub-address
numbers. If the terminals connected to the line at a destination are
assigned sub-addresses, dialing a
sub-address allows you to direct
your fax message to a particular
terminal at the destination.
Up to four digits (0 to 9999) are
available for a sub-address

shown.
167
B Enter your own facsimile

D Select [Program ISDN-G4 Line].
C Press [OK].
Programing a Sub-address
A Select [Sub-address].
B Enter a sub-address with the
number keys.
Note
If "Program ISDN-G4 Line" is
not shown, press [U
U Prev.] or [T
T
Next].
E Select an item you want to pro-
gram.
C Press [OK].
F Press [Exit].
Programing Own Fax Number 1

and Own Fax Number 2
A Select [Own Fax Number 1] or
[Own Fax Number 2]
168
RDS (Remote Diagnostic

System)
If your machine has a problem, a
service representative can perform
various diagnostic tasks over the telephone line from the service station to
try to find out what is wrong with
your machine. The service representative can also use RDS to change
some of your machine's settings if
you request it.
If you wish to use this feature, change
User Parameter Switch 25 digits 4.
169
170
9. PC FAX Features
The Optional Printer/Scanner Unit Type 1045 is required to use this feature.
With a PC FAX connected to a LAN, you can use a telephone line to send a
fax created using a Windows application to another fax machine.
To send a fax, simply select [Print] from the Windows application, then select
LAN FAX as the printer and specify a destination.
In addition to sending faxes, LAN FAX allows PC FAX to be used for printing
out documents prepared on a PC for proof checking.
To use LAN FAX, connect PC FAX to a LAN and make the necessary settings,
and then install the LAN FAX driver and related utilities on your PC.
Important
If LAN FAX errors occur, they are not displayed on the PC.
171
PC FAX Features
Setting PC FAX Properties

This section describes how to make
settings such as document size, resolution, and options.
Note
If your operating system is Windows NT4.0 or Windows 2000, log
on using an account that has Administrator permission.
Accessories
A Click [Accessories].
B Select the appropriate check
boxes.
Note
When the optional Fax Expansion Memory is installed, select the [Memory
Extension] check box.
The dialog box appearance varies

according to the Windows version.
The examples shown here are from
Windows 98.
A On the [Start] menu, point to [Settings] and then [Printers].
B Click to
select [LAN-Fax M1], and

then select [Properties] from the
[File] menu.
Note
With Windows NT, select [Document Default] from the [File]
menu.
C Click the [Paper] tab.

Note
With Windows 2000, click the
[Advanced] tab, and then click
[Printing Defaults...].
D Make paper settings.

Note
Even if you select Super Fine
(400 x 400 dpi), this machine
prints at 200 dpi when "Send &
Print" is selected , unless you
have installed the optional Fax
Expansion Memory.
The Gray Scale box does not appear in Windows NT or Windows 2000.
172
The optional ISDN Unit is

required in order to use a
G4 line.
Click [OK].
E Click [OK].
Basic Transmission
Basic Transmission
This section describes how to send fax
documents created using PC applications.
Open the application document you
want to send, or create a new document, and then perform the following
procedure.
A On the [File] menu, click [Print].

B Click [LAN-Fax M1] in [Printer Name],
and then click [OK].
Note
The setting method may differ
depending on the application
you are using. In all cases, select
[LAN-Fax M1] for the printer.
C Specify the destination.

You can select the destination from
Address Book, or directly enter the
fax number.
Note
You can select a line to use in
the "Line" list box.
If you specify the destination

from Address Book, you must
program destinations in advance.
D Specify options.
If you do not want to specify options, go to step E.
Attaching a Cover Sheet

A Place a check mark in the [Attach a Cover Sheet] checkbox.
Specifying Options
You can specify the following options:
Sending at Specific Time
User Code
User ID
Print Fax Header
Document Server
A Click [Options].
B Specify options you want to
use.
Note
The User Code you specified
for this machine, must be the
same User Code enter.
You cannot select a Document Server function unless

the check box is selected.
For details on specifying options, see the Help file on the
PC Fax driver.
C Click [OK].
E Click [Send].
Note
Click [Send & Print] to print a
copy of the document you send
to the destination on your machine.
Click [Print] to print a copy of

the document you specified
without sending it to the destination.
Note
To edit this setting, click
[Cover Sheet]. For details, see
the Online Help.
173
PC FAX Features
- Transmission Management
Using the PC FAX Driver
You can have the SmartNetMonitor
for Admin/SmartNetMonitor for Client manage your transmissions using
the PC FAX driver.
By using the PC FAX driver, you can
refer to the following information of
the documents sent using the PC FAX
driver.
User ID
Transmission result
Pages
Starting time
File number
Reference
PC FAX Online Help for more
information about using the PC
FAX function
Address Book
You can store and edit destinations in
the Address List using Address Book.
Note
For details, see the Online Help.
A On the [Start] menu, point to [Programs], and then [Address Book].
B Edit
an existing destination, or
store a new one.
Note
You can divide programmed
destinations into groups by
clicking [Group]. For details, see
the Online Help.
For [Line], select the appropriate
line type: G3, G4, or I-G3.
Storing New Destinations

A Enter the destination.
B Click [Add].
Editing Programmed Destinations
A Select the destination you
want to edit from the list. The
name of the company should
appear grayed.
B Edit the data.
C Click [Update].
Deleting Programmed Destinations

A Select the destination you
want to edit from the list.
The name of the company
should appear grayed.
B Click [Delete].
C Click [Yes].
C Click [Close].
174
Basic Transmission
D If you made changes to a destina-
tion, a confirmation dialog box

appears. To save the changes you
made, click [Yes].
If you do not want to save the
changes and quit editing, click
[No].
To return to the editing screen,
click [Cancel].
Printing
You can print documents created using Windows applications.
Open the application document you
want to print, or create a new document and perform the following procedure.

B Click [LAN-Fax M1] in [Printer Name],
Note
The setting method may differ
depending on the application
you are using. In all cases, select
[LAN-Fax M1] for the printer.
C Click [Print].
LAN FAX Operation Messages
Message
The number of entries in Destinations exceed the limits.
Up to 30 entries can be entered.
Causes and Recommended Actions

The number of destinations specified exceeds the maximum possible. The maximum number of destinations
that can be specified at one time is 100 (Up to 200 with
optional Fax Function Upgrade Unit, up to 500 with optional Expansion Memory.).
175
PC FAX Features
176
10. Troubleshooting
When Toner Runs Out
When the machine has run out of toner the symbol appears on the display.
Note that even if there is no toner left
you can still send fax messages.
Important
If you continue receiving and
sending faxes after toner runs out,
communication will not be possible after 200 communications (1000
with optional Expansion Memory
installed).
B Press [Exit].
The error display closes.
Chapter 2, "Memory Transmission" or "Immediate Transmission"
Limitation
The Memory Storage Report, Polling Reserve Report and Confidential File Report are not printed.

display is shown.
Note
key.
177
Troubleshooting
When Power is Turned off or Fails

Even if the Main Power switch is turned off, the contents of the machine's memory (programmed numbers etc.) will not be lost. However, if power is lost for
about 1 hour by the Main Power switch being turned off, a power cut or the
power cable being removed, contents of the Fax memory will be lost. Lost items
will include any fax messages stored in memory using Memory Transmission or
Reception.
If a file has been deleted from memory, a Power Failure Report is automatically
printed as soon as power is restored. This report can be used to identify lost files.
If an original stored by Memory Transmission was lost, re-send it. If a message
received by Memory Reception or Substitute Reception was lost, ask the sender
to re-send it. If an Auto Document was lost, you will need to store it in memory
again.
Important
Make sure that 100% is shown on the display before you unplug the machine.
If a lower value is shown, some data is currently stored in memory.
Right after a power failure, the internal battery needs to be sufficiently recharged to guard against future data loss. Please keep the machine plugged
in and the Main Power switch on for about 24 hours after the power loss occurs.
10
178
11. Appendix
Replacing the Stamp Cartridge
The ADF is required.
When the stamp becomes lighter, replace the cartridge.
Note
Use the cartridge specified for this
machine.
C Set a new cartridge.

Insert the cartridge until its metal
parts are not visible.
A Lift
the document feeder (ADF)

and open the stamp cover.
D Replace the stamp cover until it

clicks.
B Pull out the cartridge.
E Close the document feeder.
179
Appendix
Connecting the Machine to a Telephone

Line and Telephone
Connecting the Telephone Line
To connect the machine to a telephone line, use a snap-in modular type connector.
Important
Make sure the connector is the correct type before you start.
Where to connect the machine
1. G4
2. G3
3. Handset
When using a modular type connector
11
180
4. External Telephone
5. Extra G32
6. Extra G31
Connecting the Machine to a Telephone Line and Telephone
Connecting the Machine to the ISDN

Optional ISDN Unit required.
For details about how to install the optional ISDN unit, please contact your service representative.
Connect the machine to the ISDN with a modular type connector.
Connecting The Optional External Telephone

You can connect the handset and an external telephone to the machine. You can
use them for telephone calls.
Note
Some telephone may not be connected or may suffer reduced functionality.
Limitation
When you use the handset or an optional external telephone with the On
Hook Dial key for telephone calls, you can not talk with the other party without pressing the On Hook Dial key after taking off the receiver.
Specifying the handset line type

TT
DP
11
ND1X00E0
The switch on the handset should be in the appropriate position-TT (Tone Dialing) or DP (Pulse Dialing).
181
Appendix
Adjusting the handset bell volume
7 8 9
1 2 3
4 5 6
Ringer
ND1X00E1
Adjust the handset ringer volume using the volume switch.
Selecting the Line Type

Select the Line type to which the machine is connected. There are two types: tone
and pulse dial.
Select the Line Type using "PSTN Line Type" in "Key Operator Settings". The default settings is "Tone". P.165 Selecting Dial/Push Phone
11
182
Connecting the Machine to a Telephone Line and Telephone
Multi-port
When the optional ISDN Unit or optional Extra G3 Interface Unit is installed,
communications can take place simultaneously through two lines at once.
Option
Available Line Types
Available Protocol Combinations
Without option
PSTN
Extra G3 Interface Unit
PSTN+PSTN
G3+G3
ISDN Unit
PSTN+ISDN
G3+G4
G3
or
G3 (ISDN)+G4
ISDN
G3 (ISDN)+G4
PSTN+PSTN+PSTN
G3+G3+G3
Extra G3 Interface Unit+IS- PSTN+PSTN+ISDN

DN Unit
G3+G3+G4
+
or
G3+G3(ISDN)+G4
PSTN+ISDN
G3+G3(ISDN)+G4
or
G3 (ISDN)+G3(ISDN)
Note
A maximum of three communications can take place simultaneously.
You cannot perform three Immediate Transmissions simultaneously.

If three fax messages are received simultaneously, they cannot be printed out
at the same time.
If three communications are in progress, the display indicates the first communication that was initiated.
11
183
Appendix
Optional Equipment
Fax Function Upgrade Unit
JBIG compression for transmission/reception becomes possible.
You can extend the following features.
Function
Without Fax Function Upgrade Unit
With Fax Function Upgrade

Unit
Quick Dial
400
1,200
Memory Transmission file
400
800
Auto Document
18
Specific Sender
30
50
Program
100
200

This allows you to send and receive fax messages at high resolution (Fine or Super Fine). If you need this option, please consult your service representative.
Function
Without Expansion
Memory
With Expansion
Memory
With Expansion
Memory and Fax
Function Upgrade
Unit
Memory capacity for

Memory Transmission
160 sheet
1000 sheet
2080 sheet
Memory capacity for

storing in memory
Maximum 400 sheet
Maximum 1000 sheet
Maximum 3000 sheet
Note
The above figure is for an ITU-T No.1 chart printed on this supplier's standard A4 paper and scanned in using the following settings:
11
Resolution: Standard
Image Density: Auto
Original Type: Text
184
Optional Equipment

This allows you to send and receive messages via ISDN (Integrated Service Digital Network).

This option provides one Extra G3 line connection.
11
185
Appendix
Specifications
Standard
G3, G4 (option)
Resolution
G3:
83.85/mm200100dpi (Standard), 87.7/
mm200200dpi (Detail), 815.4/
mm200400dpi (Fine), 1615.4/mm400400dpi
(Super Fine: optional Expansion Memory required)
G4:
200100dpi (Standard), 200200dpi (Detail),
400400dpi (Super Fine: optional Expansion Memory required)
Transmission Time
G3: 3 seconds at 28,800bps, Standard resolution

G4: 3 seconds, Detail resolution
Data Compression Method
MH, MR, MMR, JBIG (optional Fax Function Upgrade Unit required)
Maximum Original Size
Standard size: A3/DLT Irregular size: 304432mm
Maximum Scanning Size
2971200mm/11"47"
Print Process
Printing on standard paper using the laser
Transmission Speed
G3:
33,600/31,200/28,800/26,400/24,000/21,600/
19,200/16,800/14,400/12,000/9,600/7,200/4,800/
2,400bps (auto shift down system)
G4:
64/56kbps (auto speed matching)
Power Consumption
11
186
Energy Saver (Auto Off) mode
9W
Standby mode
190W
Transmission
220W
Reception
195W
Printing (Average)
490W
Maximum Power Consumption
1500W
Acceptable Types of Originals

Make sure your originals are completely dry before setting them in the machine.
Originals containing wet ink or correcting fluid will mark the Exposure glass
and resulting image will be affected.
Acceptable Original Sizes

Where Original is Set Acceptable Original Size
Maximum
Number of
Sheets
1
Paper Thickness
Exposure glass
Maximum A3 (297420mm),
11"17" (279432mm)
Document Feeder
(ADF), single-sided
document
Fax transmission: A5 L to A3 L 80 sheets

(up to 1,200mm long) 8"51/2"
(80g/m2, 20lb)
L to 11"17"L
40128g/m2
(35110kg, 11-34lb)
Document Feeder
(ADF), double-sided
document
Fax transmission: A5 L to A3
L (up to 432mm long) 8"51/2"
L to 11"17"L
52105g/m2
(4590kg, 1428lb)
80 sheets
(80g/m2, 20lb)
----
Originals unsuitable for the Document Feeder (ADF)

Do not set the following types of originals in the Document Feeder (ADF) because they may be damaged. Place them on the Exposure glass instead.
Originals of sizes other than those specified in the previous table
Originals containing staples or clips
Pasted originals
Originals with any kind of coating, such as thermosensitive paper, art paper,
aluminum foil, carbon paper, or conductive paper
Originals with index tabs, tags, or other projecting parts
Sticky originals, such as translucent paper
Thin and soft originals
Originals of inappropriate weight (see table above)
Originals in bound form, such as books
11
187
Appendix
Original Sizes Difficult to Detect

The machine finds it difficult to detect the size of the following kinds of originals. If this happens, the receiving machine may not select print paper of the correct size.
Documents set on the Exposure glass of sizes other than those listed in the table below
Originals with index tabs, tags, or projecting parts
Dark originals with many characters or drawings
Originals which partially contain solid printing
Originals which have solid printing at their edges
The following paper sizes are automatically detected in Facsimile mode.
Inch Version
Paper Size
Where Original is
Set
17"
11"
K
14" 8 1/2"
8 1/2"
11" 5 1/2"
K
KL
8 1/2"
KL
Document Feeder
(ADF)
Paper Size and Scanned Area

Exposure Glass
188
10"
13" 8"
8 1/2"
K
L
Exposure Glass
- Auto detect
- Unable to auto detect
11
14"
10"
L
Limitation
There may be a difference in the size of the image when it is printed at the destination.
If you set an original larger than 11"17"/A3 on the Exposure glass, only an
are of 11"17"/A3 is scanned.
Note
Even if an original is correctly placed on the Exposure glass or in the Document Feeder (ADF), a margin of 3mm around each edge of the original may
not be sent.
If the receiver uses paper narrower than the original, the image will be reduced to fit the paper width. P.67 Auto Reduction
The machine detects paper sizes in the following ways.
When you place an original in the Document Feeder (ADF), an original
wider than about 10.4" (263mm) is scanned as 11"17" size.
An original narrower than about 9.1" (230mm) will be sent as 81/2"11" or
81/2"14" size.
Originals up to 47" (1,200mm) in length can be scanned.
Refer to the table below for the sizes the machine can detect when you
place an original on the Exposure glass. Because the machine scans in nonstandard size documents as one of the standard sizes, parts of the image
may be truncated depending on the length of the document. For details
about how to set non-standard size documents. P.116 Programing and
Changing a Scan Size.
11
Length
Width
12.5"
12.5"13.5"
13.5"
9.6"
81/2"11"L
81/2"13"L
81/2"14"L
9.6"10.6"
8"10"K
not detected
10"14"L
10.6"
81/2"11"K
not detected
11"17"L
189
Appendix
- Maximum Scan Area

Memory Transmission/Immediate Transmission
From the Document Feeder (ADF): 11"47"/2971,200mm (WL)
From the Exposure glass: 11"17"/297432mm (WL)
11
190
Function List
Function List
Transmission Mode
Feature name
Description
Reference
Send Later
Sets the machine to automatically start transmission or

polling reception at an appointed time
P.4 Sending at a Specific

Time (Send Later)
Priority Transmission
You can have your message

sent before any other queued
messages.
P.6 Priority Transmission
Confidential TX
Sends a confidential message. P.7 Confidential TransmisThis feature is divided into

sion
Default ID Confidential
Transmission and Override
ID Confidential Transmission.
Upon request from a destina- P.9 Polling Transmission

tion, the machine sends an
original stored in memory.
This feature is a divided ID
Polling Transmission, and
Override ID Polling Transmission.
Polling Reception
Sends a transmission request

to the other party and receives
a message from the receiver.
This feature is divided into
Default ID Polling Reception
and ID Override Polling Reception.
P.12 Polling Reception
11
191
Appendix
Advanced Features
Options
Description
Reference
TX SUB Code
You can send and receive con- P.43 SUB Code

fidential faxes to and from
other maker's machines that
have the SUB/SID feature.
RX SEP Code
If you wish receive a message

stored in the memory of another party's fax machine, you
can use this feature.
Transfer Req.
Sends an original to a destina- P.46 Transfer Request

tion via a facsimile equipped
with the transfer station capability.
Sub-address
Sends an original with subaddress to a destination.
P.49 Sub-address
UUI
Sends an original with UUI to

a destination.
P.50 UUI
P.44 SEP Code
Sub Transmission Information
11
192
Feature name
Description
Reference
Book Fax
When sending a book-type

original, this feature scans and
sends the right and left pages
one by one.
P.55 Book Fax
2 Sided TX
Use to send 2-Sided originals

(double-sided original) from
P.56 2-Sided Transmission

(Double-Sided Transmission)
Std. Message
Use this feature to stamp a

standard message at the top of
the first original sent.
P.57 Standard Message

Stamp
Auto Document
Stores a commonly used orig- P.58 Sending an Auto Docuinal and prints or sends it di- ment
rectly.
Select Stored File
Use this feature to send docu- P.59 Sending a Stored File

ments that are stored in the
document server.
Stamp
Indicates that the original has

been successfully stored in
memory or successfully sent.
P.65 Stamp
Function List
Options
Description
Reference
Fax Header Print
You can print a message including the name registered

as the Fax Header on the received message for each file.
P.66 Fax Header Print
Label Insertion
If you register the receiver's

P.66 Label Insertion
name in a Quick Dial or Speed
Dial, the receiver's name is automatically printed at the top
of the received message.
Auto Reduce
If the receiver uses paper nar- P.67 Auto Reduction

rower than the message, it is
reduced to fit a paper size
available on the receiving party's machine before being sent.
Default ID TX
Sends an original only to the

machine of the same Polling
ID as that registered in the
machine.
P.67 Default ID Transmission
Stamp Sender Name
You can have the machine

print a sender stamp on the
right edge of your paper.
P.66 Sender Stamp
Reducd Image TX
Using this feature, your message is sent at a reduced size

(93%) with a blank margin on
the left.
P.66 Reduced Image Transmission
11
193
Appendix
11
194
Feature name
Description
Reference
Print Journal
The Journal can be manually P.25 Printing the Journal

printed. This report shows the
results of the last 50 communications.
TX File Status
Part of the Journal can be

shown on the display. The results of the last 50 transmissions are displayed from the
latest one.
P.27 Checking the Transmission Result (TX File Status)
RX File Status
Part of the Journal can be

shown on the display. The results of the last 50 receptions
are displayed from the latest
one.
P.28 Checking the Reception

Result (RX File Status)
Memory Status
The status of the memory is

shown on the display.
P.29 Displaying the Memory

Status
Print Confidential RX File
Prints messages received in

Confidential Reception mode.
P.30 Printing a Confidential

Message
Print Memory Lock

Memory Lock mode.
P.32 Printing a File Received

with Memory Lock
Print Personal Box File

Personal Box.
P.35 Printing Personal Box

Messages
Store/Delete/Print Information Box File.
Program messages in the Information Box. And Delete or

Print a registered message is
also available.
P.36 Information Boxes
Function List
Fax User Tools

Feature name
Description
Reference
Program/Change/Delete
Quick Dial
When you register a destination in a Quick Dial, you can

specify the destination only by
pressing the Quick Dial key.
Chapter 3, "Quick Dial" in

Group
If you program a several desti- Chapter 3, "Groups" in the

nations into a Group, you can Basic Features manual
dial with just a few keystrokes.
Change Order of Quick Dial

Table
Use this feature to change the

order of the registered Quick
Dial Table. It would be convenient to list the receivers
that you fax to frequently on
the first page of the Quick Dial
Table.
P.108 Changing the Order of

the Quick Dial Table
Program Title of Quick Dial

Table
Use this feature to add a name

to the title of the Quick Dial
Table in order to facilitate
finding the desired registered
destination.
P.109 Programing Title of

the Quick Dial Table
Standard Message
Use this feature to program

standard messages to be
printed at the top of the first
page of the original.
P.111 Programing Standard

Messages
Prog./Change/Delete Auto
Document
Allows you to store a frequently used original in the

machine's memory. You can
print or send the original directly as necessary.
Scan Size
Programs a frequently used

original size in advance when
you send a message with the
Irregular Scan Area function.
P.116 Programing and

Changing a Scan Size
Prog./Change/Delete
11
195
Appendix
Feature name
Description
Reference
Print List/Report
This feature allows you to

print various reports and lists
manually. You can print the
following reports and lists:
P.119 Reports/Lists
Journal ( P.25)
Quick Dial list ( P.119)
Group Dial list ( P.119)
Label Insertion list (
P.119)
Program list( P.119)
Auto Document list (
P.119)
Gen. Settings/Adjust
Default transmission mode

and scan settings. When the
power is turned on, settings
specified here are selected.
Memory/Immediate
Transmission Switch
Text Size Priority
Auto Image Density
Adjust Scan Density
Switch Title of Quick Dial
Table
Switch Display
Adjust Sound Volume
Program Fax Information
Closed Network Priority
Setting
Scan End Reset
Mix Original Size Priority
Setting
11
Transmission Stamp Priority

On-hook Mode Release
Time
Quick Operation Key
196
P.120 General Setting/Adjustment
Function List
Feature name
Description
Reference
Reception Mode allows you to

switch the following reception
functions to on or off:
Allows you to switch the following reception functions to

on or off:
Switch Reception Mode

P.79, "Selecting the Reception Mode" in the Basic
Features manual
Authorized Reception (
P.127)
Forwarding ( P.145)
Reception File Print Quantity ( P.146)
2 Sided Print ( P.82)
Reception Reverse Printing ( P.85)
Paper Tray ( P.146)
G3/G4 Separate Tray (
P.128)
Checkered Mark ( P.81)
Center Mark ( P.81)
Print Reception Time (
P.82)
Key Operator Tools
Transmission Page Count
Check the transmission, reception, and totals on the display.
P.131 Counters
Forwarding
Transfers received messages

to a registered receiver (forwarding destination).
P.132 Forwarding
Memory Lock RX
Switch the Memory Lock on

or off. To use it, register an ID
for printing a message received in Memory Lock mode.
P.134 Memory Lock
ECM
If a part of transmission fails

due to a telephone line fault,
this feature resends the failed
part automatically.
P.135 ECM
Parameter Setting
Allows you to change and

print the function settings to
meet your needs.
P.136 Changing the User

Parameters
Program Special Sender
P.144 programing/Changing
By programing particular reSpecial Senders
ceivers as a Special Sender in
advance, you can set the special senders to treat differently.
11
197
Appendix
11
198
Feature name
Description
Reference
Box Setting
By using SUB and SEP Codes P.151 Box Settings

with these functions, you can
send messages to another party's box and retrieve messages
stored in boxes.
Transfer Report
Before using Transfer Request, you need this Transfer

Report setting.
P.161 Transfer Report
Program Confidential ID
Programs an ID required for

Confidential communication.
P.162 Programing a Confidential ID
Program Polling ID

Polling communication.
P.163 Programing a Polling

ID
Program Memory Lock ID

Memory Lock reception.
P.164 Programing a Memory Lock ID
Select Dial/Push Phone
Select a Line type when you

connect G3 analog line.
P.165 Selecting Dial/Push

Phone
Program ISDN-G3 Line
Program your own fax num- P.166 Programing ISDN G3

bers, and Own Fax Number,
Line
and sub-address when you
connect the machine to the ISDN.
Program ISDN-G4 Line
Program your own fax

number, TID (Terminal ID)
and sub-address when you
connect the machine to a G4
digital line.
P.167 Programing ISDN G4

Line
INDEX
D
180 Degree Rotation Printing, 83
2-Sided Printing, 75, 82
2-Sided Transmission, 56
2 Sided TX, 192
A
Acceptable Types of Originals, 187
Accessories, 172
Adding a Destination, 19
Address Book, 174
Attaching a Cover Sheet, 173
Auto Document, 58, 113, 192, 195
Auto Fax RX Power-up, 80
Auto Identification, 54
Automatic Redial, 71
Auto Reduce, 193
Auto Reduction, 67
B
Basic Transmission, 173
Batch Transmission, 71
Book Fax, 55, 192
Box Settings, 151
C
Canceling a Transmission, 17
Center Mark, 81
Chain Dial, 41
Changing a Destination, 18
Changing Key Operator Settings, 131
Changing the Line Type, 53
Changing the Transmission Time, 20
Checkered Mark, 81
Checking/Canceling TX Files, 15
Checking the Transmission Result
(TX File Status), 27
CIL, 86
CIL/TID Print, 86
Combine 2 originals, 75, 84
Communication Failure Report, 73
Communication Information, 194
Confidential File, 78
Confidential File Indicator, 78
Confidential File Report, 31
Confidential Message, 30
Confidential Transmission, 7
Counters, 131, 197
CSIOwn Fax Number, 77
Default ID/Free Polling RX (Reception), 12

Default ID Polling TX, 10
Default ID TX, 9, 193
Deleting Information Boxes, 156
Deleting Information Box Messages, 39
Deleting Personal Boxes, 153
Deleting Programmed Destinations, 174
Deleting Transfer Boxes, 159
Destination List, 15
Dual Access, 72
E
ECM, 71, 135, 197
Economy Transmission Time, 4
Editing Programmed Destinations, 174
End Receiver, 46, 48, 79
Expansion Memory, 184
Extra G3 Interface Unit, 185
F
Fax Function Upgrade Unit, 184
Fax Header Print, 66, 193
Fax User Tools, 195
Forwarding, 132, 197
Forwarding Station, 132
Free Polling Transmission, 9
Free Polling TX, 10
Full/Partial agreement, 141
Function List, 191
G
General Settings/Adjustment, 103
Group Dial, 195
H
Handy Dialing Functions, 41
199
O
ID Override Polling Reception, 12
ID Override Transmission, 9, 10
ID Reception, 80
ID Transmission, 67
Image Rotation, 84
Immediate Reception, 75
Information Boxes, 36
ISDN, 181
ISDN G3 Line, 166
ISDN G4 Line, 167
ISDN Unit (ISDN Option Type 450), 185
J
JBIG, 72, 80
JBIG Reception, 80
JBIG Transmission, 72
Journal, 25
K
Key Operator Setting, 131
Key Operator Tools, 103
Keystroke Program, 93
L
Label Insertion, 66, 193
LAN FAX Operation Messages, 175
List/Report, 196
M
Manual Dial, 52
Memory Lock, 32, 134, 197
Memory Reception, 75
Memory Status, 29, 194
Memory Storage Report, 73
More Transmission Functions, 70
Multi-copy, 75
Multi-copy Reception, 83
Multi-port, 183
Multistep Transfer, 79
200
On-Hook Dial, 51
Output Tray, 91
P
Page Reduction, 86
Page Separation and Length Reduction, 85
PC FAX Features, 171
PC FAX Properties, Setting, 172
Personal Boxes, 34
Polling Reception, 12, 191
Polling Reserve Report, 14
Polling Result Report, 14
Polling Transmission, 9
Polling Transmission Clear Report, 11
Print Completion Beep, 81
Print Confidential RX File, 194
Printed Report, 73
Printing, 175
Printing a File, 21
Printing Functions, 81
Printing Information Box Messages, 38
Printing Personal Box Messages, 35
Printing Special Sender List, 150
Printing the Box List, 160
Printing the Journal, 25
Print Journal, 194
Print List/Report, 103
Print Memory Lock, 194
Print Personal Box File, 194
Print TX File List, 23
Priority Transmission, 6
Prog./Change/Delete, 103
Program/Delete, 108
Programing/Editing Information Boxes, 154
Programing/Editing Personal Boxes, 151
Program ISDN-G3 Line, 166
Program ISDN-G4 Line, 167
PWD, 46
Q
Quick Dial, 195
R
RDS, 169
Receive File Indicator, 78
Reception, 75
Reception Features, 75
Reception Functions, 79
Reception Mode, 103
Reception Time, 82
Redial, 41
Reports/Lists, 119
Requesting Party, 46, 79
Re-sending a File, 22
Reverse Order Printing, 75, 85
RTIOwn Name, 77
RX File Status, 28, 194
S
Scan Size, 116, 195
Selecting the Line Type, 182
Sending at a Specific Time (Send Later), 4
Send Later, 191
SEP, 44
SID, 44
Simultaneous Broadcast, 72
Special Senders to Treat Differently, 141
Specifications, 186
Specifying Options, 173
Stamp, 65, 179
Store/Delete/Print Information Box File, 194
Storing Messages in Information Boxes, 36
Storing New Destinations, 174
SUB, 43
Sub-address, 49
Substitute Reception, 75, 76, 78
Switches and Bits, 136
Switching Titles, 111
T
Telephone Line, 180
TID, 86
Toner, 177
Transfer Boxes, 157
Transfer Report, 161
Transfer Request, 46
Transfer Result Report, 80
Transfer Station, 46, 79
Transmission Features, 41
Transmission Options, 66
Transmission Result Report (Immediate TX), 74
Transmission Result Report (Memory TX), 73
Transmission with Image Rotation, 72
Tray Shift, 91
Troubleshooting, 177
TSI, 86
TSI Print, 86
TTIFax Header, 193
TX File Status, 194
U
User Parameter List, 137
User Parameters, 136
User Tools, 103
UUI, 50
201
MEMO
202
UE
USA
B360
AdonisC2-sysEN122F_FM.book Page 1 Thursday, February 1, 2001 1:46 PM
1035/1045 Series
System Settings
reference.
RICOH COMPANY, LTD.

Phone: +81-(0)3-3479-3111
Spain
RICOH ESPAA S.A.
08005 Barcelona
Phone: +34-(0)93-295-7600
The Netherlands
RICOH EUROPE B.V.
Phone: +31-(0)20-5474111
Italy
RICOH ITALIA SpA
37139 Verona
Phone: +39-045-8181500
United Kingdom
RICOH UK LTD.
Ricoh House,
Middlesex, TW13 7HG
Phone: +44-(0)20-8261-4000
Germany
65760 Eschborn
Phone: +49-(0)6196-9060
France
RICOH FRANCE S.A.
Phone: +33-(0)1-40-94-38-38
Printed in China
UE USA B004-6507
Hong Kong
181, Johnston Road,
Wan Chai, Hong Kong
Phone: +852-2862-2888
Singapore
260 Orchard Road,
Singapore 238855
Phone: +65-830-5888
1035/1045 Series Operating Instructions
Overseas Affiliates
U.S.A.
RICOH CORPORATION
5 Dedrick Place
Phone: +1-973-882-2000
1035G/1045G
System Settings
reference.
RICOH COMPANY, LTD.

Phone: +81-(0)3-3479-3111
Spain
RICOH ESPAA S.A.
08005 Barcelona
Phone: +34-(0)93-295-7600
The Netherlands
RICOH EUROPE B.V.
Phone: +31-(0)20-5474111
Italy
RICOH ITALIA SpA
37139 Verona
Phone: +39-045-8181500
United Kingdom
RICOH UK LTD.
Ricoh House,
Middlesex, TW13 7HG
Phone: +44-(0)20-8261-4000
Germany
65760 Eschborn
Phone: +49-(0)6196-9060
France
RICOH FRANCE S.A.
Phone: +33-(0)1-40-94-38-38
Printed in Japan
UE USA B003-6507
Hong Kong
181, Johnston Road,
Wan Chai, Hong Kong
Phone: +852-2862-2888
Singapore
260 Orchard Road,
Singapore 238855
Phone: +65-830-5888
1035G/1045G Operating Instructions
Overseas Affiliates
U.S.A.
RICOH CORPORATION
5 Dedrick Place
Phone: +1-973-882-2000
Introduction
Notes:
Operator Safety:
reflected ) eye contact with the laser beam might cause serious eye damage. Safety precautions and
Laser Safety:
Warning:
Notes:
Type1: Aficio 1035, 1035P
Type2: Aficio 1045, 1045P
Power Source
see Power Connection in the Copy Reference manual.
Notice:
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against
harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio
frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful
interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur
in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to
correct the interference by one more of the following measures:
Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is
connected.
Warning
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void
the user's authority to operate the equipment.
1. Properly shielded and grounded cables and connectors must be used for connections to host computer (and/or peripheral) in order to meet FCC emission limits.
2. AC adapter with ferrite core must be used for RF interference suppression.
Note:
Avertissement:
a means POWER ON.
c means STAND BY.
Introduction
Notes:
Operator Safety:
Laser Safety:
Warning:
Notes:
Type1: Aficio 1035G
Type2: Aficio 1045G
Power Source
Notice:
connected.
Warning
Note:
Avertissement:
a means POWER ON.
c means STAND BY.
Introduction
Notes:
Operator Safety:
Laser Safety:
Warning:
Notes:
Type1: 2535, 2535P, 3502, 3502P
Type2: 2545, 2545P, 4502, 4502P
Power Source
Notice:
connected.
Warning
Note:
Avertissement:
a means POWER ON.
c means STAND BY.
Introduction
Notes:
Operator Safety:
Laser Safety:
Warning:
Notes:
Type1: 2235
Type2: 2245
Power Source
Notice:
connected.
Warning
Note:
Avertissement:
a means POWER ON.
c means STAND BY.
AdonisC2-sysEN122F_FM.book Page i Thursday, February 1, 2001 1:46 PM
Copyrights and Trademarks

Trademarks
Ethernet is a registered trademark of Xerox Corporation.
PostScript and Acrobat are registered trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated.
Apple Talk, Apple, Macintosh are registered trademarks of Apple Computer, Incorporated.
Novel, and Netware are registered trademarks of Novel, Inc.
Information about Installed Software

expat
Expat(Version 1.1). Copyright 1998, 1999 James Clark. All rights reserved.
The software installed on this product includes the expat application software Version 1.1 (hereinafter "expat 1.1").
The product manufacturer has not made any modification to the source code
of the expat 1.1.
The product manufacturer provides warranty and support to the software of
the product including the expat 1.1 and the product manufacturer makes Mr.
James Clark, the initial developer of the expat 1.1, free from these obligations.
The expat 1.1 is made available under Mozilla Public License Version 1.1
(hereinafter "MPL 1.1"), and controller software of the product equals the
Larger Work as defined in MPL 1.1. The software of this product except the
expat 1.1 is licensed to the product manufacturer under separate agreement(s).
The source code of the expat 1.1 is available at:
ftp://ftp.jclark.com/pub/xml/expat1_1.zip
MPL 1.1 is also available at:
http://www.mozilla.org/MPL/MPL-1.1.html
Information relating to the expat 1.1 is available at:
http://www.jclark.com/xml/expat.html
AdonisC2-sysEN122F_FM.book Page ii Thursday, February 1, 2001 1:46 PM
NetBSD
Copyright Notice of NetBSD
For all users to use this product:
This product contains NetBSD operating system:
For the most part, the software constituting the NetBSD operating system is not
in the public domain; its authors retain their copyright.
The following text shows the copyright notice used for many of the NetBSD
source code. For exact copyright notice applicable for each of the files/binaries,
the source code tree must be consulted.
A full source code can be found at http://www.netbsd.org/.
Copyright 1999, 2000 The NetBSD Foundation, Inc.
All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
A Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list
of conditions and the following disclaimer.
B Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice,
this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/
or other materials provided with the distribution.
C All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must
display the following acknowledgement:
This product includes software developed by the NetBSD Foundation, Inc.
and its contributors.
D Neither the name of The NetBSD Foundation nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software
without specific prior written permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE NETBSD FOUNDATION, INC. AND
CONTRIBUTORS ''AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES,
INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE FOUNDATION OR CONTRIBUTORS
BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF
USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER
CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE,
EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
ii
AdonisC2-sysEN122F_FM.book Page iii Thursday, February 1, 2001 1:46 PM
Authors Name List

All product names mentioned herein are trademarks of their respective owners.
The following notices are required to satisfy the license terms of the software
that we have mentioned in this document:
This product includes software developed by the University of California,
Berkeley and its contributors.
This product includes software developed by Jonathan R. Stone for the NetBSD Project.
This product includes software developed by the NetBSD Foundation, Inc.
and its contributors.
This product includes software developed by Manuel Bouyer.
This product includes software developed by Charles Hannum.
This product includes software developed by Charles M. Hannum.
This product includes software developed by Christopher G. Demetriou.
This product includes software developed by TooLs GmbH.
This product includes software developed by Terrence R. Lambert.
This product includes software developed by Adam Glass and Charles Hannum.
This product includes software developed by Theo de Raadt.
This product includes software developed by Jonathan Stone and Jason R.
Thorpe for the NetBSD Project.
This product includes software developed by the University of California,
Lawrence Berkeley Laboratory and its contributors.
This product includes software developed by Christos Zoulas.
This product includes software developed by Christopher G. Demetriou for
the NetBSD Project.
This product includes software developed by Paul Kranenburg.
This product includes software developed by Adam Glass.
This product includes software developed by Jonathan Stone.
This product includes software developed by Jonathan Stone for the NetBSD
Project.
This product includes software developed by Winning Strategies, Inc.
This product includes software developed by Frank van der Linden for the
NetBSD Project.
This product includes software developed for the NetBSD Project by Frank
van der Linden
This product includes software developed for the NetBSD Project by Jason R.
Thorpe.
The software was developed by the University of California, Berkeley.
This product includes software developed by Chris Provenzano, the University of California, Berkeley, and contributors
iii
AdonisC2-sysEN122F_FM.book Page iv Thursday, February 1, 2001 1:46 PM
ENERGY STAR Program

As an ENERGY STAR Partner, we have determined
that this machine model meets the ENERGY STAR
Guidelines for energy efficiency.
The ENERGY STAR Guidelines intend to establish an international energy-saving system for
developing and introducing energy-efficient office equipment to deal with environmental issues, such as global warming.
When a product meets the ENERGY STAR Guidelines for energy efficiency, the Partner shall
place the ENERGY STAR logo onto the machine model.
This product was designed to reduce the environmental impact associated with office equipment by means of energy-saving features, such as Low-power mode.
Low Power mode

This product automatically lowers its power consumption 1 minutes after the
last copying or printing job has been completed. Printing is available in this
mode, but if you use the copier, press the {Energy Saver} key.
For how to change the default interval before entering Low Power mode, see
Panel Off Timer in P.41 Timer Setting.
Auto Off mode
To conserve energy, this product automatically turns off 1 minutes after the
last copying or printing job has been completed. Printing is available in this
mode, but if you use the copier, press the operation switch.
For how to change the default interval before entering Auto Off mode, see
Auto Off Timer in P.41 Timer Setting.
Duplex Priority
To conserve paper resources, the Duplex function (1-Sided 2-Sided) is selected preferentially when you turn on the operation switch or the main power switch, press the {Energy Saver} key, or the machine resets itself
automatically. To change Duplex Priority mode, see Duplex Mode Priority
in the Copy Reference manual.
iv
AdonisC2-sysEN122F_FM.book Page v Thursday, February 1, 2001 1:46 PM
Specification
Copier Only or Copier with
printer
Low Power
mode
Power consumption
Type 1
Type 2
Type 1
Type 2
115 W
150 W
118 W
153 W
Default interval
1 minute
Recovery time
Auto Off
mode
Power consumption
3 seconds
6W
6W
Default interval
Recovery Time
Duplex Priority
Fax, printer and scanner

installed
8W
8W
1 minute
10 seconds
or less
15 seconds
or less
10 seconds
or less
15 seconds
or less
1 Sided2 Sided
Recycled Paper
In accordance with the ENERGY STAR Program, we recommend use of recycled
paper which is environment friendly.Please contact your sales representative for
recommended paper.
AdonisC2-sysEN122F_FM.book Page vi Thursday, February 1, 2001 1:46 PM

Symbols
R WARNING:
R CAUTION:

Important
Preparation
Note
Limitation
Reference
[
]
{
}
vi
AdonisC2-sysEN122F_FM.book Page vii Thursday, February 1, 2001 1:46 PM
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Manuals for this Machine........................................................................... 1
Machine Types............................................................................................ 2
Additional Functions Provided by Internal Options................................ 3
Copy Mode..................................................................................................... 3
Facsimile Mode (Option) ................................................................................ 3
Printer Mode (Option)..................................................................................... 3
Scanner Mode (Option).................................................................................. 3
1. Combined Function Operations

Control Panel .............................................................................................. 5
Changing Modes......................................................................................... 7
Copy Mode .................................................................................................. 8
Changing to Copy Mode ................................................................................ 8
Document Server Mode ........................................................................... 10
Copying by Using the Document Server ...................................................... 10
Storing Documents onto the Document Server............................................ 10
Interrupt the Operating Function and Start Storing ...................................... 11
Facsimile Mode......................................................................................... 12
Changing to Facsimile Mode........................................................................ 12
Printing a Received Fax ............................................................................... 12
Sending a Fax .............................................................................................. 13
Printer Mode.............................................................................................. 14
Changing to Printer Mode ............................................................................ 14
Printing ......................................................................................................... 14
Scanner Mode ........................................................................................... 15
Changing to Scanner Mode ......................................................................... 15
Interrupting scanning.................................................................................... 16
Multi-Access ............................................................................................. 17
2. Configuring the Network

Configuring the Network.......................................................................... 21
Configuring the Network with the Operation Panel .............................. 22
vii
AdonisC2-sysEN122F_FM.book Page viii Thursday, February 1, 2001 1:46 PM
3. User Tools (System Settings)

Accessing the User Tools (System Settings) ........................................ 29
Exiting from the User Tools.......................................................................... 30
User Tools Menu (System Settings) ....................................................... 32
Settings You Can Change with the User Tools ..................................... 34
General Features 1/2 .................................................................................... 34
General Features 2/2 .................................................................................... 37
Paper Size Settings 1/3 ................................................................................ 38
Timer Setting................................................................................................ 41
Interface Settings/Network 1/22/2 .............................................................. 43
Interface Settings/Parallel Interface ............................................................. 45
File Transfer ................................................................................................. 46
Key Operator Tools 1/2 ................................................................................. 47
Key Operator Tools 2/2 ................................................................................. 65
Entering Text............................................................................................. 66
Available Characters .................................................................................... 66
Keys ............................................................................................................. 66
How to Enter Text ........................................................................................ 67
INDEX......................................................................................................... 68
viii
Manuals for this Machine

This is a multi-functional machine combining copying, facsimile, Printer and
Scanner functions. This manual describes procedures common to these functions. Each function's reference describes the operational procedures separately
for the copying, facsimile, Printer and Scanner functions. Please consult the
manual that suits your needs.
System Settings (this manual)

Provides an overview of the machine. This manual introduces the functions
of the machine. It also introduces the options allowing you to use additional
functions and describes how to access the system user tools to make the machine easier to use.
When using as a copier
Copy Reference
Describes the various copying functions from basic copying to more advanced functions such as reducing/enlarging copies or combining originals into one copy.
When using as a facsimile
Describes the operational procedures and functions to use the machine as
a facsimile.
When using as a printer
Printer Reference (option)
Describes the system settings, procedures and functions for using this machine as a printer.
When using as a scanner
Scanner Reference (option)
Describes the system settings, procedures and functions for using this machine as a scanner.
Machine Types
This machine comes in two models which vary in copy speed. To make sure
which model you have, see the inside front cover.
Type 1
Copy speed
Type 2
1
35 copies/minute (A4K, 8 /2"

11"K)
45 copies/minute (A4K, 81/2"

11"K)
Additional Functions Provided by Internal

Options
You can expand the capabilities of
this machine to include fax functions.
When you want to add a function,
contact your sales or service representative.
Copy Mode
In copy mode you can make basic
copies and also copy using more sophisticated techniques, such as reduction/ enlargement or combining
several originals onto one copy. You
can install an optional memory expansion for storage of document images, thereby making the best use of
memory with various copy functions.
Facsimile Mode (Option)

You can send and receive fax messages in facsimile mode. Installation of
optional expansion memory allows
more functions to be used, and more
data to be stored.
Printer Mode (Option)

Installation of optional expansion
memory allows more data to be
stored.
Scanner Mode (Option)

You can use this machine as a scanner.
Chapter1 Page 5 Friday, February 2, 2001 4:55 PM
1. Combined Function
Operations
Control Panel
7. Operation switch
User Tools
Press to change the default settings
and conditions to meet your requirements.
Counter
Press to check or print the total number of copies made.
P.29 User Tools (System Settings)

(the On indicator goes on). To turn the
2. Display panel
Shows operation status, error messages,

and function menus.
Clear
Press to delete a number entered.
Stop
Press to stop a copy job in progress.

Press to check the enterd copy job settings.

Press to clear the previously entered copy
job settings.

Press to switch to and from Energy Saver
mode.
6. {Interrupt}} key
Press to make interrupt copies during a
copy run.
8. {Start}} key
Press to start copying. Use to set Auto
Start.
10. {#}} key

Press to enter a value.
11. Number keys

Use to enter the desired number of copies
and data for selected modes.
12. Function keys

Press the appropriate key to choose any
of the following functions:
Copy
Document Server
Facsimile
Printer
Scanner
Combined Function Operations
13. Function Status indicator

These show the status of the above functions:
Yellow: the function is selected.
Green: the function is active.
Red: the function has been interrupted.
Changing Modes
Changing Modes
You can use this machine not only as a copier, but optionally as a fax, printer and
scanner machine as well. Press the {Copy}, {Document Server}, {Facsimile}, or
{Printer}, {Scanner} key to use each function.
Limitation
You cannot switch modes in any of the following cases:
When scanning in a fax message for transmission.
During immediate transmission.
When accessing the user tools.
During interrupt copying.
During on hook dialing for fax transmission
Copy Mode
You can make basic copies, and enlarge/reduce, combine, or use various other copy functions to make
copies. You can also add options to
further increase the number of functions. For more details, refer to "Options" in the Copy Reference manual.
Changing to Copy Mode

You can always make a copy when
the machine isn't printing or scanning
a fax data.

The copier display appears on the
panel display.
Limitation
You cannot use the interrupt copy
function in the following cases:
during fax immediate transmission
while scanning an original for
memory transmission
during interrupt copying

If the machine is scanning originals, it will immediately stop the
scanning job. On the other hand, if
the machine is performing a copy
or print job, it will still continue the
job until you press the {Start} key
after pressing the {Interrupt} key.
When the current job stops, the interrupt copy display appears on
the panel display.
Note
When you interrupt a copying
job, remove the previous original.
Reference
For details, see the Copy Reference.
Interrupt copying to make urgently

needed copies
You can interrupt the current job to
make a copy.
Preparation
Machine operations are different
depending on the settings Print
Priority( P.34 General Features
1
/2) or User Code Management
( P.47 Key Operator Tools 1/2)
settings.
B Make your copies.

Important
If the remaining memory space
is 0%, the machine fails to receive fax data. Wait until the
machine completes printing a
received fax, then start making
copies.
Note
While copying, a received fax document is stored in memory and
the Receive File indicator is lit.
C After
interrupt copying is completed, remove the original and

delivered copies.
Copy Mode
D Press the {Interrupt}} key again.

The machine resumes the printing
job of the received fax document.
Resuming the interrupted

copying job
A Reset the previous original.
B Press the {Start}
} key.
The machine resumes the interrupted copy run.
Copying and Multi-accessing

If you want to make copy while using
another function, follow the procedure below.

The interrupt display appears on
the panel display.
B Set originals, and then press the

{Start}
} key.
The machine interrupts the job that
is printing and starts copying your
originals.
When Print Priority = Fax,

Printer, or Display (default)
The machine completes the operation of the function set by
Print priority before performing
the operation of another function.
Limitation
While the machine is performing two-sided printing
in fax m ode, you cannot
make two-sided copies until
the printing ends.
When Print Priority = Interleave

The machine performs the operations in the order in which they
are initiated. If another function
is initiated during operation,
the machine completes the current operation before performing the operation of the function
initiated.
C When
copying is complete, remove your originals and the copies.
D Press the {Interrupt}} key again.

The previous job settings will be
restored and the machine will continue from where it left off.
Note
Machine operations are different depending Print Priority
( P.34 General Features 1/2) or
User Code Management (
P.34 General Features 1/2) settings.
Reference
P.17 Multi-Access
Document Server Mode

You can store files in the document
server.
Note
If you want to re-send fax documents, go back to the Facsimile
display.
For details about this function and
operation refer to the Copy Reference.
Copying by Using the

Document Server
You can print out while other documents are printing.

The Document Server display appears on the panel display.
Storing Documents onto the

Document Server
Storing Documents in the Document
Server
A Set originals.
B Press the {Document Server}} key.
The Document server display appears on the panel display.
C Press the [Scan Original] key.

Documents are stored for the copier function.
Storing Documents while Copying

You can copy while storing files.
A Set Originals.
B Press the {Copy}} key.
The Copier display appears on the
panel display.
B Select the desired documents, and

then press [OK].
Note
You can select output trays for
each function if you have optional finishers.
C Press
[Store File], and then press

[OK].
Both copy job and store file will be
started.

Storing Documents from the Fax display
You can select to store and transmit
documents at the same time or store
documents only.
A Set originals.
10
Document Server Mode
B Press the {Facsimile}} key.

The facsimile display appears on
the panel display.
Interrupt the Operating

Function and Start Storing
C Press the [Store File] key.

D Press [Store&Transmit] or
Even if another function is operating,

you can use the document server.
Refer to the following procedure.
E If you select [Store&Transmit] and
While Copying
[Store
Only], and then press the [OK] key.
then input dial numbers or if you

select [Store Only], go to step F.

If you press [Store&Transmit], the
machine starts storing documents
and transmitting them. If you
press [Store Only], the machine
starts storing documents.
Reference
For details about this function
refer to the Facsimile Reference.
Storing Documents from Printer

If you want to store files from printer,
use this function from the printer
driver.

The copy job will be interrupted.
B Remove the originals.

C Press the {Document Server}} key.
The document server display appears on the panel display.
D Set originals to be stored.

E Press the [Scan Original] key.
The machine starts storing documents.
Note
If you want to go back to the
copier function, press {Copy}.
11
Facsimile Mode
1
Changing to Facsimile Mode
Printing a Received Fax
You can always use the machine as a

facsimile when you are not copying.
When you are not copying, a received

fax is printed automatically. You do
not need to switch to Facsimile mode.
If you wish to print a received fax
while copying, see below.
A Press the {Facsimile}} key.

The facsimile display appears on
the panel display.
Preparation
Machine operations are different
depending on the settings Print
Priority ( P.34 General Features
1
/2) or User Code Management
( P.47 Key Operator Tools 1/2)
settings.
Reference
P.17 Multi-Access.
Note
The Memory Transmission/Reception function is performed
automatically even when another function is being used.
You need not switch the display. When data is received in
memory, the Receive File indicator is lit.
Reference
For details, see the Facsimile
Reference.
Printing a received fax while copying

When Print Priority = Fax or Display (default)
The machine once interrupts the
copying and receives a fax. Upon
completing the fax reception, it resumes the interrupted copying job.
When Print Priority = Interleave
The machine performs the operations in the order in which they are
initiated. If another function is initiated during operation, the machine completes the current
operation before performing the
operation of the function initiated.
Printing a received fax in a hurry
Press the {Facsimile} key to switch
to the facsimile display. The copying job is interrupted and the machine starts printing the received
fax automatically. After printing
the fax, press the {Copy} key and
do the previous job again.
12
Facsimile Mode
Sending a Fax
Sending a fax while printing a received
fax
Scanning originals for memory
transmission
The machine can scan your originals
for memory transmission even while
printing a received fax.
A Complete
the usual operations

for sending a fax, then press the
{Start}
} key.
Sending a fax while printing
A Press the {Facsimile}} key to switch

to the fax display.
Printing is interrupted.
B Complete

{Start}
} key.
After the transmission has finished, printing re-starts.
When Scanning Other Jobs
A You
cannot scan originals to be

sent by fax when scanning originals for another job.
Sending a fax while copying

While outputting copy
A Press the {Facsimile}} key to switch

to the facsimile display.
You can send a fax while copying.
Note
Remove any originals of your
copy job.
B Complete

{Start}
} key.
C After
the transmission has finished, press the {Copy}

} key.
D Reset the copy job originals, then
press the {Start}

} key.
The machine resumes the interrupted copy run.
13
Printer Mode
Changing to Printer Mode
Whenever you print from applications, you do not have to switch to

printer mode. However, if you wish
to cancel a print job, you need to
switch to printer mode.
A Press the {Printer}} key.

The printer display appears on the
panel display.
Reference
For details, see the Printer Reference.
Printing
The machine can receive print data
while another mode is functioning.
A Print the job from your computer.

Printing starts.
Reference
For details, see the Printer Reference.
14
Scanner Mode
Scanner Mode
Changing to Scanner Mode
This scanner unit has two scanner
functions: Network TWAIN Scanner and Network Delivery Scanner.
Reference
To configure the function priority,
see the Scanner Reference.
Limitation
In the following cases, the machine
cannot be used as a scanner.
While scanning originals for
copying
While scanning a fax message
for transmission
During immediate fax transmission
Using the Network TWAIN Scanner
A Set originals.
B Configure the scan options using
the computer.
C Start the scan.

Reference
For more information, see the
Scanner Reference.
Using the Network Delivery Scanner
A Set originals.
B Press {Scanner}} key.
The screen for the scanner mode
appears.
Storing Documents in Memory
A Set originals.
B Press the {Scanner}} key.
The scanner display appears on
the panel display.
C Press the {Store File}} key.

D The machine prepares to store the
document.
C Set the scan options, an address

and a sender.
D Press {Start}} key.

Reference
For more information, see the
Scanner Reference.
15
Interrupting scanning
If you want to scan while copying or
faxing, follow the procedure below.
Scanning while copying

Usually, you cannot use this machine
as a scanner until it finishes copying.
Preparation
Select Function Reset Timer to set
Instant. P.34 General Features
1
/2
A Press {Clear/Stop}} key.

Copying is interrupted.

C Press {Reset}} key.
D Start the scan.
Note
When the scan is completed,
press {Copy} key and restart
copying.
Scanning while scanning a fax message

for memory transmission
Usually, you cannot use the scanner
function until scanning a fax message
for memory transmission is completed.
Preparation
1
/2

The fax message scan is interrupted.
Note
While using the quick memory
delivery, previously scanned
originals will be delivered.
16

C Start the scan.
Note
press {Facsimile} key and restart
faxing.
Scanning while doing an Immediate Fax

Transmission
Usually, you cannot use the scanner
function while it is doing an immediate fax transmissions.
Preparation
1
/2.

The immediate fax transmission is
interrupted.
Note
Previously scanned originals
will be delivered.

C Start the scan.
Note
press {Facsimile} key and restart
faxing.
Scanning while printing

You can scan without interrupting
printing.
Multi-Access
Multi-Access
You can carry out another job using a different function while the current job is
being performed.
This allows you to handle your jobs efficiently regardless of how the machine is
being used. For example:
While making copies, you can scan documents to store in the Document Server.
While printing documents saved in the Document Server, the machine can receive print data.
You can make copies while receiving fax data.
While printing print data, you can make operations for copying.
Performing multiple functions simultaneously like this is called Multi-accessing.
Note
You can choose which mode has the highest priority for performing a print
job by using Print Priority in General Features 1/2. The default mode is
shown in the display. P.34 General Features 1/2.
When your machine is equipped with the optional external tray, the 1000
sheet finisher, the 2 tray finisher or the print post you can specify the tray
used for each function so that completed documents are not mixed. Output in P.34 General Features 1/2.
- Sample operations
This chart is based on the following conditions:
When Print priority is set to Interrupt ( Print Priority in P.34 General
Features 1/2)
For details on operations under other conditions, contact your service representative.
17
Sort
Operations for Copying
Copying
DeskTopBinder
V2 Professional/
Lite
Sending a Facsimile from Document Server
Printing from Document Server
Document
Scanning a Document to Store in Document Server Server
Operations for Document Server
Scanning
Operations for Scanning
Staplling
Data Reception
Printing
Print
Reception
Printing Received Data
Memory Reception
Scanner
Printer
Transmission
Memory Transmission
Scanning an original for Memory Transmission
Copying
Sort
Stapling
Copy
Interrupt Copying Copy
Mode before you select

Stapling
Transmission Operation/Manual Reception Operation
Facsimile
Interrupt
Copying
Mode after you select
$ $ $ $ $ $ $ $
$ $ $ $ $ $ $
*1
*1
*1
*5
*2
*2
*2
*4
*4
$ $ $ $ $ $ $
*1
*1
*1
*2
*2
*2
*2
18
Reception Transmission
*3
Memory Reception
*3

*2
*3
*3

*3

*3
*3
*3
*3

*8
*8
Data Reception
Sort Print
Staplling

Scanning
$ $ $ $ $ $

Operations for Document

Server
Scanning a Document to
Store in Document Server
Printing from Document
Server
$ $ $ $ $ $ $ $
Print
Document Server Scanner Printer
Facsimile
Transmission Operation/
$ $ $ $ $ $ $ $
Manual Reception Operation
Scanning an original for
Memory Transmission
Memory Transmission
*5
*4
*4
$ $ $

$
*4
*8
*8
*8
Multi-Access
DeskTopBinder V2 Professional/Lite
*1
*2
*3
*4
*5
*6
*7
*8
*9
DeskTopBinder
V2 Professional/
Lite
Sending a Facsimile from Document Server
Document
Scanning a Document to Store in Document Server Server
Operations for Document Server
Scanning
Staplling
Data Reception
Print
Reception
Memory Reception
Scanner
Printer
Transmission
Memory Transmission
Transmission Operation/Manual Reception Operation
Scanning an original for Memory Transmission
Copying
Sort
Stapling
Mode before you select

Printing from Document
Server
Sending a Facsimile from
Document Server
Copy
Interrupt
Copying
Facsimile
Printing
Mode after you select

*4

*3
*3
*3
*3
Simultaneous operations are only available after the preceding job documents are all
scanned and the [Next Job] key appears.
You can scan a document after the preceding job documents are all scanned.
Simultaneous operations are only available when the machine is equipped with multiple telephone lines.
During stapling, printing automatically starts after the current job.
Stapling is not available.
Simultaneous operations become available after you press the [Next Job] key.
If you are making stapled copies with paper larger than A4, 81/2" 11" using the operational 1000 sheet finisher, subsequent operations using the finisher shift tray are
suspended until the current job is finished.
If you scan a document during printing, the scanning speed might be slow.
During parallel receptions, any subsequent job is suspended until the receptions are
completed.
Limitation
Simultaneous stapling is not available.
19
20
2. Configuring the Network

Configuring the Network
Mode
Network Setting
Distribute received fax

documents *1
IP Address, Subnet Mask, Gateway Address, Delivery Server IP

Address,Fax RX File Transmission, Effective Protocol (TCP/IP)
Scanner (Network Twain

Scanner) *2
IP Address, Subnet Mask, Gateway Address, Effective Protocol

(TCP/IP)
Scanner (Network Delivery Scanner) *3
IP Address, Subnet Mask, Gateway Address, Effective Protocol

(TCP/IP), Delivery Server IP Address,Number of Recalls, Recall
Interval time
Printer (TCP/IP) *4
IP Address, Subnet Mask, Gateway Address, Network Boot, Effective Protocol, Ethernet Speed
Printer (NetWare) *5
IP Address, Subnet Mask, Gateway Address,Effective Protocol,

NW Frame Type, Ethernet Speed
*1
*2
*3
*4
*5
The optional Scan Router V2 Lite/Professional is required to use this function. In addition to the network settings, you will also need to specify the settings for Delivery
Server IP Address and Fax RX File Transmission for file transfer.
You will need to specify the settings for a network TWAIN scanner and network delivery scanner when using the scanner function.
When you use this function, you need to have an optional network interface board
and 32MB of memory, or Scan Router V2 Lite which handled with the printer/scanner unit. If you need to have Scan Router V2 Professional, see the Printer Reference
or Scanner Reference.
Make the necessary settings for your network environment. For details about settings, see the Printer Reference.
Configure the TCP/IP when you use pure IP of NetWare 5.
This section describes the basic procedures. For detailed settings values, refer to
the Network Settings Items on page 30.
If your network environment has TCP/IP, you can configure the IP address by
using the SmartNetMonitor for Admin which handle with printer/scanner unit.
21
Configuring the Network with the

Operation Panel
This section describes the basic procedures. Please set the settings appropriate
for the network you are using.
Important
These settings should be set by your systems administrator or after consulting
with your systems administrator.
The following table shows the operation panel settings and their default settings. These are included in TCP/IP Menu of the Network menu.
Setting Name
Value
IP Address
011.022.033.044
Subnet Mask
000.000.000.000
Gateway Address
000.000.000.000
Access Control
000.000.000.000
Access Mask
000.000.000.000
Network Boot
None
NW Frame Type
Auto Select
Effective Protocol
TCP/IP
*1
NetWare
*1
NetBEUI
*1
AppleTalk
*1
Ethernet Speed
*1
Auto
means that this protocol is active.
A Press {User Tools/Counter}}.
22
Configuring the Network with the Operation Panel
B Press {System Settings}}.

C Press [Interface Settings].
The following screen appears on the panel display.
D Make sure that the [Network] key is pressed.

The following screen appears on the panel display.
E Press [Effective Protocol].

The following message appears on the panel display.
Note
Consult the network administrator for help with these settings.
You must configure IP Address for using TCP/IP protocol. You don't have
to configure it if Networkboot is DHCP.
Press [Invalid] for protocols that you don't use.
Press [Effective] for TCP/IP protocol when you use pure IP of NetWare 5.
Limitation
You need to have PostScript 3 module for AppleTalk.
23
A Make sure that the [Effective Protocol] key is pressed.

B Select [Invalid] or [Effective] for each protocol.
2
C Press [OK].
The following operation will be different, depending on each protocols.
F If you use TCP/IP, you should assign an IP address.

A Make sure that the [Network] key is pressed.
B Press [IP Address].
C Use the number keys to enter the IP address.
24
Note
Press [
] and [
] Keys to move to the next entry field.
If you enter the wrong IP address, press [Clear] and re-enter the IP address.
D Press [OK].
G Refer to step F if you want to make settings for the following TCP/IP pro-
tocols: [Sub-net Mask], [Gateway Address], [Access Control] and [Access Mask].
H If you use the DHCP server, press [Network Boot].

Note
You need to change the settings when you use DHCP.
Use the default IP address.
A Make sure that the [Network] key is pressed.
B Press [Network Boot].
C Press [DHCP], and then press [OK].
25
I Press [TTNext], and then press [NW Frame Type] if you use NetWare.
2
You can select the following frame types:
Auto select (Default)
Ethernet II
Ethernet 802.2
Ethernet 802.3
Ethernet SNAP
Note
Select File server which connection must be same as the frame type.
A Make sure that the [Network] is selected, and then press [T
TNext].
B Press [NW Frame Type].
26
C Select the Frame Type, and then press [OK].
2
J Press [Exit].
Returns to the [User Tools/Counter] display.
K Press [List/Test Print] to print out the settings.

A Press [Printer Features].
B Press [List/Test Print].
C Press [Config. Page].

The configuration Page will be printed.
Reference
For details about List/Test Print refer to the Printer Reference.
Note
Ignore step K if your machine does not have printer or scanner options.
L Press {User Tools/Counter}} key.

Note
The settings become effective and back to display.
27
28
3. User Tools (System Settings)

Accessing the User Tools (System Settings)
This section is for the key operators in charge of this machine. You can change
or set the machine's default settings.
Preparation
After using the User Tools, be sure to exit from the User Tools.
The selected key is highlighted.

Any changes you make with the User Tools remain in effect even if the main
power switch or operation switch is turned off, or the {Energy Saver} key is
pressed.
Reference
For information on the User Tools (Copy/Document Server Features), see the
Copy Reference manual.

B Press the [System Settings] key.

The System Settings menu appears.
C Select the desired menu and press the key.
29
User Tools (System Settings)
D Change the settings by following the instructions on the display panel.

Then press the [OK] key.
Note
[OK]: Press to set the new settings and return to the previous menu.
[Cancel]: Press to return to the previous menu without changing any data.
Exiting from the User Tools
A After changing the User Tools settings, press the [Exit] key on the User
Tools Main Menu.

Changing the User Tools is completed, and the machine is ready for copying.
Note
To exit from the change of the machine's default settings and return to
Copy mode, press the {User Tools/Counter} key.
You can also exit from the User Tools by pressing the {User Tools/Counter}
key.
30
Accessing the User Tools (System Settings)
31
User Tools Menu (System Settings)
32
User Tools Menu (System Settings)
33
Settings You Can Change with the User

Tools
Reference
For how to access the User Tools, P.29 Accessing the User Tools (System Settings).
Panel Tone
The beeper(key tone)sounds when a key is pressed.
Note
Default: ON
Warm Up Notice
Specify whether the beeper sounds when the machine becomes ready for
copying after Energy Saver mode is deactivated or the power is turned on.
Note
If the Panel Tonesetting is Off, the beeper does not sound irrespective
of the Warm Up Noticesetting.
Default: ON
Copy Count Display

The copy counter can be set to show the number of copies made (count up) or
the number of copies remaining to be made (count down).
Note
Default: Up (count up)
Function Priority
You can specify the mode to be displayed immediately after the operation
switch is turned on or System Reset mode is turned on.
Note
Default: Copier
Print Priority
Set print priority for each mode.
"Display mode"
Print priority is given to the mode displayed on the display.
"Copier"
Print priority is given to the copy function.
"Document Server"
Print priority is given to the Document server.
34
Settings You Can Change with the User Tools
"Facsimile"
Print priority is given to the fax function.
"Printer"
Print priority is given to the printer function.
"Interleave"
Prints jobs in the order in which they are initiated regardless of mode/
function. Output from each function might be mixed. If you want to avoid
such mixing, specify an independent tray for each feature using "Output
tray Prio". When using different functions, attaching internal tray 2 allows
you to specify an independent tray for each function. If you want to attach
one, contact your local dealer.
Note
Default: Display mode
Reference
P.17 Multi-Access or "Output Tray Prio." in P.34 General Features 1/2
Function Reset Timer

The length of time the machine waits before changing modes when using the
multi-access function. This is useful if you make many copies where you have
to change the settings for each copy. If you set a large value, you can prevent
jobs from other functions interrupting the copy job. This setting is ignored if
"Interleave" is set for "Print Priority".
Note
Default: Set Time
When you select "Set Time", enter the time (330seconds by 1 second steps)
The default time setting is 3 seconds.
35
Output: Copier
You can specify a tray to which documents are delivered.
Internal tray 1
Internal tray 2
External tray
1000-sheet finisher
Mailbox proof tray
Internal tray 1
Internal tray 2
External tray
Finisher shift tray
Mailbox proof tray
Output: Document Server

Internal tray 1
Internal tray 2
External tray
Finisher shift tray
Mailbox proof tray
Note
For details about output trays refer to P.36 Output: Copier
36
Output: Facsimile
You can specify a trays to which documents are delivered.
Internal tray 1
Internal tray 2
External tray
Finisher shift tray
Mailbox proof tray
Note
For details about output trays refer to P.36 Output: Copier

Output: Printer
Internal tray 1
Internal tray 2
External tray
Finisher shift tray
Mailbox proof tray
Mailbox output tray1-9
Note
For details about output tray refer to the illustration in P.36 Output:
Copier
Prepare Stapling
Perform a test staple after replacing staples or removing jammed staples.
Note
Press [OK] to prepare stapling.
37
Output tray settings

Limitation
You cannot interrupt a job when 1000sheet Finisher is stapling jobs using paper larger than 81/2"14". However, jobs received by fax will be printed and
delivered to Internal tray 1.
If the staple function is selected when using 2 Tray Finisher, the job will be
delivered to Finisher shift tray 2 regardless of the setting.
When Print post is installed, even if the output tray selected is an internal
tray, paper longer than 81/2"14" size is delivered automatically to the following output trays.
Installed option
More than 81/2"14" paper
Mailbox proof tray
Mailbox output tray
2 Tray Finisher+Mailbox
proof tray
Mailbox output tray

Finisher shift tray1
If Mailbox proof tray is installed on your machine and you often use paper
larger than 81/2" 14", specify an output tray other than internal tray.
Paper Size Settings 1/3

Paper Tray Priority (Copy/Document Server)
You can specify the output tray for delivery.
Note
Default: Internal tray 1
Paper Tray Priority (Fax/Printer)

You can specify the output tray for delivery.
Note
Default: Internal tray 1
Tray Paper Size: (Tray 14)

Select the size of the copy paper set in the paper tray.
Reference
Copy Reference "Changing the Paper Size".
Important
If the specified paper size differs from the size of paper actually set in the
paper tray, a paper misfeed might occur because the paper size is not detected correctly.
38
Note
The tray fence for the optional large capacity tray (LCT) is fixed. If you
need to change the paper size, contact your service representative.
If the paper size set for the dial in paper tray 1 and 2 is different to the paper size for this setting, the paper size of the dial has priority.
If you load paper in tray 1 or 2 that is not available on the paper size dial,
set the dial to "*".
The paper sizes you can set for (Tray14) are as follows:
A3L, B4L, A4K, A4L, B5K, B5L, A5L
11"17"L, 81/2"14"L, 81/2"11"K, 81/2"11"L, 8"13"L, 81/2"13"L,
8 1/4"13"L, 81/ 4"14"L, 11"14"L, 71/4" 101/2"L, 8"101/2"K,
8"101/2"L, 51/2"81/2"L
Default:
Internal tray 1: 81/2"11"K
Internal tray 2: 11"17"L
Internal tray 3: 81/2"11"L
Internal tray 4: 81/2"14"L

Paper Type (Bypass Tray)
Sets the display so you can see what type of paper is loaded in the bypass tray.
Note
Default: No display
Paper Type (Tray14)

Sets the display so you can see what type of paper is loaded in each of the paper trays. This information is used by the print function to automatically select the paper tray.
Note
Default:
Paper Type: No display
Copying Method: 2 Sided Copy
Apply Auto Paper Select: Yes
A key mark is displayed next to the paper tray if No is selected.
Limitation
Auto paper select can only be selected for the Copy function if No display
and Recycled paper are selected. However, auto paper select is not used if
No is selected.
39

Paper Type (LCT)
Sets the display so you can see what type of paper is loaded in the large capacity tray.
Note
Default
Paper Type: No display
Copying Method in Duplex: 2 Sided Copy
Apply Auto Paper Select: Yes
A key mark is displayed next to the paper tray if No is selected.
Limitation
Auto paper select is only selected for the Copy function if No display and
Recycled paper are selected. However, auto paper select is not used if No
is selected.
Cover Sheet Tray (Copy/Document Server)

Note
Default:
Tray to program: NONE
The functions that use the Cover Sheet Tray setting are the front cover
function and both covers function.
When Mode Selected is selected, the cover settings options are only displayed when the cover function or slip sheet function is selected.
You can only set the Copying Method in Duplex setting when At Mode selected is selected.
Slip Sheet Tray (Copy/Document Server)

Note
Default:
Tray to program: NONE
When you use the Slip Sheet function, you can use the output tray specified in the Slip Sheet Tray setting.
When At Mode selected is selected, the options are only displayed when
the cover function or slip sheet function is selected.
Reference
Copy Reference "Cover/Slip Sheet"
40
Timer Setting
When entering Set Time mode, if a key operator code has already been set, you
must enter the code (up to 8 digits). P.49 User Code.
Auto Off Timer

The machine turns off automatically to conserve energy after a specified
amount of time has past after a job. This function is called "Auto Off". The
Time can be set from 10 seconds to 240 minutes.
Note
Default: 1 minute
Enter numbers with number keys

Use [
] keys to switch between minites and seconds.
] and [
Auto off may not work while an error is displayed.
Panel Off Timer

Set the amount of time the machine waits before switching the panel off after
copying has finished or no operations are performed with the machine.
Note
The default setting is the same time interval as Auto Off Timer, so the Panel Off Timer is not used. This setting is only used if the Auto Off Timer setting is set to a longer interval than the Panel Off Timer setting.
The warm up time for making a copy from standby mode is three seconds.
The default setting is 1 minute
Enter a time interval between 10 seconds and 240 minutes with the number
keys.
Press the [
] or [
] keys to move the cursor between minutes and seconds.
System Reset Timer

The System Reset setting is a setting that automatically switches to the screen
for the function set in Function Priority. This happens if no operations are performed or to when clearing an interruputed job. This setting sets the system
reset interval.
Note
Default: Yes, 60 seconds
The time can be set from 10 to 999 seconds.
Copier/Document Server Auto Reset Timer

Set the time interval after which the copy function and document server function are reset.
41
Note
If No is selected, the machine will not automatically switch the user code
entry screen and you will not be able to limit who uses the machine.
The time can be set from 10 to 999 seconds.
Facsimile Auto Reset Timer

Set the time interval for when the fax function should be reset.
Note
Default: 30 seconds
The time can be set from 30-999 seconds.
Scanner Auto Reset Timer

Set the time interval for when the scanner function should be reset.
Note
If No is selected, the machine will not automatically switch the user code
entry screen and you will not be able to limit who uses the machine.
The time can be set from 10-999 seconds.
Set Date
Set the date for the copier's internal clock.
Note
To change among year and month and day, press [
] [
] keys.
Set Time
Set the date for the copier's internal clock.
Note
To change between minutes and seconds, press [
] [
] keys.
42
Interface Settings/Network 1/22/2

IP Address
Before using this machine with the network environment you must configure
the IP address.
Note
Default: 011.022.033.044
Do not use IP address that has been used for another machine. To get the
addresses, contact your network administrator.
Press [
] or [
] keys to move between each group of three numbers.
Press [Clear] if you enter the wrong number.
Sub-net Mask
A number used to mathematically "mask" or hide an IP address on the network by eliminating those parts of the address that are alike for all the machine on the network.
Note
Default: 000.000.000.000
Press [
] or [
] keys to move between each group of three numbers.
Gateway Address
A gateway is a connection or interchange point that connects two networks.
Configure the gateway address for the router or host computer used as a gateway.
Note
Default: 000.000.000.000
To get the addresses, contact your network administrator.
Access Control and Access Mask

You can control the client access. Access control and Access mask set to be together.
Note
Default: 000.000.000.000
If you do not want to set any limitation for this machine, use default settings.
43
If you set access control as192.168.15.16, clients address might be assign as

follows:
Address for access mask Client Address
000.000.000.000
xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx
255.000.000.000
192.xxx.xxx.xxx
255.255.000.000
192.168.xxx.xxx
255.255.255.000
192.168.15.xxx
255.255.255.255
192.168.15.16
Network Boot
Select how to set IP address from client.
Note
Default: NONE
For details about settings, consult your network administrator.
Effective Protocol
Select protocol, using in the network.
Note
Default: TCP/IP:Effective, NetWare:Effective, NetBEUI:Effective, AppleTalk:
Effective.
NW Frame Type
Select the frame type when you use NetWare.
Note
Default: Auto select
Ethernet Speed
Set the access speed for networks.
Note
Default: Auto select
Reference
For more information and settings about networks, see the Printer Reference.
44
Interface Settings/Parallel Interface

Parallel Timing
Specifies the timing setting for the parallel interface. Under normal circumstances, you will not need to change this setting.
Note
Default: ACK outside
Parallel Communication Speed

Specifies the communication speed for the parallel interface. If the communication speed is set too fast, data transfers may not flow smoothly. If this occurs, change the setting to Standard.
Note
Default: High speed
Selection Signal Status

Specifies the level for the select signal setting of the parallel interface.
Note
Default: High
Input Prime
Specifies whether the prime signal is active or inactive when an input prime
signal is sent. Under normal circumstances, you will not need to change this
setting.
Note
Default: Invalid
Bidirectional Communication
Specifies the printer's response mode etc., for status request when using the
parallel interface. If you experience problems when using other manufacturers printers, set this to Off. However, if this is set to Off, asynchronous
functions will not work.
Note
Default: Yes
Signal Control
Specifies the error processing settings for when an error occurs when printing
from a computer or sending faxes. Under normal circumstances, you will not
need to change this setting.
Note
Default: Job acceptance priority
45
File Transfer
Be sure to make these settings if you are using ScanRouter V2 Lite/Professional.
Note
The optional ScanRouter V2 Professional is required for distributing received
fax documents.
Delivery Server IP Address

Specifies the IP address of the ScanRouter V2 Lite delivery server for distributing documents or data from the machine.
Note
Default: 000.000.000.000
Press [
] or [
] to move between each group of three numbers.
If you make a mistake, press the Clear key and enter the correct number.
Fax RX File Transmission

Setting per Line
Specifies whether or not received fax documents should be sent to the
ScanRouter V2 Professional for each of the fax lines.
Note
Default: G3 Port 1/Do not Deliver, G3 Port 2/Do not Deliver, G3 Port 3/Do
not Deliver
Print at Delivery
Specifies whether or not received fax documents that are sent to the ScanRouter V2 Professional should also be printed by the machine at the same time.
Note
Default: No
File to Deliver
Specifies whether all received fax documents or only received fax documents that include delivery codes (documents with an ID and F code)
should sent to the ScanRouter V2 Professional.
Note
Default: File with Dlvry Code
Delivery Failure File (Dlvry Failure File)
If a received fax document cannot be sent to the ScanRouter V2 Professional, the documents is stored in the machine's memory. To print this stored
data select Print File, to delete the data select Delete File.
Note
If the machine can send data to the ScanRouter V2 Professional, data is
sent automatically.
If you delete the data, you will not be able to distribute or print the data.
46
Recall Interval Time

Specifies the interval the machine waits before resending data or a document,
if a data could not be sent to the ScanRouter V2 Professional.
Note
Default: 300 Seconds
Enter an interval within the range of 60 -999 seconds (in one second intervals) with the number keys.
This setting is for the Scanner function. The distribution of received fax
documents will still be performed.
Number of Recalls
Note
Default: Yes
Enter a number of times within the range of 1-99 with the number keys.
The default setting is 3 times.
This setting is for the Scanner function. The distribution of received fax
documents will still be performed.
Key Operator Tools 1/2

If an access code has been set, you cannot use the Key Operator Tools unless you
enter the access code (max. 8 digits). P.48 Key Operator Code
Reference
For details about user codes, P.49 User Code
User Code Management

Allows you to control who uses the machine by setting user codes for users.
Note
Default: Copier/OFF, Document Server/OFF, Facsimile/OFF, Scanner/OFF,
Printer/OFF
By using Auto Registration for the printer you can keep a print log for
each user code entered from the driver.
Key Counter Management

Use the key counter to specify whether users are limited or not.
Note
Default: Copier/OFF, Document Server/OFF, Facsimile/OFF, Scanner/OFF,
Printer/OFF
47
Key Operator Code

This specifies whether or not to use passwords (max. 8 digits) to control use
of the Timer Setting or Key Operator Tools settings for the access codes.
Note
Default: OFF
If you select ON, enter the access code (max. 8 digits) with the number
keys, then select Partial or All Initial Settings to set the access limit.
If you selected Partial
An access code is only required for the Timer Setting and Key Operator Tools initial settings and for Key Operator Tools for the fax initial settings. MENU PROTECT will be set for CHANGE/
CONTROL in the printer initial settings.
If you selected All Initial Settings
An access code will be required to access all the items in the System Settings, Copier/Document Server Features, Facsimile Features, Printer
Features, and Scanner Features.
If you select All Initial Settings, you will need to enter the access code to
access the Key Operator Code screen.
AOF (Always ON)

Makes the Auto Off Timer setting active. Leave this set to ON.
Note
Default: ON
Program/Change/Delete User Code

Adds, changes or deletes user codes (max 8 digits).
Note
You can register up to 100 user codes. If you add the optional extension
module, you can register up to 500 user codes.
You can also register user codes from the SmartNetMonitor for Admin
(printer option required).
Even if you change the user codes, the counter values are not cleared.
If you clear a user codes, the counter values associated with it are also automatically cleared.
[Program/Change]
This registers new user codes, and changes the functions that can be
used with user codes and user names.
[Delete]
Deletes a user code.
[Delete All]
Deletes all the user codes.
48
Display/Print Counter
Allows you to view and print the various counters.
Display/Print Counter
Displays counters for each functions ( Total, Copier, Facsimile, Printer ).
Print Counter List
A If you want to print Counter List, press [Print Counter List], and then press
start.
Note
If you do not want to print, then press [Cancel].
B
Press [Exit]
Display/Clear/Print Counter per User Code

Allows you to view and print the various counters accessed with user codes,
and to set the values to 0.
Important
If you use the Delete All for the user codes, the user code names (Fax
function), counter values, and communication settings will also be deleted.
Be sure to print the list of these settings before pressing the OK key.
Note
Press [U
U] [T
T] keys to show all counters.
Print Counter per User Code
Prints the counter values for each of the user codes.
Clear Counter per User Code
Sets the counter value for each of the user codes to 0.
Change User Name Order

Changes the order of the registered user codes.
Note
You can rearrange the order of items on the same page, but you cannot
move the items to another page. For example, you cannot move an item
from PLANNING to DAILY.
Select the user code you want to move and press the [
], [
], [
], [
] keys
to change its position. To move it to the end, press To End.
User Code
By registering user codes you can control which users can use which functions,
and check their use of a function.
Copier
Limits the users who can use the Copy function and manages the use of each
user code.
49
Document Server
Limits the users who can use the Document Server function and manages the
use of each user code.
Facsimile
Limits the users who can use the Fax function and manages the use of each
user code.
Printer
Limits the users who can use the Printer function and manages the use of each
user code.
Scanner
Limits the users who can use the Scanner function and manages the use of
each user code.
Important
The functions associated each user code are the same. If you change or delete user codes, the management data and limits associated with that user
code will become invalid.
To Register the New User Code

C Press the [Key Operator Tools] key.
D Press the [Program/Change/Delete User Code] key.
50
E Press [New Program] key.
F Press the key for the classification you want to use from Title Select.
Note
The keys you can select are as follows.
[Freq.] Added to the pages that is displayed first.
[AB], [CD], [EF], [GH], [IJK], [LMN], [OPQ], [RST], [UVW], [XYZ], Added to
the list of items in the title selected.
You can only select one page for Title Select.
G Enter the user code (8 digits max), then press the [#] key.
Note
If you make a mistake, press the [Cancel] or {Clear/Stop} key, and then enter
the code again.
51
H Select the functions to be used with the user code from Available Functions.
Note
The functions that can selected are as follows.
[Copier], [Facsimile TX], [Printer], [Document Server], [Scanner]
Select Yes for each function of the user code. P.47 User Code Management
I Press [Enter Name], then enter the name for the user code.
Note
For details on how to enter the name for the user code, see Entering text
on P.66 Entering Text.
This can be used to attach the user name to documents in the document
server. You do not need to enter a user code for this. Functions, Document Server, in the Copy Reference manual.
J To continue registering user codes, press [Continue to Program], and then repeat the procedures from step F.
52
K Press the [OK] key.
L Press the [Exit] key.
The display returns to the initial settings screen.
Changing the User Code
A Press the{{User Tools/ Counter}} key.

53
E Select the user code you want to change.
F Enter the new information for the item that you want to change.

54
Clearing the User Code

To clear a user code
A Press the {User Tools/ Counter}} key.

E Press the [Delete] key.
F Select the user code you want to delete.
Note
Press [All on The Page] when you want to select all the user codes displayed
on the page.
55
H Press Yes in the confirmation screen.
Note
If you don't want to quit deleting, press [No].
I Press the [Exit] key.

To delete all user codes

Using Print Counter, you can check the user codes for each print job for the
Copy/Document Server function, Printer function, and Facsimile function.
Important
Using [Print Counter], you can check the user codes for each print job for the

56

3
E Press the [Delete] key.
F Press the [Delete All] key.
G Press [Yes] in the confirmation screen.
Note
If you don't want to quit deleting, press [No].
57

3
To display counter for each user code
Using Print Counter, you can check the user codes for each print job for the
Using Transmission Counter you can check the number pages sent by fax and
the charge for each fax sent.

D Press the [Display/Clear/Print Counter per User Code] key.
E Press the [Print Counter] Key or [Transmission Counter] key.

The individual function counters for each user code are displayed.
58
Printing the Counter

Printing the Number of Prints (Counter) for Each User Code
You can print out how many prints you used for Copier/Document Server,
Printer, and Fax.

E Select User Code from the left side of display.
Note
Press [All on The Page] if you want to select all user codes on the page.
F Press [Print All Codes] of Per User Code.
59
G Press either [Print Counter] or [Transmission Counter].
Note
You can select both [Print Counter] and [Transmission Counter] at the same
time.
H Press [Print].
Printing the Number of Prints (Counter) for All User Code

E Press [Print All Codes] of All User Code.
Note
If [User Code Management] is set to [ON], input the enter codes.
60
F Press either [Print Counter] or [Transmission Counter].
Note
time.
G Press {Print}}.
Clearing the Counter
Clearing the Number of Print (Counter) for Each User Codes
A Press the [User Tools/Counter] key.

61
E Select User Code from the left side of display.
Note
Press [All on The Page] if you want to select all user codes on the page.
F Press [Clear] for Per User Code.
G Press either [Print Counter] or [Transmission Counter].
Note
time.
62
H Press [OK].
The user code counter will be clear.
3
Note
If you want to cancel the operation, press [Cancel].
Clearing the Number of Prints (Counter) for All User Code

E Press [Clear] for All User Codes.
63
F Press either [Print Counter] or [Transmission Counter].
Note
time.
G Press [OK].
All user code counters will be clear.
Note
If you want to cancel the operation, press [Cancel].
64
Key Operator Tools 2/2

Auto Delete File
You can select whether the files on the document server will be deleted after
a specified amount of time or not.
Note
Default: No
If you select [Yes], you can set the time interval from 1 to 180 days by one
day steps.
Delete All Files

You can delete all stored files on the document server.
Note
You can delete stored files even if password is set for a file.
Display Password with Stored File

You can select whether the documents which have passwords will be temporarily displayed or not.
Note
If you forget the password, press [Yes]. And if you make sure the password, press [No].
65
Entering Text
This section describes how to enter characters. When you enter a character, it is
shown at the position of the cursor. If there is a character at the cursor position,
the entered character is shown before the character.
Available Characters
Alphabetic characters
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZabcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz
Symbols
Numerals
012345689
Keys
Note
When entering uppercase or lowercase continuously, use the [Shift Lock] to
lock the case.
66
Entering Text
How to Enter Text

Entering letters
A Press the [Shift] to switch between uppercase and lowercase.

B Press letter you want to enter.
Deleting characters
A Press [Backspace] or [Delete All] to delete characters.
67
INDEX
C
Check Modes key, 5
Clear Modes key, 5
Clear/Stop key, 5
Combined Function Operations, 5
Configuring the Network, 21
Control Panel, 5
Copy Mode, 1, 8
D
Display panel, 5
Document Server Mode, 10
E
Energy Saver key, 5
F
Facsimile Mode, 1, 12
I
Interrupt Copying, 8
Interrupt key, 5
M
Multi-Access, 17
N
Number keys, 5
O
Operation switch, 5
P
Printer Mode, 14
S
Scanner Mode, 15
Start key, 5
U
User Code, 49
User Tools (System Settings), 29
K
# key, 5
68
UE
USA
B003
UE
USA
B004
Printer Unit Type 1045

Printer Reference 2
Zdsh000e.eps
reference.
Introduction
Please read the Safety Information in the Copy Reference manual before using this machine. It contains important information related to USER SAFETY and PREVENTING EQUIPMENT PROBLEMS.
Important
Parts of this manual are subject to change without prior notice. In no event will the company be liable
for direct, indirect, special, incidental, or consequential damages as a result of handling or operating
the machine.
Warning:
Trademarks
Microsoft, Windows and Windows NT are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the
United States and/or other countries.
Adobe, PostScript, Acrobat and PageMaker are registered trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated.
PCL is a registered trademark of Hewlett-Packard Company.
AppleTalk, Apple, Macintosh, Mac and TrueType are registered trademarks of Apple Computer, Incorporated.
IPS-PRINT Printer Language Emulation Copyright 1999-2000, XIONICS DOCUMENT TECHNOLOGIES, INC., All Rights Reserved.
Other product names used herein are for identification purposes only and might be trademarks of their
respective companies. We disclaim any and all rights in those marks.
Notes:
Certain options might not be available in some countries. For details, please contact your local dealer.
Note:
Microsoft Windows Millennium Edition (Windows Me)

The following manuals describe the operational procedures and maintenance of
this machine.
To enhance safe and efficient operation of this machine, all users should read
and follow the instructions carefully.
Copy Reference
Describes the procedures and functions for using this machine as a copier.
System Settings
Describes the system settings of this machine.
Printer Unit Type 1045 Printer Reference 1
Describes the procedures and provides necessary information about using
this machine as a printer. This manual is included as a PDF file on the CDROM labeled Operating Instructions for Printer(this manual).
Network Printing Guide Operating Instructions
Describes the procedures and provides necessary information about setting
up and using the printer under the network environment. We recommend
this manual as your first choice to read, and it is included as a PDF file on the
CD-ROM labeled Operating Instructions for Printer .
PostScript 3 Unit Type 1045 Operating Instructions Supplement
Describes the menus and features you can set using the PostScript 3 printer
driver. This manual is provided as a PDF file on the CD-ROM labeled Operating Instructions for Printer.
UNIX Supplement
Provides information about setting up and using the printer in a UNIX environment. This manual is included as a PDF file on the CD-ROM labeled Operating Instructions for Printer.

Symbols
R WARNING:
This symbol indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if instructions
R CAUTION:
are not followed, may result in minor or moderate injury or damage to property.

Important
If this instruction is not followed, paper might be misfed, originals might be
Preparation
Note
This symbol indicates precautions for operation, or actions to take after misoperation.
Limitation
Reference
[
]
Keys that appear on the machine's panel display.
Keys and buttons that appear on the computer's display.
{
}
Keys on the computer's keyboard.
ii
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1. Setting Up the Printer Driver and Canceling a Print Job
PCL 6/5e - Accessing the Printer Properties .......................................... 1
Windows 95/98/Me - Accessing the Printer Properties ................................. 1
Windows 2000 - Accessing the Printer Properties ........................................ 2
Windows NT 4.0 - Accessing the Printer Properties ..................................... 3
RPCS - Accessing the Printer Properties ............................................ 5
Windows 2000 - Accessing the Printer Properties ........................................ 6
Windows NT 4.0 - Accessing the Printer Properties ..................................... 7
PostScript 3 - Setting Up for Printing ...................................................... 9
Windows 2000 - Accessing the Printer Properties ...................................... 10
Windows NT 4.0 - Accessing the Printer Properties ................................... 11
Macintosh - Setting Up for Printing ............................................................. 13
Canceling a Print Job.............................................................................. 14
Windows 95/98/Me - Canceling a Print Job ................................................ 14
Windows 2000 - Canceling a Print Job ....................................................... 15
Windows NT 4.0 - Canceling a Print Job .................................................... 16
Macintosh - Canceling a Print Job .............................................................. 17
2. Uninstalling the Printer Driver and Software

Uninstalling the PCL 6/5e Printer Driver ...............................................
Windows 95/98/Me - Uninstalling the PCL 6/5e Printer Driver....................
Windows 2000 - Uninstalling the PCL 6/5e Printer Driver...........................
Windows NT 4.0 - Uninstalling the PCL 6/5e Printer Driver ........................
Uninstalling the RPCS Printer Driver .................................................
Windows 95/98/Me - Uninstalling the RPCS Printer Driver .....................
Windows 2000 - Uninstalling the RPCS Printer Driver ............................
Windows NT 4.0 - Uninstalling the RPCS Printer Driver .........................
Uninstalling the PostScript 3 Printer Driver..........................................
Windows 95/98/Me - Uninstalling the PostScript 3 Printer Driver ...............
Windows 2000 - Uninstalling the PostScript 3 Printer Driver ......................
Windows NT 4.0 - Uninstalling the PostScript 3 Printer Driver ...................
Macintosh - Uninstalling the PostScript 3 Printer Driver .............................
19
19
19
20
21
21
21
22
23
23
23
24
24
iii
3. Printing with the Control Panel

Sample Print.............................................................................................
Printing a Sample Print File.........................................................................
Deleting a Sample Print File........................................................................
Checking the Error Log ...............................................................................
Locked Print.............................................................................................
Printing a Locked Print File .........................................................................
Deleting Locked Print files...........................................................................
Checking the Error Log ...............................................................................
Accessing the Document Server .................................................................
25
25
28
29
30
30
32
33
34
4. Troubleshooting
Error & Status Messages on the Display Panel....................................
Machine configuration .................................................................................
Machine Does Not Print ..........................................................................
Other Printing Problems .........................................................................
37
42
45
47
5. Using the Control Panel

Adjusting Printer Features ....................................................................
Printer Features Menu ................................................................................
Accessing the Printer Features ...................................................................
Exiting from the Printer Features ................................................................
Printer Features Parameters ..................................................................
Paper Input .................................................................................................
List/Test Print .............................................................................................
Maintenance ...............................................................................................
System ........................................................................................................
Host Interface .............................................................................................
PCL Config. Page .......................................................................................
Machine condition ...................................................................................
49
49
51
51
52
52
52
52
53
56
56
58
6. Appendix
Staple and Punch .................................................................................... 59
Specifications .......................................................................................... 61
Options........................................................................................................ 62
INDEX........................................................................................................ 65
iv
1. Setting Up the Printer Driver

and Canceling a Print Job
PCL 6/5e - Accessing the Printer Properties
Windows 95/98/Me - Accessing the Printer Properties
Changing the default machine settings
A Click [Start] on the taskbar, point to [Settings], and then click [Printers].
The [Printers] window appears.
B Click to select the icon of the machine whose default settings you want to
change.
C On the [File] menu, click [Properties].

The [Printer Properties] dialog box appears.
D Make any settings you require and click [OK].

Note
With some applications, the printer driver's settings are not used, and the
application's own default settings are applied.
Making machine settings from an application

To make the machine settings for a specific application, open the [Printer Properties] dialog box from that application. The following example describes how to
make settings for the WordPad application that comes with Windows 95/98/
Me.
Note
The actual procedures you should follow to open the [Printer Properties] dialog
box may vary depending on the application. For more information, see the
documentation that comes with the application you are using.
Any settings you make in the following procedure are valid for the current
application only.

The [Print] dialog box appears.
B Select the machine you want to use in the [Name] list box, and then click
[Properties].
Setting Up the Printer Driver and Canceling a Print Job
C Make any settings you require and click [OK].

D Click [OK] to start printing.
Windows 2000 - Accessing the Printer Properties

Changing the default machine settings - Printer Properties
Limitation
Changing the setting of the machine requires Manage Printers permission.
Members of the Administrators and Power Users groups have Manage Printers permission by default. When you set up options, log on using an account
that has Manage Printers permission.
change.


Note
Settings you make here are used as the default settings for all applications.
Changing the default machine settings - Printing Preferences Properties

Limitation
change.
C On the [File] menu, click [Printing Preferences...].

The [Printing Preferences Properties] dialog box appears.
PCL 6/5e - Accessing the Printer Properties

Note

To make the machine settings for a specific application, open the [Print] dialog
box from that application. The following example describes how to make settings for the WordPad application that comes with Windows 2000.
Note
The actual procedures you should follow to open the [Print] dialog box may
vary depending on the application. For more information, see the documentation that comes with the application you are using.
application only.
A On the [File] menu, click [Print...].

B Select the machine you want to use in the [Select Printer] box.
C Make any settings you require and click [OK] to start printing.
Windows NT 4.0 - Accessing the Printer Properties
Limitation
Changing the setting of the machine requires Full Control access permission.
Members of Administrators, Server Operators, Print Operators, and Power
Users groups have Full Control permission by default. When you set up options, log on using an account that has Full Control permission.
change.


Note
Changing the default machine settings - Default Document Properties

Limitation
Members of the Administrators, Server Operators, Print Operators, and Power Users groups have Full Control permission by default. When you set up
options, log on using an account that has Full Control permission.
change.
C On the [File] menu, click [Document Defaults].

The [Default Document Properties] dialog box appears.

Note

make settings for the WordPad application that comes with Windows NT 4.0.
Note
application only.

[Properties].

4
RPCS - Accessing the Printer Properties

change.


Note

make settings for the WordPad application that comes with Windows 95/98/Me.
Note
application only.

[Properties].

5

Limitation
change.


Note

Limitation
change.


Note

Note
application only.

Limitation
change.


Note

Limitation
change.


Note

Note
application only.

[Properties].

8
PostScript 3 - Setting Up for Printing

change.


E Click [OK].
Note

make settings for the WordPad application that comes with Windows 95/98/
Me.
Note
application only.

[Properties].


Limitation
change.

The [Printer Properties] dialog box appear.

Note

Limitation
change.

10

Note

Note
application only.

Limitation
The [Printers] window appears .
change.


Note
Setting you make here are used as the default settings for all applications.
11

Limitation
change.


Note

Note
application only.

[Properties].

12
Macintosh - Setting Up for Printing

Making paper settings from an application
A Open the file you want to print.

B On the [File] menu, click [Page Setup].
The [AdobePS Page Setup] dialog box appears.
C Make sure that the machine you want to use is shown in the [Format for:]
box.
Note
If the machine is not shown in the [Format for:] box, use the pop-up menu
to display a list of available machines.
Reference
The actual appearance of the Page Setup depends on the application you
are using. See the documentation that comes with the Macintosh for more
information.
D From the [Paper:] box, select the paper size.

E Make any settings you require and click [OK].
Setting up for printing from an application
A Open the file you want to print.

B On the [File] menu, click [Print].
The [Printer Features] dialog box appears.
C Make sure that the machine is selected in the [Printer:] box.

D Make any settings you require and click [Print] to start printing.
13
Canceling a Print Job

Windows 95/98/Me - Canceling a Print Job
A Double-click the machine icon on the Windows taskbar.

A window appears, showing all the print jobs that are currently queuing to
be printed. Check the current status of the job you want to cancel.
B Select the name of the job you want to cancel.

C On the [Document] menu, click [Cancel Printing].
Note
You can also open the print job queue window by double-clicking the machine icon in the [Printer] window.
D Press the {Printer}} key on the machine's control panel.

E Press [Job Reset] on the display panel.
A message appears on the display panel indicating that the print job is being
canceled.
Important
This procedure cancels the print job that is being processed by the machine. In some cases, the machine may already be processing data for the
next print job following the one currently being output. In this case, the
next print job is also canceled when you press [Job Reset].
When the machine is being shared by multiple computers, be careful not

to accidentally cancel someone else's print job.
Note
You cannot stop printing data that has already been processed internally
by the machine. Because of this, printing may continue for a few pages after you press [Job Reset].
A print job that contains a large volume of data may take considerable time
to stop.
14
Windows 2000 - Canceling a Print Job
A Double-click the machine icon on the taskbar.

Note
You can also open the print job queue window by double-clicking the machine icon in the [Printers] window.

canceled.
Important
This procedure cancels the print job that is being processed by the machine. In some cases, the machine may already be processing data for the

Note
by the machine. Because of this, printing might continue for a few pages
after you press [Job Reset].
A print job that contains a large volume of data might take considerable
time to stop.
15
Windows NT 4.0 - Canceling a Print Job
A Double-click the machine icon on the Windows taskbar.

Note
You can also open the print job queue window by double-clicking the machine icon in the [Printer] window.

canceled.
Important
The procedure cancels the print job that is being processed by the machine.
In some cases, the machine may already be processing data for the next
print job following the one currently being output. In this case, the next
print job is also canceled when you press [Job Reset].

Note
to stop.
16
Macintosh - Canceling a Print Job
A Double-click the machine icon on the desktop.

C Click the pause icon, and then click the trash icon.
canceled.
Important
This procedure cancels the print job that is being processed by the machine. In some case, the machine may already be processing data for the

Note
to stop.
17
18
2. Uninstalling the Printer

Driver and Software
Uninstalling the PCL 6/5e Printer Driver
This section describes how to uninstall the PCL 6/5e printer driver. The actual
procedures may vary depending on the operating system.
Follow the appropriate procedure below.
Windows 95/98/Me - Uninstalling the PCL 6/5e Printer Driver
A Close all the applications that are currently running.

B Click [Start] on the taskbar, point to [Settings], and click [Printers].
C Click to select the icon of the machine you want to remove.

D On the [File] menu, click [Delete].
E Click [Yes] to uninstall the printer driver.

Windows 2000 - Uninstalling the PCL 6/5e Printer Driver
Limitation
Uninstalling a printer driver requires Manage Printers permission. Members
of the Administrators and Power Users groups have Manage Printers permission by default. When you uninstall a printer driver, log on using an account


19
Uninstalling the Printer Driver and Software

Note
You can also uninstall the printer driver using the following procedure.
A
B
C
D
In the [Printers] window, click [Server Properties] on the [File] menu to display [Print Server Properties].
In the [Drivers] tab, click the driver you want to remove, and click [Remove].
Click [Yes].
Click [OK].
Windows NT 4.0 - Uninstalling the PCL 6/5e Printer Driver

Limitation
Uninstalling a printer driver requires Full Control access permission. Members of the Administrators, Server Operators, Print Operators, and Power Users groups have Full Control Permission by default. When you uninstall a
printer driver, log on using an account that has Full Control permission.
A Close all applications that are currently running.


20
Uninstalling the RPCS Printer Driver
Uninstalling the RPCS Printer Driver

This section describes how to uninstall the RPCS printer driver. The actual
procedures may vary depending on the operating system.
Windows 95/98/Me - Uninstalling the RPCS Printer Driver



Windows 2000 - Uninstalling the RPCS Printer Driver
Limitation


21

Note
A
B
C
D
Click [Yes].
Click [OK].
Windows NT 4.0 - Uninstalling the RPCS Printer Driver

Limitation


22
Uninstalling the PostScript 3 Printer Driver
Uninstalling the PostScript 3 Printer Driver

This section describes how to uninstall the PostScript 3 printer driver.
The actual procedures may vary depending on the operating system.
Windows 95/98/Me - Uninstalling the PostScript 3 Printer Driver

B Click [Start] on the taskbar, point to [Settings], and then click [Printers].


Windows 2000 - Uninstalling the PostScript 3 Printer Driver
Limitation


23

Note
A
B
C
D
Click [Yes].
Click [OK].
Windows NT 4.0 - Uninstalling the PostScript 3 Printer Driver

Limitation

B Click [Start] on the taskbar, point to [Settings], and then click [Printers].


Macintosh - Uninstalling the PostScript 3 Printer Driver
A Drag the AdobePS file from the [Extensions] folder in [System Folder] to
[Trash].
B Drag the PPD file and plug-in file from the [Printer Descriptions] folder in the
[Extensions] folder in [System Folder] to [Trash].
24
3. Printing with the Control

Panel
Sample Print
Use this function to print only the first set of a multiple-set print job. The remaining sets are saved on the hard disk drive in the machine. The saved jobs can be
printed or cancelled from the machine's control panel. This can help in avoiding
large amounts of misprints in case of mistakes in the content or in the printing
settings.
Note
If the application has a collate option, make sure that it is not selected before
sending a print job. By default, sample print jobs are automatically collated
by the printer driver. If a collate option is selected from the application print
dialog box, more prints than intended may be printed.
You can identify the file you want to print by the User ID and the date and
time when the job was stored.
The actual number of pages the machine can save depends on the contents of
the print image. For example, the machine can save up to 30 jobs or 2,000 pages depending on the data volume.
If the first set of the sample print files is not as you expected and you do not
want to print the remaining sets, delete the sample print file using the display
panel. If you print the remaining sets of the sample print file, the job in the
machine is deleted automatically.
Printing a Sample Print File

The following procedure describes how to print a sample print file with the PCL
printer driver. For information about how to print a sample print file with the
PostScript 3 printer driver, see the PostScript 3 Unit Type 1045 Operating Instructions Supplement included as a PDF file on the CD-ROM.
Limitation
Applications, like PageMaker, which use their own drivers do not work with
this function.
A Configure the sample print in the properties of the printer driver.

Reference
For details on configuring the PCL 6/5e or RPCS printer driver, see the
corresponding Help files.
25
Printing with the Control Panel
B Click [OK] in the application's print dialog box to start printing.

Note
Make sure to set more than 2 copies.
The sample print job is sent to the machine and the first set is printed.
C On the machine's control panel, press the {Printer}} key to display the Printer
Screen.
Screen
Contrast
User Tools/Counter
Copy
Document Server
Facsimile
Printer
Scanner
ZCAS030E
D Press [View Sample Print jobs].
A list of the sample print files stored on the machine is displayed.
The following will also be displayed:

User ID : The User ID set up by the printer driver.
Date/Time : The date and time when the job was sent from the computer.
Qty. : The number of remaining sets.
E Press [UUPrev.] or [TTNext.] to scroll the files to the one you want to print.
F Select the file you want to print by pressing on it.
You can select only one file at a time.
26
Sample Print
G Press [Change Set Qty.] to change the number of sets to be printed.
If you do not want to change the set quantity then proceed to step I.
H Enter the new number of sets using the number keys and press [OK].
Sample Copy
ABC
DEF
GHI
JKL
MNO
PRS
TUV
WXY
Start
Clear/Stop
Enter
OPER
The screen returns to the file list screen.

Note
You can enter up to 999 sets.
Press [Clear] to correct any entry mistakes.

If you want to cancel [Change Set Qty.], press [Cancel].
I Press [Print].
The print confirmation screen is displayed.
J Press [Yes].
The remaining sets are printed.
Important
When printing is completed, the stored file will be deleted.
Note
Press [No] to cancel printing.
If printing is stopped by pressing [Job Reset] after printing has started, the
file will be deleted.
27
Deleting a Sample Print File

If you are not satisfied with the sample printout, you can delete the sample print
file, revise it and print it again until the settings are fine.
A Press the {Printer}} key to display the Printer Screen.

Screen
Contrast
User Tools/Counter
Copy
Document Server
Facsimile
Printer
Scanner
ZCAS030E
B Press [View Sample Print jobs].
A list of the sample print files stored in the machine is displayed.
C Highlight the file you want to delete by pressing on it.

Note
You can scroll the list by pressing [U
UPrev.] or [T
TNext.].
You can only choose one file at a time.
D Press [Delete].
The delete confirmation screen will be displayed.
E Press [Yes] to delete the file.

After the file has been deleted the screen will return to the file list screen.
Note
If you do not want to delete the file, press [No].
28
Sample Print
Checking the Error Log

If a file could not be stored in the machine, you can check the error log on the
control panel.
Limitation
The error log displays only the 20 most recent entries. If the power is turned
off, the log will be deleted.
User Tools/Counter
Screen
Contrast
Copy
Document Server
Facsimile
Printer
Scanner
ZCAS030E
C Press [Show Error Log].
D Press [UUPrev.] or [TTNext.] to scroll the error files.

Press [Exit] after checking the log.
You will then return to the file list screen.
Note
For printing files that appear in the error log, resend them after stored files
in the machine have been printed or deleted.
29
Locked Print
Use this function to maintain privacy when printing confidential documents on
the machine over a shared network. Usually, it is possible to print data by using
the control panel once the data is stored in this machine. When using Locked
Print, it will not be possible to print unless a password is entered on the machine's control panel. Your confidential documents will be safe from viewing by
other people.
Note
sending a print job. By default, locked print jobs are automatically collated by
the printer driver. If a collate option is selected from the application print dialog box, more sets than intended may be printed.
You can identify the file you want to print by the User ID and the date and
time when the job was stored.
the print image. For example, the machine can save up to 30 jobs or 2,000 pages. It depends on the data volume.
After the locked print file is printed, the job in the machine is deleted automatically.
Printing a Locked Print File

The following procedure describes how to print a locked print file with the PCL
printer driver. For information about how to print a locked print file with the
PostScript 3 printer driver, see the PostScript 3 Unit Type 1045 Operating Instructions Supplement included as a PDF file on the CD-ROM.
Limitation
Applications, like PageMaker, which use their own drivers do not work with
this function.
A Configure the locked print in the properties of the printer driver.

Reference
For details on configuring the PCL 6/5e or RPCS printer driver, see the
corresponding Help files.
B Click [OK] in the application's print dialog box to start printing.

The locked print job is sent to the machine.
30
Locked Print
C On the machine's control panel, press the {Printer}} key to display the Printer
Screen.
Screen
Contrast
User Tools/Counter
Copy
Document Server
Facsimile
Printer
Scanner
ZCAS030E
D Press [View Locked Print jobs].
A list of the locked print files stored in the machine is displayed.
The date and time when the job was sent from the computer, as well as the
User ID is displayed.
E Select the file you want to print by pressing on it.

Note
Press [U
UPrev.] or [T
TNext.] to scroll the list.
Only one file can be selected at a time.
F Press [Print].
The password screen is displayed.
31
G Enter the password using the number keys and press [OK].
Note
A confirmation screen will appear when the password has not been entered correctly. Press [OK] to enter the password again.
H Press [Yes].
The locked file is printed.
Note
Deleting Locked Print files

Screen
Contrast
User Tools/Counter
Copy
Document Server
Facsimile
Printer
Scanner
ZCAS030E
B Press [View Locked Print jobs].
A list of the files stored in the machine is displayed.
C Select the file you want to delete by pressing on it.

Note
Press [U
UPrev.] or [T
32
Locked Print
D Press [Delete].
E Enter the password using the number keys and press [OK].
The delete confirmation screen is displayed.
F Press [Yes].
After the file has been deleted, the screen returns to the file list screen.
Note
Checking the Error Log

If a file could not stored in this machine, you can check the error log on the control panel.
Limitation
The error log displays only the 20 most recent entries. If the power is turned
off, the log will be deleted.

Screen
Contrast
User Tools/Counter
Copy
Document Server
Facsimile
Printer
Scanner
ZCAS030E
33
B Select [View Locked Print jobs].
C Press [Show Error Log].
3
D Press [UUPrev.] or [TTNext.] to scroll the error files.
Press [Exit] after checking the log.
You will then return to the file list screen.
Note
For printing files that appear in the error log, resend them after stored files
in the machine have been printed or deleted.
Accessing the Document Server

The Document Server enables you to save documents in the machine memory
and then edit and print them as you want.
Reference
For more information about the Document Server function, see the Copy Reference.
For information about how to access to Document Server from a client, see the
Help of the printer driver.
Note
When you use the Document Server, the following can be selected using the
machine's control panel.
Copies
Collate
Duplex
Punch
Staple
Paper Source
Output Tray
34
Locked Print
Above items are lightly shaded, so you cannot set them from the [Printer Properties] dialog box when the Document Server is selected.
You must enter User ID up to eight alphanumeric characters.
You had better enter Password and File Name to distinguish the job from others.
the print images. As an example, the machine can save up to 200 jobs in the
Document Server. 1,000 pages of one print job can be saved depending on the
data volume.
35
36
4. Troubleshooting
Error & Status Messages on the Display
Panel
Messages/Second messages
84:Error
Descriptions and Solutions

There is no work area for image processing.
Try installing an SDRAM module or reducing the amount of
data sent. When installing the SDRAM module, contact your
86:Error
Please set the correct parameters.
86:Error
There is a possibility that the printer driver is not compatible

with the machine. Use a printer driver that matches the emulation selected or the machine model.
There is also the possibility that a fault has occurred between the
machine and the computer.
Make sure that both are correctly connected.
87:Error
Try installing an SDRAM module or make the size setting smaller. When installing the SDRAM module, contact your service
representative.
89:Error
Reconfigure the set values of the regional settings in the printing

conditions, or other set values in the configuration range.
90:Error
Delete unnecessary forms or registered fonts.
92:Error
Printing canceled by pressing [Job Reset] on the machine's control panel.
92:Error
If the priority memory configuration is set to [User Priority], set it

to [Page Priority] in the driver configuration. Reduce the resolution as well as the amount of data sent.
Try installing an SDRAM Module. When doing this, contact
92:Error
Try installing an SDRAM Module. When doing this, contact

93:Error

transmission data. When installing an SDRAM module, contact
95:Error
There was a request to print non-existent characters.

Make sure the character code has been correctly set.
96:Error
Correctly insert the Option Expansion Font Card and correct the
Font Selection Program. Also, make sure to correct the transmission data.
96:Error
Correct the parameters to select the existing fonts.
37
Troubleshooting
97:Error
Try installing an SDRAM module. When doing this, contact

98:Error
Restart the machine. If this message reappears, contact your

9A:Error
Reset the machine.
A7:Error

A8:Error
An error has occurred in the Library screen.

C1:Error
Try the following:
C2:Error
Execute commands OE or IN.
C3:Error
C6:Error
Print out a print condition list.

Reset the machine.
C7:Error
Close duplex unit cover.
The cover of the optional Duplex Unit is open. Close the cover
of the optional Duplex Unit.
Close LCT cover
The cover of the LCT is open.

Close the cover of the LCT.
CD:Error
Try resetting the machine.
Collate has been cancelled.

D0:Error
Try the following:
D1:Error
Execute command ESC.E
D2:Error
D3:Error

Reset the machine.
D4:Error
DC:Error
Try the following:
DD:Error
Execute commands OE or IN.
DE:Error
38

Reset the machine.
DF:Error

your service representative. If this message appears after installing an SDRAM module, try reducing the amount of data.
DIMM has a problem. Call

The DIMM inside the machine is abnormal. Replace the DIMM.

For replacement, contact your service representative.
Driver setting error. (Memory)
Check the printer driver memory configuration.
Set the character code correctly.
Error & Status Messages on the Display Panel

Correct the Font Set Download parameters.
Duplex has been cancelled.

your service representative. Also, use paper with size for duplex
printing.
Ethernet board has a problem. Call service representative.
An error has occurred in the optional Network Interface Board.
Exceeded max capacity of

document server. Cannot
stored.
Make the size of the transmission files smaller, or delete some of

the files from the Document Server.
Exceeded max number of

pages per file of document
server. Cannot stored.
Delete some of the files from the Document Server.
Exceeded max number of

pages per file of document
server. Cannot stored.
Reduce the number of pages in the transmission files, or delete

some of the files from the Document Server.
I/O buffer overflow.
Reduce the number of pages sent or the amount of transmission

data.
Exceeded max. stored files in

sample print and locked
print.
Delete unnecessary files from the machine.
Exceeded max. stored pages

in sample print and locked
print.
Reduce the number of pages to be printed.
F0:Error

transmission data. When installing an SDRAM module, contact
F8:Error
Check the transmission parameters.
Finisher is in use for another

function. Please wait.
The finisher is being used by another function such as copy.

Please wait until the other function has completed using the finisher.
HDD has a problem. Call

An error has occurred in the optional Hard Disk Drive.
HDD has not been installed.
Install an HDD unit. If this error reappears even if there is an

HDD unit installed, contact your service representative.
HDD is full.
Delete unnecessary files stored in the machine. Also, reduce the

size of sample or locked print files.
HDD is full.
Delete unnecessary fonts or forms stored in the machine.
Hex Dump Mode
The machine is in Hex Dump Mode.Wait for a while, and if the

Hex Dump Mode message does not disappear, press {Online}
on the Display panel to return to the Ready condition.
Turn off the power switch. Replace the Network Interface Board
and turn on the power switch.
First turn the power switch off and then on. If the message appears again, call your sales or service representative.
39
Troubleshooting
Hole punch receptacle is full.
Open finisher cover and
empty punch receptacle.

The hole punch receptacle is full. Please empty the receptacle.
IEEE1394 board has a prob- An error has occurred in the optional 1394 Interface Unit.
lem. Please call service repre- Turn off the power switch. Replace the 1394 Interface Unit and
sentative.
turn on the power switch.
I/O buffer overflow.
The receiving buffer has overflowed.

Set the [I/O Buffer] in the Printer Configuration to a higher value.
LCT has a problem. Turn

Main Power Switch off then
on. If the error appears
again, call service representative.
The LCT is malfunctioning. Turn the main power off on the machine and after 5 seconds turn the power on again. If the same
message appears again, contact your service representative.
Load Paper
There is no paper left in this tray.
Tray #
Load paper into the tray indicated.
Lower Staple is almost empty.
There are a few booklet staples remaining.
NV-RAM has a problem.

Call service representative.
An error has occurred in the optional Memory Unit.
NV-RAM has a problem.

The content of the NV-RAM is damaged. Replace the NV-RAM.

For replacement, contact your service representative.
Offline
The machine is offline.
Please load in more booklet staples.

Turn off the power switch, replace the Memory Unit, and then
turn on the power switch.
If you want to put the machine online, press [Online].
40
Output tray has been

changed.
Set the correct output tray.
Paper in duplex unit. Open

cover and remove paper.
There is a misfeed in the Duplex Unit.
Paper in staple tray. Open

finisher cover and remove
paper.
Remove the paper remaining inside the finisher.
Paper tray 1 has a problem.

Turn Main Power Switch off
then on. If the error appears
again, call service representative.
Paper tray 1 is malfunctioning.
Parallel I/F board has a

problem. Call service representative.
Parallel I/F board has a problem. Contact your service representative.
Please wait.
The machine is warming up or setting the toner.
Printing...
Wait for a while.
Remove the misfed paper.
Turn the main power off on the machine, wait 5 seconds and
then turn the power on again. If the same message reappears,

Print overrun.

Punch has been cancelled.
Check the paper direction, printing direction as well as the postprocess positioning settings.
Ready
The machine is online and ready to make prints.

If you want to take the machine offline, press [Online].
Reset duplex unit correctly.

If the error appears again,
call service representative.
The optional Duplex Unit is not set correctly.
Resetting job...
The print job is being reset.
An error has occurred in the Duplex Unit.

Set the optional Duplex Unit correctly. If the message appears
again, call your sales or service representative.
Wait for a while.

RPCS graphic error.
There is the possibility that the SDRAM is not working correctly.

For details, contact your service representative.
RPCS Memory Overflow.
There is the possibility that the SDRAM module is not working

correctly. For details, contact your service representative.
RPCS memory overflow.
Printing canceled by the autojob cancel.
Selected paper tray is in use

for another function. Please
wait.
The selected paper tray is being used by another function such

as copy. Please wait until the other function has completed using the selected paper tray.
Shift tray has a problem. Call

Malfunction occurs when using the Shift function. Contact your

Staple has been cancelled.
Check the paper direction, printing direction as well as the postprocess positioning settings.
Staple is almost empty.
There are a few staples remaining.

Please load in more staples.
Staple unit has a problem.

The staple unit is malfunctioning.
Staple unit is in use for another function. Please wait.
The staple unit is being used by another function such as copy.

Please wait until the other function has completed using the staple unit.
Toner is almost empty.
The toner has almost run out.
Contact your service representative.
Prepare a new toner cartridge. If the image density gets too

light, replace the toner cartridge with a new one.
Unauthorized user access.
Print job has been cancelled.
Check the User Code permission conditions.
Waiting...
The machine is waiting for the next print job.

Wait for a while.
41
Troubleshooting
Machine configuration
You can check the machine configuration using telnet.
telnet
Use the info command.
UNIX
Use the lpg or lpstat command or stat parameter of rsh, rcp, or ftp.
Reference
For more information, see Remote Maintenance by Telnet (mshell) in the
Network Printing Guide Operating Instructions provided as a PDF file on
the CD-ROM labeled Operating Instructions for Printer.
Note
* (asterisk) is displayed with the current setting.
Regarding *1*5, see table below.

Item
Description
Printer System
Version of the printer
Network Board
Version of the network board

Input Tray
No. ID number of the paper tray
Name Name of the paper tray*1
PaperSize Paper size loaded in the paper tray*2
Status Current status of the paper tray*3
Output Tray
No. ID number of the output tray
Name Name of the output tray*4
Status Current status of the output tray*5
*1 Input Tray: Name

Name
42
Description
Tray X
Name of installed paper tray.

(X is the number of tray.)
Bypass Tray
Bypass tray
*2 Input Tray: Paper Size

Paper Size
Description
A3 (297 420)
A3 K
B4JIS (257 364)
B4K
A4 (297 210)
A4L
A4 (210 297)
A4K
B5JIS (257 182)
B5L
B5JIS (182 257)
B5K
A5 (210 148)
A5L
A5 (148 210)
A5K
A6 (105 148)
A6K
11 17
DLK
81/2 14
LGK
11 81/2
LTL
81/2 11
LTK
51/2 81/2
HLK
FRI
Custom Size
101/2 71/4
101/2" 71/4"L
71/4 101/2
71/4" 101/2"K
81/4 13
81/4" 13"K
81/2 13
81/2" 13"K
41/8 91/2
41/8" 91/2"K
37/8 71/2
37/8" 71/2"K
DL (110 220)
DLK
C5 Env(162 229)
C5 EnvK
8 13
8"13"K
C6 Env(114 162)
C6 EnvK
NCS
There is no tray.
**
The paper size is not selected.
43
Troubleshooting
*3 Input Tray: Status

Status
Description
Normal
NoTray
There is no paper tray
PaperEnd
There is no paper in the paper tray
*4 Output Tray: Name

Name
Description
Standard Tray
Output tray
1-bin Shift Tray
Upper postprint tray
Postprint Tray 1-9
Postprint tray 1-9
*5 Output Tray: Status

Status
44
Description
Normal
----
PaperExist
There is paper in the output tray
OverFlow
Output tray is full of paper
Error
Other error
Machine Does Not Print
Machine Does Not Print

Possible Cause
Is the power on?
Solutions
Make sure that the cable is securely plugged into the power outlet
and the machine.
Turn on the power switch.
Does the Online indicator

stay on?
Press [Online] so the indicator lights.
Is the error and status mes- Check the error and status message on the display panel and take
sage displayed?
the required action.
Does the indicator next to
the Printer key stay red?
Check the error message, and take the required action.
Is paper loaded?
Load paper into the paper tray or on the bypass tray.
Can you print a configura- If you cannot print a configuration page, it probably indicates a
tion page?
machine malfunction. You should contact your sales or service
representative.
If you can print a configuration page but cannot get the machine
to print when you issue a print command from the computer, it
probably means there is a problem with the computer.
Note that large or complex data might take a long time to be printed.
Is the interface cable connecting the machine to the
computer connected securely?
Connect the interface cable properly. If there are any connectors or

screws, make sure that they are securely fastened.
Did you connect the interface cable after turning on

the power switch?
Make sure to connect the interface cable before turning on the

power switch.
Are you using the correct

interface cable?
The type of interface cable you should use depends on the computer. Make sure to use the correct one.
If the cable is damaged or worn, replace it with a new one.
Are the user restrictions

activated?
Set the user ID correctly in the printer driver.

Cancel the user restrictions.
For details on the user restrictions, as well as how to cancel
them, and user ID assignations, see the System Settings.
45
Troubleshooting
Possible Cause
Is the Data In indicator
blinking or lit after starting
the print job?
Solutions
If not blinking or lit, the data is not being sent to the machine.
If the machine is connected to the computer using the

interface cable
Make sure the computer port settings are correct. For a parallel
port connection, port LPT1 or LPT2 should be set.
Windows 95/98/Me
A Click [Start], point to [Settings] and then click [Printers].
B Click to select the icon of the machine. Next, on the [File]
menu, click [Properties].

C Click the [Details] tab.
D Check the [Print to the following port] box to make sure that
the correct port is selected.
Windows 2000

C Click the [Port] tab.

Windows NT 4.0

C Click the [Port] tab.
Network Connection
Contact your network administrator.
Note
If you cannot solve the problem by taking the preceding actions, contact your
sales or service representative.
46
Other Printing Problems
Other Printing Problems

Status
Possible Causes, Descriptions, and Solutions
Multiple pages are fed through

the machine together.
Remove all paper from the tray and fan it gently to get air between the sheets. After that, load it back into the tray.
The image is printed on the reverse side of the paper.
Set the paper the other way up.
Paper misfeeds occur frequently. Check the paper size settings. The size set with the paper size
dial might be different from the actual paper size. Make the
correct dial setting.
Use the recommended paper. Avoid using curled, folded,
wrinkled, perforated or glossy paper .
The control panel error message Open the front cover of the machine and then close it.
stays on after removing the misfed paper.
It takes a long time for the machine to start printing.
The machine might be in Energy Saver mode or Low Power

mode, which requires more time for warming up and resuming the print job. If you cannot wait, change the settings for
Low Power, Shift Time and Low Power Timer.
It takes too much time to resume

printing.
The data is so large or complex that it takes time to process

it. If the Data In indicator is blinking, printing data processing is taking place. Just wait until printing resumes.
The image is printed in the

wrong orientation.
Make sure that the orientation setting has been set in the application you are using.
Set the correct paper size and feed direction that match the
tray settings on the RPCS printer driver.
Windows 95/98/Me,
Windows 2000, NT 4.0 :
If the machine is not bidirectional, specify which options you

have installed using the printer driver.
The computer does not recognize See the Help file of the printer driver.
the installed printer options.
Connecting functions are not
recognized when using
Windows 95/98/Me, Windows
2000 and Windows NT 4.0
You have to configure the Option Setup in the Printer Properties when not using bidirectional transmission.
When in Windows, data which

uses proportional fonts cannot
be printed exactly as viewed on
the screen.
Are you printing with the setting that replaces the True Type
Font with the Printer Font? If you want to print with the
same characters as viewed onscreen, use the following configuration:
Select the [User Settings] check box in the [Print Quality] tab
of the printer driver. Click on [Change User Settings].
Choose the [True Type Font] tab, and then check the [Print
in True Type Font Image] check box.
47
Troubleshooting
Status
Possible Causes, Descriptions, and Solutions
When printing graphic data, the If the printer driver is configured to use the graphics comoutput and the screen are differ- mand, the command from the machine is used to print.
ent to some extent.
If you want to print accurately, set the printer driver to print
without using the graphics command.
One page is printed halfway
and ejected, and the data of that
page continues to be printed on
the next page.
It is possible that the configuration of the [Automatic Paper

Ejection Time] in the Printer Initialization setting has been set
too short. Set it to [None] or for a longer time.
The Page Layout is shifting.
Print areas differ according to the printer used. The information that fits on one page on one machine may not fit on one
page of another machine.
Adjust the [Print Area] settings in the printer driver.
The paper comes out from a dif- The paper tray set in the printing conditions or the print drivferent tray than expected.
er has priority over the paper tray set in the [Paper Select]
function in the control panel.
Set correctly the print conditions or the printer driver.
Duplex printing is malfunction- Duplex printing cannot be done with paper set in the
ing.
manual tray.
When using duplex printing, correct the settings to use
paper from a tray other than the manual tray.
Duplex printing cannot be done with a tray set in [off] in
the [Duplex] setting of the system configuration.
When using Windows 95/98/Me,
Windows 2000, or Windows
NT4.0, either forced printing or
bookbind printing cannot be set.
Make sure that the paper set in the application has the same
size and direction as in the [Accessories].
If a different paper size and direction are set, choose the same
size and direction.
When using Windows 95/98/

Me, Windows 2000, or Windows NT4.0, doubling of the paper settings is not possible.
Vertical and horizontal are
printed reversed.
It is possible that the printer condition's original direction is

not correctly set. Make sure that it has been correctly set.
When stapling and printing

Documents which have different sizes and paper directions
documents which have different may not be stapled as expected depending on the location of
sizes and paper directions, sta- the staples.
pling does not occur correctly.
Note
If the problem cannot be solved, contact your sales or service representative.
48
5. Using the Control Panel

Though the factory default settings of the machine are suitable for most printing
jobs, the Printer Features gives you access to a number of settings that control
basic printer operations. Printer Features settings you make are retained even
when you turn off the machine.
Reference
For more information about the copy features and their system settings, see
the Copy Reference and the System Settings.
Adjusting Printer Features

Printer Features Menu
There are six menu items in the Printer Features menu.
Paper Input
List/Test Print
Maintenance
System
Host Interface
PCL Config. Page
You can select functions in the following table.
Category
Function menu
Paper Input P.52
Bypass Paper Size
List/Test Print P.52
Config. Page
Menu List
PS Config. Page
PCL Config. Page
Hex Dump
Maintenance P.52
Menu Protect
System P.53
Misfeed Recovery
Print Error Report
Auto Continue
Memory Overflow
Sub Paper Size
Page Size
49
Using the Control Panel

Category
System P.53
Function menu
Duplex
Job Separation
Memory Usage
Unit of Measure
Edge Smoothing
Resolution
PCL
PS
Toner Saving
Host Interface P.56
I/O Buffer
I/O Timeout
PCL Config. Page P.56
Orientation
Form Lines
Font Source
Font Number
Point Size
Font Pitch
Symbol Set
50
Adjusting Printer Features
Accessing the Printer Features
A Press {User Tools/Counter}} on the control panel.

B Press [Printer Features].
C Select the desired item by pressing the tab, and change the settings.
Note
[OK] : Press to set the new settings and return to the previous menu.
[Cancel] : Press to return to the previous menu without changing any setting.
Exiting from the Printer Features
A After changing Printer Features, press [Exit] to return to the User Tools/
Counter menu.
B Press [Exit].
Note
You can also exit from the User Tools/Counter menu by pressing {User
Tools/Counter}.
51
Printer Features Parameters

Paper Input
Menu
Bypass Paper Size
Description
The paper size for the bypass tray.
For more information about paper sizes that can be set in the bypass tray, see the Copy Reference.
List/Test Print
Menu
Description
Config. Page
You can print the current configuration of the machine.
Menu List
You can print the Menu List which shows the function menus of
the machine.
PS Config. Page
You can print a list of the installed PS 3 Fonts.
PCL Config. Page
You can print the current configuration of the PCL.
Hex Dump
You can print the Hex Dump.
Maintenance
Menu
Menu Protect
Description
This procedure lets you protect menu settings against accidental
changes. It makes it impossible to change the menu settings you
make with the normal procedure unless you perform the required
key operation. In a network environment, protecting settings restricts changes to menu settings to network administrators.
Off
Level 1
Level 2
Note
Default: Off
52
System
Menu
Misfeed Recovery
Description
You can select whether or not to enable Misfeed Recovery. When
it is on, printing restarts after the misfed paper has been cleared.
Off
On
Note
Default: On
Print Error Report
You can select whether or not to have an error report printed

when a printer error or memory error occurs.
Off
On
Note
Default: Off
Auto Continue
You can select whether or not to enable Auto Continue. When it

is on, you can set the time interval for when to continue after an
error.
Off
0 minute
1 minute
5 minutes
10 minutes
15 minutes
Note
Default: Off
When 0 minute, 1 minute, 5 minutes, 10 minutes or
15 minutes is selected, and certain types of error occur, the
current job might be canceled, and the machine automatically
resumes with the next job.
Memory Overflow
You can select whether the memory overflow error report should
be printed.
Not Print
Error Report
Note
Default: Not Print
Sub Paper Size
You can enable the Auto Substitute Paper Size (A4LT) feature.
Auto
Off
Note
Default: Off
53

Menu
Page Size
Description
You can select the default Paper size.
11 17
8/ 14
11 8/
5/ 8/
71/4 10/
813
8/13
81/413
A3
B4
A4
B5
A5
A6
Custom Size
Note
Default:11 8/
Duplex
You can select whether you want to print on both sides of each
page.
Off
Long Edge Bind
Short Edge Bind
Note
Default: Off
This menu appears only when the optional Duplex Unit is installed.
Job Separation
You can enable Job Separation.

On
Off
Note
Default: Off
This menu appears only when the optional 1-bin shift sort tray
is installed.
54

Menu
Memory Usage
Description
You can select the volume of memory to be used in the Font Priority or Frame Priority, according to the paper size or resolution.
Font Priority
This setting uses memory for registering fonts.
Frame Priority
This setting uses frame memory for high speed printing.
Note
Default: Frame Priority
Unit of Measure
You can select mm or inch for the custom paper size.

mm
inch
Note
Default: mm (metric version), inch (inch version)
Edge Smoothing
You can set whether or not to enable Edge Smoothing.

On
Off
Note
Default: On
If Toner Saving is On, Edge Smoothing is ignored even
if it is On.
Resolution
You can set the print resolution in dots per inch.
PCL
300 dpi, 600 dpi
PS
300 dpi, 600 dpi
Note
Default: 600 dpi
The PCL 6 can only be set to 600 dpi.
Toner Saving
You can select whether or not to enable Toner Saving.

On
Off
Note
Default: Off
If Toner Saving is On, Edge Smoothing is ignored even
if it is On.
55
Host Interface
Menu
I/O Buffer
Description
You can set the size of the I/O Buffer. Normally it is not necessary
to change this setting.
16 KB, 32 KB, 64 KB, 128 KB, 256 KB, 512 KB
Note
Default: 32 KB
I/O Timeout
You can set how many seconds the machine should wait before
ending a print job. If data from another port often arrives in the
middle of the print job, you should increase the timeout value.
10 seconds, 15 seconds, 20 seconds, 25 seconds, 60 seconds
Note
Default: 15 seconds
5
PCL Config. Page
Menu
Orientation
Description
You can set the page orientation.
Portrait
Landscape
Note
Default: Portrait
Form Lines
You can set the number of lines per page.

5-128
Note
Default: 64 (Metric version), 60 (Inch version)
Font Source
You can set the location of the default font.

Resident
RAM
HDD
Font Number
You can set the ID of the default font you want to use.
0 to 50
Note
Default: 0
56

Menu
Point Size
Description
You can set the point size you want to use for the selected font.
4 to 999.75 by 0.25
Note
Default: 12.00
This setting is effective only for a variable-space font.
Font Pitch
You can set the number of characters per inch you want to use for
the selected font.
0.44 to 99.99 by 0.01
Note
Default: 10.00
This setting is effective only for a fixed-space font.
Symbol Set
You can specify the set of print characters for the selected font. The
available options are as follows.
Roman-8, ISO L1, ISO L2, ISO L5, PC-8, PC-8 D/N, PC-850, PC852, PC8-TK, Win L1, Win L2, Win L5, Desktop, PS Text, VN Intl,
VN US, MS Pubi, Math-8, PS Math, VN Math, Pifont, Legal, ISO 4,
ISO 6, ISO 11, ISO 15, ISO 17, ISO 21, ISO 60, ISO 69, Win 3.0
Note
Default: Roman-8
57
Machine condition
We recommend that you print the configuration page and check the machine's
settings before changing them.
A Press {User Tools/Counter}} on the control panel.

The User Tools/Counter menu appears.
B Press [Printer Features].

The Printer Features menu appears.
C Press the [List/Test Print] tab.

The following screen appears on the display panel.
5
D Press [Config. Page].
The configuration page is printed.
58
6. Appendix
Staple and Punch
The following tables show the staple and punch positions.
Note
Staple and punch outputs depend on paper size, paper type, number of pages
and feed direction.
Staple
Staple Setting
Portrait
Landscape
Upper Left Slant
Upper Left Vertical
Upper Left Horizontal
Left 2
Upper 2
59
Appendix
Punch
Punch
Setting
Portrait
Left
Landscape
Top
2 holes *1
3 holes *2
4 holes
Type E
*3
4 holes
Type NE
*3
*1
*2
*3
60
Available for metric and inch version.

Available for inch version only.
Available for metric version only.
Left
Top
Specifications
Specifications
This section contains the electrical and hardware specifications for the machine
including information about the options.
Component
Specification
Resolution
300 dpi, 600 dpi ; PCL, PostScript 3/600 dpi ; RPCS
Printing Speed
35ppm, 45ppm
(A4K, 8/" 11"K)
Note
Printing Speed depends on the machine. Check which type of
machine you have.
Parallel Interface
Standard 36-pin printer cable and a parallel port on the host computer.
IEEE1284
Note
Do not use a parallel cable that is longer than 3 meters (10 feet).
Printer Language
PCL 5e , PCL 6, RPCS
PostScript 3 (option)
Fonts
PCL 5e, PCL 6

Afga Font Manager 35 Intellifonts, 10 TrueType fonts, and 1 Bitmap font Font Manager available.
PostScript 3
136 fonts (Type 2:24, Type 14:112)
Memory
Standard : 32MB
Optional SDRAM : 64MB
Hard Disk
Storage capacity : 10GB or more
Operation Systems supported by this machine
Windows 95/98/Me
Windows 2000
Windows NT 4.0
Mac OS 7.61 to 9.0.4
Network
Topology : Ethernet 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX

Protocol : TCP/IP, IPX/SPX, NetBEUI, AppleTalk
Network Cable
10BASE-T/100BASE-TX shielded twisted-pair (STP, Category/

Type5) cable.
61
Appendix
Options
Mailbox (CS360)
Dimensions (W
D
H):
600545970mm (23.621.538.2)
Weight:
38 kg (83.8lb)
Paper Size:
Upper postprint tray : A3L, B4L, A4KL, B5KL, A5KL, B6L, A6L,
1117L, 8/14 (Legal)L, 8/11 (Letter)KL, 5/8/L, undefined size
Postprint trays 19 : A3L, B4L, A4KL, B5KL, A5KL, 1117L, 8/14
(Legal)L, 8/11 (Letter)KL, 5/8/L
Paper Weight:
Upper postprint tray : 52157g/m2(14-42lb)
Postprint trays 19 : 6482g/m2(17-22lb)
Stack Capacity:
Upper postprint tray : 500 sheets/bin(80g/m2)
Postprint trays 19 : 100 sheets/bin(80g/m2)
Bridge Unit Type 460
Dimensions (W
D
H):
41740676mm (16.4163)
Weight:
4 kg (8.8lb)
Memory Unit TypeB 64MB
Module Type:
SO-DIMM (Small Outline Dual-in-line Memory Module)
Memory Type:
SDRAM (Synchronous Dynamic RAM)
Number of Pins
144 pins
62
Specifications
Network Interface Board Type 1045

Topology:
Ethernet (10BaseT/100BaseTX)
Protocols:
TCP/IP, NetBEUI, IPX/SPX, AppleTalk
Interface Connector:
RJ45
Required Cable:
STP (Shielded Twisted-Pair) cable
Category / Type5 or better
IEEE 1394 Interface Unit Type 1045
Interface Connector:
IEEE 1394 (6 pin 2)
Required cable:
1394 interface cable (6 pin x 4 pin, 6 pin x 6 pin)
Important
You cannot plug devices together so as to create loops.
Do not use a cable more than 4.5 meters (14.8 feet) long.
Connectable number of devices on a bus

Maximum 63
Allowed cable hops on a bus
Maximum 16
Power supply
Non power supply
Cable Power repeated (IEEE 1394a-2000 compliant)
Important
In Windows 2000, the 1394 Interface Unit can only be used with Service Pack
1 or later. If the Service Pack is not installed, the connectable number of devices in a 1394 bus is only one, and the client cannot access the 1394 Interface
Unit without using an account that has Administrators permission.
The optional IEEE 1394 Interface Unit is not supported by Windows 95/98/
Me. If the plug and play function starts, click [Cancel] in the [New Hardware
Found] or [Device Driver Wizard] dialog box.
63
Appendix
Do not plug or unplug the 1394 interface cable while installing the printer
driver.
Do not turn off or on the device while installing the printer driver.
If the IEEE 1394 Interface Unit is installed, uninstall the printer driver after the
IEEE 1394 interface cable is unplugged.
Note
The IEEE 1394 Interface Unit could not receive data from more than one computer at the same rime. In this case, an error message appears. The machine
can accept data sent from other computers after the first print job has finished.
Bidirectional transmissions are not supported by the IEEE 1394 Interface
Unit.
When the IEEE 1394 Interface Unit is installed successfully and the IEEE 1394
interface cable plug is connected, the machine icon automatically changes
from Use Printer Offline to Ready.
PostScript 3 Unit Type 1045

Reference
See the Postscript 3 Unit Type 1045 Operating Instructions Supplement for information.
64
INDEX
B
Bridge Unit Type 460, 62
C
cable, 63
D
Data In indicator, 46
Display panel, messages, 37
Document Server, 34
E
Error, 37
H
Host Interface, 56
L
List/Test Print, 52
Locked Print, 30
M
Machine condition, 58
Macintosh
Uninstall, PostScript 3, 24
Mailbox (CS360), 62
Maintenance, 52
Memory Unit TypeB 64MB, 62
messages, 37
N
Network Interface Board, 63
O
Online indicator, 45
Online key, 45
P
Paper Input, 52
PCL 5e
Windows 2000, uninstalling, 19
Windows 95/98/Me, uninstalling, 19
Windows NT 4.0, uninstalling, 20
PCL 6
PCL Config. Page, 56
PostScript 3
Macintosh, Uninstall, 24
Printer Features, 49, 52
R
RPCS
S
Sample Print, 25
SDRAM, 62
System, 53
T
Troubleshooting, 37
65
W
Windows 2000
canceling a job, 15
PCL 5e, uninstalling, 19
PCL 6, uninstalling, 19
PostScript 3, uninstalling, 23
printer properties, PCL, 2
printer properties, PostScript 3,
printer properties, RPCS, 6
RPCS, uninstalling, 21
Windows 95/98/Me
canceling a job, 14
Windows NT 4.0
canceling a job, 16
document defaults, PCL, 4
document defaults, PostScript 3,
document defaults, RPCS, 8
66
10
12
11
67
68
UE
USA
B362
Notice:
interference to radio communications.
However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one more of
the following measures:
connected.
Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
Warning
Caution (in case of 100BaseTX environment):

Network interface cable with ferrite core must be used for RF interference suppression.
Note:
Avertissement:
Copyright 2001
Printer Unit Type 1045
UE USA B362-8627
Network Printing Guide

c1-Network-300.tif
reference.
Introduction
To get maximum versatility from this machine all operators should carefully read and follow the instructions in this manual. Please keep this manual in a handy place near the machine.
Please read the Safety Information in the Copy Reference before using this machine. It contains important information related to USER SAFETY and PREVENTING EQUIPMENT PROBLEMS.
Important
the machine.
Software Version Conventions Used in this Manual
NetWare 3.x means NetWare 3.12 and 3.2.
NetWare 4.x means NetWare 4.1, 4.11 and IntranetWare.
Trademarks
Apple, AppleTalk, EtherTalk, LaserWriter, Macintosh and Mac are registered trademarks of Apple
Computer, Inc.
Microsoft, Windows and Windows NT are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United
States and/or other countries.
Netscape and Netscape Navigator are registered trademarks of Netscape Communications Corporation.
Novell, NetWare and NDS are registered trademarks of Novell, Inc.
PostScript is a registered trademark of Adobe Systems, Incorporated.
Sun is a registered trademark of Sun Microsystems, Inc.
SunOS is a trademark of Sun Microsystems, Inc.
Note
Microsoft Windows Millennium Edition

this machine.
Copy Reference
System Settings
this machine as a printer. This manual is included as a PDF file on the CDROM labeled Operating Instructions for Printer.
CD-ROM labeled Operating Instructions for Printer (this manual).
UNIX Supplement
Provides information about setting up and using the printer in a UNIX environment. This manual is included as a PDF file on the CD-ROM labeled Operating Instructions for Printer.

Symbols
R WARNING:
R CAUTION:

Important
If this instruction is not followed, paper might be misfed, originals might be
Preparation
Note
Limitation
Reference
[
]
{
}
ii
Introduction
This manual contains detailed instructions on configuring the machine as a network printer. Read the section appropriate to your network environment on
how to configure the machine correctly.
Windows 2000,
Windows NT (Server)
NetWare (Server)
Windows 95/98/Me
Windows 2000
Windows NT
NetWare
(Client)
Macintosh
UNIX
Important
The procedures written in this manual assume that you are a network administrator. If you are not, be sure to consult your network administrator before
configuration.
Reference
For more information about installing the Network Interface Board and cabling, see the Printer Unit Type 1045 Printer Reference 1 that came with the
printer option or printer/scanner option of this machine.
For more information about configuring the Network Interface Board with
the control panel, see the System Settings that came with the printer option or
printer/scanner option of this machine.
iii
Features
Support for 100BASE-TX and 10BASE-T
The Network Interface Board is compatible with NetWare (IPX/SPX,
TCP/IP), Windows NT 4.0 (TCP/IP, NetBEUI, IPP *1 ), Windows 2000
(TCP/IP, NetBEUI, IPP *1 ), Windows 95/98/Me (TCP/IP, NetBEUI,
IPP *1 ), UNIX (TCP/IP) and Macintosh (AppleTalk) protocols. This allows you to use the machine in a network that uses different protocols
and operating systems.
A computer used as a dedicated print server is not required because the
Network Interface Board can be configured as a NetWare print server.
The Network Interface Board can connect the machine to the network
without requiring its own power supply because the Network Interface
Board is installed inside the machine.
*1
iv
IPP (Internet Printing Protocol) is a protocol for printing via the Internet.
Setting Up the Machine on a Network

Windows 95/98/Me
For setting up the machine as a network printer in a Windows 95/98/Me environment, see P.1 Windows 95/98/Me Configuration. There are two methods for
using the machine as a network printer.
Printing Without a Print Server
Printing With a Windows 2000 or

Windows NT Print Server
Windows 2000 or
Windows NT Server
(or Workstation)
Print Server
TCP/IP
NetBEUI
IPP
Windows 95/98/Me
Windows 95/98/Me
Windows 2000
For setting up the machine as a network printer in a Windows 2000 environment, see P.13 Windows 2000 Configuration. There are two methods for using
the machine as a network printer.

Windows 2000 or
Windows NT Server
(or Workstation)
Print Server
TCP/IP
NetBEUI
IPP
LPR
Windows 2000
vi
Windows 2000
Windows NT 4.0
For setting up the machine as a network printer in a Windows NT 4.0 environment, see P.27 Windows NT 4.0 Configuration. There are two methods for using
the machine as a network printer.

Windows 2000 or
Windows NT Server
(or Workstation)
Print Server
TCP/IP
NetBEUI
IPP
LPR
Windows NT 4.0
Windows NT 4.0
NetWare
For setting up the machine as a network printer in a NetWare environment, see
P.41 NetWare Configuration. The Network Interface Board allows you to use
the machine as either a print server or a remote printer.
For more information about setting up the clients, see the following pages.
Windows 95/98/Me P.61 Windows 95/98/Me
Windows 2000 P.62 Windows 2000
Windows NT 4.0 P.63 Windows NT 4.0
vii
Configuring the machine as a print server

A dedicated NetWare print server is not required because the machine can be
configured as a print server.
Print Server
NetWare
File Server
Windows 95/98/Me
Windows 2000
Windows NT 4.0
The actual procedures for configuring the machine depend on the NetWare version.
NetWare 3.x P.46 Setting Up as a Print Server
NetWare 4.x, 5 P.53 Setting Up as a Print Server
Configuring the machine as a remote printer

If a dedicated NetWare print server is being used, the machine should be configured as a remote printer.
Remote Printer
NetWare
Print Server
NetWare
File Server
Windows 95/98/Me
Windows 2000
Windows NT 4.0
The actual procedures for configuring the machine depend on the NetWare version.
NetWare 3.x P.49 Setting Up as a Remote Printer
NetWare 4.x, 5 P.57 Setting Up as a Remote Printer
viii
Macintosh
For setting up the machine as a network printer in a Macintosh environment, see
P.65 Macintosh Configuration.
AppleTalk
Macintosh
UNIX
For setting up the machine as a network printer in a UNIX environment, see the
UNIX Supplement provided as a PDF file on the CD-ROM labeled Operating
Instructions for Printer.
TCP/IP
UNIX
ix
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1. Windows 95/98/Me Configuration
Configuring Windows 95/98/Me ................................................................ 1
Printing Without a Print Server....................................................................... 1
Printing with a Windows 2000 or Windows NT Print Server .......................... 1
Configuring Protocols................................................................................ 2
Configuring TCP/IP and IPP for Printing ........................................................ 2
Configuring NetBEUI for Printing ................................................................... 3
Using SmartNetMonitor for Client............................................................. 4
Installing SmartNetMonitor for Client ............................................................. 5
Setting Up the Printer Driver .......................................................................... 7
Changing Port Settings .................................................................................. 9
Setting up a Client Computer .................................................................. 10
2. Windows 2000 Configuration

Configuring Windows 2000 ..................................................................... 13
Printing Without a Print Server..................................................................... 13
Printing with a Standard TCP/IP Port ........................................................... 13
Printing with a LPR Port ............................................................................... 14
Printing with a Windows 2000 or Windows NT Print Server ........................ 14
Configuring the Protocols ....................................................................... 15
Configuring TCP/IP and IPP for Printing ...................................................... 15
Configuring NetBEUI for Printing ................................................................. 16
Using SmartNetMonitor for Client........................................................... 17
Installing SmartNetMonitor for Client ........................................................... 18
Setting Up the Printer Driver ........................................................................ 20
Changing Port Settings ................................................................................ 22
Configuring LPR Port Printing ................................................................ 23
3. Windows NT 4.0 Configuration

Configuring Windows NT 4.0................................................................... 27
Printing Without a Print Server..................................................................... 27
Printing with a LPR Port ............................................................................... 28
Printing with a Windows 2000 or Windows NT Print Server ........................ 28
Configuring the Protocols ....................................................................... 29
Configuring TCP/IP and IPP for Printing ...................................................... 29
Configuring NetBEUI for Printing ................................................................. 30
Using SmartNetMonitor for Client........................................................... 32
Installing SmartNetMonitor for Client ........................................................... 33
Setting Up the Printer Driver ........................................................................ 35
Changing Port Settings ................................................................................ 37
x
Configuring LPR Port Printing ................................................................ 38

4. NetWare Configuration
Installing the NIB Setup Tool................................................................... 41
Installing SmartNetMonitor for Admin ......................................................... 41
Running the NIB Setup Tool ....................................................................... 42
Quick Setup Using the NIB Setup Tool Wizard...................................... 43
NetWare 3.x - Advanced Settings ........................................................... 46
Setting Up as a Print Server......................................................................... 46
Setting Up as a Remote Printer ................................................................... 49
NetWare 4.x, 5 - Advanced Settings ....................................................... 52
Setting Up as a Print Server......................................................................... 53
Setting Up as a Remote Printer ................................................................... 57
Setting Up a Client Computer.................................................................. 61
Windows 95/98/Me....................................................................................... 61
Windows 2000.............................................................................................. 62
Windows NT 4.0........................................................................................... 63
5. Macintosh Configuration
Configuring Macintosh ............................................................................ 65
Changing to EtherTalk ................................................................................. 65
Configuring the Printer ................................................................................. 66
Changing the Printer Name.......................................................................... 66
Changing the Zone....................................................................................... 66
6. Appendix
Configuring the Network Interface Board with a Web Browser ........... 67
Going to the Top Page ................................................................................. 68
Remote Maintenance by telnet................................................................ 70
Using telnet .................................................................................................. 70
Commands List ............................................................................................ 71
SNMP ......................................................................................................... 80
Understanding the Displayed Information ............................................. 81
Print Job Information .................................................................................... 81
Print Log Information.................................................................................... 81
Configuring the Network Interface Board ..................................................... 82
Message List ............................................................................................. 84
System Log Information ............................................................................... 84
xi
Precautions ............................................................................................... 88
Connecting a Dial-Up Router to a Network .................................................. 88
PostScript Printing from Windows................................................................ 89
NetWare Printing .......................................................................................... 89
When Using DHCP ...................................................................................... 90
When Using the NIB Setup Tool .................................................................. 91
When Using IPP with SmartNetMonitor for Admin ....................................... 91
Specifications ........................................................................................... 93
INDEX......................................................................................................... 94
xii
1. Windows 95/98/Me
Configuration
Configuring Windows 95/98/Me
The following procedure describes how to configure Windows 95/98/Me to use
the machine on a network without a Windows 2000 Server, Windows 2000 Professional, Windows NT Server, Windows NT Workstation, or NetWare based
print server.
indicates topics explained in this document
1. Specify the protocol to use

Consult your network administrator about which of the three protocols is appropriate.
IPP
TCP/IP
NetBEUI
2. Configure the chosen protocol

"Configuring NetBEUI
for Printing"
"Configuring TCP/IP and IPP for Printing"
3. Select the appropriate software

If using the printer...
SmartNetMonitor
for Client
If using and managi ng pr inters...
SmartNetMonitor
for Admin
4. Install the software and set the printer driver port
"Using SmartNetMonitor
for Client"
for Admin"
Printing with a Windows 2000 or Windows NT Print Server

See P.10 Setting up a Client Computer for configuring Windows 95/98/Me with
a Windows 2000 or Windows NT print server.
Windows 95/98/Me Configuration
Configuring Protocols
Configuring TCP/IP and IPP for Printing
These instructions are for configuring the Network Interface Board and Windows 95/98/Me to use the TCP/IP protocol and IPP.
Configuring the machine

Configure the machine to use the TCP/IP protocol.
Make sure that the TCP/IP protocol is set to active. (The default is active.)
Assign an IP address and make other settings required for using the TCP/IP
protocol.
Reference
For more information about how to make the above settings, see the System
Settings.
If DHCP is used to assign IP addresses, see P.90 When Using DHCP.

Note
After setting the IP address, use the ping command to make sure that it has
been set correctly.
A Click [Start], point to [Programs], and then click [MS-DOS Prompt].
B Type the following: (Example IP address is 192.168.15.16)
C:\> ping 192.168.15.16
If the address has been configured correctly, the following message appears.
Reply from 192.168.15.16 : bytes=32 time<10ms TTL=32
If the address has been configured incorrectly, the following message appears.
Request timed out.
Configuring a Windows 95/98/Me computer

These steps are for configuring a Windows 95/98/Me computer to use the TCP/
IP protocol.
A Open [Control Panel] and double-click the [Network] icon. Make sure that
TCP/IP is listed in the [The following network components are installed:] box on
the [Configuration] tab.
Note
If the TCP/IP protocol is not installed, click [Add] on the [Configuration] tab
to install it. For more information about installing the TCP/IP protocol, see
Windows 95/98/Me Help.
Configuring Protocols
B Configure the TCP/IP protocol with the appropriate IP address, subnet

mask and other settings.
Check with the network administrator that the settings are correct.
Configuring NetBEUI for Printing

These instructions are for configuring the Network Interface Board and Windows 95/98/Me to use the NetBEUI protocol.

Configure the machine to use the NetBEUI protocol.
Make sure that the NetBEUI protocol is set to active. (The default is active.)
Reference
Settings.
Configuring a Windows 95/98/Me computer

Install the NetBEUI protocol on the Windows 95/98/Me computer and set it as
the default protocol.
NetBEUI is listed in the [The following network components are installed:] box
on the [Configuration] tab.
Note
If the NetBEUI protocol is not installed, click [Add] on the [Configuration] tab
to install it. For more information about installing the NetBEUI protocol,
see Windows 95/98/Me Help.
If NetBEUI Dial-Up Adaptor is listed in the [The following network components are installed:] box, select it and click [Remove] to remove the binding.
B Set the NetBEUI protocol as the default protocol. Click the [Configuration]
tab, select NetBEUI in the [The following network components are installed:]
box, and click [Properties].
C Click the [Advanced] tab, select [Set this protocol to be the default protocol], and
click [OK].
D Click [OK] to close the [Network] dialog box.

E When the message to restart appears, click [Yes].
Using SmartNetMonitor for Client

SmartNetMonitor for Client is a utility that helps you to use network printers effectively. It is useful in environments where two or more network printers are
used. It is recommended that you install SmartNetMonitor for Client to use Parallel Printing and Recovery Printing. For more information about SmartNetMonitor for Client, see SmartNetMonitor for Client Help.
SmartNetMonitor for Client features

Sends a print job directly to the network printers without using a print
server.
Notifies when a printing error occurs.
Prints documents using other printers in the printer group when the specified printer is busy (Recovery Printing).
Equally divides the number of copies to be printed among the selected
printers in the printer group (Parallel Printing).
Important
The following must be the same for the specified printer and the printers selected for Recovery Printing or Parallel Printing.
Printer models
Installed options (e.g. Paper tray unit)
Size and orientation of paper in each paper tray unit
Total memory
Installed fonts (including the downloaded fonts)
Reference
For more information about installing SmartNetMonitor for Client, see the
Printer Unit Type 1045 Printer Reference 1.
Note
Make sure to close all applications before beginning the installation process.
Installing SmartNetMonitor for Client may require the computer to be restarted.
Installing SmartNetMonitor for Client

Follow the procedure below to install SmartNetMonitor for Client.
A Configure the IP parameters on the Network Interface Board using the op-
eration panel.
Reference
For more information about setting IP parameters, see Configuring the
printer for the Network with the Operation Panel in the System Settings.
B Insert the CD-ROM labeled Printer Drivers and Utilities into the CDROM drive.
Note
If the installer starts automatically, you can use it to install SmartNetMonitor for Client. Follow the instructions on the screen.
C Open [Control Panel], and double-click the [Add/Remove Programs] icon.

D On the [Install/Uninstall] tab, click [Install].
E Click [Next >].
F Type the name of the CD-ROM drive in the [Command line for installation program] box, followed by :\ NETWORK \ NETMON \ CLIENT \ DISK1 \
SETUP.EXE (do not include the quotation marks), and then click [Finish].
Note
An example would be D:\ NETWORK \ NETMON \ CLIENT \ DISK1
\ SETUP.EXE when the CD-ROM drive letter is D.
G From the [Choose Setup Language] list, select the language you want to use,
H After the [Welcome] dialog box appears, click [Next >].

Follow the instructions on the screen.
After the installation is complete, configure the printer port with SmartNetMonitor for Client. P.7 Setting Up the Printer Driver
Note
If the dialog box asking if you want to restart the computer appears, select
[Yes, I want to restart my computer now.].
Deleting the port

The following procedure allows you to delete the printer port. If you want to delete the port which is currently used in Windows, switch the port to another such
as FILE, and then delete it. For more information about SmartNetMonitor for
Client, see SmartNetMonitor for Client Help.
A From the [Printers] window, click the icon of the printer which uses SmartNetMonitor for Client to print. On the [File] menu, click [Properties].
B Click the [Details] tab and make sure that the SmartNetMonitor for Client
port is shown in the [Print to the following port] box.
Remember the port name because this port should be deleted later.
C From the [Print to the following port] box, select [FILE].

D Click [Delete Port].
E Click the SmartNetMonitor for Client port name as in step B, and then click
[OK].
The port is deleted.
F Click [OK] to close the printer properties.

Uninstalling SmartNetMonitor for Client
Preparation
Before uninstalling SmartNetMonitor for Client, make sure that:
The SmartNetMonitor for Client settings dialog box is closed.

No printer is using the SmartNetMonitor for Client port as a printer port.
A Open [Control Panel], and double-click the [Add/Remove Programs] icon.

B On the [Install/Uninstall] tab, click [SmartNetMonitor for Client], and click [Add/Remove].
C After the confirmation message appears, click [Yes].

UninstallShield removes all of the components of SmartNetMonitor for Client.
D After the confirmation message, click [Yes].

E Acknowledge the [Question] dialog box.
F When the uninstallation is complete, click [OK].
Setting Up the Printer Driver

The following procedure allows you to configure the printer port to use SmartNetMonitor for Client.
Preparation
The target printer must be turned on before starting the installation process.
A Install the printer driver of the printer you want to use.

B From the [Printers] window, click the icon of the printer. On the [File] menu,
click [Properties].
C Click the [Details] tab and click [Add Port].

D Click [Other], click [SmartNetMonitor] from the list, and then click [OK].
The [Select Printer] dialog box appears .
The displayed items are as follows:
Model Name: The model name of the printer.
Name: The name of the Network Interface Board.
Comment: Additional information about the Network Interface Board.
Address: The IP address of the printer.
E Select the printer.

TCP/IP
A Click the printer you want to use, and then click [OK].
Note
Printers that respond to an IP broadcast from the computer will be displayed. To print to a printer not listed here, click [Specify Address], and
then type the IP address or host name.
You cannot add an address partially similar to that already used. For example, when 192.168.0.2 is already used, 192.168.0.2xx cannot be
used. Similarly, when 192.168.0.20 is already used, 192.168.0.2 cannot be used.
NetBEUI
A Click [NetBEUI].
A list of printers that can be printed to by the NetBEUI protocol appears.
B Click the printer you want to use, and then click [OK].
Note
Printers that respond to a broadcast from the computer will be displayed.
To print to a printer not listed here, click [Specify Address], and then type
the NetBEUI address. Make sure that the NetBEUI address is on the configuration page. For more information about the printing of the configuration page, see the Printer Unit Type 1045 Printer Reference 2.
You cannot print to printers beyond routers.
IPP
A Click [IPP].
The IPP setting dialog box appears.
B In [Printer URL], type http://(printer's IP address)/printer as the IP address of the printer.
(Example IP address is 192.168.15.16)
http://192.168.15.16/printer
C As necessary, type the names to distinguish the printer in [IPP Port Name].
Type a name differing from those of any existing port names.
If you omit this, the address typed in [Printer URL] will be set as the IPP port
name.
D If using a proxy server and IPP user name, click [Detailed Settings] and
configure the necessary settings.
Note
For more information about these settings, see SmartNetMonitor for
Client Help.
F Click [OK].
G Make sure that the specified printing port is displayed in the [Print to the fol-
lowing Port] box, and click [OK].

This completes the settings.
To print, select the specified printer. SmartNetMonitor for Client will now direct print data to the printer automatically.
Changing Port Settings

Follow these steps to change SmartNetMonitor for Client settings, such as Parallel Printing, Recovery Printing, TCP/IP, the proxy server and IPP URL.
Note
There are no settings for the NetBEUI protocol.
You can configure Timeout Settings for the TCP/IP protocol.
A From the [Printers] window, click the printer icon. On the [File] menu, click
[Properties].
B Click the [Details] tab, and then click [Port Settings].

The [Port Settings] dialog box appears.
For IPP, you can configure User Settings, Proxy Settings and Timeout Settings.
Note
For more information about these settings, see SmartNetMonitor for Client
Help.
Setting up a Client Computer

This section describes the procedures for setting up a client on a network that
uses Windows 2000, Windows NT Server or Windows NT Workstation as a
print server.
To print from Windows 95/98/Me, you must first install the printer driver and
change the printer port to the print server.
Windows 2000 or
Windows 95/98/Me
Note
This section assumes that the client has already been configured to communicate with a Windows 2000 or Windows NT print server. Do not begin the following procedure until the client has been set up and configured correctly.
A Install the printer driver as a local printer.

Reference
For more information about installing the printer driver, see the Printer
Unit Type 1045 Printer Reference 1.
Note
Any port can be selected during the installation, however, LPT1 is recommended.
B Click [Start], point to [Settings], and then click [Printers].

C Click the icon of the printer you want to use. On the [File] menu, click [Properties].
D Click the [Details] tab, and click [Add Port].

E Click [Network], and click [Browse].
10
F On the network tree, double-click the name of the computer used as the
print server.
The printers connected to the network are displayed.
G Click the name of the printer you want to use, and click [OK].
H Click [OK].
I Make sure that the port name is displayed in the [Print to the following port]
box, and click [OK].
11
12
2. Windows 2000 Configuration

Configuring Windows 2000
The following procedure describes how to configure Windows 2000 to use the
machine on a network without a Windows 2000, Windows NT Server, Windows
NT Workstation or NetWare based print server.

IPP
TCP/IP
NetBEUI

for Printing"

SmartNetMonitor
for Client
SmartNetMonitor
for Admin
for Client"
for Admin"
Printing with a Standard TCP/IP Port

Standard TCP/IP port is a standard port of Windows 2000 to enable Peer-toPeer printing in a network environment.
For more information about Standard TCP/IP port settings, see Windows 2000
Help.
13
Windows 2000 Configuration
Printing with a LPR Port

See P.23 Configuring LPR Port Printing for configuring a LPR port in Windows
2000.
See P.24 Setting up a Client Computer for configuring Windows 2000 with a
Windows 2000 or Windows NT print server.
14
Configuring the Protocols

Follow these instructions to configure the Network Interface Board and Windows 2000 to use the TCP/IP protocol and IPP.

protocol.
Reference
Settings.

Note
been set correctly.
A Click [Start], point to [Programs], point to [Accessories], and then click [Command Prompt].
C:\> ping 192.168.15.16
Request timed out.
Configuring a Windows 2000 computer

Follow these steps to configure a Windows 2000 computer to use the TCP/IP
protocol.
A Click [Start] on the taskbar, point to [Settings], and then click [Network and
Dial-up Connections].
B Click [Local Area Connection]. On the [General] tab, click [Properties].
15
C Make sure that theInternet Protocol (TCP/IP) is selected in the [Components checked are used by this connection:] box on the [General] tab.
Note
Select the TCP/IP protocol box if it is not already selected.
If the TCP/IP protocol is not installed, click [Install] on the [General] tab to
install it. For more information about installing the TCP/IP protocol, see
Windows 2000 Help.
D Configure the TCP/IP protocol with the appropriate IP address, subnet


Follow these instructions to configure the Network Interface Board and Windows 2000 to use the NetBEUI protocol.

Reference
Settings.
Configuring a Windows 2000 computer

Follow these steps to configure a Windows 2000 computer to use the NetBEUI
protocol.
A Click [Start] on the taskbar, point to [Settings], and then click [Network and
Dial-up Connections].
B Click [Local Area Connection]. On the [General] tab, click [Properties].

C Make sure that theNetBEUI Protocol is selected in the [Components
checked are used by this connection:] box on the [General] tab.
Note
Select the NetBEUI protocol box if it is not already selected.
If the NetBEUI protocol is not installed, click [Install] on the [General] tab
and install it. For more information about installing the NetBEUI protocol,
see Windows 2000 Help.
16


server.
Important
Printer models
Total memory
Reference
For more information about installing SmartNetMonitor for Client, see the
Printer Unit Type 1045 Printer Reference 1.
Note
17

A Configure the IP parameters on the Network Interface Board using the operation panel.
Reference
Note

D Click [Add New Programs], and then click [CD or Floppy].
E Click [Next >].
F Type the name of the CD-ROM drive in the [Open] box, followed by :\
NETWORK \ NETMON \ CLIENT \ DISK1 \ SETUP.EXE (do not include the quotation marks), and then click [Finish].
Note

Note
18
Deleting the port

as FILE, then delete it. For more information about SmartNetMonitor for Client, see SmartNetMonitor for Client Help.
A From the [Printers] window, click the icon of the printer which uses Smart-
NetMonitor for Client to print. On the [File] menu, click [Properties].
B Click the [Ports] tab and make sure that the SmartNetMonitor for Client
port is shown in the [Print to the following port(s)] box.
C Select the [FILE] check box in the [Port] column.

D Click [OK] to close the Printer Properties.
The port which is currently in use is changed.
E Open the Printer Properties of the same printer.

F Select the [Ports] tab.
G At the [Port] column in the [Print to the following port(s)] dialog box, click to select the SmartNetMonitor for Client port name as in step B.
H Click [Delete Port].

I When the confirmation message appears, click [Yes].
J Click [Close] to close the Printer Properties.

Preparation
The port settings dialog box is closed.


B Click the [Change or Remove Programs] tab, click [SmartNetMonitor for Client],
and click [Change/Remove].

19
D After the confirmation message appears, click [Yes].

E Acknowledge the [Remove Shared File?] dialog box.
Preparation
A Install the printer driver for the printer you want to use.
click [Properties].
C Click the [Ports] tab and click [Add Port].

D Click [SmartNetMonitor for Client] in the [Available port types:] box, and then
click [New Port].
The [Select Printer] dialog box appears and printers on the network are
browsed.
Name: The name of Network Interface Board.
Comment: Additional information about Network Interface Board.

TCP/IP
Note
Printers that respond to an IP broadcast from the computer will be displayed. To print to a printer not listed here, click [Specify Address] and
20
NetBEUI
A Click [NetBEUI].
A list of printers that can be printed by the NetBEUI protocol appears.
Note
Printers that respond to a broadcast from the computer will be displayed. To print to a printer not listed here, click [Specify Address] and
then type the NetBEUI address. Make sure that the NetBEUI address is
on the configuration page. For information about the printing of the
configuration page, see the Printer Unit Type 1045 Printer Reference 1.
IPP
A Click [IPP].
http://192.168.15.16/printer
Type a name different from those of any existing port names.
If you omit this, the address entered in [Printer URL] will be set as the IPP
port name.
Note
For more information about these setting, see SmartNetMonitor for Client Help.
F Click [OK].
G Make sure that the specified printing port is displayed in the [Print to the fol-
lowing Port(s)] box, and click [Close].

To print, select the specified printer. SmartNetMonitor for Client will now direct print data to the printer automatically.
21

Follow the steps to change SmartNetMonitor for Client settings, such as Parallel
Printing, Recovery Printing, TCP/IP, the proxy server and IPP URL.
Note
A From the [Printers] window, click the icon of the printer you want to use. On
the [File] menu, click [Properties].
B Click the [Ports] tab, and then click [Configure Port].

The [Port Settings] dialog box appears
For TCP/IP protocol, you can configure Parallel Printing, Recovery Printing and Timeout Settings.
Note
Help.
22
Configuring LPR Port Printing

This section explains the procedure for printing to a LPR port from Windows
2000.
Note
The TCP/IP protocols must be installed and configured correctly. For more
information about configuring the protocols, see P.15 Configuring TCP/IP and
IPP for Printing.
A Click [Start], point to [Settings], and then click [Printers].

B Click the icon of the printer you want to use. On the [File] menu, click [Properties].

D In the [Available port types:] box, click LPR Port, and then click [New Port].
Note
If LPR Port does not appear, Print Services for Unix has not been installed.
E Type the IP address of the Network Interface Board into the [Name or address
of server providing lpd:] box.
F Type lp into the [Name of printer or print queue on that server box:], and click
[OK].
G Click [Close].
H Make sure that the port name is displayed in the [Print to the following port(s)]
box and that the check box is selected, and then click [OK].
23

This section describes the procedures for setting up a client in a network that
print server.
To print from Windows 2000, you must first install the printer driver and change
the printer port to the print server.
Windows 2000 or
Windows 2000
Note
Use the [Printers] window to set up the printer.

B Double-click the [Add Printer] icon.
This launches the Add Printer Wizard.
C Click [Next >].

D Click [Network printer], and click [Next >].
E Click [Next >].
F In the [Shared printers:] box, double-click the name of the computer used as
a print server.
The printers attached to the network are displayed.
24
G Click the printer you want to use, and click [Next >].
Note
If the printer driver is not installed in the print server, a message appears.
If a driver has been installed on the client, click [OK], and follow the instructions on the screen.
There is a Windows 2000 printer driver on the CD-ROM labeled Printer

Drivers and Utilities.
H Select whether to use this printer as the default printer, and click [Next >].
I After the installation is complete, click [Finish].
The icon of the newly installed printer appears in the [Printers] window.
25
26
3. Windows NT 4.0 Configuration

Configuring Windows NT 4.0
The following procedure describes how to configure Windows NT 4.0 to use the
machine on a network without a Windows 2000, Windows NT Server, Windows
NT Workstation or NetWare based print server.

IPP
TCP/IP
NetBEUI

for Printing"

SmartNetMonitor
for Client
SmartNetMonitor
for Admin
for Client"
for Admin"
27
Windows NT 4.0 Configuration
Printing with a LPR Port

See P.38 Configuring LPR Port Printing for how to configure a LPR port in Windows NT 4.0.

See P.39 Setting up a Client Computer for configuring Windows NT 4.0 with a
Windows 2000 or Windows NT print server.
28

These instructions are for configuring the Network Interface Board and Windows NT to use the TCP/IP protocol and IPP.

protocol.
Reference
Settings.

Note
been correctly set.
A Click [Start], point to [Programs], and then click [Command Prompt].
C:\> ping 192.168.15.16
Request timed out.
Configuring a Windows NT computer

These steps are for configuring a Windows NT computer to use the TCP/IP protocol.
TCP/IP Protocol is listed in the [Network protocols] box on the [Protocols]
tab.
Note
If the TCP/IP protocol is not installed, click [Add] on the [Protocols] tab to
install it. For more information about installing the TCP/IP protocol, see
Windows NT Help.
29
B Configure the TCP/IP protocols with the appropriate IP address, subnet

C Click the [Services] tab, and make sure that Microsoft TCP/IP Printing is
installed.
If Microsoft TCP/IP Printing is not installed, click [Add] on the [Services ]
tab, to install it. For more information about installing and configuring network services, see Windows NT Help.

These instructions are for configuring the Network Interface Board and Windows NT to use the NetBEUI protocol.

Reference
Settings.
Configuring a Windows NT computer

Install the NetBEUI protocol on the Windows NT computer, and change the
LAN adapter number (Lana Number).
NetBEUI Protocol is listed in the [Network Protocols] box on the [Protocols]
tab.
Note
If the NetBEUI protocol is not installed, click [Add] on the [Protocols] tab to
install it. For more information about installing the NetBEUI protocol, see
Windows NT Help.
B Change the Lana Number. Click the [Services] tab, click NetBIOS Interface in the [Services] tab, and click [Properties].
C Click the Lana Number corresponding the Nbf protocol of the [Network
Route] headline, and click [Edit].
30
D Type 0 as the Lana Number.

Note
If the other protocol's Lana Number is configured with 0, you must
change the Lana Number a number other than 0.
E Click [OK].
F Click [Close], and close the [Network] dialog box.
G After acknowledging the message to restart, click [Yes].
Note
After you change the Lana Number, you must restart the computer.
31


server.
Important
Printer models
Total memory
Reference
For more information about installing the SmartNetMonitor for Client, see
the Printer Unit Type 1045 Printer Reference 1.
Limitation
On a computer that is used as a print server, do not use the features such as
Parallel Printing, Recovery Printing and Notify. For more information about
turning off these features, see SmartNetMonitor for Client Help.
Note
32

A Configure the IP parameters on the Network Interface Board using the operation panel.
Reference
B Insert the CD-ROM labeled Printer Drivers and Utilities into the CD-
ROM drive.
Note

E Click [Next >].
F Type the name of the CD-ROM drive in the [Command line for installation program] box, followed by :\ NETWORK \ NETMON \ CLIENT \ DISK1 \
SETUP.EXE (do not include the quotation marks), and then click [Finish].
Note

Note
33
Deleting the port

as FILE, then delete it. For more information about SmartNetMonitor for Client, see SmartNetMonitor for Client Help.
A From the [Printers] window, click the icon of the printer which uses SmartNetMonitor for Client to print. On the [File] menu, click [Properties].
B Click the [Ports] tab and make sure that the SmartNetMonitor for Client
port is shown in the [Print to the following port] box.

C From the [Print to the following port] box, select [FILE].

D Click [Apply].
The port which is currently in use is changed.
E Click [Delete Port].

F After the confirmation message appears, click [Yes].
G Click [OK] to close the printer properties.

Preparation
The port settings dialog box is closed.


B On the [Install/Uninstall] tab, click [SmartNetMonitor for Client] and click [Add/Remove].

D After a confirmation message appears, click [Yes].

E Acknowledge the [Remove Shared File?] dialog box.
34

Preparation
A Install the printer driver of the printer you want to use.

click [Properties].

D Click [SmartNetMonitor] from the list, and then click [New Port...].
The [Select Printer] dialog box appears .
Name: The name of the Network Interface Board.
Comment: Additional information about the Network Interface Board.

TCP/IP
Note
Printers that respond to an IP broadcast from the computer will be displayed. To print to a printer not listed here, click [Specify Address], and
NetBEUI
A Click [NetBEUI].
A list of printers that can be printed by the NetBEUI protocol appears.
Note
Printers that respond to a broadcast from the computer will be displayed. To print to a printer not listed here, click [Specify Address] and
then type the NetBEUI address. Make sure that the NetBEUI address is
on the configuration page. For information about the printing of the
configuration page, see the Printer Unit Type 1045 Printer Reference 2.
35
IPP
A Click [IPP].
http://192.168.15.16/printer
Type a name different from those of any existing port names.
If you omit this, the address entered in [Printer URL] will be set as the IPP
port name.
Note
For more information about these setting, see SmartNetMonitor for Client Help.
F Click [OK].
G Make sure that the specified printing port is displayed in the [Print to the following Port] box, and then click [OK].
To print, select the printer specified here. SmartNetMonitor for Client will
now direct print data to the printer automatically.
36

Follow the steps to change SmartNetMonitor for Client settings, such as Parallel
Printing, Recovery Printing, TCP/IP, the proxy server settings and IPP URL.
Note
A From the [Printers] window, click the icon of the printer you want to use. On
the [File] menu, click [Properties].
B Click the [Ports] tab, and then click [Port Configuration].
The [Port Settings] dialog box appears

For TCP/IP protocol, you can configure Recovery Printing, Parallel Printing and Timeout Settings.
Note
Help.
37

This section explains the procedure for printing to a LPR port from Windows
NT.
Note
The following procedure assumes that the printer drivers have already been
installed. This is the procedure to change the printer port to LPR.
The TCP/IP protocols must be installed and configured correctly. For more
information about configuring the protocol, see P.29 Configuring TCP/IP and
IPP for Printing.

B Click the icon of the printer you want to use. On the [File] menu, click [Properties].
C Click the [Ports] tab, and then click [Add Port].

D In the [Available Printer Ports] box, click LPR Port, and then click [New Port].
Note
If LPR Port does not appear, Microsoft TCP/IP Printing has not been
installed.
E Type the IP address of the Network Interface Board into the [Name or address
of server providing lpd] box.
F Type lp into the [Name of printer or print queue on that server] box, and click
[OK].
G Click [Close].
H Make sure that the port name is displayed in the [Print to the following port(s)]
box and the check box is selected, and then click [OK].
38

This section describes the procedures for setting up a client in a network that
print server.
To print from Windows NT 4.0, you must first install the printer driver and
change the printer port to the print server.
Windows 2000 or
Windows NT 4.0
Note
Use the [Printers] window to set up the printer.

B Double-click the [Add Printer] icon.
This launches the Add Printer Wizard.
C Click [Network printer server] and click [Next >].

D In the [Shared Printers] box, double-click the name of the computer used as a
print server.
The printers attached to the network are displayed.
E Click the printer you want to use and click [OK].

Note
If the printer driver is not installed in the print server, a message appears.
If a driver has been installed on the client, click [OK] and follow the instructions on the screen.
There is a Windows NT printer driver on the CD-ROM labeled Printer
Drivers and Utilities.
39
F Select if you want to use this printer as the default printer, and click [Next >].
G After the installation is complete, click [Finish].
The icon of the newly installed printer appears in the [Printers] window.
40
4. NetWare Configuration
This chapter describes how to configure the machine to use as a print server or
a remote printer in a NetWare environment.
Note
NetWare must be set to active using the machine's control panel. For more information about how to set it, see the System Settings.
Installing the NIB Setup Tool

A utility called the NIB Setup Tool is provided to configure the machine to work
in a network environment. This section describes how to install the SmartNetMonitor for Admin, and how to run the NIB Setup Tool.
Limitation
The NIB Setup Tool is supported to work with the following operating systems.
Microsoft Windows 95/98/Me
Microsoft Windows 2000
Microsoft Windows NT 4.0
Installing SmartNetMonitor for Admin

Follow these steps to install the SmartNetMonitor for Admin.
Preparation
You should install the SmartNetMonitor for Admin on the computer. If you
install the SmartNetMonitor for Admin from a file server or run it via the network, the SmartNetMonitor for Admin might not work correctly.
Make sure to close all applications before starting the installation procedure.

If the installer starts automatically, follow the instructions on the screen.
If not, go to step C.

E Click [Next >].
41
NetWare Configuration
F In the [Command line for installation program] box, type the name of the CD-ROM
drive followed by :\ NETWORK\NETMON\ADMIN\DISK1\SETUP.EXE

(do not include the quotation marks), and then click [Finish].
Note
An example would be D:\ NETWORK\NETMON\ADMIN\DISK1\SETUP.EXE when the CD-ROM drive name is D.

I The [Software License Agreement] dialog box appears.
After reading through all of the contents by clicking [T

T], click [Yes] to agree
with the License Agreement.
J Select a folder to install the SmartNetMonitor for Admin in, and then click
[Next >].
If you want to change the displayed folder, click [Browse] to select another
one.
The installation program starts.
When the confirmation dialog box appears, the installation program is complete.
Running the NIB Setup Tool
A Click [Start], point to [Programs], and then click [NIB Setup Tool] in the [SmartNetMonitor for Admin] program folder.
42
Quick Setup Using the NIB Setup Tool Wizard
Quick Setup Using the NIB Setup Tool

Wizard
With the NIB Setup Tool, you can easily set up a NetWare printing environment.
Reference
For more information about installing the NIB Setup Tool, see P.41 Installing
the NIB Setup Tool.
You can select [Wizard] or [Property Sheet] as an installation method.

When you configure the Network Interface Board for the first time, use the Wizard method.
If you want to use the Property Sheet method, see P.46 NetWare 3.x - Advanced
Settings or P.52 NetWare 4.x, 5 - Advanced Settings.
Note
This section assumes that NetWare is functional and that the necessary environment for NetWare Print Services is available.
If you configure the Network Interface Board in a NetWare environment using the NIB Setup Tool, you should install the client software released from
Novell in the following cases.
Windows 95/98/Me in NDS mode configuration
Windows NT 4.0 in NDS mode configuration
Windows NT 4.0 in Bindery mode configuration
Windows 2000 in NDS mode configuration
Windows 2000 in Bindery mode configuration
A Log on to the Netware file server or the NDS tree as an Admin or Admin
equivalent.
B Run the NIB Setup Tool.

Reference
P.42 Running the NIB Setup Tool
C Click [Wizard] and click [OK].

The [NIB Setup Tool - Network board list] dialog box of the Network Interface
Board appears.
D Click [IPX protocol].

E Click to select the IPX address of the Network Interface Board you are configuring, and click [Next >].
Note
If you do not know which Network Interface Board you are configuring,
print a network configuration page to check the MAC address (Network
address).
43
F Make sure that the MAC address and IPX address are correct, and click [Finish].
G Type the print server name into the [Device Name] box, and click [Next >].
The default setting is RDP_ followed by the 6 digit serial number. We recommend that you change it to something that is easier to remember or something based on the structure of the network.
H In a dialog box for selecting a network environment, click to select the [NetWare] check box and click to clear the [TCP/IP] check box.
I Click [Next >].

A dialog box for configuring the NetWare environment appears.
J Select [Bindery] when printing under Bindery mode, or select [NDS] when
printing under NDS mode.

When you are using NetWare version 4.x, you should select [NDS].
K If you selected [Bindery], type into the [File Server Name:] box the name of the
file server in which a print server is to be created.
After clicking [Browse], you can select a file server among those listed in the
[Browse] dialog box.
L If you selected [NDS], type into the [Tree:] box the name of the NDS tree in
which the print server is created, and type the context into the [Context:] box.
Clicking [Browse], you can select an NDS tree and an NDS context among
those listed in the [Browse] dialog boxes.
As a context, object names are typed from a lower object and divided by a period. For example, if you want to create a print server into NET under DS,
type NET.DS.
M Click [Next >].

N Type the name of the printer into the [Printer Name] box, and the name of the
print queue into the [Print Queue Name] box.

The default setting for Printer Name is Print Server Name followed by _1
and for Print Queue Name is Print Server Name followed by _Q (quotation marks are not included). You can change them if necessary.
44
Quick Setup Using the NIB Setup Tool Wizard
O If you have selected the NDS mode, type the volume of the print queue into
the [Queue Volume] box.
Clicking [Browse], you can select one of those shown in the [Browse] dialog
box.
P Click [Next >].

A dialog box to acknowledge the printing environment appears.
Q After acknowledging the environment, click [Next >].

If you want to change the settings, click [< Back] and make the settings again.
Clicking [Next >], the NIB Setup Tool automatically creates the Print Server,
the Printer, and the Print Queue in the NetWare network.
R After the confirmation dialog box appears, select [Quit] and click [Finish] to
exit the NIB Setup Tool.
45
NetWare 3.x - Advanced Settings

The actual procedures for configuring the machine vary depending on whether
the Network Interface Board is configured as a print server or as a remote printer. This section describes how to configure the machine in the NetWare 3.x environment.
Basic Procedure
Install the NIB Setup Tool
Print Server
Remote Printer
Configure the Network Interface Board
Configure the NetWare

Turn the power
off and on
Start the print server
Preparation
The following procedures use the Property Sheet method in configuring the
Network Interface Board. If you configure the Network Interface Board as a
NetWare print server for the first time, we recommend you use the Wizard
method. P.43 Quick Setup Using the NIB Setup Tool Wizard
Note
This section assumes NetWare is functional and that the necessary environment for the NetWare Print Service is available.
Setting Up as a Print Server
A Log on to the file server as a Supervisor or a Supervisor equivalent.

Reference
C Click [Property Sheet] and click [OK].

Board appears.

46
E Click the IPX address of the Network Interface Board which is to be configured, and then click [Next >].
Note
see the network configuration page to check the MAC address (Network
Address).
The [NIB Setup Tool] window appears.
G Click [Configure].
The property sheet appears.
H Click the [General] tab, and type the name of the print server into the [Device
Name] box.
I Click the [NetWare] tab, and make the following settings.
A Select [Bindery].
B In the [File Server Name:] box, type the name of the file server in which a
print server is to be created.
Click [Browse] to select a file server among those listed in the [Browse] dialog box.
C Click [OK] to close the property sheet.
D After the confirmation dialog box appears, click [OK].
J On the [NIB] menu, click [Exit] to exit the NIB Setup Tool.
K Type PCONSOLE from the command prompt.
F:> PCONSOLE
L Create a print queue as follows:

Note
If you use a currently defined print queue, go to step M.
A From the [Available Options] menu, select [Print Queue Information] and press
the {ENTER}
} key.
B Press the {INSERT}
} key and type a print queue name.
C Press the {ESC}
} key to return to the [Available Options] menu.
47
M Create a printer as follows:
A From the [Available Options] menu, select [Print Server Information] and press
the {ENTER}
} key.
B To create a new print server, press the {INSERT}
} key and type a print
server name.
If you use a currently defined print server, select one of the print servers
shown in the [Print Server] list.
Important
Use the same name as that specified in the NIB Setup Tool. ( Step H).
C From the [Print Server Information] menu, select [Print Server Configuration].
D From the [Print Server Configuration] menu, select [Printer Configuration].
E Select the printer which is indicated as Not Installed.
F If you want to change the name of the printer, type a new name.
A name Printer x is assigned to the printer. x stands for the number of
the selected printer.
G For type, select [Remote Other/Unkown].
The IRQ, Buffer size, Starting form, and Queue service mode are automatically configured.
H Press the {ESC}
} key, and click [Yes] in the confirmation dialog box.
I Press the {ESC}
} key to return to the [Print Server Configuration] menu.
N Assign print queues to the created printer as follows:
A From the [Print Server Configuration] menu, select [Queues Serviced By Printer].
B Select the printer created in step M.
C Press the {INSERT}
} key to select a queue serviced by the printer.
Note
You can select more than one queue at a time.
D Follow the instructions on the screen to make other necessary settings.

When you have finished the previous steps, make sure that the queues are
assigned.
O Press the {ESC}} key until Exit? appears, and select [Yes] to exit PCONSOLE.
P Turn the printer power off and on.

Note
To make sure that the printer is correctly configured, type the following
from the command prompt.
F:> USERLIST
If the printer works as configured, the name of the print server appears as
an attached user.
48
Setting Up as a Remote Printer
A Log on to the file server as a Supervisor or a Supervisor equivalent.

Reference

Board appears.

E Click the IPX address of the Network Interface Board which is to be config-
ured, and click [Next >].
Note
see a network configuration page to check the MAC address (Network Address).
Name] box.
A In the [Print Server Name] box, type the name of the print server.
B In the [File Server Name] box, type the name of the file server in which a
Clicking [Browse], you can select a file server among those listed in the
C In the [Print Server Operation Mode] group, click [As Remote Printer].
D In the [Remote Printer No.] box, type the printer number.
Important
Use the same printer number as that to be created in the printer server.
E Click [OK] to close the property sheet.

F After the confirmation dialog box appears, click [OK].
49
K Type PCONSOLE from the command prompt.
F:> PCONSOLE

Note
If you use a currently defined print queue, go to step M.
A From the [Available Options] menu, select [Print Queue Information] and press
the {ENTER}
} key.
B Press the {INSERT}
} key and type a print queue name.
C Press the {ESC}
} key to return to the [Available Options] menu.
M Create a printer as follows.
A From the [Available Options] menu, select [Print Server Information] and press
the {ENTER}
} key.
B To create a new print server, press the {INSERT}
} key and type a print
server name.
If you use a currently defined print server, select one of the print servers
shown in the [Print Server] list.
Important
Use the same name as that specified in the NIB Setup Tool. (Step H).
C From the [Print Server Information] menu, select [Print Server Configuration].
D From the [Print Server Configuration] menu, select [Printer Configuration].
E Select the printer which is indicated as Not Installed.
Important
Use the same number as that specified as Remote Printer No. using the
NIB Setup Tool. (Step I-D).
F Type a new name, if you change the name of the printer, .

A name Printer x is assigned to the printer. x stands for the number of
the selected printer.
G Select [Remote Parallel, LPT1,] for type.
The IRQ, Buffer size, Starting form, and Queue service mode are automatically configured.
H Press the {ESC}
} key, and click [Yes] in the confirmation dialog box.
I Press the {ESC}
} key to return to [Print Server Configuration Menu].
50
A From [Print Server Configuration Menu], select [Queues Serviced By Printer].

B Select the printer created in step M.
C Press the {INSERT}
} key to select a queue serviced by the printer.
Note
You can select more than one queue at a time.
D Follow the instructions on the screen to make other necessary settings.

When you have finished the above steps, make sure that the queues are assigned.
O Press the {ESC}} key until Exit? appears, and select [Yes] to exit PCONSOLE.
P Start the print server by typing the following from the console of the NetWare Server.
If it is running, restart it after exiting it.
To exit
CAREE: unload pserver
To start
CAREE: load pserver print_server_name
Note
If the printer works as configured, Waiting for job appears.
51
NetWare 4.x, 5 - Advanced Settings

The actual procedures for configuring the machine vary depending on whether
the Network Interface Board is configured as a print server or as a remote printer. This section describes how to configure it in the NetWare 4.x, 5 environment.
To use NetWare 5
You cannot use the NDPS (Novell Distributed Print Services) mode.
If you use Pure IP, configure the machine to use the TCP/IP protocol. For
more information about how to make the settings, see the System Settings.
Basic Procedure
Install the NIB Setup Tool

Print Server
Remote Printer
Configure the Network Interface Board

Configure the NetWare
Turn the power
off and on
Start the print server
Preparation
The following procedures use the Property Sheet method in configuring the
Network Interface Board. If you configure the Network Interface Board as a
NetWare print server for the first time, we recommend you use the Wizard
method. P.43 Quick Setup Using the NIB Setup Tool Wizard
Note
This section assumes NetWare is functional and that the necessary environment for the NetWare Print Service is available.
You should install the client software released from Novell in Windows before running the NIB Setup Tool for configuring in NDS mode or using Windows NT 4.0.
52
Setting Up as a Print Server

Important
You can set up the print server using the NDS or Bindery mode in NetWare
4.x, 5. The following procedure is for setting up the print server using the
NDS mode in NetWare 4.1. When you set up the print server using the Bindery mode, use the NIB Setup Tool Wizard. P.43 Quick Setup Using the NIB
Setup Tool Wizard.
Note
If you use Pure IP in NetWare 5, follow the procedure on P.55 Using Pure IP
in the NetWare 5 environment.
A Log on to the file server as an Admin or an Admin equivalent.

Reference

E Click the IPX address of the Network Interface Board which is to be configured, and click [Next >].
Note
Address).
Name] box.
A In the [Print Sever Name:] box, type the name of the print sever.
B In the [File Sever Name:] box, type the name of the file sever in which a
53
C In the [NDS Context:] box, type the context in which the print server is to
be created.
Clicking [Browse], you can select a context among those listed in the
As a context, object names are typed from a lower object and divided by a
period. For example, if you want to create a print server into NET under
DS, type NET.DS.
D Click [OK] to close the property sheet.

E After the confirmation dialog box appears, click [OK].
K From Windows, run NWAdmin.
Reference
For more information about NWAdmin, see the documentation that comes
with the NetWare.
A Select the container object the print queue is located in among those in
the directory tree, and click [Create] on the [Object] menu.
B In the [Class of new object] box, click Print Queue, and click [OK].
C In the [Print Queue name] box, type the name of the print queue.
D In the [Print Queue volume] box, click the [Browse] button.
E In the [Available objects] box, click the volume in which the print queue is
created, and click [OK].
F After acknowledging the settings, click [Create].
A Select the container object the printer is located in, and click [Create] on
the [Object] menu.
B In the [Class of new object] box, click Printer, and click [OK]. When you
are using NetWare 5, click Printer (Non NDPS).
C In the [Printer name] box, type the name of the printer.
D Select the [Define additional properties] check box, and click [Create].
54
A Click [Assignments], and click [Add] in the [Assignments] group.

B In the [Available objects] box, click the queue created in step L, and click
[OK].
C Click [Configuration], and in the [Printer type] box, select [Parallel] using the
drop-down menu, and then click [Communication].
D Click [Manual load] in the [Communication type] group, and click [OK].
E After acknowledging the settings, click [OK].
O Create a print server as follows:
A Select the context specified using the NIB Setup Tool (step I-A
A), and on
the [Object] menu, click [Create].
B In the [Class of new object] box, click Print Server, and click [OK]. When
you are using NetWare 5, click Print Server (Non NDPS).
C In the [Print Server name] box, type the name of the print server.
Important
Use the same name as that specified using the NIB Setup Tool. (Step H)
P Assign the printer to the created print server as follows.

B In the [Available objects] box, click the printer created in step M, and click
[OK].
C After acknowledging the settings, click [OK].
Q Turn the printer power off and on.

Note
If the printer works as configured, the name of the print server appears as
an attached user.
Using Pure IP in the NetWare 5 environment

Reference

The [Network board list] dialog box appears.
55
D Click [TCP/IP protocol].

E Click the IP address of the Network Interface Board which is to be configured, and click [Next >].
Note
Address).
F Make sure that the MAC address and IP address are correct, and click [Finish].
Name:] box.
A In the [Print Server Name:] box, type the name of the print server.
[Browse File Server] dialog box.
C In the [NDS Context:] box, type the context of the print server.
Clicking [Browse], you can select an NDS tree and an NDS context among
those listed in the [Browse Context] dialog box.
As a context, object names are typed from a lower object and divided by a
period. For example, if you want to create a print server into NET under
DS, type NET.DS.
D In the [Print Server Operation Mode] group, click [As Print Server].
E Click [OK] to close the property sheet.
F After the confirmation dialog box appears, click [OK].
After this step, go to step K on P.53 Setting Up as a Print Server.
56
Setting Up as a Remote Printer

Reference

Board appears.

E Click the IPX address of the Network Interface Board which is to be config-
ured, and click [Next >].
Note
Address).
Name] box.
A In the [Print Server Name:] box, type the name of the print server.
57
C In the [NDS Context:] box, type the context in which the print server is to
be created.
Clicking [Browse], you can select a context among those listed in the
As a context, object names are typed from a lower level object and divided
by a period. For example, if you want to create a print server into NET under DS, type NET.DS.
D In the [Print Server Operation Mode] group, click [As Remote Printer].
E In the [Remote Printer No.] box, type the number of the printer.
Important
Use the same number as that of the printer to be created in the print
server.
F Click [OK] to close the property sheet.

G After the confirmation dialog box appears, click [OK].
K From Windows, run NWAdmin.
Reference
For more information about NWAdmin, see the documentation that comes
with the NetWare.
A Select the container object the print queue is located in among those in
the directory tree, and click [Create] on the [Object] menu.
B In the [Class of new object] box, click Print Queue, and click [OK].
C In the [Print Queue name] box, type the name of the print queue.
D In the [Print Queue Volume] box, click [Browse] button.
E In the [Available objects] box, click the volume in which the print queue is
created, and click [OK].
F After acknowledging the settings, click [Create].
58
A Select the container object the printer is located in, and click [Create] in
the [Object] menu.
B In the [Class of new object] box, click Printer, and click [OK]. When you
are using NetWare 5, click Printer (Non NDPS).
C In the [Printer name] box, type the name of the printer.

B In the [Available objects] box, click the queue created in step L, and click
[OK].
C Click [Configuration], and in the [Printer type] box, select [Parallel] using the
drop-down menu, and then click [Communication].
D Click [Manual load] in the [Communication type] group, and click [OK].
O Create a print server as follows:
A Select the context specified using the NIB Setup Tool (Step I-A
A), and on
the [Object] menu, click [Create].
B In the [Class of new object] box, click Print Server, and click [OK]. When
you are using NetWare 5, click Print Server (Non NDPS).
C In the [Print Server name] box, type the name of the print server.
Important
Use the same name as that specified using the NIB Setup Tool. (Step H).
P Assign the printer to the created print server as follows.

B In the [Available objects] box, click the queue created in the step M, and
click [OK].
C In the [Printers] group, click the printer assigned in step B , and click
[Printer Number].
D Type the printer number and click [OK].
Important
Use the same number as that specified as Remote Printer No. using the
NIB Setup Tool. (Step I-E).
59
Q Start the print server by typing the following from the console of the NetWare Server.
If it is running, restart it after exiting it.
To exit
CAREE: unload pserver
To start
CAREE: load pserver print_server_name
60
Setting Up a Client Computer

This section describes how to set up a client computer when using a NetWare
print server.
Note
This section assumes that the client has NetWare client applications installed
and is correctly configured to communicate with a NetWare print server. If
not, install the necessary applications before starting the setting up procedure.
Windows 95/98/Me
Follow the procedure to set up a Windows 95/98/Me client.

Preparation
Log on to the NetWare file server before starting the following procedure.
A Install the printer driver you want to use as Local printer.

Reference
For more information about installing the printer driver, see the Printer
Unit Type 1045 Printer Reference 1.
Note
Any port can be selected during the installation, however, LPT1 is recommended.
B Click [Start], point to [Settings], and then click [Printers].

C In the [Printers] window, click the icon of the printer you want to use.
D On the [File] menu, click [Properties].
E Click the [Details] tab, and click [Add Port].
F Click [Network] and click [Browse].
G On the network tree, double-click the name of the file server.
The queues are displayed.
H Click the queue you want to print, and click [OK].

I Click [OK].
In the [Print to the following port] box, a network path to the printer appears.
J Click [OK] to close the Printer Properties, and again, open it.
61
K Click the [Printer Settings] tab.

L Select to clear the [Form feed] and [Enable banner] check boxes.
Note
You should not select these boxes because they should be specified using
the printer driver. If they are selected, the printer might not print correctly.
When using the PostScript printer driver

Follow these steps to set up for the PostScript printer driver.
A Click the [PostScript] tab.
B Click [Advanced].
C Click to clear the [Send CTRL+D before job] and [Send CTRL+D after job] check
boxes.
M Click [OK] to close the Printer Properties.

Windows 2000
Follow the procedure to set up a Windows 2000 client.
Preparation
A Double-click the [My Network Places] icon on the desktop and navigate to the
queue you want to use, and then double-click it.
The printers dialog box appears.
B Click [No].
C Close all the applications that are currently running.
D Insert the CD-ROM labeled Printer Drivers and Utilities into the CDROM drive.
If the setup menu starts automatically, you can go to the next step. If not, see
E The [Printer Installation] dialog box appears.

F From the [Port] list, select the queue you selected in step A, and click [Next >].
G Follow the instructions on the screen to complete the installation of the
printer driver.
62
Windows NT 4.0
Follow the procedure to set up a Windows NT 4.0 client.
Preparation
A Double-click the [Network Neighborhood] icon on the desktop and navigate to

the queue you want to use, and then double-click it.
The [Printers] dialog box appears.
B Click [No].
C Close all the applications that are currently running.
D Insert the CD-ROM labeled Printer Drivers and Utilitiesinto the CD-
ROM drive.
If the setup menu starts automatically, you can go to the next step. If not, see
E The [Printer Installation] dialog box appears.

F From the [Port] list, select the queue you selected in step A, and click [Next >].
G Follow the instructions on the screen to complete the installation of the
printer driver.
63
64
5. Macintosh Configuration
Configuring Macintosh
This section describes how to configure a Macintosh computer to use EtherTalk.
The actual procedures to configure a Macintosh may vary depending on the version of the Mac OS. The following procedure describes how to configure Mac OS
9. If you are not using Mac OS 9, see the manual that comes with your version of
Mac OS for more information.
Basic Procedure
Change to EtherTalk
Configure the printer
Change the printer name
Change the zone
Limitation
Use PostScript 3, to print from a Macintosh.
Changing to EtherTalk
The following procedure is for configuring a Macintosh computer to use EtherTalk.
Reference
For more information about installing the software required for EtherTalk,
see the Macintosh manuals.
A Open [Control Panel], and double-click the [AppleTalk] icon.

B From the [Connect via:] pop-up menu, select Ethernet.
C If you change zones, select a name from the [Current zone:] pop-up menu.
D Close the [AppleTalk] control panels.
E Restart the Macintosh.
65
Macintosh Configuration
Configuring the Printer

Use the control panel to activate the EtherTalk protocol. (The default is active.)
Reference
For more information about configuration, see the System Settings.
Changing the Printer Name

If the network has several similar model printers, the names will be the same.
Printers that have the same name will have their names slightly changed in the
Chooser. For example, three printers named printer will appear in the chooser
as printer0, printer1 and printer2.
To change the printer name in the Macintosh EtherTalk environment, use the
Printer Utility for Mac included on the CD-ROM labeled Printer Drivers and
Utilities.
Changing the Zone

To change the zone configuration in the Macintosh EtherTalk environment, use
the Printer Utility for Mac included on the CD-ROM labeled Printer Drivers
and Utilities.
Reference
For more information about using Printer Utilities for Mac, see PostScript 3
Unit Type 1045 Operating Instructions Supplement provided as a PDF file on
the CD-ROM labeled Operating Instructions for Printer.
66
6. Appendix
Configuring the Network Interface Board
with a Web Browser
The Network Interface Board functions as a Web server in addition to allowing
a printer to function as a network printer. You can use a Web Browser to view
the printer status and configure the Network Interface Board.

This requires the TCP/IP protocol to be installed. After the machine has been
configured to use the TCP/IP protocol, it will be possible to adjust the settings
using a Web Browser.
Reference
For more information about configuring the machine to use the TCP/IP
protocol, see the System Settings.
Operating system browser requirements

OS
Browser
Windows 95/98/Me
Windows NT 4.0
Windows 2000
Mac OS 7.6.1 9.0.4
Microsoft Internet Explorer 3.02/4.0/5.0

Netscape Navigator 3.0/4.0
Solaris 2.5 2.7
Limitation
Sometimes after clicking [Back] , the previous page may not appear. In this
case, click [Refresh] or [Reload] .
The text on the screen may disappear or be aligned incorrectly if the font
size settings of the browser are too large. It is recommended that you use
a font size equal to or smaller than 10 point with Netscape Navigator,
and Medium or smaller with Internet Explorer.
67
Appendix
Going to the Top Page

After launching the Web Browser, type the IP address of the machine. See the
example below. This example is for the English version.
http://192.168.15.16/
(In this example, the IP address of the Network Interface Board is 192.168.15.16.)
Note
If a DNS server is used on the network, you can type the host name as a URL.
For example, http://webmonitor.netprinter.com/. In order to do this, you
must the register the IP address and the host name of the Network Interface
Board with the DNS server. Consult the network administrator for information about how to do this.
If the network uses proxy servers, the browser may run slowly.
1
2
3
1. Header Buttons
You can register favorite URLs with
[URL]. To view the Help section, click
[Help].
Important
When connecting via a dial-up
connection, please be aware that
there will be a communication
charge as you are logging onto the
Internet.
Note
The Help files are stored on the CDROM labeled Operating Instructions
for Printer in HTML format.
2. Menu Buttons
These Buttons are to configure the Network Interface Board and for checking
the status of the machine.
68
Note
When you click [Configuration], a dialog box appears requesting the user
name and password. Type only the
password in this dialog box. The default password is password.
The password is the same as that used
for remote maintenance and that used
in the NIB Setup Tool. If you change a
password with the Web Browser, the
other passwords are also changed.
3. Status
Displays the name and comments of the
Network Interface Board, and the printer
status.
Configuring the Network Interface Board with a Web Browser
- Linking the address (URL) to the [Help] button

You can link the address (URL) of the [Help] button to the Help files on the computer or on a Web server.
A Copy the Help files on the CD-ROM to the desired location. The Help files are
located in folders labeled with abbreviated language names; for example, English Help files are in the [EN] folder. Make sure to copy the entire [EN] folder
to the new location.
B Using a Web Browser, navigate to the Top Page and click [Network config].
C Type your password, (it is not necessary to type a user name) and click [OK].
D Type the path to the Help files in the [Help URL] box.
If you copied the Help files to C:\HELP\EN, type file ://C:/HELP/. For
example if you copied the files to a web server and the index URL is http:/
/a.b.c.d/HELP/EN/index.html, type http://a.b.c.d/HELP/.
E Click [Apply].
When a warning message appears, select to continue configuration.
69
Appendix
Remote Maintenance by telnet

You can view the printer status and configure the Network Interface Board using telnet.
Note
You should specify a password so that only the network administrator, or a
person having network administrator privileges, can use remote maintenance.
Using telnet
The following is a sample procedure using telnet.
Limitation
Only one person at a time can be logged on to do remote maintenance.
A Using the IP address or host name of the machine, start telnet.

% telnet IP_address
Note
In order to use the host name instead of the IP address, you must write it
to the /etc/hosts file.
B Type the password.

Note
The default is password.
C Type a command.
Reference
For more information about telnet commands, see P.71 Commands List.
D Exit telnet.
msh> logout
When the configuration is changed, a message requests whether or not the
changes should be saved.
E Type yes to save the changes, and press the {ENTER}} key.
If you do not want to save the changes, type noand press the {ENTER} key.
If you want to make additional changes, type return at the command line,
and press the {ENTER} key.
70
Note
If the Cannot write NVRAM information message appears, the changes
are not saved. Repeat the steps above.
The Network Interface Board is reset automatically when the settings are
changed.
When the Network Interface Board is reset, the active print job which has
already been sent to the machine will finish printing. However, jobs that
have not been sent yet will be canceled.
Commands List
This is a list of commands that can be used via remote maintenance.
Note
Type help to see a list of commands that can be used.
msh> help
Type help command_name to display information about the syntax of that
command.
msh> help command_name
TCP/IP address
Use the ifconfig command to configure TCP/IP(IP address, subnet mask, broadcast address, default gateway address) for the machine.
Reference
msh> ifconfig
Configuration
msh> ifconfig naf0 parameter address
Parameter
Meaning
(no parameter)
IP address
netmask
subnet mask
gateway
default gateway address
broadcast
broadcast address
The following is an example for configuring an IP address of 192.168.15.16.

msh> ifconfig naf0 192.168.15.16
The following is an example for configuring a subnet mask of 255.255.255.0.
msh> ifconfig naf0 netmask 255.255.255.0
71
Appendix
Note
This affects the configuration of the Network Interface Board of the IP address that is used.
To type an address using hexadecimal, prefix it by 0x.
- Address
Subnet Mask
A number used to mathematically mask or hide the IP address on the network by eliminating those parts of the address that are alike for all the machines on the network.
Default Gateway Address
A gateway is a connection or interchange point that connects two networks.
A gateway address is used as a gateway by the router or host computer .
Note
To get the above addresses, contact your network administrator.
6
Access Control
Use the access command to view and configure access control.
Reference
msh> access
Configuration
msh> access parameter address
Parameter
Meaning
control
Access Control Address
mask
Access Control Mask
Note
The Access Control Address and the Access Control Mask are used to limit
access to the computer used for printing by denying access to users based on
their IP address. If it is not necessary to limit access, set the Access Control
Mask to 0.0.0.0.
When the Access Control Address matches the masked result of the IP address computer attempting to print, print jobs from that IP address will be accepted by the Network Interface Board.
72
For example, if you assign 192.168.15.16 as the Access Control Address of the
Network Interface Board, the IP addresses that can print are as follows: XXX
means any number from 1 to 254 is acceptable.
Access Control Mask
IP addresses that can access the

printer
0.
0.
0.
XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX
255.
0.
0.
192.XXX.XXX.XXX
255.255.
0.
192.168.XXX.XXX
255.255.255.
192.168. 15.XXX
255.255.255.255
192.168. 15. 16
Network Boot
Use the set command to configure the boot method.
msh> set parameter {on | off}
on means active and off means inactive.
Parameter
Meaning
dhcp
DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration

Protocol)
Note
When you use DHCP, the server also needs to be configured.
DHCP takes precedence over all other settings.
Protocol
Use the set command to allow/prevent remote access for each protocol.
msh> set protocol {up | down}
Protocol
appletalk
tcpip
up means active and down means

inactive.
netware
netbeui
lpr
ftp
rsh
diprint
web
snmp
ipp
73
Appendix
Note
If you prohibit remote access using TCP/IP and then log out, you cannot use
remote access. If this was a mistake, you can use the control panel to allow access by TCP/IP.
When you prevent access via TCP/IP, you are also prevented from using lpr,
ftp, rsh, diprint, web, snmp and ipp.
Printer status
The following commands can be used to get information about the current status
of the printer.
msh> command
Command
status
Information that is displayed

Status of printer.
Information about the print jobs.
info
Information about the paper tray, output tray,

printer language of printer.
prnlog [ID]
Lists the last 16 print jobs.
Note
More information about any print job is displayed when the ID number is
added after the prnlog command.
Reference
For more information about the meaning of the data returned with these commands, see P.82 Configuring the Network Interface Board.
Network Interface Board configuration settings information

Use the show command to display the Network Interface Board configuration
settings.
msh> show [-p]
Note
Add -p to the show command to have the information displayed one screen
at a time.
Reference
For more information about the meaning of the data returned with this command, see P.82 Configuring the Network Interface Board.
74
System log information

Use the syslog command to display information stored in the machine's system
log.
msh> syslog
Reference
For more information about the displayed information, see P.84 System Log
Information.
SNMP
Use the snmp command to display and edit SNMP configuration settings such
as the community name.
Note
You can configure from ten SNMP access settings numbered 110.
Default access settings 1 and 2 are as follows.

Number
Community name
public
admin
IP address
0.0.0.0
0.0.0.0
Access type
read-only
read-write
trap off
trap off
Display
Shows the SNMP information and available protocols.
msh> snmp ?
msh> snmp [-p] [registered_number]
Note
If the -p option is added, you can view the settings one by one.
Omitting the number displays all access settings.
Community name configuration

You can set the community name of the registered number.
msh> snmp number name community_name
Note
The community name must consist of 15 characters or less.
75
Appendix
Access type configuration

You can select the access type from those listed below.
msh> snmp number type access_type
Access type
Type of access which is permitted
read
Read only
write
Read and write
trap
User is notified of trap messages.
no
All access is denied.
Protocol configuration
You should use the following command to set the protocols to active or inactive. If you set a protocol to inactive, all access settings set to use that protocol
will be disabled.
msh> snmp {ip | ipx} {on | off}
on means active and off means inactive
To change the protocol of an access settings, use the following command.
However, if you disabled a protocol with the above command, making it active here will have no effect.
msh> snmp number active {ip | ipx} {on | off}
Access configuration
You can configure the address of a host depending on the protocols used.
The Network Interface Board accepts requests only from hosts having addresses with access types of read-only or read-write. Type 0 to have the
Network Interface Board accept requests from any host without requiring a
specific type of access.
Command syntax:
msh> snmp number {ip | ipx} address
Note
To specify the TCP/IP protocol, type ip followed by a space, and then the
IP address.
To specify the IPX/SPX protocol, type ipx followed by a space, and then
the IPX address followed by a decimal, and then the MAC address of the
Network Interface Board.
The following is an example of how to configure registration number 3 with
the IP address 192.168.15.16.
msh> snmp 3 ip 192.168.15.16
The following is an example of how to configure registration number 3 with
the IPX address 7390A448, and the MAC address 00:00:74:62:5C:65.
msh> snmp 3 ipx 7390A448:000074625C65
76
IPP
Use the ipp command to configure the IPP settings.
Viewing setting
The following command displays the current IPP settings.
msh >ipp
Example output:
timeout=900(sec)
auth basic
The timeout setting specifies how many seconds the computer keeps trying to access the network printer to send print jobs when no connection can
be made.
The auth setting indicates the user authorization mode.
IPP timeout configuration
Specify how many seconds to wait before canceling a print job if it has been
interrupted for some reason. The range of time can be changed between 30 to
65535 seconds.
msh>ipp timeout {30 - 65535}
IPP user authorization configuration

Use the IPP user authorization to restrict users that can print with IPP. The default is off .
ipp auth {basic|digest|off}
basic and digest are user authorization setting.
off removes the user's authorization.
Note
If you select basic or digest, see next section Entry the IPP User Authorization for how to configure the user name. Up to ten user names are
available.
Configuring the IPP user authorization

Use the following command:
ipp user
The following message appears.
Input user number (1 to 10):
Type the number, user name and password.
IPP user name:user1
IPP password:*******
After configuring the settings, the following message appears.
User configuration changed.
77
Appendix
SMB
Use the smb command to configure or delete the computer name or workgroup
name for NetBEUI.
msh >smb parameter
Parameter
Settings
smb comp
Your computer name consisting of up to 13 characters
smb group
Workgroup name consisting of up to 15 characters
smb comment
Comment consisting of up to 31 characters
smb clear comp
Clears the computer name
smb clear group
Clears the Workgroup name
smb clear comment
Clears comment
ROUTE
Use the route command to control the routing table.
This command allows you to configure and display routing information. You
can change the network configuration from remote PCs using this command.
Note
The maximum number of routing tables are 16.
Parameter
Topics of setting
route add {host | net} desti- Adds a host/network route to destination, and a gateway address to gateway in the table. Host becomes the default setting.
nation *1 gateway *1
route delete {host | net}
destination *1
Deletes a host/network route from the table. Host becomes the

default setting.
route get {destination *1 }
Displays only route information corresponding to a specified

destination. When the destination is unspecified, all routing information is displayed.
route active {host | net} des- You can turn the specified destination on or off. Host becomes
the default setting.
tination *1 on/off
route flush
*1
78
IP address
Deletes all routing information.
SLP
Use this command to configure SLP settings.
You can search the NetWare server using SLP in the PureIP environment of
NetWare5. To use the slp command, you can configure the value of TTL which
can be used by the SLP multi-cast-packet.
Note
The default value of TTL is 1. A search is executed only within a local segment. If the router does not support multi-cast, the settings are not available
even if the TTL value is increased.
The acceptable TTL value is 1 - 255.
msh> slp ttl {1 - 255}
Changing the password

Use the passwd command to change the remote maintenance password.
Important
Be sure not to forget or lose the password.
Note
The default password is password.
A Type passwd.
msh> passwd
B Type the current password.

Old password:
C Type the new password.

New password:
Note
The password must consist of 3 to 8 alphanumeric characters and symbols.
Upper and lower case characters are considered unique. For example, R is
different from r.
The password is the same as that used in the configuration of the Network
Interface Board using a Web Browser and that used in the NIB Setup Tool.
If you change a password from telnet, the other passwords are also
changed.
D Type the new password once again.

Retype new password:
79
Appendix
SNMP
The Network Interface Board functions as an SNMP (Simple Network Management Protocol) agent using the UDP and IPX protocols. Using the SNMP manager you can get information about the printer.
The default community names are public and admin. You can get MIB information using these community names.
Reference
For more information about configuring the community name, see P.75 SNMP in Remote Maintenance by telnet.
Limitation
The kinds of supported MIBs vary depending on the printer.
Supported MIBs
MIB-II
PrinterMIB
HostResourceMIB
RicohPrivateMIB
80
Understanding the Displayed Information

This section describes how to read the status information returned by the Network Interface Board.
Print Job Information

The status of the print job can be viewed using the following commands.
telnet : Use the status command. P.74 Printer status
Item name
Meaning
Rank
Print job status.

Active
Printing or preparing for printing.
Waiting
Waiting to be transferred to the printer.
Owner
Print request user name.
Job
Print request number.
Files
The name of the document.
Total Size
The size of the data (spooled).
The default is 0 bytes.
Print Log Information

This is a record of the most recent 16 jobs that have been printed.
This log can be displayed with the following commands.
telnet : Use the prnlog command. P.74 Printer status
Name
Meaning
ID
Print request ID.
User
Print request user name.
Page
The number of pages that is printed.
Bytes
The number of bytes that is received.
Result
The result of the print request.
Time
The time when the print request was received
User ID
User ID that is to be configured in the printer driver.
JobName
The name of the document for printing.
81
Appendix
Configuring the Network Interface Board

The Network Interface Board settings can be displayed by using the commands
below.
telnet : Use the show command. P.74 Network Interface Board configuration
settings information
Item name
Common
Mode
Protocol Up/Down
AppleTalk
TCP/IP
NetWare
NetBEUI
Ethernet interface
NVRAM version
Device name
Comment
Location
Contact
Soft switch
AppleTalk
Mode
Net
Object
Type
Zone
82
Meaning
Up means active, Down means inactive.
Internal version number.
AppleTalk protocol in selection.

Network number.
Macintosh printer name.
The type of printer.
Name of the zone that the printer belongs to.

Item name
TCP/IP
Mode
ftp
lpr
rsh
diprint
web
telnet
snmp
ipp
EncapType
Network boot
Address
Netmask
Broadcast
Gateway
AccessCtrl
AccessMask
Time server
Home page URL
Home page link name
Help page URL
SNMP protocol
NetWare
EncapType
RPRINTER number
Print server name
File server name
Context name
Switch
Mode
NDS/Bindery
Packet negotiation
Print job timeout
Meaning
Up means active, Down means inactive.
Frame type.
Network boot.
IP address.
Subnet mask.
Broadcast address.
Default gateway address.
Access control address.
Access control mask.
URL of homepage.
URL name of homepage.
URL of help page.
Protocol used with SNMP.
Frame type.
Remote printer number.
Print server name.
Name of the connect file server.
Context of print server.
Active mode.
(this value is fixed)
Time of the job timeout.
NetBEUI
Switch
Mode
diprint
Notification
Workgroup name
Computer name
Comment
Share name[1]

Notification of print job completion.
Name of the workgroup.
Name of the computer.
Comment.
Share name (name of the printer type).
Shell mode
Mode of the remote maintenance tool.
83
Appendix
Message List
This is a list of messages written to the machine's system log. The system log can
be viewed using the syslog command.
System Log Information

You can use the following methods to view the system log.
UNIX : Use the syslog paremeter of rsh, rcp or ftp command. Printer Status in the UNIX Supplement provided as a PDF file included on the CDROM labeled Operating Instructions for Printer.
telnet : Use the syslog command. P.75 System log information
Message
Description and Solutions
Access to NetWare server <file server name>

denied. Either there is no account for this print
server on the NetWare server or the password
was incorrect.
(In print server mode) Cannot log in to the file

server. Make sure that the print server is resistered on the file server. If a password is specified for the print server, delete it.
add_sess: community<community name> already defined.
The same community name already exists.

Use another community name.
add_sess: session<community name> not defined.
A requested community name is not defined.
add_sess: bad trap addr:<IpAddress>, community:<community name>
The IP address (0.0.0.0.) is unavailable when

the community access type is TRAP. Specify
the host IP address for the TRAP destination.
add_sess_ipx: bad trap addr: <IPX address>,

community:<community name>
The IPX address (00:00:00:00:00:00) is unavailable when the community access type is
TRAP. Specify the host IPX address for the
TRAP destination.
add_sess_ipx: community <community

name> already defined.
The same community name already exists.

Use another community name.
add_sess_ipx: session_ipx<community name> A requested community name is not defined.

not defined.
84
ANONYMOUS FTP LOGIN FROM <IP address>, <password>
An anonymous login has been made with a

password <password> from the host <IP address>.
anpd start. (AppleTalk)
An anpd (AppleTalk Network Package Daemon) has started.
Attach FileServer =<file server name>
Attached to the file server as a nearest server.
Attach to print queue <print queue name>
(In print server mode) Attached to the print

queue name.
Message List
Message
Cannot create service connection
(In remote printer mode) Cannot establish a

connection with the file server. The number of
file server users may exceed the maximum
number that the file server can handle.
Cannot find rprinter (<print server name>/

<printer number>)
The printer having the number displayed on

the print server does not exist. Make sure that
the number of the printer is registered in the
print server.
Change IP address from DHCP Server.
The IP address changes when DHCP LEASE is

renewed. To always assign the same IP address, set a static IP address to the DHCP server.
child process exec error! (process name)
Failed to start the network service. Turn the

printer off and then on. If this does not work,
contact your service or sales representatives.
Connected DHCP Server(<DHCP server address>).
The IP address was successfully received from

the DHCP server.
connection from <IP address>
Logged on from the host <IP address>.
Could not attach to FileServer<error number> (In remote printer mode) Cannot attach to the
file server. For some reason, the file server refuses the connection. Check the file server configuration.
Could not attach to PServer<print server>
(In remote printer mode) Cannot attach to the

print server. For some reason, the print server
refuses the connection. Check the print server
configuration.
Current Interface Speed:xxxMbps
The speed of the network (10 Mbps or 100

Mbps).
Current IP address <current IP address>
The IP address <current IP address> was received from the DHCP server.
Current IPX address<IPX address>
The current IPX address.
DHCP lease time expired.
DHCP lease time has expired. The printer tries

to discover the DHCP server again. The IP address used up to now becomes invalid.
DHCP server not found.
The DHCP server cannot be found. Make sure

the DHCP server is running on the network.
dhcpcd start.
A dhcpcd (DHCP client service) has started.
diprintd started
Direct print service has started.
Duplicate IP=<IP address>(from <MAC address>).
The same IP address is used. An IP address

must be unique. Check the address of the device indicated in <MAC address>.
85
Appendix
86
Message
Established SPX Connection with PServer,(RPSocket=<socket number>, connID=<connection ID>)
(In remote printer mode) A connection with

the print server has been established.
Exit pserver
(In print server mode) Exits the print server

because the necessary print server settings
have not been made.
Frametype =<frame type name>
The <frame type name> is configured to be

used on NetWare.
httpd start.
An httpd has started.
inetd start.
An inetd has started.
ipp disable.
Printing with ipp is disabled.
ipp enable.
Printing with ipp is enabled.
LeaseTime=<lease time>(sec), RenewTime=<renew time>(sec).
The resource lease time that was received from

the DHCP server is <lease time> in seconds.
The renewal time is also <renew time> in seconds.
Login to fileserver <file server name>

(<NDS|BINDERY>)
(In print server mode) Logged in to the file

server with NDS or BINDERY mode.
multid start.
Data transmission service for multiprotocols

has started.
nbstart start. (NetBEUI)
The service for NetBEUI protocol stack setting

has started.
NBT Registration Broadcast(<NetBIOS

name>)
Use a local broadcast to map <NetBIOS name>

with the IP address.
nbtd start.
A nbtd (NetBIOS over TCP/IP Daemon) has

started. (Available only in DHCP mode)
NetBEUI Computer Name =<computer

name>
The NetBEUI Computer Name is defined as

<computer name>.
nmsd start. (NetBEUI)
A nmsd (Name Server Daemon) has started.
npriter start. (NetWare)
(In remote printer mode) NetWare service has

started.
nwstart start. (NetWare)
The service for NetWare protocol stack setting

has started.
Open log file <file name>
(In print server mode) The specified log file

has been opened.
papd start.
AppleTalk print service has started.
phy release file open failed.
Replacing the Network Interface Board is required. Contact your sales or service representatives.
Message List
Message
Print queue <print queue name> cannot be

serviced by printer 0, <print server name>
(In print server mode) The print queue name

cannot be serviced. Make sure that print queue
volume exists on the specified file server.
Print server <print server name> has no print- (In print server mode) The printer object is not
er.
assigned to the print server <print server
name>. Using NWAdmin, assign the printer
object, and then restart the printer device.
Print session full
Cannot accept the print session.
Printer <printer name> has no queue
(In print server mode) The print queue is not

assigned to the printer. Using NWAdmin, assign the print queue to the printer, and then restart it.
pserver start. (NetWare)
(In print server mode) NetWare service has

started.
Required computer name (<Computer

name>) is duplicated name
The same computer name is detected on the

network. The start job determines the computer name by adding the computer name to the
suffix (0,1....). Configure a new computer
name that is unique.
Required file server (<file server name>) not

found
Cannot find the required file server.
restarted.
LPD has started.
sap enable, saptype=<SAP type>, sapname=<SAP name>
The SAP function has started. The SAP (SAP

type and SAP name) packet is issued to advertise the service on the SAP table on the NetWare server.
Set context to <NDS context name>
A <NDS context name> has been set.
shutdown signal received. network service re- Rebooting the network service.
booting...
smbd start. (NetBEUI)
An smbd (SMB (Server Message Block) service) has started.
Snmp over ip is ready.
Communication over TCP/IP with SNMP is

available.
Snmp over ipx is ready.
Communication over IPX with SNMP is available.
snmpd start.
SNMP service has started.
The print server received error <error number> during attempt to log in to the network.Access to the network was denied.Verify
that the print server name and password are
correct.
Cannot log in to the file server. The print server is not registered or the password is specified. Register the print server without
specifying a password.
87
Appendix
Precautions
Please pay attention to the following when using the Network Interface Board.
When configuration is necessary, follow the appropriate procedures below.
Connecting a Dial-Up Router to a Network

When the NetWare file server and the printer are on the opposite side of a router,
packets are continuously sent back and forth, possibly causing communications
charges to increase. Because the packet transmission is a specification of NetWare, you need to change the configuration of the router. If the network you are
using does not allow you to configure the router, configure the machine.
Configuring the router

Filter the packets so that they do not pass over the dial-up router.
Note
The MAC address of the printer doing the filtering is printed on the printer
configuration page. For more information about printing a configuration
page, see the Printer Unit Type 1045 Printer Reference 2.
For more information about configuring the printer if the router cannot be
configured, see the instructions below.
Configuring the printer with NetWare
A Following the setup method in this manual, configure the file server.
B Set the frame type for a NetWare environment.
Reference
For more information about selecting a frame type, see the System Settings.
Configuring the printer without NetWare
A While not printing, the Network Interface Board sends packets on the network. Set the NetWare to inactive.
Reference
For more information about selecting a protocol, see the System Settings.
88
Precautions
PostScript Printing from Windows

When printing PostScript from Windows, see the PostScript 3 Unit Type 1045
Operating Instructions Supplement provided as a PDF file on the CD-ROM labeled Operating Instructions for Printer.
NetWare Printing
Form Feed
You should not configure the form feed on NetWare. The form feed is controlled
by the printer driver on Windows. If the NetWare form feed is configured, the
printer might not work properly. If you want to change the form feed setting, always configure it on Windows.
With Windows 95/98/Me, clear the [Form feed] check box on the [Printer Settings] tab in the printer properties dialog box.
With Windows 2000, clear the [Form feed] check box on the [NetWare Settings]
tab in the printer properties dialog box.
With Windows NT 4.0, clear the [Form feed] check box on the [NetWare Settings]
tab in the printer properties dialog box.
Banner Page
You should not configure a banner page on NetWare. If you want to change the
banner page setting, always configure it on Windows.
With Windows 95/98/Me, clear the [Enable banner] check box on the [Printer
Settings] tab in the printer properties dialog box.
With Windows 2000, clear the [Enable banner] check box on the [NetWare Settings] tab in the printer properties dialog box.
With Windows NT 4.0, clear the [Enable banner] check box on the [NetWare Settings] tab in the printer properties dialog box.
Printing after resetting the machine

After resetting the remote printer, the connection from the print server will be
cut off for about 30-40 seconds before re-connecting. Due to the NetWare specification, print jobs may be accepted, but they will not be printed during this interval.
When using the machine as a remote printer, wait about 2 minutes after resetting
the printer before attempting to print.
89
Appendix
When Using DHCP

Note the following points when using DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol).
Supported systems
Windows NT Server 4.0 can be configured as a DHCP server.
Configure the printer with a reserved IP address

To always assign the same IP address, configure a reserved IP address using the
DHCP server.
Note
When multiple DHCP servers are used, reserve the same address with each
DHCP server. The Network Interface Board needs to receive information
from the DHCP server that it contacts.
Follow these steps to configure the printer with a reserved IP address.
A Start the DHCP manager.

B Select the scope that will be used, and on the [Scope] menu, click [Reservation].
C Type the IP address into [IP Address].

D Type the MAC address of the Network Interface Board into [Unique Identifier].
Note
Do not use hyphens to separate the numbers.
If you do not know the MAC address, it can be found on the configuration
page printed by the printer.
E Type a name and comment into the [Client Name] box and the [Client Comment]
box.
Note
For more information about client names, see P.91 Additional information.
F Click [Add].
An IP address is reserved.
G Click [Close] to close the dialog box.
90
Precautions
Additional information
When you click [Active Lease] on the [Scope] menu of DHCP manager, a list of
client leases appears. When the reserved IP address is not active, the name of
the reservation is the name entered in the Client Name field of the [Add Reserved Clients] dialog box. When the reserved IP address becomes active, the
client name changes to the printer name configured by the Network Interface
Board. Only the first 13 letters of the printer name appear here. When you use
the printer with SmartNetMonitor for Client, use the host name of the printer
as the [Client Properties] dialog box.
When the DHCP server does not assign an IP address, the Network Interface
Board uses 11.22.33.44 as a temporary IP address. You can check the machine's IP address on the network configuration page.
Because 11.22.33.44 is a special IP address, you cannot print using this address.
The DHCP relay agent is not supported. When using the DHCP relay agent
via an ISDN line connection, the packets from the printer will be sent through
the ISDN connection, which can lead to very high communication charges.
When Using the NIB Setup Tool

If the Network Interface Board cannot browse using the TCP/IP protocol, make
sure that the TCP/IP environment is correctly configured in your computer.
When Using IPP with SmartNetMonitor for Admin

When using IPP with SmartNetMonitor for Admin, note the following:
The network printer can only receive one print job from SmartNetMonitor for
Admin at a time. While the network printer is printing a job, another user cannot access the network printer until it completes the job. In this case, SmartNetMonitor for Admin tries to access the network printer until the retry
interval expires.
If SmartNetMonitor for Admin cannot access the network printer and times
out, SmartNetMonitor for Admin stops sending the print job. In this case, you
should cancel the paused status from the print queue window. SmartNetMonitor for Admin will resume access to the network printer. You can delete
the print job from the print queue window, but canceling a print job that has
been printed by the network printer might cause the next print job sent from
another user to be incorrectly printed.
If a print job that is sent from SmartNetMonitor for Admin is interrupted and
the network printer cancels the job because something went wrong, launch
the print job again.
Print jobs sent from another computer do not appear in the print queue window regardless of the protocol.
91
Appendix
If various users send print jobs using SmartNetMonitor for Admin to network
printers, the printing order might not be in the order in which the jobs were
sent.
An IP address cannot be used for the IPP port name because the IP address is
used for the SmartNetMonitor for Admin port name.
92
Specifications
Specifications
LAN interface
100BASE-TX, 10BASE-T
Frame type
EthernetII, IEEE802.2, IEEE802.3, SNAP
Protocol
TCP/IP
Windows 95
Windows 98
Windows Me
Windows 2000
Windows NT 4.0
IPX/SPX
NetWare 3.12, 3.2, 4.1, 4.11, 4.2, 5, 5.1 IntranetWare
NetBEUI
Windows 95
Windows 98
Windows Me
Windows 2000
Windows NT 4.0
IPP
Windows 95
Windows 98
Windows Me
Windows 2000
Windows NT 4.0
AppleTalk
Mac OS 7.6.1 9.0.4
SNMP
MIB-II, PrinterMIB, HostResourceMIB, RicohPrivateMIB
93
INDEX
A
access control address, 72
access control mask, 72
B
BOOT, 73
C
client computer, setup
Windows 2000, 24
Windows 95/98/Me, 10
Windows NT 4.0, 39
community name, 75
configuration
LPR port printing, Windows 2000, 23
LPR port printing, Windows NT 4.0, 38
Macintosh, 65
NetWare, 41
NetWare 3.x, 46
NetWare 4.x, 5, 52
Web Browser, 67
Windows 2000, 13
Windows 95/98/Me, 1
Windows NT 4.0, 27
D
default gateway address, 72
DHCP, 73, 90
dial-up router, 88
E
EtherTalk, 65
94
I
information
Network Interface Board
configuration, 74, 82
print job, 81
print log, 81
system log, 75, 84
install
NIB Setup Tool, 41
SmartNetMonitor for Client,
Windows 2000, 18
Windows 95/98/Me, 5
Windows NT 4.0, 33
IP address, 71
IPP, 77, 91
L
LAN adapter number (Lana Number), 30
LPR port printing, 23, 38
M
Macintosh, 65
message, 84
MIB, 80
N
NetWare, 41
NetWare 3.x, 46
NetWare 4.x, 5, 52
network boot, 73
NIB Setup Tool, 43
install, 41
install, SmartNetMonitor for Admin, 41
precautions, 91
Run NIB Setup Tool, 42
P
password, 68, 79
precautions, 88
printer name, 66
printer status, 74
Pure IP, 55
R
remote printer, setup
NetWare 3.x, 49
NetWare 4.x, 5, 57
S
setup
client computer, Windows 2000, 24
client computer, Windows 95/98/Me, 10
client computer, Windows NT 4.0, 39
SmartNetMonitor for Admin, 91
SmartNetMonitor for Client
Windows 2000, 17
Windows 95/98/Me, 4
Windows NT 4.0, 32
SmartNetMonitor for Client, delete the port
Windows 2000, 19
Windows 95/98/Me, 6
Windows NT 4.0, 34
SmartNetMonitor for Client, install
Windows 2000, 18
Windows 95/98/Me, 5
Windows NT 4.0, 33
SmartNetMonitor for Client, printer port
Windows 2000, 20
Windows 95/98/Me, 7
Windows NT 4.0, 35
SmartNetMonitor for Client, uninstall
Windows 2000, 19
Windows 95/98/Me, 6
Windows NT 4.0, 34
SMB, 78
SNMP, 75, 80
specifications, 93
subnet mask, 72
T
telnet, 70
U
uninstall
Windows 2000, 19
Windows 95/98/Me, 6
Windows NT 4.0, 34
W
Web Browser, 67
Windows 2000, 13
Windows 95/98/Me, 1
Windows NT 4.0, 27
Z
zone, 66
95
96
EE
GB
UE
USA
B362
Copyright 2001
EE GB
UE USA B362-8640
PostScript 3 Unit Type

1045
Supplement
c4-APS-150-1.eps
reference.
Introduction
To get maximum versatility from this machine all operators should carefully read and follow the instructions in this manual. Please keep this manual in a handy place near the printer.
Important
the machine.
Trademarks
Microsoft, Windows and Windows NT are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the
United States and/or other countries.
Adobe, PostScript and PageMaker are registered trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated.
Appletalk, Apple, Macintosh and Mac are registered trademarks of Apple Computer, Incorporated.
Notes:
Certain options might not be available in some countries. For details, please contact your local dealer.
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1. PostScript 3
Installable Options ..................................................................................... 1
Setting Up Options ......................................................................................... 2
Printing a Document .................................................................................. 3
Toner Saving, Edge Smoothing ..................................................................... 7
Staple and Punch........................................................................................... 9
Sample Print................................................................................................. 11
Locked Print ................................................................................................. 18
Document Server ......................................................................................... 25
Printer Utility for Mac ............................................................................... 27
Installing the Printer Utility for Mac............................................................... 27
Starting the Printer Utility for Mac ................................................................ 27
Functions in the Printer Utility for Mac ......................................................... 28
Downloading PS Fonts................................................................................. 29
Displaying the Machine's Fonts.................................................................... 30
Deleting Fonts .............................................................................................. 30
Initializing the Hard Disk............................................................................... 31
Page Setup .................................................................................................. 31
Printing the Font Catalog ............................................................................. 31
Printing Font Samples .................................................................................. 32
Renaming the Machine ................................................................................ 32
Restarting the Machine ................................................................................ 33
Downloading PostScript Files ...................................................................... 33
Selecting the Zone ....................................................................................... 34
Displaying the Machine Status..................................................................... 35
Launching the Dialog Console ..................................................................... 35
ii
1. PostScript 3
Installable Options
The following options are available.
Paper Feed Unit

Document feeder (ADF)
Input Paper Device
Large Capacity Tray (LCT)
Paper tray unit
Output Paper Device
Internal tray 2 (1 bin tray)
Mailbox
External tray
Bridge unit
1000-Sheet Finisher
2 Tray Finisher
Memory Unit
Other
Punch Kit
PostScript 3
Setting Up Options
To use the installed options correctly, you have to first set up the printer driver.
If the options are not recognized, you cannot use them even though they are
physically installed on the printer. The method of setting up the printer driver
may differ depending on the operating system.
Windows
You can set up any of the options with the following tabs.
Operating System
Tab Name
Windows 95/98/Me
[Setup] tab
Windows 2000
[Device Settings] tab in the Printer Properties.
Windows NT 4.0
[Device Settings] tab
Note
You should access the printer driver from Windows to set up options. You
cannot set up options when accessing the printer driver from an application.
Limitation
If your system is Windows 2000, changing the printer driver setting requires Manage Printers permission. Members of the Administrators and
Power Users groups have Manage Printers permission by default. When
you change the settings of the printer driver, log on under Manage Printers
permission.
If your system is Windows NT 4.0, changing the printer driver setting requires Full Control access permission. Members of the Administrators,
Server Operators, Print Operators, and Power Users groups have Full Control permission by default. When you change the settings of the printer
driver, log on under Full Control permission.
If you use Adobe Page Maker 6.0 or 6.5 with Windows 95/98/Me, Windows 2000 or Windows NT 4.0, you have to set up options in the Adobe
PageMaker's print dialog box.
Macintosh
You can set up all of the options in the [Chooser] dialog box.
Printing a Document
Printing a Document
This section describes how to print a document using printer specific functions.
Paper Source
The following table shows the tabs or menus where you can select this function.
Windows 95/98/Me
[Paper] tab
Windows 2000
[Paper/Quality] tab in the Printing Preferences Properties
Windows NT 4.0
[Page Setup] tab
Macintosh
[General] in the print dialog box
Destination Tray
Windows 95/98/Me
[Destination] on the [Paper] tab
Windows 2000
[Printer Features] on [Advanced...] on the [Paper/Quality]

tab in the Printing Preferences Properties
Windows NT 4.0
[Printer Features] on [Document Options] on the [Advanced] tab
Macintosh
[Printer Specific Options] in the print dialog box
Duplex Printing
Use this function to select Duplex Printing.
Limitation
To use this function, the duplex unit must be installed on the printer.
Windows 95/98/Me
[Duplex] on the [Setup] tab
Windows 2000
[Print on Both Sides (Duplex)] on the [Layout] tab in the

Printing Preferences Properties
Windows NT 4.0
[Page Setup] tab
Macintosh
[Print on Both Sides] on [Layout] in the print dialog box
Collate
Use this function to enable collation. With this, the printer can efficiently print
collated sets of multiple-page documents.
Windows 95/98/Me
[Collate] on the [Setup] tab
Windows 2000

Windows NT 4.0
[Printer Features] on [Document Options] on the [Advanced...] tab
Macintosh
PostScript 3
Edge Smoothing
Use this function to improve the print quality of text. Indentations in curved
lines are automatically smoothed to produce a cleaner appearance.
Limitation
When Edge Smoothing is selected, Toner Saving is not enabled.
As this function is for improving the quality of printed text, set it to OFF
when printing pictures and half tone data.
Note
This function is for improving the quality of printed text. Do not use for
images.
Windows 95/98/Me
[Edge Smoothing] on the [Print Quality] tab
Windows 2000

Windows NT 4.0
Macintosh
Toner Saving
Use this function to reduce the amount of toner used when printing.
Limitation
When Toner Saving is selected, Edge Smoothing is not enabled.
Note
While this will increase the life of the toner, the output will appear slightly
lighter.
Windows 95/98/Me
[Toner Saver] on the [Print Quality] tab
Windows 2000

Windows NT 4.0
Macintosh
Printing a Document
Staple and Punch

Use this function to punch holes in documents as well as staple documents
one by one.
Limitation
When stapling or punching, use the finisher option. See the Copy Reference or the Printer Unit Type 1045 Printer Reference 2.
Note
The stapling location might differ depending on the direction of the paper
set in the printer and the direction of the data to be printed. See Staple and
Punch in the Printer Unit Type 1045 Printer Reference 2 for details.
Windows 95/98/Me
[Staple] or [Punch] on the [Setup] tab
Windows 2000
[Printer Features] on [Advanced] on the [Paper/Quality] tab

in the Printing Preferences Properties.
Windows NT 4.0
[Printer Features] on [Document Options] on the [Advanced] tab.
Macintosh
Sample Print
Use this function to make only one set of a multiple print job, and if the result
is satisfactory, the remaining sets can be printed out from the machine's control panel.
Limitation
Applications, like PageMaker, which use original drivers do not work with
this function.
Note
The User ID can consist of up to eight alphanumeric (a-z, A-Z, 09) characters.
Entering the User ID helps you to distinguish the print job from others.
Windows 95/98/Me
[Job Type] on the [Setup] tab
Windows 2000
[Job Type] on the [Job/Log] tab
Windows NT 4.0
Macintosh
[Job Log] in the print dialog box
PostScript 3
Locked Print
Use this function to save documents in the machine's hard disk using a password, and then print them as you want.
Limitation
Applications, like PageMaker, which use original drivers do not work with
this function.
Note
The User ID can consist of up to eight alphanumeric (a-z, A-Z, 09) characters. The Password must be four digits.
Windows 95/98/Me
Windows 2000
Windows NT 4.0
Macintosh
Document Server
Use this function to store the machine's hard disk documents that you want
to print and as well as documents you might want to later combine or process
for printing. For more detailed information about the Document Server
function, see Accessing the Document Server in the Printer Unit Type 1045
Printer Reference 2.
Windows 95/98/Me
Windows 2000
Windows NT 4.0
Macintosh
Printing a Document
Toner Saving, Edge Smoothing

Follow the procedures below to print a document using Toner Saving or
Edge Smoothing.
Windows 95/98/Me
A From an application, select [Print] from the file menu.

The print dialog box appears.
B Open the Printer Properties.

C Click the [Print Quality] tab.
D Select the function you want to use.
E After making all of the settings you want, click [OK] to close the Printer
Properties.
F Start printing from the application's print dialog box.

Windows 2000


C Click to select the [Paper/Quality] tab.
D Click [Advanced...].
[Advanced Options] appears.
E Click to select the function you want to use and select the appropriate setting.
F After making all of the settings you want, click [OK] to close the Printer
Properties.
G Start printing from the application's print dialog box.
PostScript 3
Windows NT 4.0

C Click the [Advanced] tab.
D From [Document Options], select [Printer Features].
E Click [Print Mode] to select the function you want to use.
Properties.

Macintosh

B From the pop-up menu, select [Printer Specific Options].

C Use the list box to select the appropriate setting.
D After making all of the settings you want, click [OK].
Printing a Document
Staple and Punch

Follow the procedures below to print a document using the Staple and Punch
functions.
Windows 95/ 98/ Me


C Click the [Setup] tab.
D Make the settings you want in [Staple] (or [Punch] ).
E Start printing from the application's print dialog box.
Windows 2000


C Click to select the [Paper/Quality] tab.
D Click [Advanced...].
The [Advanced Options] dialog box appears.
E Click to select the function you want to use and select the appropriate setting.
Properties.
PostScript 3
Windows NT 4.0

C Click the [Advanced] tab.
D From [Document Options], select [Printer Features].
E Click [Staple](or [Punch] ) to select the function you want.
Properties.

Macintosh

B From the pop-up menu, select [Printer Specific Options].

C Choose the location to staple (or punch) from the pop-up menu in [Staple]
(or [Punch] ).
D After making all of the settings you want, click [Print].
10
Printing a Document
Sample Print
Follow the procedures below to print a document using the Sample Print
function.
Windows 95/98/Me
Note
by the printer driver. If the collate option is selected in the application print


C Click to select the [Setup] tab.
D Select [Sample Print] in the [Job Type] box.
E Click [Details].
F Enter the User ID in [User ID]. This can consist of up to eight alphanumeric (a-z, A-Z, 0-9) characters.
Note
This is used to identify the user associated with a job.
The User ID can consist of up to eight alphanumeric (a-z, A-Z, 0-9) characters.
G Click [OK].
H Click [OK] to close the Printer Properties.
I Set the number of copies to more than 2 and start printing from the application's print dialog box.
The sample print job is sent to the machine and one set is printed.
J Check the printed output to make sure that the settings are correct.
If the settings are correct, go to step K to print the remaining sets.
If you want to delete the saved job, see P.17 Deleting a Sample Print File.
K On the machine's control panel, press the {Printer}} key to display the Printer screen.
11
PostScript 3
L Press [View Sample Print jobs].
1
The following will also be displayed

M Press [UUPrev.] or [TTNext.] to scroll the files to the one you want to print.
N Select the file you want to print by pressing on it.
If you want to cancel the sample print file, press again on it.
O Press [Change Set Qty.] to change the number of sets to be printed.
If you do not want to change the set quantity then proceed to step Q.
P Enter the new number of sets using the number keys and press [OK].
Note

Q Press [Print].
12
Printing a Document
R Press [Yes].
Important
Note
Windows 2000, Windows NT 4.0

Note
by the printer driver. If the collate option is selected from the application print


C Click to select the [Job/Log] tab.
D Select [Sample Print] in the [Job Type] box.
E Enter the User ID in [User ID]. This can consist of up to eight alphanumeric (a-z, A-Z, 0-9) characters.
Note
The User ID can consist of up to eight alphanumeric (a-z, A-Z, 0-9) characters.
F Click [OK] to close the Printer Properties.

G Set the number of copies to more than 2 and start printing from the application's print dialog box.
H Check the printed output to make sure that the settings are correct.
If the settings are correct, go to step I to print the remaining sets.
I On the machine's control panel, press the {Printer}} key to display the Printer screen.
13
PostScript 3
J Press [View Sample Print jobs].
1
The following will also be displayed:

K Press [UUPrev.] or [TTNext.] to scroll the files to the one you want to print.
L Select the file you want to print by pressing on it.
M Press [Change Set Qty.] to change the number of sets to be printed.
If you do not want to change the set quantity then proceed to step O.
N Enter the new number of sets using the number keys and press [OK].
Note

O Press [Print].
14
Printing a Document
P Press [Yes].
Important
Note
Macintosh

B From the pop-up menu, select [Job Log].

C Select [Sample Print] and select the appropriate setting.
D Enter the User ID in [User ID]. This can consist of up to eight alphanumeric (a-z, A-Z, 0-9) characters.
Note
E Set the number of copies to more than 2 and click [Print].

F Check the printed output to make sure that the settings are correct.
If the settings are correct, go to step G to print the remaining sets.
G On the machine's control panel, press the {Printer}} key to display the Printer screen.
15
PostScript 3
H Press [View Sample Print jobs].
1
The following will also be displayed

I Press [UUPrev.] or [TTNext.] to scroll the files to the one you want to print.
J Select the file you want to print by pressing on it.
K Press [Change Set Qty.] to change the number of sets to be printed.
If you do not want to change the set quantity then proceed to step M.
L Enter the new number of sets using the number keys and press [OK].
Note

M Press [Print].
16
Printing a Document
N Press [Yes].
Important
Note
Deleting a Sample Print File

If the printed document is not what you expected, you can delete the sample
print file.
A On the machine's control panel, press the {Printer}} key to display the Printer screen.

A list of the sample print files stored in the machine is displayed.

Note
Press [U
UPrev.] or [T
To cancel a selection, press once more on the highlighted file.
D Press [Delete].
The Delete Confirmation screen will be displayed.
E Press [Yes] to delete the file.

After the file has been deleted the screen will return to the Printer screen.
Note
17
PostScript 3
Locked Print
Follow the procedures below to print a document using the Locked Print function.
Windows 95/98/Me


D Select [Locked Print] in the [Job Type] box.
E Click [Details].
F Enter the User ID in [User ID]. This can consist of up to eight alphanumeric (a-z, A-Z, 0-9) characters. Then enter a password in [Password] of up to
four digits.
Note
G Click [OK].
H Click [OK] to apply the settings you made.
I After making all of the settings you want, click [OK] to close the Printer
Properties.
The document file is saved in the machine.
If you want to print this document, go to step J.
If you want to delete this document, see P.24 Deleting a Locked Print File.
J On the machine's control panel, press the {Printer}} key to display the Printer screen.
18
Printing a Document
K Press [View Locked Print jobs].
1
L Select the file you want to print by pressing on it.

Note
Press [U
UPrev.] or [T

M Press [Print].
N Enter the password using the number keys, and then press [OK].
Note
The confirmation screen will reappear when the password has not been entered correctly. Press [OK] to enter the password again.
19
PostScript 3
O Press [Yes].
The locked print file is printed.
Important
Note


D Select [Locked Print] in the [Job Type] box.
E Enter the User ID in [User ID]. This can consist of up to eight alphanumeric (a-z, A-Z, 0-9) characters. Then enter a password in [Password] of up to
four digits.
Note
F Click [OK] to apply the settings you made.

G After making all of the settings you want, click [OK] to close the Printer
Properties.
If you want to print this document, go to step H.
H On the machine's control panel, press the {Printer}} key to display the Printer screen.
20
Printing a Document
I Press [View Locked Print jobs].
1
J Select the file you want to print by pressing on it.

Note
Press [U
UPrev.] or [T

K Press [Print].
L Enter the password using the number keys, and then press [OK].
Note
21
PostScript 3
M Press [Yes].
Important
Note
Macintosh


C Select [Locked Print] from the [Print Job] pop-up menu.
D Enter the User ID in [User ID]. This can consist of up to eight alphanumeric (a-z, A-Z, 0-9) characters. Then enter a password in [Password] of up to
four digits.
Note
E After making all of the settings you want, click [Print].

If you want to print this document, go to step F.
F On the machine's control panel, press the {Printer}} key to display the Printer screen.
22
Printing a Document
G Press [View Locked Print jobs].
1
H Select the file you want to print by pressing on it.

Note
Press [U
UPrev.] or [T

I Press [Print].
J Enter the password using the number keys, and then press [OK].
Note
23
PostScript 3
K Press [Yes].
Important
Note
Deleting a Locked Print File

If the printed document is not what you expected, you can delete the locked
print file.
A On the machine's control panel, press the {Printer}} key to display the Printer screen.
B Press [View Locked Print jobs].

A list of the files stored on the machine is displayed.

Note
Press [U
UPrev.] or [T

D Press [Delete].
E Enter the password using the number keys, and then press [OK].
The Delete Confirmation screen is displayed.
Note
F Press [Yes].
After the file has been deleted, the screen returns to the Printer screen.
Note
When canceling the delete request, press [No].
24
Printing a Document
Document Server
Follow the procedures below to print a document using the Document Server
function.
Windows 95/98/Me


D Select [Document Server] in the [Job Type] box.
E Click [Details].
F Enter the User ID in [User ID]. This can consist of up to eight alphanumeric (a-z, A-Z, 0-9) characters.
G Click [OK].
H Start printing from the application's print dialog box.


D Select [Document Server] in the [Job Type] box.
E Enter the User ID in [User ID]. This can consist of up to eight alphanumeric (a-z, A-Z, 0-9) characters.
F Click [OK].
25
PostScript 3
Macintosh

C From the [Print Job] pop-up menu, select [Document Server].
D Enter the User ID in [User ID]. This can consist of up to eight alphanumeric (a-z, A-Z, 0-9) characters.
E Click [OK].
F Start printing from the application's print dialog box.
26
Printer Utility for Mac

By using the Printer Utility for Mac, you can download fonts, change the name
of the printer and so on.
Note
The Printer Utility for Mac is included on the CD-ROM labeled Printer Drivers and Utilities.
The Printer Utility for Mac requires from Mac OS 7.6.1 or later up to 9.0.4.
Installing the Printer Utility for Mac

Follow these steps to install the Printer Utility for Mac on the machine.
A Start the Macintosh.

B Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.
The icon of the CD-ROM appears.
C Double-click the icon of hard disk to open it.

D Double-click the CD-ROM icon.
The contents of the CD-ROM are displayed.
E Double-click the [PS UTILITY] folder of the CD-ROM, and then drag the
Printer Utility for Mac file and drop it into the Macintosh hard disk.
F Drag the CD-ROM icon and drop it into [Trash] to eject the CD-ROM.
The Printer Utility for Mac is installed.
Starting the Printer Utility for Mac

The following instructions describe how to start Printer Utility for Mac.
Important
Before starting the Printer Utility for Mac, make sure that the printer is selected with [Chooser] on the Apple menu.
A Double-click the icon of the Printer Utility for Mac.

The Printer Utility for Mac dialog box appears.
B Click [OK].
The Printer Utility for Mac will take a few seconds to start.
Reference
For more information, see P.28 Functions in the Printer Utility for Mac.
27
PostScript 3
Functions in the Printer Utility for Mac

The functions in the Printer Utility for Mac are described below.
File menu
[Download PS Fonts]
Downloads fonts (PostScript Type 1) to the machine. P.29 Downloading
PS Fonts
[Display Printer's Fonts]
Displays and deletes the fonts in the machine's memory and the machine's
hard disk drive. P.30 Displaying the Machine's Fonts
[Initialize Printer's Disk]
Initializes the machine's hard disk drive. P.31 Initializing the Hard Disk
[Page Setup]
Sets up the paper size to print Printer Font Catalog and Printer Font
Sample. P.31 Page Setup
[Print Fonts Catalog]
Prints the names of available fonts. P.31 Printing the Font Catalog
[Print Fonts Sample]
Prints a sample of fonts. P.32 Printing Font Samples
[Rename Printer]
Changes the machine's name when viewed via Appletalk. P.32 Renaming the Machine
[Restart Printer]
Restarts the machine. P.33 Restarting the Machine
Utility menu
[Download PostScript File]
Downloads a PostScript file. P.33 Downloading PostScript Files
[Select Zone]
Changes the zone the printer belongs to via Appletalk. P.34 Selecting
the Zone
[Display Printer Status]
Displays the status of the printer. P.35 Displaying the Machine Status
[Launch Dialogue Console]
Creates and edits a PostScript file, and downloads it to the printer. P.35
Launching the Dialog Console
28
Downloading PS Fonts
Important
The following procedure to download the fonts assumes that you are a system administrator. If you are not, make sure to consult your system administrator.
Resetting the machine causes the fonts to be deleted.

Make sure that the Macintosh computer and the machine are connected in the
Appletalk environment.
Note
Some fonts cannot be downloaded.
Before downloading, read the documentation of the fonts you want to use.
A Select [Download PS Fonts...] on the [File] menu.

B Click [Add to list].
The dialog box to select fonts appears.
C Click to select the desired font files, and then click [Open].
The list of selectable font names appears.
D After adding all the fonts you want to download, click [OK].
The dialog box of selected fonts to download appears.
Note
You can select [Printer's Disk].
E Click [Download].
The fonts begin to download, and the download status is shown.
Important
During the download, do not turn off the main power switch, operate the
panel, or open or close the cover.
F After the completion message appears, click [OK].

G Click [Cancel].
29
PostScript 3
Displaying the Machine's Fonts

You can view the available fonts currently downloaded into the machine. Fonts
in the machine's memory and hard disk can be displayed.
A Select [Display Printer's Fonts...] on the [File] menu.

The dialog box appears.
B Select [Printer's memory] or [Printer's disk].

C Click [OK].
Deleting Fonts
You can delete fonts from the machine's memory or hard disk drive.
A Select [Display Printer's fonts] on the [File] menu.

The dialog box appears.
B Select [Printer's memory] or [Printer's disk].

C Select the fonts you want to delete.
Limitation
You cannot delete fonts displayed in Italics.
D Click [Delete].
A confirmation message appears.
E Make sure that the fonts you want to delete and the printer name from
which you want to delete the fonts are correct.
F Click [Continue] and then click [OK].

G Click [OK].
30
Initializing the Hard Disk

When initializing the machine's hard disk using the Printer Utility for Mac, only
the fonts related to PostScript will be deleted. Before initializing, make sure to
have an idea of the fonts that are already stored in the machine.
Important
When initializing the machine's hard disk from the machine's control panel,
all the data in the machine, such as the document server data, will be deleted.
Before initializing, make sure to check the data on the hard disk drive.
A Select [Initialize Printer's Disk...] on the [File] menu.

The confirmation message appears.
Note
To cancel initialization, click [Cancel].
B Click [Execute].
Initializing starts.
Important
Do not turn off the main power switch until initialization is completed,
otherwise it might damage the hard disk drive.
C When the completion message appears, click [OK].

Page Setup
You can set the paper size in the Print Fonts Catalogue and Prints fonts Sample.
A Select [Page Setup...] on the [File] menu.

B Choose the paper size.
Printing the Font Catalog
You can print the names of fonts available on the machine.
Note
The paper selected under [Page Setup] is used.
A Select [Print Fonts Catalogue] on the [File] menu.

B Click [Print].
31
PostScript 3
Printing Font Samples

You can print samples of fonts that have been downloaded into the hard disk
drive and into the memory.
Note
Printing will be done by using the paper selected on [Page Setup].
A Select [Print Fonts Sample...] on the [File] menu.

B Click [Print].
Renaming the Machine
You can change the machine's name displayed under Appletalk. If you connect
several printers on the network, assign different names so you can identify them.
If several printers have the same name, a digit appears next to the machine name
in [Chooser].
A Select [Rename Printer...] on the [File] menu.

B Type a new name in the [New Name:] field.
Limitation
You can enter up to 31 digits and letters.
Do not use symbols, for example *, :, =,@, ~.
C Click [Rename].
The machine name is changed.
D Press [OK].
E Select [Chooser] on the Apple menu.
F Click the icon of [AdobePS].
G Click to select the machine name renamed in step B, and then close [Chooser].
Note
If there are several Appletalk zones, select the zone the machine belongs to.
32
Restarting the Machine

You can restart the machine from the file menu; however, the fonts in the machine's memory will be deleted.
A Select [Restart Printer] on the [File] menu.

B Acknowledge the message that appears on the screen, and then click [Restart].
The machine restarts.
Note
If the machine is restarted, all the settings return to their defaults. For setting each function, see the Printer Unit Type 1045 Printer Reference 2 provided as a PDF file on the CD-ROM labeled Operating Instructions for
Printer.
Downloading PostScript Files

You can download PostScript files for printing.
A Select [Download PostScript File...] on the [Utility] menu.

B Select the file name to print and click the file name, and then click [Open].
C Type the log file name, and then click [Save].
The selected file is printed.
Note
Errors are recorded in the log file.
33
PostScript 3
Selecting the Zone

You can change the zone the machine belongs to under Appletalk.
Important
Make sure that the machine and the Macintosh computer are connected in the
Appletalk environment.
A Select [Select Zone...] on the [Utility] menu.

The zone the printer belongs to and the available zone list appear.
B Select
the zone that you want to switch the printer to and then click
[Change].
C Click [Continue].
D Press [OK].
E Select [Chooser] on the Apple menu.
F Click the [AdobePS] icon.
G Select the zone changed in step B on [Appletalk zone:].
H Click to select the machine you want to use on [Select a PostScript Printer:].
I Close [Chooser].
34
Displaying the Machine Status

You can display the current status of the machine.
A Select [Display Printer Status...] on the [Utility] menu.
The current status of the machine appears.
B Check the current status of the machine.

You can check the memory capacity, the VM space, the hard disk drive status
and available space on the hard disk drive. You can also see the zone the machine belongs to.
C Click [OK].
Launching the Dialog Console
You can create and edit PostScript file for printing, and download it to the machine.
Important
As the Launch Dialogue Console is recommended for users who have a
firm grasp of PostScript, it is advised that you take extreme care when operating it.
Do not download any file other than PostScript files to the machine.
A Select [Launch Dialogue Console...] on the [Utility] menu.

Open the editing screen. The Dialogue Console menu bar appears.
B Type the PostScript command in the editor screen.

Note
To edit a PostScript file, select [Open] on the [File] menu to open it.
You can search or replace a character string by using the [Search] menu.
C After editing the PostScript file, select [Download Top Window] on the [Console] menu to start printing.
The PostScript file is sent to the machine.
D Printing is executed according to the transmitted PostScript file.

Note
[Reply from Printer] may open, depending on the PostScript file you sent.
E Select [Return To Main Menu] on the [Console] menu to close the PostScript file.
35
PostScript 3
36
EE
GB
UE
USA
B362
Copyright 2001
PostScript 3 Unit Type 1045 Operating Instructions
EE GB
UE USA B362-8680
UNIX Supplement
c1-Network-300.tif
reference.
Introduction
To get maximum versatility from this machine all operators should carefully read and follow the instructions in this manual. Please keep this manual in a handy place near the machine.
Important
the machine.
Further Information
Please consult your authorized reseller concerning additional UNIX support.
Trademarks
PostScript is a registered trademark of Adobe Systems, Incorporated.
Sun, SunOS and Solaris are trademarks or registered trademarks of Sun Microsystems, Inc. in the
United States and other countries.
HP-UX is a registered trademark of Hewlett-Packard Company.
LINUX is a trademark of Linus Torvalds.
RED HAT is a registered trademark of Red Hat, Inc.

this machine.
Copy Reference
System Settings
this machine as a printer. This manual is included as a PDF file on the CDROM labeled Operating Instructions for Printer.
CD-ROM labeled Operating Instructions for Printer.
UNIX Supplement
Provides information about setting up and using the printer in a UNIX environment. This manual is included as a PDF file on the CD-ROM labeled Operating Instructions for Printer (this manual).

Symbols
R WARNING:
R CAUTION:

Important
Preparation
Note
Limitation
Reference
[
]
{
}
ii
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1. UNIX Configuration
Before Setup ............................................................................................... 1
Using the lp/lpr commands............................................................................. 1
Using the rsh/rcp/ftp commands .................................................................... 1
Using the Installation Shell Script ............................................................ 2
Assigning the IP Address ............................................................................... 2
Executing the Installation Shell Script ............................................................ 3
After Executing Install Shell ........................................................................... 7
Printing Method ........................................................................................ 12
Printing with lpr, lp........................................................................................ 12
Printing with rsh, rcp, ftp .............................................................................. 12
Printer Status ............................................................................................ 15
Viewing the Print Job Status with lpq and lpstat .......................................... 15
Viewing the Printer Status with rsh and ftp .................................................. 15
Copying Information to a File ....................................................................... 16
INDEX......................................................................................................... 17
iii
iv
1. UNIX Configuration
This section explains how to set up a network printer and check the print status
using UNIX.
Limitation
To print from a UNIX workstation, use the file that the printer supports.
Before Setup
Setting up can vary depending on the printing commands. Please make sure to
make the settings accordingly.
Using the lp/lpr commands
A Use the Installation Shell Script to register the printer host name and the IP
address.
B Start printing.
P.12 Printing Method
Using the rsh/rcp/ftp commands
A Edit the host file to register the Printer host name and the IP address.
B Start printing.
P.12 Printing Method
Reference
See P.7 After Executing Install Shell for host file editing.
Note
If you cannot edit the host file, use the Install Shell Script to register the
host name.
UNIX Configuration
Using the Installation Shell Script

The installation shell script helps with the setup process. The installation shell
script automates some of the tasks in configuring /etc/hosts, /etc/printcap, and
in creating the spool directory for BSD UNIX, and in running lpadmin command
for System V UNIX.
Preparation
The installation shell script can be used on the following three kinds of workstations. This installation shell script cannot be used with other types of workstations.
Solaris 2.5.1, 2.6, 7, 8

HP-UX 8.x, 9.x, 10.x, 11.0
Red Hat Linux 6.x, 7
When you use NIS (Network Information Service) or DNS, you should configure the server before running this installation shell script.
For more information about the configuration utility of your OS, see the manual that came with the utility.
Assigning the IP Address

Preparation
Make sure that the TCP/IP protocol on the machine is set to active. (The
default is active.)
Assign an IP address to the machine and configure the other settings required for using the TCP/IP protocol.
Reference
Settings that came with the printer option or printer/scanner option of this
machine.
Checking the IP address configuration

Follow the procedure below to make sure that the IP address has been configured correctly.
The following procedure uses the sample IP address: 192.168.15.16.
A Enter the following:

# ping 192.168.15.16
192.168.15.16 is alive
no answer from 192.168.15.16
Note
When you use NIS, the IP address and host name are written to /etc/hosts
on the master server. When you use DNS, the information is written to a
data file on the name server. After writing the host name and IP address to
the file, make sure that the configuration is correct by pinging the host
name.
# ping host_name
If the host name is registered with an IP address, the server can access the
printer using its host name instead of its IP address.
Executing the Installation Shell Script

After having configured the printer IP address, follow the procedure below to
execute the installation shell script and set up the workstation printing environment.
Preparation
Before executing the installation shell script, the IP address, the host name
and the printer name are required.
Following procedures use sample IP address: 192.168.15.16, sample host

name: nphost and sample printer name: np.
Note
Use ftp to get the installation shell script from the printer.
A Log on to the workstation as root account.

Note
If you do not log on as root, the installation shell script will not run.
UNIX Configuration
B Get the installation shell script from the printer.
A Move to the directory you want to copy the installation shell script to.
B Use ftp to connect to the printer with the IP address that you just configured.
# ftp 192.168.15.16
Connected to 192.168.15.16
220 printer FTP server ready.
name (192.168.15.16:root:)
C When a user name is requested, leave blank and press the {RETURN}
} key.
331 Password required for root.
Password:
D When a password is requested, leave blank and press the {RETURN}
} key.
230 User root logged in.
ftp>
E Type the following to get the installation shell script.
ftp> get install
F Close the ftp session.
ftp> bye
221 Goodbye.
#
C Run the installation shell script.

# sh ./install
Note
Insert a period and slash before the current directory.
D Enter a number to select the workstation OS that you are using.

Network printer install shell
Copyright RICOH CO.,LTD. 1994-2000
Select your workstation OS type.
1. SunOS 4.x.x
2. Solaris 2.x, Solaris 7-8 (SunOS5.x)
3. HP-UX 8.x,9.x,10.x,11.x
4. UnixWare
5. Linux
6. other
Enter <1-6>:
2
Note
SunOS and UnixWare appear on the screen, but they are not supported.
Use Solaris, HP-UX or Linux.
If you select 6, the installation shell script exits.
E Enter the IP address of the printer.

Enter Printer host IP address <xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx> [return=skip]:
192.168.15.16
Note
The IP address will be added to the /etc/hosts file.
If the host name of the printer has already been configured, press the {RETURN} key. Nothing will be added to the /etc/hosts file.
F Enter the host name of the printer.

Enter Printer host name : nphost
Note
The host name will be added to the /etc/hosts file.
If no IP address was entered in step E, nothing is added to the /etc/hosts
file.
G Configure the printer name.

Enter logical printer name [default nphost_prn]
If you want to use the default name, press the {RETURN} key. Enter a new
name, if you want to use a different one.
Note
The host name entered in step F followed by _prn appears in default.
H Set the print option.
Enter remote printer name [default lp]:

Press the {RETURN} key, print with PCL or PostScript is enabled.
If you enter text, text printing is enabled.
If you enter text, printing with PCL and PostScript is unavailable.
Enter remote printer name [default lp]:text
Limitation
You can enter up to 14 characters for HP-UX 11.0, 256 for Solaris 8, and 51
for Red Hat Linux 6.2.
When printing with the lp command, use ( _ ) instead of ( = ) and ( ; ) instead of ( , ) for operating systems that cannot use ( = ) and ( , ) such as Solaris 2.5 or later.
After the setup with the installation shell script is complete, and if you enter
the IP address in step E, the following message appears.
hosts file is modified
UNIX Configuration
I Perform a test print to make sure that the settings are correct.
# lpr -Pnp file_name
# lp -d np file_name
For more information about lpr and lp, see P.12 Printing Method.
Deleting the printer

To print using the lp or lpr command, the option specified when the installation
shell script is executed is used. Change the option in accordance with the workstation you are using.
BSD UNIX workstation, Linux

Delete the printer entry from /etc/printcap, then execute the installation
shell script again. Select options during the setup process.
Or, search the printer entry from /etc/printcap, and change its rp capability
to option setting.
Solaris, HP-UX
Delete the printer entry, and then execute the installation shell script again.
Select options during the setup process. To delete the printer entry, follow the
procedure below.
A Stop the scheduler.
# /usr/sbin/lpshut
B Delete the printer.
# /usr/sbin/lpadmin -x printer_name
C Restart the scheduler.
# /usr/lib/lpsched
After Executing Install Shell

The printing environment is set up automatically when the installation shell
script is executed.
This section describes the set up contents when the installation shell script is executed under Red Hat Linux, Solaris and HP-UX.
Linux
Adding the IP address and host name to the /etc/hosts file
The following line is added to the /etc/hosts file. The IP address and printer
host name which you previously entered in the installation script will be
used.
192.168.15.16 nphost # Network Printer
192.168.15.16 is the IP address, nphost is the host name, from # to the end
of the line is a comment.
Note
The /etc/hosts file contains a list of the IP addresses and host names of all
of the hosts communicating on the network. Each entry is delimited with
a space or a tab, and each line is separated with a return.
If you do not use NIS or DNS, you must manually enter the IP address and
host name of each workstation using the network printer in the /etc/hosts
file.
Adding an entry to the /etc/printcap file

The following entry is added to the /etc/printcap file, which is the configuration for printing with the lpr command. In order to use the lpr command to
print, you need to edit the /etc/hosts file, add an entry for the network printer to the /etc/printcap file and create a spool directory.
##PRINTTOOL3## REMOTE
np|Network Printer:\
:rm=nphost:\
:rp=option:\
:sd=/var/spool/lpd/npd:\
:lf=/var/log/npd-errs:\
:sh:\
:mx#0:
Note
The /etc/printcap file is used to register the name and attributes of a printer. You must make an entry for the network printer in the /etc/printcap
file of all workstations using the network printer.
Each entry is separated with colons into several fields. The syntax is to begin each entry with a colon, followed by the entry, and then end with a colon, a back slash, and then a return.
UNIX Configuration
The first line of the field is the name of the printer. You use this name when
logging on to a network printer from a workstation. You can define several
different names by separating each name with the | character.
The second and following lines contain the printer's attributes. Attributes
of the printer are represented by two character names referred to as capabilities. For more information about capabilities, see the following table.
Capability
Explanation
Value Required for the Network

Printer.
rm
Host name of the printer
The host name that was registered

with the /etc/hosts file.
sd
Path name of the spool directory.
Path name of the spool directory

that is to be created.
lf
Path name of the log file.
Path name of the log file.

For example /var/log/lpd-errs.
mx
Maximum file size which the directory can copy. When set to 0, the
size is unlimited. If nothing is entered, the size is set to 1024 k.
None or something suitable.
Making the spool directory

Create a spool directory under /var/spool/lpd. The name of the spool directory should be the name of the printer followed by a d.
Note
The spool directory is used to control the data used for a print job. For example, when a print job is created, a temporary copy of the file data used
for printing is created in the spool directory. All workstations accessing the
network printer need to have a spool directory for the network printer.
A spool directory should be made for every network printer entry listed in
the /etc/printcap file.
The spool directory should normally be made under /var/spool/lpd and
the name should match that listed under the sd capability in /etc/printcap. Change the owner and group of the directory to root and lp. The following examples show how to make a /var/spool/lpd/npd spool
directory.
# cd /var/spool/lpd
# mkdir npd
# chown root npd
# chgrp lp npd
Making the log file

Error messages are logged to a file created in the /var/log directory. The log
file name is the printer name followed by d-errs.
Note
The log file is used for logging some errors or warning messages by the
UNIX workstation.
The log file should be made for every network printer entry listed in the /
etc/printcap file.
The log file should normally be made under /var/log directory and the
name should match that listed under the lf capability in /etc/printcap.
Change the owner and group of the log file to root and lp.The following
examples show how to make a /var/log/npd-errs file.
# cd /var/log
# touch npd-errs
# chown root npd-errs
# chgrp lp npd-errs
Solaris
The following line is added to the /etc/hosts file.The IP address and printer
used.
192.168.15.16 nphost # Network Printer
192.168.15.16 is the IP address, nphost is the host name, from # to the end
of the line is a comment.
Note
The /etc/hosts file contains a list of the IP addresses and their host names
of all of the hosts communicating on the network. Each entry is delimited
with a space or a tab, and each line is separated with a return.
file.
UNIX Configuration
Registering the printer

The installation shell script registers the printer as a remote printer.
A If your workstation is Solaris 2.5.1, register the print server and print client
to the print service.
# lpsystem -t bsd -R 0 -y Network Printer nphost
B Register the printer as a remote printer.
# lpadmin -p np -s nphost!"option" -T dump -I any
np is the printer name, nphost is the host name.
lp will be assigned, if the device option is not used.
When printing with the lp command, use ( _ ) instead of ( = ) and ( ; )
instead of ( , ) for operating systems that cannot use ( = ) and ( , ) such as
Solaris 2.5 or later.
C If your workstation is Solaris 2.5.1, set the print job to active so that it can
be accepted by the print queue.
/usr/lib/accept np
D If your workstation is Solaris 2.5.1, set the print job to active to print.
/usr/lib/enable np
HP-UX
The following line is added to the /etc/hosts file. The IP address and printer
used.
192.168.15.16 np # Network Printer
192.168.15.16 is the IP address, np is the host name, from # to the end of
the line is a comment.
Note
The /etc/hosts file contains a list of the IP addresses and their host names
of all of the hosts communicating on the network. Each entry is delimited
with a space or a tab, and each line is separated with a return.
file.
10
Registering the printer

The installation shell script registers the printer as a remote printer following
the procedure below.
A Stop the scheduler.
/usr/lib/lpshut
B Register the printer.
/usr/lib/lpadmin -Pnp -v/dev/null -mrmodel
-ormnphost -orp"option" -ob3
np is the printer name, nphost is the host name.
lp will be assigned, if the Device option is not used.
C Set the printer so that the print job is listed in the print queue.
/usr/lib/accept np
D Set the printer to perform the print job.
/usr/lib/enable np
E Restart the scheduler.
/usr/lib/lpsched
11
UNIX Configuration
Printing Method
Printing with lpr, lp
Execute one of the following commands according to the type of workstation being used:

% lpr -Pprinter_name file_name [file_name...]
For example:
printer name is np, file names are file1 and file2
% lpr -Pnp file1 file2
Solaris, HP-UX
% lp -d printer_name file_name [file_name...]
For example:
printer name is np, file names are file1 and file2
% lp -d np file1 file2
Note
printer_name is the name that was entered when executing the installation
shell script.
You can use wild cards ( * or ? ) for the file name.
Printing with rsh, rcp, ftp

You can also print using the rsh, rcp and ftp commands.
Note
Print using the format that the printer can support.
The message print session full appears when the maximum number of
print requests has been reached (max. 5 session) . You should try to print
again when the number of requests is less than five. You can check the number of print requests using telnet. For more information about using telnet,
see the Network Printing Guide Operating Instructions provided as a PDF
file on the CD-ROM labeled Operating Instructions for Printer.
12
Printing Method
rsh
% rsh host_name print < file_name
For example:
host name is nphost, file name is file1
% rsh nphost print < file1
Note
host_name is the name entered when executing the installation shell script.
If you use a HP-UX, use the remsh command instead of rsh.
rcp
To specify and print the file
% rcp file_name [file_name...] host_name:
For example:
host name is nphost, file names are file1 and file2
% rcp file1 file2 nphost:
To print all of the files in a directory
% rcp -r directory_name host_name:
For example:
host name is nphost, directory name is directory1
% rcp -r directory1 nphost:
Note
host_name is the name entered when executing the installation shell script.
You can use wild cards ( * or ? ) for the file name.
ftp
Depending on the number of files to be printed, use the put or mput commands.
Limitation
File names cannot contain = or ,.
To print one file

ftp> put file_name
To print several files
ftp> mput file_name [file_name...]
Note
You can use wild cards ( * or ? ) for the file name with the mput command.
13
UNIX Configuration
The following procedure shows an example of how to print a file using ftp.
A Start ftp using the IP address or host name of the printer.

% ftp IP_address
Note
host_name is the name entered when executing the installation shell
script.
B Enter the user name. Skip the password, and then press the {RETURN}} key.
Name:
Password:
C Set the file transfer mode to binary.

ftp> bin
Note
If the file transfer mode is not set to binary, the image might not be printed
correctly.
D Print the file.

Note
For example, to print one file named file1:
ftp> put file1
For example, to print two files named file1 and file2:
ftp> mput file1 file2
E Exit ftp.
ftp> bye
14
Printer Status
Printer Status
You can use the following commands to have information and the printer status
displayed or copied to a file.
Use the lpq or lpstat command to display the status of the printer or information
about print jobs.
Use the rsh, rcp or ftp commands to get more detailed information from the
printer.
Viewing the Print Job Status with lpq and lpstat

% lpq -Pprinter_name
For example: Printer name is np
% lpq -Pnp
System V UNIX, Solaris, HP-UX
% lpstat -o printer_name
For example: Printer name is np
% lpstat -o np
Note
In case of HP-UX, do not put a space between -o and printer name.
Viewing the Printer Status with rsh and ftp

Use the rsh or ftp command to display the status of the printer or information
about print jobs using specified parameters.
You can use these commands for BSD and System V UNIX.
Note
If your workstation is HP-UX, use the remsh command instead of the rsh.
% rsh host_name parameter

% ftp host_name
User user_name
password:
ftp> get parameter Note
Leave the user name and password blank, and then press the {RETURN} key.
" - " indicates the standard output. It will be displayed on screen if the standard output has not been specified.
15
UNIX Configuration
Parameters that can be used with rsh, rcp and ftp:

Parameter
stat
Information returned
Status of the printer.

Information about print jobs.
info
Information about the paper tray, output tray

and printer language.
prnlog
Record of the last 16 jobs printed.
syslog
Record of messages about the Network Interface

Board.
Reference
provided as a PDF file on
the CD-ROM labeled Operating Instructions for
Printer.
System Settings provided
as a PDF file on the CDROM labeled Operating
Instructions for Printer.
provided as a PDF file on
the CD-ROM labeled Operating Instructions for
Printer.
Copying Information to a File

Use the rcp or ftp command to copy information about the specified parameters
to a file.
You can use these commands for BSD and System V UNIX.
Note
The same parameters are used as those above.
% rcp host_name:parameter file_name
% ftp host_name
User: user_name
password:
ftp> get parameter file_name
Note
Leave the user name and password blank, and then press the {RETURN} key.
16
INDEX
B

Deleting the printer, 6
Printer Status, 15
Printing Method, 12
Printer Status, 15
Printing Method, 12
Printing with lpr, lp, 12
Printing with rsh, rcp, ftp, 12
configuration
UNIX, 1
rcp
Printing, 13
rsh
Printing, 13
F
ftp
Printing, 13
I
installation shell script, 2
S
Solaris, HP-UX
Printing Method, 12
System V UNIX, Solaris, HP-UX
Printer Status, 15
U
UNIX, 1
17
18
UE
USA
B362
Copyright 2001
UNIX Supplement
UE USA B362-8667

A Fi Cio 1045 Savin 2245

Caricato da

Informazioni sul documento

Copyright

Formati disponibili

Condividi questo documento

Condividi o incorpora il documento

Opzioni di condivisione

Hai trovato utile questo documento?

Questo contenuto è inappropriato?

Copyright:

Formati disponibili

A Fi Cio 1045 Savin 2245

Caricato da

Copyright:

Formati disponibili

AdonisC2_ENcopy122F_FM.

book Page 1 Thursday, February 15, 2001 3:23 PM

AdonisC2_ENcopy122F_FM.book Page 1 Thursday, February 15, 2001 3:23 PM

RICOH COMPANY, LTD.

1035/1045 Series Operating Instructions

AdonisC2_ENcopy122F_FM.book Page 1 Thursday, February 15, 2001 3:23 PM

Type1: Aficio 1035/1035P

Type2: Aficio 1045/1045P

AdonisC2_ENcopy122F_FM.book Page 1 Thursday, February 15, 2001 3:23 PM

USA (This information is for facsimile option users only.)

WHEN PROGRAMMING EMERGENCY NUMBERS AND/OR MAKING TEST CALLS TO

AdonisC2_ENcopy122F_FM.book Page 1 Thursday, February 15, 2001 3:23 PM

AdonisC2_ENcopy122F_FM.book Page 1 Thursday, February 15, 2001 3:23 PM

RICOH COMPANY, LTD.

1035G/1045G Operating Instructions

AdonisC2_ENcopy122F_FM.book Page 1 Thursday, February 15, 2001 3:23 PM

Type1: Aficio 1035G

Type2: Aficio 1045G

AdonisC2_ENcopy122F_FM.book Page 1 Thursday, February 15, 2001 3:23 PM

USA (This information is for facsimile option users only.)

WHEN PROGRAMMING EMERGENCY NUMBERS AND/OR MAKING TEST CALLS TO

AdonisC2_ENcopy122F_FM.book Page 1 Thursday, February 15, 2001 3:23 PM

Type1: 2535/2535P, 3502/3502P

Type2: 2545/2545P, 4502/4502P

AdonisC2_ENcopy122F_FM.book Page 1 Thursday, February 15, 2001 3:23 PM

USA (This information is for facsimile option users only.)

WHEN PROGRAMMING EMERGENCY NUMBERS AND/OR MAKING TEST CALLS TO

AdonisC2_ENcopy122F_FM.book Page 1 Thursday, February 15, 2001 3:23 PM

AdonisC2_ENcopy122F_FM.book Page 1 Thursday, February 15, 2001 3:23 PM

USA (This information is for facsimile option users only.)

WHEN PROGRAMMING EMERGENCY NUMBERS AND/OR MAKING TEST CALLS TO

AdonisC2_ENcopy122F_FM.book Page i Thursday, February 15, 2001 3:23 PM

Safety During Operation

Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if instructions

Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if instructions are not

AdonisC2_ENcopy122F_FM.book Page ii Thursday, February 15, 2001 3:23 PM

AdonisC2_ENcopy122F_FM.book Page iii Thursday, February 15, 2001 3:23 PM

How to Read this Manual

WARNINGS and CAUTIONS are notes for your safety.

AdonisC2_ENcopy122F_FM.book Page iv Thursday, February 15, 2001 3:23 PM

AdonisC2_ENcopy122F_FM.book Page v Thursday, February 15, 2001 3:23 PM

Copying from the Bypass Tray ..............................................................

Directional Magnification (%) ................................................................. 77

AdonisC2_ENcopy122F_FM.book Page vi Thursday, February 15, 2001 3:23 PM

1 Sided 8 Pages Combine 2 Side...........................................................

Combination Chart ................................................................................ 147

AdonisC2_ENcopy122F_FM.book Page vii Thursday, February 15, 2001 3:23 PM

If You Cannot Make Copies As You Want ...........................................

Changing the Paper Size ...................................................................... 194

AdonisC2_ENcopy122F_FM.book Page viii Thursday, February 15, 2001 3:23 PM

d Adding Staples .................................................................................

5. User Tools (Copy/Document Server Features)

Input/Output ........................................................................................... 233

AdonisC2_ENcopy122F_FM.book Page ix Thursday, February 15, 2001 3:23 PM

AdonisC2_ENcopy122F_FM.book Page x Thursday, February 15, 2001 3:23 PM

AdonisC2_ENcopy122F_FM.book Page 1 Thursday, February 15, 2001 3:23 PM

35 copies/minute (A4K, 8 /2"

45 copies/minute (A4K, 81/2"

AdonisC2_ENcopy122F_FM.book Page 2 Thursday, February 15, 2001 3:23 PM

What You Can Do with This Machine (Copy

AdonisC2_ENcopy122F_FM.book Page 3 Thursday, February 15, 2001 3:23 PM

*1 Optional 2 Tray finisher is reguired.

Front & Back

1 Sided & Booklet